GENEX User Guide V200R003 04

GENEX Probe
V200R003
User Guide
Issue
04
Date
2011-02-15
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Probe
User Guide
About This Document
About This Document

Overview
The document provides the guidelines for installing and using the GENEX Probe (hereinafter
referred to as Probe) and methods for collecting the test data, analyzing the test data in real time,
and replaying the test data.
Product Version
The following table lists the product and version related to this guide.
Product Name
Product Version
GENEX Probe
V200R003
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l
Network design engineers
Network monitoring engineers
System maintenance engineers
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
04 (2011-02-15)
This is the third commercial release.
Compared with 03 (2010-08-10), this version has the following modifications:
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

iii
GENEX Probe
User Guide
About This Document
Content
Description
2.5 Recommended Device List
New
7.1 Connectable External Devices
Added terminals.
7.3.1 Configuring External Devices

Automatically
New
11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing

Function Test
New
13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is

Displayed in the WCDMA View
Windows?
New
13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into

UARFCNs (WCDMA)?
New
13.4.5 What Should I Do When the

Automatic Answer Setting of Huawei
U1251 Is Invalid?
New
14.5 PSTN SQE Server
New
03 (2010-08-10)
This is the second commercial release.
Content
Description
2.2 Basic Concepts of the Probe
The content descriptions are changed.
2.3 Main Interface of the Probe
8.5.3 Performing an Outdoor Test
13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?
New
Serving/Active Set and Neighboring Cells
02 (2010-06-25)
This is the first commercial release.
iv
Content
Description
1 New Features of the Probe V200R003

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
About This Document
Content
Description
7.2 Plugging in External Devices
8.4 Designing Test Plans
11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests

(GSM/WCDMA)
11.3 IP Analysis
New
13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to

Access the Network During the LTE
Forcing Feature Test?
New
14.3.5 LTE Information Elements of UEs
01 (2010-04-14)
This is the first release. It is prepared for the Beta test version of V200R003.
Organization
This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003.
2 Overview of the Probe
The Probe is an air interface test software, which is used to collect the test data of the air interface
of the GSM/GPRS/EDGE, WCDMA/HSPA/HSPA+, CDMA2000 1x/EV-DO, WiMAX, and
LTE network. Through the Probe, the network performance can be evaluated, the network
optimization can be guided, and the fault can be rectified. The collected test data of the air
interface on the radio network can be saved as the test logfile. This facilitates the data analysis
after the logfile is imported to other post-processing software (such as GENEX Assistant) or the
later data replaying.
3 Installing the Probe
This section describes how to install the Probe and other assistants. To complete the installation
of the Probe, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as
prompted by the installation wizard.
4 Starting the Probe
Once installed, the Probe application can be launched from the Start menu or the shortcut icon.
5 Managing the Map Window
The map window displays map-related information in a test area and counter information such
as cell information, event information, and IE information on the drive test route. You can add
a layer, configure layer properties, and configure the legend properties of the IE layer in the map
window.
6 Managing Engineering Parameters
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

GENEX Probe
User Guide
About This Document
This chapter describes engineering parameters of different network systems supported by the
Probe and the method for importing engineering parameters. You can learn about the details of
base station parameters, antenna parameters, neighboring cell parameters, and various
technology parameters of the current test area through the engineering parameters.
7 Connecting External Devices
Connecting external devices involves connecting external devices to the PC and in the Probe,
so that the external devices can work with the Probe to perform tests. When you use the Probe
to replay data, you need not connect external devices.
8 Collecting Data
The Probe collects the air interface test data through the test terminal and other external devices
and records test data in logfiles. Before collecting the data, make sure that a computer installed
with the Probe, the test terminal, the scanner, and the GPS are available and the dongle must be
plugged in. You can also import engineering parameters for different network systems and map
files, which helps to provide a vivid view of test data.
9 Managing Logfiles
During tests, test data is saved in .gen files that are called logfiles. This chapter describes how
to record, replay, segment, and export logfiles.
10 Managing View Windows
This section describes how to view data in view windows and how to configure properties of
view windows. View windows are key windows of the Probe. You can view IEs, events, Layer
2 or Layer 3 messages, and statistical values of indicators in view windows.
11 Typical Application
This section describes typical test methods supported by the Probe.
12 Interface Reference of the Probe
This describes the interface and parameters of the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when
you collect, view, and replay the data through the Probe.
13 FAQs
This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the software and the corresponding
causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the using skills.
14 Appendix
This describes the test items, information elements (IEs), predefined events, and keyboard
shortcuts supported by the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when you collect or view
data through the Probe.
15 Technical Support
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
vi

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
About This Document
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Courier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
vii
GENEX Probe
User Guide
About This Document
Convention
Description
{ x | y | ... }*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt

+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2
Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means

the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
viii
Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving

the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 New Features of the Probe V200R003.....................................................................................1-1
1.1 New Features of the Probe V200R003C01.....................................................................................................1-2
1.2 New Features of the Probe V200R003C00.....................................................................................................1-2
2 Overview of the Probe...............................................................................................................2-1

2.1 Introduction to the Probe.................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Basic Concepts of the Probe............................................................................................................................2-4
2.3 Main Interface of the Probe.............................................................................................................................2-7
2.4 Working Mode of the Probe..........................................................................................................................2-18
2.5 Recommended Device List...........................................................................................................................2-19
2.5.1 Recommended Terminal List (GSM/WCDMA)..................................................................................2-19
2.5.2 Recommended Terminal List (LTE)....................................................................................................2-21
2.5.3 Recommended Terminal List (WiMAX).............................................................................................2-21
2.5.4 Recommended Scanner List.................................................................................................................2-22
3 Installing the Probe....................................................................................................................3-1

3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Probe.........................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Installing Shared Components........................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.3 Installing the Probe Main Program................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.4 Plugging in a Dongle.......................................................................................................................................3-8
4 Starting the Probe.......................................................................................................................4-1

5 Managing the Map Window....................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps...........................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Importing Maps...............................................................................................................................................5-3
5.2.1 Importing Outdoor Test Maps................................................................................................................5-3
5.2.2 Importing Indoor Test Maps.................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.3 Adding Layers.................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.4 Configuring Layer Properties..........................................................................................................................5-6
5.5 Configuring Legend Properties.......................................................................................................................5-8
6 Managing Engineering Parameters........................................................................................6-1

6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems................................................................6-2
6.2 Importing Engineering Parameters..................................................................................................................6-9
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

ix
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Contents
7 Connecting External Devices...................................................................................................7-1

7.1 Connectable External Devices.........................................................................................................................7-2
7.2 Plugging in External Devices........................................................................................................................7-11
7.3 Configuring External Devices.......................................................................................................................7-12
7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically......................................................................................7-12
7.3.2 Configuring External Devices Manually..............................................................................................7-13
7.4 Enabling External Devices............................................................................................................................7-16
7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected................................................................................................................7-17
7.6 Configuring Device Alarms..........................................................................................................................7-18
8 Collecting Data...........................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Data Collection Process..................................................................................................................................8-3
8.2 Preparations Before Data Collection...............................................................................................................8-3
8.3 Creating a Project............................................................................................................................................8-4
8.4 Designing Test Plans.......................................................................................................................................8-5
8.5 Performing a Test Plan....................................................................................................................................8-7
8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA)........................................................................................................8-8
8.5.2 Performing an Indoor Test.....................................................................................................................8-9
8.5.3 Performing an Outdoor Test.................................................................................................................8-10
8.5.4 Monitoring the Test..............................................................................................................................8-11
8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans..............................................................................................................................8-11
9 Managing Logfiles.....................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Recording Logfiles..........................................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 Segmenting Logfiles.......................................................................................................................................9-3
9.3 Replaying Logfiles..........................................................................................................................................9-3
9.4 Exporting Logfiles...........................................................................................................................................9-5
10 Managing View Windows....................................................................................................10-1

10.1 Presentation of IEs and Events....................................................................................................................10-2
10.2 Browsing Data.............................................................................................................................................10-2
10.3 Configuring the View Window...................................................................................................................10-3
10.3.1 Configuring the Line Chart View.......................................................................................................10-3
10.3.2 Configuring the List View..................................................................................................................10-4
10.3.3 Configuring the Chart View...............................................................................................................10-5
10.3.4 Configuring the Plain Text View.......................................................................................................10-5
11 Typical Application...............................................................................................................11-1
11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests (GSM/WCDMA)...................................................................................11-2
11.1.1 Synchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test...................................................................................11-2
11.1.2 Asynchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test.................................................................................11-3
11.1.3 Speech Quality Evaluation Test Between PHU Terminal and PSTN SQE Server............................11-4
11.2 Forcing Function Tests................................................................................................................................11-6
11.2.1 Setting the GSM Nonvolatile Parameters..........................................................................................11-6
11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A Measurements................................................................................................11-7
x

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Contents
11.2.3 Conducting GSM Frequency Scanning..............................................................................................11-8

11.2.4 Conducting the GSM Forcing Function Test.....................................................................................11-9
11.2.5 Conducting the WCDMA Forcing Function Test............................................................................11-11
11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing Function Test....................................................................................11-13
11.3 IP Analysis................................................................................................................................................11-14
12 Interface Reference of the Probe.........................................................................................12-1

12.1 Interface Description: Test Plan Control Window....................................................................................12-4
12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter management Window...................................................12-6
12.3 Interface Description: OutdoorMap Window...........................................................................................12-8
12.4 Interface Description: IndoorMap Window............................................................................................12-13
12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View......................................................................................................12-17
12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View....................................................................................................12-18
12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices...........................................................................................12-19
12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data................................................................................................12-25
12.9 Parameters for Configuring the Test Items...............................................................................................12-26
12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test........................................................................................................12-26
12.11 Parameters for Importing the Engineering Parameters...........................................................................12-27
12.12 Parameters for Importing the Outdoor Raster Map.................................................................................12-29
12.13 Parameters for Configuring the Legend Properties.................................................................................12-30
12.14 Parameters for Configuring the Layer Control Properties......................................................................12-32
12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event...........................................................................................12-34
12.16 Parameters for Configuring the Device Alarm........................................................................................12-35
12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications...........................................................................................12-36
12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings......................................................................................................12-36
12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views.................................................................12-38
12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View........................................................12-40
12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM........................................................................12-41
12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test......................................................................................12-42
12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature Test.................................................................................12-43
12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM..............................................................12-44
12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data..........................................................................................................12-45
12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of the Scanner......................................................12-51
13 FAQs.........................................................................................................................................13-1
13.1 Problems Related to Software Start............................................................................................................13-2
13.1.1 What Should I Do When the Verification of the Dongle Fails?........................................................13-2
13.1.2 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails?...........................................................................13-3
13.1.3 How to Install the East Asian Language Package?............................................................................13-3
13.1.4 How to Uninstall the Main Program..................................................................................................13-3
13.1.5 How to Uninstall the GENEX Shared Components...........................................................................13-4
13.2 Problems Related to Device Connections...................................................................................................13-4
13.2.1 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the MS Fails?......................................................13-5
13.2.2 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the Scanner Fails?...............................................13-5
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

xi
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Contents
13.2.3 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the GPS Fails?....................................................13-6
13.2.4 What Should I Do When the Mouse Becomes Invalid After the GPS Is Connected to the PC?.......13-6
13.2.5 What Should I Do When the PCTel DTI Scanner Fails to Receive the GPS Signals?......................13-7
13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?..........................................................................................................13-7
13.3 Problems Related to Views.......................................................................................................................13-10
13.3.1 What Should I Do When Opening the Map View Fails?.................................................................13-11
13.3.2 What Should I Do When Opening the Chart View Fails?...............................................................13-11
13.3.3 What Should I Do When Importing Engineering Parameters Fails?...............................................13-11
13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is Displayed in the WCDMA View Windows?...............................13-12
13.4 Problems Related to Tests.........................................................................................................................13-13
13.4.1 What Should I Do When FTP Service Tests Fail?...........................................................................13-13
13.4.2 What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated?......................................................13-15
13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to Access the Network During the LTE Forcing Feature Test?
.....................................................................................................................................................................13-16
13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into UARFCNs (WCDMA)?.............................................................13-16
13.4.5 What Should I Do When the Automatic Answer Setting of Huawei U1251 Is Invalid?.................13-17
14 Appendix..................................................................................................................................14-1
14.1 Description of Test Items............................................................................................................................14-2
14.1.1 Test Items Supported in Different Networks.....................................................................................14-2
14.1.2 Test Items of MSs..............................................................................................................................14-6
14.1.3 Test Items of PCTel Scanners..........................................................................................................14-60
14.1.4 Test Items of Anritsu Scanners........................................................................................................14-65
14.1.5 Test Items of Rohde & Schwarz Scanners.......................................................................................14-91
14.2 Description of Predefined Events..............................................................................................................14-92
14.2.1 General Events.................................................................................................................................14-93
14.2.2 GSM Predefined Events...................................................................................................................14-94
14.2.3 WCDMA Predefined Events............................................................................................................14-98
14.2.4 CDMA Predefined Events..............................................................................................................14-121
14.2.5 WiMAX Predefined Events...........................................................................................................14-126
14.2.6 LTE Predefined Events..................................................................................................................14-130
14.3 Description of Information Elements......................................................................................................14-131
14.3.1 GSM Information Elements of MSs...............................................................................................14-132
14.3.2 WCDMA Information Elements of UEs........................................................................................14-148
14.3.3 CDMA Information Elements of MSs...........................................................................................14-167
14.3.4 WiMAX Information Elements of UEs.........................................................................................14-191
14.3.5 LTE Information Elements of UEs................................................................................................14-228
14.3.6 Information Elements of Scanners.................................................................................................14-273
14.3.7 Packet Service Testing Information Elements...............................................................................14-276
14.3.8 Speech Quality Evaluation Information Elements.........................................................................14-282
14.3.9 Noise Test Information Elements...................................................................................................14-282
14.4 Keyboard Shortcuts.................................................................................................................................14-283
14.5 PSTN SQE Server...................................................................................................................................14-284
xii

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Contents
14.5.1 Overview of the PSTN SQE Server...............................................................................................14-285

14.5.2 Installing the PSTN SQE Server....................................................................................................14-295
14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server................................................................................................................14-301
14.5.4 Interface Reference of the PSTN SQE Server................................................................................14-306
14.5.5 FAQs..............................................................................................................................................14-309
14.5.6 Test Items of the PSTN SQE Server..............................................................................................14-311
14.5.7 Predefined Events of the PSTN SQE Server..................................................................................14-313
15 Technical Support..................................................................................................................15-1
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

xiii
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Synchronous speech quality evaluation test.......................................................................................1-3
Figure 1-2 Asynchronous speech quality evaluation test.....................................................................................1-4
Figure 1-3 Speech quality evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN SQE Server......................................1-4
Figure 2-1 System structure of the Probe.............................................................................................................2-3
Figure 2-2 Main interface of the Probe................................................................................................................2-7
Figure 2-3 Standard toolbar................................................................................................................................2-12
Figure 2-4 Replay toolbar...................................................................................................................................2-14
Figure 2-5 Navigation pane................................................................................................................................2-15
Figure 2-6 Shortcut menu of the status bar of the operation interface...............................................................2-17
Figure 2-7 System status bar..............................................................................................................................2-17
Figure 3-1 Customer Information.........................................................................................................................3-6
Figure 5-1 Cell layer.............................................................................................................................................5-2
Figure 7-1 Device Configure dialog box...........................................................................................................7-13
Figure 7-2 The example of COM port..............................................................................................................7-15
Figure 7-3 The example of Modem port...........................................................................................................7-15
Figure 12-1 Test Plan Control window............................................................................................................12-4
Figure 12-2 Engineering Parameter management window...........................................................................12-6
Figure 12-3 OutdoorMap window....................................................................................................................12-8
Figure 12-4 Map Layers window....................................................................................................................12-12
Figure 12-5 IndoorMap window.....................................................................................................................12-13
Figure 12-6 Map Layers window....................................................................................................................12-16
Figure 12-7 Interface of the test data view.......................................................................................................12-17
Figure 12-8 Line Chart window.....................................................................................................................12-18
Figure 13-1 Y-shaped cable...............................................................................................................................13-8
Figure 13-2 Querying the IP address of the host................................................................................................13-9
Figure 13-3 UARFCN definition (general)......................................................................................................13-17
Figure 13-4 UARFCN definition (additional channels)...................................................................................13-17
Figure 14-1 System structure of the PSTN SQE Server................................................................................14-287
Figure 14-2 Speech evaluation on the uplink.................................................................................................14-287
Figure 14-3 Speech evaluation on the downlink............................................................................................14-288
Figure 14-4 Main interface of the PSTN SQE Server....................................................................................14-290
Figure 14-5 Customer Information.................................................................................................................14-297
Figure 14-6 Test Plan Editor interface.........................................................................................................14-306
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

xv
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Tables
Tables
Table 2-1 Description of the system structure of the Probe.................................................................................2-3
Table 2-2 Basic concepts of the Probe.................................................................................................................2-4
Table 2-3 Description of the main interface of the Probe....................................................................................2-8
Table 2-4 Description of the menu bar of the Probe............................................................................................2-8
Table 2-5 Description of the Project menu..........................................................................................................2-9
Table 2-6 Description of the Logfile menu..........................................................................................................2-9
Table 2-7 Description of the Configuration menu............................................................................................2-10
Table 2-8 Description of the View menu...........................................................................................................2-10
Table 2-9 Description of the Test menu.............................................................................................................2-11
Table 2-10 Description of the Window menu....................................................................................................2-11
Table 2-11 Description of the Help menu..........................................................................................................2-12
Table 2-12 Description of the standard toolbar..................................................................................................2-13
Table 2-13 Description of the replay toolbar......................................................................................................2-14
Table 2-14 Description of the icons under the Project tab................................................................................2-15
Table 2-15 Description of the icons under the Configuration tab....................................................................2-16
Table 2-16 Description of the system status bar.................................................................................................2-17
Table 2-17 Device status description..................................................................................................................2-18
Table 3-1 Hardware requirements of the Probe....................................................................................................3-2
Table 3-2 Software requirements of the Probe.....................................................................................................3-2
Table 3-3 Structure of the Probe installation folder.............................................................................................3-7
Table 7-1 Specifications of GSM/WCDMA test terminals..................................................................................7-2
Table 7-2 Specifications of CDMA test terminals...............................................................................................7-7
Table 7-3 Specifications of WiMAX test terminals.............................................................................................7-8
Table 7-4 Specifications of LTE test terminals....................................................................................................7-9
Table 8-1 Data collection procedure.....................................................................................................................8-3
Table 8-2 Requirements for the external devices.................................................................................................8-4
Table 12-1 Description of the Test Plan Control window................................................................................12-4
Table 12-2 Description of the Test Plan Control window toolbar...................................................................12-5
Table 12-3 Description of the Engineering Parameter management window...............................................12-6
Table 12-4 Toolbar description of the Engineering Parameter management window..................................12-7
Table 12-5 Description of the OutdoorMap window.......................................................................................12-9
Table 12-6 Description of the OutdoorMap window toolbar...........................................................................12-9
Table 12-7 Description of the Map Layers window.......................................................................................12-12
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

xvii
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Tables
Table 12-8 Description of the IndoorMap window........................................................................................12-14

Table 12-9 Description of the IndoorMap window toolbar............................................................................12-14
Table 12-10 Description of the Map Layers window.....................................................................................12-16
Table 12-11 Description of the test data view..................................................................................................12-17
Table 12-12 Description of the Line Chart window.......................................................................................12-19
Table 13-1 Data packets need to be selected....................................................................................................13-13
Table 13-2 Fault cause......................................................................................................................................13-14
Table 13-3 Fault cause......................................................................................................................................13-15
Table 14-1 Properties of the MMS test item....................................................................................................14-30
Table 14-2 Auxiliary parameters......................................................................................................................14-30
Table 14-3 Description of system structure of the PSTN SQE Server...........................................................14-287
Table 14-4 Speech evaluation on the uplink..................................................................................................14-288
Table 14-5 Speech evaluation on the downlink..............................................................................................14-288
Table 14-6 Basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server.....................................................................................14-289
Table 14-7 Description of the main interface.................................................................................................14-290
Table 14-8 Description of the menu bar.........................................................................................................14-291
Table 14-9 Description of the File menu........................................................................................................14-291
Table 14-10 Description of the Configuration menu....................................................................................14-291
Table 14-11 Description of the View menu...................................................................................................14-292
Table 14-12 Description of the Test menu.....................................................................................................14-292
Table 14-13 Description of the Help menu....................................................................................................14-292
Table 14-14 Description of the toolbar...........................................................................................................14-292
Table 14-15 Description of the navigation pane of the operation interface...................................................14-293
Table 14-16 Operation procedures.................................................................................................................14-294
Table 14-17 Hardware requirements of the PSTN SQE Server.....................................................................14-295
Table 14-18 Software requirements of the PSTN SQE Server......................................................................14-296
Table 14-19 Description of the Test Plan Editor interface...........................................................................14-306
Table 14-20 Description of the Test Plan Editor Toolbar............................................................................14-307
Table 14-21 Fault cause..................................................................................................................................14-310
xviii

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
New Features of the Probe V200R003
About This Chapter

This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003.
1.1 New Features of the Probe V200R003C01
This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003C01.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

1-1
GENEX Probe
User Guide

Configuring External Devices Automatically

For details, see 7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically.
New Test Terminals

The new test terminals of Probe V200R003C01 are as follows:
l
GSM/WCDMA
Huawei U1280-5
Huawei U8220
Huawei U8226
Huawei U7519
Huawei U7517
Huawei U3220
Huawei E1823 Card
Huawei E372u-8 Card
LTE
Huawei UE 2.2
Huawei B390
Huawei E398 Card
For details, see Test Terminal.
New Scanners
The new scanners of Probe V200R003C01 are as follows:
l
PCTel PCT-505 (WCDMA)
PCTel PCT-520 (GSM/WCDMA)

Compared with Probe V200R002, the new features of Probe V200R003C00 are as follows:
1-2
Supporting the WiMAX Beceem test and LTE TDD/FDD test.
Supporting the enhanced speech quality evaluation test. For details, see Speech Quality
Evaluation Test.
Supporting more test items. For details, see New Test Items.
Supporting more forcing function tests. For details, see New Forcing Functions.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Supporting the settings of the size of the TCP window. For details, see Setting the Size of
the TCP Window.
Supporting more models of test terminals. For details, see New Test Terminals.
Speech Quality Evaluation Test

Based on Probe V200R002, Probe V200R003 enhances the speech quality evaluation tests. The
speech quality evaluation tests are categorized into the following types:
l
Synchronous speech quality evaluation test

One Probe is configured with the two PHU terminals. The Probe performs the synchronous
speech quality evaluation test by enabling a PHU terminal to call the other PHU terminal.
During the test, the calling PHU terminal plays speech samples and the called PHU terminal
records result files so that the uplink and downlink MOSs are obtained. For details, see
Figure 1-1. In this case, only the test plan for the calling PHU terminal needs to be
configured.
Asynchronous speech quality evaluation test

The Probe is installed on two PCs. Each Probe is configured with a PHU terminal. The
Probes perform the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling the two PHU
terminals to call each other. During the test, the calling and called PHU terminals record
and play speech files alternatively so that each Probe records the MOS. For details, see
Figure 1-2. In this case, the test plans for the calling and called PHU terminals need to be
configured separately.
Speech quality evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN SQE Server
For two PCs, one is configured with the Probe that is configured with a PHU terminal, and
the other is configured with the PSTN SQE Server. The Probe performs the speech quality
evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server by enabling the PHU terminal
to call the PSTN SQE Server or the PSTN SQE Server to call the PHU terminal. During
the test, the calling party plays voices and the called party records voices so that the MOS
is obtained. For details, see Figure 1-3. In this case, the test plans for the calling and called
parties need to be configured separately.
Figure 1-1 Synchronous speech quality evaluation test
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

1-3
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Figure 1-2 Asynchronous speech quality evaluation test
Figure 1-3 Speech quality evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN SQE Server
New Test Items

The new test items of Probe V200R003 are as follows:
l
GSM/WCDMA
Email, which indicates the email sending test.
Multi-FTP, which indicates that a test terminal performs the FTP download and upload
tests at the same time.
Async SQE(MS-MS), which indicates the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test.
AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS), which indicates the AMR end-to-end delay test.
WiMAX
NetSearch, which indicates the WiMAX Beceem frequency scan test.
LTE
Frequency Scan, which indicates the LTE RRC spectrum scan test.
Cell Scan, which indicates the LTE RRC cell scan test.
Iperf, which indicates the LTE TCP or UDP network performance test.
1-4

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
New Forcing Functions

l
GSM nonvolatile parameter setting
GSM frequency scan test
WCDMA UARFCN locking and scrambling code locking tests
LTE EARFCN locking and scrambling code locking tests
Setting the Size of the TCP Window

You can change the size of the TCP window to decrease the delay in the data transmission.
The size of the TCP window can be set in System Configure.
New Test Terminals

The new test terminals of Probe V200R003 are as follows:
l
GSM/WCDMA
Huawei U6100 PHU
Huawei U1251 PHU
Huawei E270+ Card
WiMAX
Huawei Beceem BM328
Huawei Beceem BM338
Huawei Sequans BM358
LTE
Huawei UE 1.0
Huawei UE 1.1
Huawei UE 2.0
For details, see Test Terminal.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

1-5
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Overview of the Probe
About This Chapter

The Probe is an air interface test software, which is used to collect the test data of the air interface
of the GSM/GPRS/EDGE, WCDMA/HSPA/HSPA+, CDMA2000 1x/EV-DO, WiMAX, and
LTE network. Through the Probe, the network performance can be evaluated, the network
optimization can be guided, and the fault can be rectified. The collected test data of the air
interface on the radio network can be saved as the test logfile. This facilitates the data analysis
after the logfile is imported to other post-processing software (such as GENEX Assistant) or the
later data replaying.
2.1 Introduction to the Probe
The Probe supports multiple network systems, device types, features powerful service test
function, and data management function. In addition, the Probe is easy to operate.
This describes certain central concepts of the Probe, such as external device, logfile, test plan,
signaling, and air interface parameters. These concepts help you better use the Probe to collect,
view, and analyze the test data of the air interface.
This section describes the main interface of the Probe, including the menu bar, toolbar,
navigation pane, operation interface, status bar, and entries to perform related operations by
using the Probe.
2.4 Working Mode of the Probe
The Probe can work in two different working modes. One for testing and recording data. The
other is for replaying and analyzing data.
This section describes the recommended devices, including UEs, data cards, and scanners.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

2-1
GENEX Probe
User Guide
2.1 Introduction to the Probe

The Probe supports multiple network systems, device types, features powerful service test
function, and data management function. In addition, the Probe is easy to operate.
Features
The features of the Probe are as follows:
l
Supports the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX, and LTE network systems.
Supports multiple device types, including:

Multiple types of test terminals.
Multiple types of scanners.
Multiple types of GPS.
Supports multiple tests of the voice service and the data service, including the voice service
test, scanner test, data service test, and concurrent test of the voice and data service.
Supports multiple speech quality evaluation tests.

For details, see 1 New Features of the Probe V200R003.
Supports forcing function test.

For details, see 11.2 Forcing Function Tests.
Supports the geographic display of the wireless measurement data.

The Probe can dynamically display the test parameters, test routes, and neighboring
connection line and display events by using graphics. In addition, the Probe supports the
geographic display of the MapInfo map, raster map, and site information.
Supports recording and saving logfiles in real time and replaying the test procedure through
the replay function. In addition, during the test, the logfiles can be sliced to facilitate the
management of the logfiles recorded in different time segments.
Supports displaying key events in real time, such as handover and call drops during the
test. The statistics of key events and KPIs in real time during the test facilitates the detection
of problems.
Supports the data view synchronization of the message view, map view, and event view
facilitate the problem location and analysis.
Application Scenarios
The Probe can be used at every stage of the network lifecycle, such as the network planning,
network construction, network capacity expansion, and network optimization.
l
Exploring propagation environment

During the network planning, the Probe uses the scanner to perform the continuous wave
(CW) test to obtain the test data of the radio signal space fading in typical running
environment. The data can be used to calibrate propagation models and function as a guide
to the network planning.
l
2-2
Performance test and evaluation

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
During network construction and capacity expansion, you can evaluate the network
performances by the Probe. The evaluation result functions as a guide to adjusting and
optimizing network parameters.
l
Network problem identification

During the network maintenance or optimization, the test process can be replayed through
the replay function of the Probe. The network problems can be quickly identified through
the replay function of the Probe and the post-processing data analysis software (such as
GENEX Assistant).
System Structure
The Probe system consists of the test terminal, scanner, GPS, PC installed with the Probe, and
dongle. It supports simultaneous testing on the test terminal, scanner, and GPS. During the test,
up to six test terminals, one scanner, and one GPS can be connected to the PC.
Figure 2-1 shows the system structure of the Probe. Table 2-1 describes the physical entities
shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 System structure of the Probe
Table 2-1 Description of the system structure of the Probe
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Physical Entity
Description
PC
Refers to a desktop or laptop. The PC is used to install the main program

of the Probe, the GENEX shared components, and the driver of certain
devices to provide the data test platform of the air interface. In addition,
the PC can be connected to the GPS, scanner, test terminal, or dongle
through the serial port, USB port, IEEE 1394 port, or ethernet port.
Dongle
Refers to the hardware device with the license information. The dongle
is used to control the usage rights to the Probe.
GPS
The GPS is used to record outdoor test tracks.
Scanner
Refers to the scanner. The scanner can record the spectrum of the air
interface data and import the spectrum to Probe for observation.
2-3
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Physical Entity
Description
Test terminal
Refers to the MS or PC card.

This describes certain central concepts of the Probe, such as external device, logfile, test plan,
signaling, and air interface parameters. These concepts help you better use the Probe to collect,
view, and analyze the test data of the air interface.
Table 2-2 describes the basic concepts of the Probe.
Table 2-2 Basic concepts of the Probe
Basic
Concepts
Description
Remarks
External
device
The external device refers to the test terminal, scanner,

and Global Positioning System (GPS).
For types and

specifications of the
external device
supported by the
Probe, see 7.1
Connectable
External Devices.
l Test terminal
The test terminal includes the test mobile phone
and PC card.
l Scanner
The scanner can record the spectrum of the air
interface data and import the spectrum to Probe for
observation.
l GPS
The GPS is used to record outdoor test tracks.
Logfile
The logfile is the record of the collected information

during the drive test. During the drive test, the test data
can be saved in a file, and the file is called logfile
(a .gen file). Through the logfile, you can replay the
test procedure. This facilitates observing and
analyzing the data.
When recording a logfile, the Probe automatically

saves a .tab file with the same name with the logfile.
The .tab file is used to store GPS information.
2-4
Project
The Probe manages test items based on projects. You

can configure multiple external devices and other
system parameters and design the test plan for one
project.
Test plan
The test plan is a customized test task and consists of

test items provided by the Probe. You can design test
plan for the test terminal and scanner according to your
requirements to guide the test of each data service and
voice service during the drive test.
For the test items

provided by the Probe,
see 14.1 Description
of Test Items.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Basic
Concepts
Description
Indoor test The difference between the indoor test and the outdoor
test lies in the methods of obtaining the test tracks. In
the case of the outdoor test, the test tracks are obtained
through the dot trace by the GPS. In the case of the
indoor test, the test tracks are obtained through the
manual dot trace.
Remarks
-
The indoor test consists of horizontal test and vertical

test.
l In the case of the horizontal test, the fixed points
are selected according to the floor plan of the
equipment room. The horizontal test consists of
automatic test and manual test.
The automatic test is performed according to the
tracks entered beforehand. The manual test is
performed by manually controlling the tracks of
points.
l In the case of the vertical test, the signal distribution
in the vertical direction between floors is tested.
Statistic
Report of
Event
By using the air interface message or Layer2/Layer3

signaling, the Probe can judge the events in accordance
with the event definition rules and help in locating
radio network problems.
The Probe provides predefined events of the system.
Through the event view window, you can browse the
predefined events of the system or check the events in
the map view.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
For the predefined

events provided by the
Probe, see 14.2
Description of
Predefined Events.
Device
alarm
During the drive test, when the device is unexpectedly

disconnected or the signal strength of the GPS is weak,
the Probe generates alarm in dialog box or voice mode.
You can set alarm events for special situations and
alarm modes.
Message
The message provided by the Probe refers to the air

interface message, generally the layer 2 message and
the layer 3 message. In the message view window, you
can browse air interface messages or the messages
from various protocols or events.
Air
interface
parameter
s
Air interface parameters refer to the information

elements (IEs) of the test terminal. The air interface
parameters of each network protocol are displayed in
the air interface parameter view or map view in digital
or text mode.
For the air interface

parameters that can be
collected by the Probe,
see 14.3 Description
of Information
Elements.
Data
service
The session of the data service can be performed

through the setup of the Packet Switched (PS)
connection.

2-5
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Basic
Concepts
Description
Remarks
Voice
service
The voice service or the video call service can be tested

through the setup of the Circuit Switched (CS)
connection.
Data view
The data view is used to display the test data. The data
views provided by the Probe include the IE view,
message view, event view, map view, KPI statistic
view, and GPS view.
These data views are displayed on the Probe in chart,

list, text, line chart, or mixed mode.
Engineeri
ng
parameter
s
Engineering parameters include base station (BS)

engineering parameters, BS technical parameters,
antenna parameters, and neighboring cell parameters.
After the engineering parameters are imported, the
system can find the information about the best matched
site in time and consider the engineering parameters as
network parameters for analysis.
For the engineering

parameters supported
by the Probe, see 6.1
Engineering
Parameters
Supported in
Different Network
Systems.
Map
The map consists of a series of map elements and

involves the MapInfo map and the raster map. The map
information is displayed in the map window on the
Probe. The map information involves the test area, test
routes, events, and engineering parameters.
l MapInfo Map
A MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, and
each layer is saved in a file. The files supported by
the MapInfo map are in .tab or .gst (GeoSet) format.
A GeoSet is a special type of workspace used for
map layers and saves the configurations including
layer order, labels, and legends.
l Raster map
The entire raster map can be considered as a layer.
The raster map supported by the Probe is
in .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png format.
Layer
A layer is a set of data displayed in the map window.

There are two main types of layers: map layers and
indicator layers.
l A map consists of multiple map layers.

l An indicator layer consists of events, IEs, and cells.
A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a
map layer contains all the roads and water areas on the
map; a cell layer contains multiple engineering
parameters.
2-6

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Basic
Concepts
Description
Remarks
Label
The labels indicates the objects in various layers of

maps in text form. The objects include field names of
engineering parameters in cell layers, IE values and
numbers in IE layers, and names of buildings in
building layers.
Filemark
The filemark is used to record the geographic

information about the test location in texts. The
geographic information includes the features of
buildings and interference source.
The filemarks can be displayed as events in view

windows. You can search for filemark events to locate
the filemark area during the data replay.

This section describes the main interface of the Probe, including the menu bar, toolbar,
navigation pane, operation interface, status bar, and entries to perform related operations by
using the Probe.
Figure 2-2 shows the interface after the Probe is started. Table 2-3 describes the items shown
in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 Main interface of the Probe
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

2-7
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Table 2-3 Description of the main interface of the Probe

No.
Name
Description
Menu bar
Displays the main menu of the system. For details, see

Menu Bar.
Toolbar
Provides the shortcut icons for common operations. For

details, see Toolbar.
Navigation
pane
Provides shortcut icons for the main operations of the

system. For details, see Navigation Pane.
Operation
interface
Displays different view windows and configuration

interfaces. For details, see Operation Interface.
Status bar of
the operation
interface
Displays the worksheet that is added by users. For details,

see Operation Interface.
System status
bar
Displays the status information about the system,

including the current status of the system and the device.
For details, see System Status Bar.
Menu Bar
The menu bar of the Probe shows the main menu of the system. The menus on the menu bar are
arranged according to the main functions of the Probe to facilitate your operations.
Table 2-4 describes the menu bar of the Probe and the corresponding functions.
Table 2-4 Description of the menu bar of the Probe
2-8
Main Menu
Description
Project
Provides entries for operations related to the project

management. For details, see Table 2-5.
Logfile
Provides entries for operations related to the

management of the logfile. For details, see Table 2-6.
Configuration
Provides entries for operations such as configuring

external devices, engineering parameters, test plans,
and the system. For details, see Table 2-7.
View
Provides entries for operations related to the view

Test
Provides entries for certain basic operations during data

collection. For details, see Table 2-9.
Window
Provides entries for operations such as arranging view

windows. For details, see Table 2-10.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Main Menu
Description
Help
Provides entries for the system help and operations

related to the license management. For details, see
Table 2-11.
Table 2-5 Description of the Project menu

Menu Item
Description
New
Enables you to create a project.
Open
Enables you to open a project under a specified path.
Open From
Enables you to open projects of different types.

The menu items are as follows: Site Verification,
Optimize, Benchmark, Acceptance, and Customize.
Close
Enables you to close the project that is opened

currently.
Remove
Enables you to delete a project.
Save
Enables you to save a project.
Save As
Enables you to save the current project as another one.
Exit
Enables you to exit the main program of the Probe.
Table 2-6 Description of the Logfile menu
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Menu Item
Description
Open Logfile
Enables you to open a logfile.
Close Logfile
Enables you to close a logfile.
Play
Enables you to replay a logfile.
Pause
Enables you to pause the logfile replay.
Stop
Enables you to stop the logfile replay.
Speed Up
Enables you to accelerate the replay of a logfile.
Speed Down
Enables you to slow down the replay of a logfile.
Export Data
Enables you to convert the test data format.

2-9
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Table 2-7 Description of the Configuration menu

Menu Item
Description
Device Configure
Enables you to configure external devices.
Engineering Parameter
management
Enables you to manage engineering parameters.
Test Plan Control
Enables you to design a test plan.
System Configure
Enables you to set configuration items of the system.
Table 2-8 Description of the View menu
2-10
Menu Item
Description
Toolbars
Enables you to set whether to display the standard

toolbar, replay toolbar, and navigation pane. By
default, these items are displayed.
Status Bar
Enables you to set whether to display the system status

bar. By default, the system status bar is displayed.
GSM
Enables you to open the view of GSM/GPRS air

interface parameters.
WCDMA
Enables you to open the view of WCDMA air interface

parameters.
CDMA
Enables you to open the view of CDMA2000 1X/EVDO air interface parameters.
WiMAX
Enables you to open the view of WiMAX air interface

parameters.
LTE
Enables you to open the view of LTE air interface

parameters.
GPS
Enables you to open the GPS view.
Service Quality
Enables you to open the view of data service

parameters.
MOS
Enables you to open the view of speech quality

evaluation.
Statistic
Enables you to open the event statistics view and KPI

statistics view.
Message
Enables you to open the Layer 2 or Layer 3 message

view.
Event List
Enables you to open the event list view.
Information
Enables you to open the information view.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Menu Item
Description
OutdoorMap
Enables you to open the outdoor map view.
IndoorMap
Enables you to open the indoor map view.
Scanner
Enables you to open the scanner view.
Custom Line Chart
Enables you to open the line chart view.
Table 2-9 Description of the Test menu

Menu Item
Description
Start Test Plan
Enables you to start a test plan.
Stop Test Plan
Enables you to stop a test plan.
Start Record
Enables you to start or stop the logfile recording.
Pause Record
Enables you to pause or resume the logfile recording.
Slice Record
Enables you to slice a logfile.
File Mark
During the test, the Probe records the geographic

information about the test location in texts and
automatically saves the information in DT logfiles. The
geographic information includes the features of
buildings and interference source. During the data
replay or data analysis, the Probe can quickly locate the
user-concerned area based on the Filemark event.
This menu is available after the Probe starts the DT
logfile recording.
Forcing Function
Enables you to controls a terminal to perform the

forcing feature test, including the GSM, WCDMA, and
LTE forcing feature test, GSM Carrier-to-Adjacent
(CA) measurement, and GSM NV parameter setting.
LTE Send Command
Enables you to control a LTE terminal to perform the

demodulation reference signal (DMRS) frequency
hopping test.
For details about the hopping group information, see
Radio Parameters.
Table 2-10 Description of the Window menu
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Menu Item
Description
Cascade
Enables you to arrange view windows in cascade mode.

2-11
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Menu Item
Description
Tile Horizontally
Enables you to arrange view windows in horizontal tile

mode.
Tile Vertically
Enables you to arrange view windows in vertical tile

mode.
Close All
Enables you to close all the view windows of the

currently active worksheet.
NOTE
The Window menu enables the system to display the names of the opened view windows of the currently
active worksheet.
Table 2-11 Description of the Help menu

Menu Item
Description
Contents
Enables you to open the Help of the Probe.
License Info
Enables you to view the license information.
Update License
Enables you to update the license.
View ESN
Enables you to obtain the electronic serial number

(ESN).
Check License
Enables you to check whether the dongle is connected

properly.
About Probe
Enables you to view the version information about the

Probe.
Tech Support
Enables you to view the technical support information.
Toolbar
The toolbar on the main interface of the Probe consists of the standard toolbar and the replay
toolbar. By clicking the icon on the toolbar, you can switch to the corresponding interface or
perform the corresponding operation quickly.
l
Standard toolbar
Figure 2-3 shows the icons on the standard toolbar. Table 2-12 describes the icons shown
in Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3 Standard toolbar
2-12

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide

NOTE
You can choose View > Toolbars > Standard to set whether to display the standard toolbar.
Table 2-12 Description of the standard toolbar

Icon
Name
Description
New Project
Open Project
Enables you to open a project in .xml format.
Save
Enables you to save the current project.
External
Device
Configuratio
n
Enables you to configure external devices.
Auto
Connect
Enables the Probe to automatically connect to an external

device added in the Device Configure dialog box so that
the external device can be used.
Disconnect
Enables the Probe to disconnect an external device added

in the Device Configure dialog box.
Test Plan
Control
Enables you to design a test task. In the Test Plan

Control dialog box displayed after you click this icon, you
can design test plans, configure test items, and view the
execution status of the test items.
Map
Window
Management
Enables you to open the OutdoorMap window.
Engineering
Parameter
Management
Enables you to open the Engineering Parameter

management window.
Record Start/
Stop
Enables you to start or stop the logfile recording.

When the logfile recording is started, this icon becomes the
icon.
Record
Pause/
Resume
Enables you to pause or resume the logfile recording. If

KPIs are required to be evaluated, it is recommended that
you do not pause the logfile recording.
When the logfile recording is paused, this icon becomes the
icon.
Record
Segment
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Enables you to slice a logfile. If you click this icon, the

system closes the currently recorded logfile and creates a
new logfile to slice the corresponding logfile while
performing the ongoing tests.

2-13
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Icon
Name
Description
Filemark
During the test, the Probe records the geographic

information about the test location in texts and
automatically saves the information in DT logfiles. The
geographic information includes the features of buildings
and interference source. During the data replay or data
analysis, the Probe can quickly locate the user-concerned
area based on the Filemark event.
This icon is available after the Probe starts the DT logfile
recording.
Start Test
Plan
Enables you to start a test plan.
Stop Test
Plan
Enables you to stop a test plan.
Online Help
Enables you to open the Help of the Probe.
Replay toolbar
Figure 2-4 shows the icons on the replay toolbar. Table 2-13 describes the icons shown in
Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4 Replay toolbar
NOTE
You can choose View > Toolbars > Replay to set whether to display the replay toolbar.
Table 2-13 Description of the replay toolbar

Icon
2-14
Name
Description
Open Logfile
Enables you to open a drive test

file in .gen format.
Play Logfile
Enables you to replay a logfile.

This icon is available only after a
logfile is opened.
Pause Logfile Playing
Enables you to pause the logfile

replay.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Icon
Name
Description
Stop Playing Logfile
Enables you to stop the logfile

replay.
Stopping the logfile replay does
not close the logfile. You can
choose Logfile > Close Logfile to
close a logfile.
Locate
Enables you to search for an event

in a logfile and find the location
where the event occurs on the
map.
Replay rate dropdown list box
Enables you to adjust the replay

speed. The range is from 1/8speed to 32-speed.
Slide bar
Enables the logfile to be replayed

from a specified position.
CAUTION
The Probe does not count the key
events or KPIs when you move the
slide bar.
Navigation Pane
The navigation pane, located in the left pane of the main interface, provides shortcut icons for
the main operations of the system. The navigation pane consists of four tabs, namely, Project,
Control, Configuration, and View, as shown in Figure 2-5.
Click
in the upper right corner of the navigation pane to hide the navigation pane.
Figure 2-5 Navigation pane
Project tab
Table 2-14 describes the shortcut icons under this tab.
Table 2-14 Description of the icons under the Project tab
Icon
Description
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

2-15
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Icon
Description
Enables you to open the project file in the
following path: software installation path
\Projects\Site Verification.
\Projects\Optimize.
Enables you to open the benchmark project file in
the following path: software installation path
\Projects\Benchmark.
\Projects\Acceptance.
\Projects\Customize.
Control tab
Configuration tab
Table 2-15 Description of the icons under the Configuration tab
Icon
Description
Enables you to configure external devices. After
you click this icon, the Device Configure dialog
box is displayed for you to configure external
devices.
Enables you to design a test plan. After you click
this icon, the Test Plan Control dialog box is
displayed for you to design a test plan.
Enables you to set configuration items of the
system. After you click this icon, the System
Configure dialog box is displayed for you to
modify the pre-defined event attributes, alarm
mode when the device is abnormal, and attributes
of the logfile.
View tab
The icons under this tab provide operation entries for various view windows, engineering
parameter windows, and test plan control windows. For details, see Table 2-8.
2-16

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Operation Interface
The operation interface is used to display various view windows and configuration windows.
The operation interface consists of multiple worksheets. You can add multiple worksheets as
required.
Right-click the status bar of the operation interface shown in Figure 2-2. Then, you can add,
delete, or rename a worksheet through the options displayed in the shortcut menu, as shown in
Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6 Shortcut menu of the status bar of the operation interface
System Status Bar

The system status bar, located at the bottom of the main interface, displays the current status of
the system and the device, as shown in Figure 2-7. For descriptions on the Figure 2-7, see Table
2-16.
Figure 2-7 System status bar
Table 2-16 Description of the system status bar
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
No.
Name
Description
(1)
Menu description
This area displays the function description of a menu

when the menu is in use.
(2)
System status
This area displays the current status of the system. The

status can be Idle, Testing, or Replay.

2-17
GENEX Probe
User Guide
No.
Name
Description
(3)
Device status
This area displays the connection status of the

currently configured devices. If you place the mouse
pointer on the status indicator, the name of the device
that the indicator stands for is displayed. Different
colors represent different status, as shown in Table
2-17.
l
indicates the MS.
indicates the GPS.
indicates the Scanner.
Table 2-17 Device status description

Icon
Meaning
Red indicator:
l The external device is connected to the PC properly but the
connection displayed on the Probe is broke down or abnormal.
l The external device is disconnected from the PC or the connection
to the PC is abnormal.
The green indicator indicates that the external device connected to the
PC and the connection displayed on the Probe is normal.
The yellow indicator indicates that the signals of the external device
are insufficient or the device is in the Searching state.
2.4 Working Mode of the Probe

The Probe can work in two different working modes. One for testing and recording data. The
other is for replaying and analyzing data.
The Probe can work in the following working modes:
l
Drive test mode

By working with the test terminal and other external devices, the Probe collects the air
interface data and records the test data (saving the test data in logfiles). During the data
collection, you can also observe the test data in real time.
For details, see 8 Collecting Data.
Replay mode
The Probe reads the test data from logfiles and replays logfiles for inspection and analysis.
During the replay, you can adjust the replay speed and assign the replay start point to
facilitate the problem identification and analysis.
For details, see 9.3 Replaying Logfiles.
2-18

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide

NOTE
The minimum replay rate and the maximum rate supported by the Probe are 1/8 and 32 times of the
test rate.
The preceding two working modes are mutually exclusive:

l
When the system is in the drive test mode, if the working mode needs to be switched to the
replay mode, the test must be stopped before the logfile is opened.
When the system is in the replay mode, if the working mode needs to be switched to the
drive test mode, the replay must be stopped and the logfile must be closed before the external
device is connected to the Probe.

This section describes the recommended devices, including UEs, data cards, and scanners.
2.5.1 Recommended Terminal List (GSM/WCDMA)
This section describes the recommended GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards and the
features supported by these GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards.
2.5.2 Recommended Terminal List (LTE)
This section describes the recommended LTE data cards and the features supported by these
LTE data cards.
2.5.3 Recommended Terminal List (WiMAX)
This section describes the recommended WiMAX data cards and the features supported by these
WiMAX data cards.
2.5.4 Recommended Scanner List
This section describes the recommended scanner list and the features supported by these
scanners.
2.5.1 Recommended Terminal List (GSM/WCDMA)

This section describes the recommended GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards and the
features supported by these GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards.
NOTE
l : Supported.
l : Not supported.
Recommended terminal list (GSM/WCDMA)
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Feature/Terminal
U6100
U1251
U1280-5
GSM 850
GSM 900
GSM 1800
GSM 1900
WCDMA 850

2-19
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Feature/Terminal
U6100
U1251
U1280-5
WCDMA 900
WCDMA 1900
WCDMA 2100
WCDMA AWS
EDGE
HSDPA (Mbit/s)
HSUPA (Mbit/s)
External Antenna
Video Phone
SQE(MS-MS)
SQE(MS-PSTN)
GSM Cell Locking
GSM Forced
Handover/Prohibited
Handover
GSM ARFCN/Band
Locking
GSM CBA Turnover
GSM Frequency
Scan
WCDMA UARFCN
Locking
WCDMA
Scrambling Code
Locking
Recommended data card list (GSM/WCDMA)
2-20
Feature/Data Card
E372u-8
GSM 850
GSM 900
GSM 1800
GSM 1900

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Feature/Data Card
E372u-8
WCDMA 850
WCDMA 900
WCDMA 1900
WCDMA 2100
WCDMA AWS
HSDPA (Mbit/s)
21.6
HSUPA (Mbit/s)
5.76
MIMO
MIMO+64QAM
HSPA+
DC-HSPA+
42
PC Voice
2.5.2 Recommended Terminal List (LTE)

This section describes the recommended LTE data cards and the features supported by these
LTE data cards.
NOTE
l : Supported.
l : Not supported.
Feature/Data Card
Huawei B390
Huawei E398
2100
2650
900
800
Band 64 TDD
2.5.3 Recommended Terminal List (WiMAX)

This section describes the recommended WiMAX data cards and the features supported by these
WiMAX data cards.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

2-21
GENEX Probe
User Guide

NOTE
l : Supported.
l : Not supported.
Feature/Data Card
Huawei Sequans
BM358
Seowon GCT
SWU3120
Seowon GCT
SWU3220
2.3 (GHz)
2.5 (GHz)
3.5 (GHz)
External Antenna
MIMO
FFR
2.5.4 Recommended Scanner List

This section describes the recommended scanner list and the features supported by these
scanners.
NOTE
l : Supported.
l : Not supported.
2-22
Feature/Scanner
PCTEL SeeGull Ex
TSMQ/TSML
GSM 850 (MHz)
GSM 900 (MHz)
GSM 1800 (MHz)
GSM 1900 (MHz)
WCDMA 850 (MHz)
WCDMA 900 (MHz)
WCDMA 1900 (MHz)
WCDMA 2100 (MHz)
WCDMA AWS (MHz)
WiMAX 2.3 (GHz)
WiMAX 2.5 (GHz)
WiMAX 3.5 (GHz)
CW

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Feature/Scanner
PCTEL SeeGull Ex
TSMQ/TSML
RSSI Scanning
GSM Scanning
Spectrum Analysis
TopN Pilot Scanning

(WCDMA)
TopN Preamble Index

Scanning (WiMAX)
External Antenna
External GPS

2-23
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Installing the Probe
About This Chapter

This section describes how to install the Probe and other assistants. To complete the installation
of the Probe, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as
prompted by the installation wizard.
Context
After the Probe is installed, you must connect the dongle to the PC to obtain the license so that
you can use the relevant functions authorized by the license.
3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Probe
Before installing the Probe, you must check whether the installation requirements are met. The
installation requirements are as follows: The software package of the Probe is available. The
software package of the shared components is available. The configuration of the PC meets the
requirement for the installation.
3.2 Installing Shared Components
The GENEX Shared components provide functions for map processing and view editing.
Therefore, the Shared components must be installed to ensure normal running of the Probe.
3.3 Installing the Probe Main Program
The Probe main program must be installed on the computer used for the test and must be active
during the test.
3.4 Plugging in a Dongle
The dongle is a device that provides the user with the authorization to use the GENEX series
products. License is integrated with the dongle. Therefore, you must plug the dongle into the
computer before using the Probe to collect data or using the PSTN SQE Server to evaluate speech
quality. If you only use the Probe to replay data, the dongle is not required.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

3-1
GENEX Probe
User Guide
3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Probe

Before installing the Probe, you must check whether the installation requirements are met. The
installation requirements are as follows: The software package of the Probe is available. The
software package of the shared components is available. The configuration of the PC meets the
requirement for the installation.
Hardware Requirements of the Probe

Table 3-1 lists the hardware requirements for the PC.
Table 3-1 Hardware requirements of the Probe
Configuration
Item
Configuration Requirement
CPU
It is recommended that the processor be Intel 1.8 GHz Dual-Core.
Memory
The minimum memory is 1 GB and it is recommended that the memory

be 2 GB or larger.
Hard disk
It is recommended that the free hard disk space be 10 GB or larger.
PC port
l If a scanner is connected to the PC, one USB port, one serial port,
or one IEEE 1394 port is required.
l If a test terminal is connected to the PC, at least one USB port, one
USB hub, one serial port, or one PCI slot is required.
l If a GPS is connected to the PC, one USB port or one serial port is
required.
l If a dongle is connected to the PC, at least one USB port is required.
Operating System
Microsoft Windows XP or Microsoft Windows 7
Software Requirements of the Probe

Table 3-2 lists the software and the corresponding configurations required for the drive test.
Table 3-2 Software requirements of the Probe
3-2
Configuration
Item
Obtaining Method
Configuration
Requirement
Remarks
Operating system
Microsoft Windows XP or
Microsoft Windows 7
Mandatory

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Configuration
Item
Obtaining Method
Configuration
Requirement
Remarks
Operating software
Microsoft Office 2003 or

Microsoft Office 2007
If the
Microsoft
Office is not
installed, the
engineering
parameter
file in xls or
xlsx format
cannot be
imported.
GENEX Probe
V200R003C01
software installation
package
l Download the
software package
from http://
support.huawei.co
m.
The user must have an

account for the http://
support.huawei.com. In
addition, the user must be
authorized to download the
GENEX Probe
V200R003C01 software
installation package or the
user purchased the GENEX
Probe V200R003C01.
Mandatory
The user must have an

account for the http://
addition, the user must be
authorized to download the
software installation
package of the GENEX
shared components or the
user purchased the GENEX
Probe V200R003C01.
If the
GENEX
Shared
components
are not
installed, the
Probe cannot
be used
normally.
The GENEX Probe

V200R003C01 is
purchased.
If the dongle
is not
installed,
only the
replay
function of
the Probe can
be used.
l Obtain from the

GENEX Probe
V200R003C01
software
installation CDROM.
Software installation
package of the
GENEX shared
components
l Download the
software package
from http://
support.huawei.co
m.
l Obtain from the
GENEX Probe
V200R003C01
software
installation CDROM.
License
The license is
integrated in the
dongle.
3.2 Installing Shared Components

The GENEX Shared components provide functions for map processing and view editing.
Therefore, the Shared components must be installed to ensure normal running of the Probe.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

3-3
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Context
If the computer is already installed with the Probe before, you need not to install the Shared
components again. For an upgrade version of the Probe, the GENEX Shared components also
need to be upgraded. Therefore, you need to install an upgraded GENEX Shared components if
you install an upgrade version of the Probe.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the installation program of GENEX Shared components.
If ...
Then ...
The installation program is downloaded from

http://support.huawei.com.
Decompress the downloaded package

and perform Step 2.
The installation CD-ROM of GENEX Probe

V200R003 is available.
Perform Step 2.
Step 2 Double-click Setup.exe. The installation interface is displayed.

Step 3 Click Next.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click Yes.
Step 5 After the installation is complete, click Finish.
Step 6 Check whether the GENEX Shared components are successfully installed.
Choose Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs. In the displayed Add or Remove
Programs window, check whether the software information about the GENEX Shared
components is listed.
If ...
Then ...
The software information about the

GENEX Shared components is listed.
The GENEX Shared components are installed

successfully.
The software information about the

GENEX Shared components is not listed.
Perform Step 1 through Step 6.
----End
3.3 Installing the Probe Main Program

The Probe main program must be installed on the computer used for the test and must be active
during the test.
3-4

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Prerequisite
Get the Probe installation program ready and check whether the computer meets the hardware
requirements for installing the Probe. For details about the hardware requirements, see 3.1
Preparations Before Installing the Probe.
Context
During the installation of the Probe, the system installs the PSTN SQE Server by default. You
can install the two softwares according to your requirements. If you need to perform the speech
quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink, you must install the PSTN SQE Server. For
details about the PSTN SQE Server, see the corresponding user guide.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the GENEX Probe V200R003C01 installation program.
If ...
Then ...


and perform Step 2.

V200R003C01 is available.
Perform Step 2.

Step 3 Click Next.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, choose I accept the terms of the license
agreement.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the dialog box as shown in Figure 3-1, specify User Name and Company Name.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

3-5
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Figure 3-1 Customer Information
NOTE
l Anyone who uses this computer (all users): Authorize all users of this computer to use the Probe.
l Only for me (user): Authorize only the current user to use the Probe.
Step 7 Click Next.

Step 8 Select the installation mode.
l Complete: Installs the Probe and the PSTN SQE Server at a time.
l Custom: Refers to the custom installation mode. You can choose to install the PSTN SQE
server.
Step 9 Click Browse to select the installation directory.
Step 10 Click Next.
If ...
Then ...
The Complete installation mode is used
Perform Step 11.
The Custom installation mode is used
1. In the displayed dialog box, select Probe.

2. Click Next.
3. Perform Step 11.
Step 11 After the installation is complete, you can select Yes, I want to restart my computer now or
No, I will restart my computer later. Then click Finish.
3-6

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
It is recommended that you select Yes, I want to restart my computer now.

Step 12 Check whether the Probe is installed successfully.
Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 >
Probe and check whether the shortcut for the Probe exists.
If ...
Then ...
The shortcut for the Probe exists.
The Probe is installed successfully.
The shortcut for the Probe does not exist.
Perform Step 1 through Step 12 again.
After the Probe main program is installed, the generated Probe installation folder is in a structure
described in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 Structure of the Probe installation folder
Folder
Probe 2.3
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Description
Bin
Fonts
Saves the fonts used by the Probe.
HelpManual
Saves the help documents.
Language
Saves the supported language resources.
MsgDecoder
Saves the data used for decoding.
PLUGIN
Saves the plug-ins supported by the Probe.
SQE
Saves the sample files and the destination files

of the speech quality evaluation test.
Voice
Saves the voice files.
Config
Saves the system configuration files.
EventConfig
Saves the configuration files that serve as the

principle for event handling.
Log
Saves the logfiles recording history

operations.
Map
Saves the map files.

3-7
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Folder
Description
Projects
Save project files. By default, the following

folders are contained:
l Acceptance: Saves the project files for
acceptance tests.
l Benchmark: Saves the project files for
benchmark tests.
l Customize: Saves the customized project
files.
l Optimize: Saves the project files for
optimization tests.
l Site Verification: Saves the project files
for site verification tests.
Temp
Saves the temporary files.
Template
Saves the templates of projects and

engineering parameters.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the Probe is installed, you must connect the dongle to the PC to obtain the license so that
you can use the relevant functions authorized by the license.
3.4 Plugging in a Dongle

Procedure
Step 1 Plug in the dongle.
If ...
Then ...
The software is being used for the first time Plug the dongle into the USB port of the PC.
and the dongle is available.
The dongle expires.
3-8
Perform Step 2 through Step 5 to obtain a

valid license and update the license for the
dongle.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Step 2 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 >
corresponding software name (such as Probe or PSTN SQE Server) to run the main program.
Step 3 On the displayed main interface, choose Help > View ESN.
Step 4 Send the ESN to Huawei technical support engineer and wait for a new license.
Normally, the new license will be delivered in two to three days.
Step 5 Update the new license for the dongle.
1.
On the main interface, choose Help > Update License.
2.
In the Open dialog box, select the new license.
3.
Click Open.
4.
In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click OK.
CAUTION
When updating the new license for the dongle, ensure that only the dongle for the corresponding
software is plugged into the computer.
Step 6 Optional: Choose Help > License Info to check the authorization information of the dongle.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
If the dongle can not be used normally, the dongle driver should be installed.
You can obtain the dongle driver through the following modes:
l
Huawei website: http://support.huawei.com
GENEX Probe V200R003 software installation CD-ROM
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

3-9
GENEX Probe
User Guide
4 Starting the Probe
Starting the Probe
Once installed, the Probe application can be launched from the Start menu or the shortcut icon.
Procedure
l
Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 >
Probe to open the main interface of the Probe.
For details about the main interface of the Probe, see 2.3 Main Interface of the Probe.
Double-click
to open the main interface of the Probe.
----End
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

4-1
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Managing the Map Window
About This Chapter

The map window displays map-related information in a test area and counter information such
as cell information, event information, and IE information on the drive test route. You can add
a layer, configure layer properties, and configure the legend properties of the IE layer in the map
window.
Context
l
To open an indoor map window, choose View > IndoorMap.
To open an outdoor map window, choose View > OutdoorMap.
5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps

This section describes the basic concepts about maps. It is recommended that you perform
relevant operations in the map window to learn the relevant concepts of maps.
5.2 Importing Maps
You can import a map through the indoor map window or outdoor map window. In this manner,
you can directly know the wireless environment of the test area and easily analyze the test data.
5.3 Adding Layers
This section describes how to add map layers or counter layers such as IE layer, cell layer, and
event layer to an indoor map or an outdoor map so that you can view and analyze test data.
5.4 Configuring Layer Properties
Layer properties consist of layer display properties and layer label properties. Layer display
properties specify the display modes of the objects on a layer. Layer label properties specify the
labeling modes of the objects on a layer. You can configure layer offset properties and adjust
the projection of map layers in the outdoor map window. You can also configure the offset
properties of IE layers in the indoor or outdoor map window. The configuration of layer
properties is temporary and is not saved in projects.
5.5 Configuring Legend Properties
Legend properties include the colors, shapes, and fonts of legends. You can configure the IE
legend properties of MSs in the indoor or outdoor map window so that IEs are displayed on the
map as dots according to different legends. If legend properties are not configured, the Probe
displays IEs according to the default legend.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

5-1
GENEX Probe
User Guide
5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps

This section describes the basic concepts about maps. It is recommended that you perform
relevant operations in the map window to learn the relevant concepts of maps.
Map
The map consists of a series of map elements and involves the MapInfo map and the raster map.
The map information is displayed in the map window on the Probe. The map information
includes the map information about the test area, test routes, events, and engineering parameters.
l
MapInfo map
A MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, and each layer is saved in a file. The files
supported by the MapInfo map are in .tab or .gst (GeoSet) format. A GeoSet is a special
type of workspace used for map layers and saves the configurations including layer order,
labels, and legends.
Raster map
The entire raster map can be considered as a layer. The raster map supported by the
Probe is in .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png format.
Layer
A layer is a set of data displayed in the map window. There are two main types of layers: map
layers and indicator layers.
l
A map consists of multiple map layers.
An indicator layer includes the information related to events, IEs, and cells.
A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a map layer contains all the roads and water
areas on the map; a cell layer (see Figure 5-1) contains multiple engineering parameters.
Figure 5-1 Cell layer
5-2

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Label
Labels are the texts that represent the objects contained on each layer in the map window. For
example, the fields of the engineering parameters on a cell layer, the values and indexes of the
IEs on an IE layer, and the names of the buildings on a building layer.
5.2 Importing Maps

You can import a map through the indoor map window or outdoor map window. In this manner,
you can directly know the wireless environment of the test area and easily analyze the test data.
Context
After the Probe is installed, the system automatically installs the world map. If no other maps
are imported, the system displays the world map by default each time you open the outdoor map
window.
If engineering parameters are imported, the Probe automatically loads the engineering
parameters and displays them as a layer of the map after you open the outdoor map window.
The indoor map window and the outdoor map window are mutually exclusive. Therefore, you
must close the outdoor map window before opening the indoor map window. Similarly, you
must close the indoor map window before opening the outdoor map window.
5.2.1 Importing Outdoor Test Maps
The MapInfo map and raster map can be imported. The MapInfo map consists of multiple layers,
and each layer is saved in a file. The entire raster map can be considered as a layer. You can
import outdoor test map during the outdoor test to facilitate the data browse in the outdoor map
view.
5.2.2 Importing Indoor Test Maps
Only the raster indoor map can be imported. You can import indoor test map during the indoor
test to facilitate the data browse in the indoor map view.

The MapInfo map and raster map can be imported. The MapInfo map consists of multiple layers,
and each layer is saved in a file. The entire raster map can be considered as a layer. You can
import outdoor test map during the outdoor test to facilitate the data browse in the outdoor map
view.
Procedure
l
Import a MapInfo map.

1.
Choose View > OutdoorMap from the system menu, or double-click

OutdoorMap on the View tab page in the navigation area.
2.
In the OutdoorMap window displayed, click the
3.
Select one or more outdoor map files in .tab format or .gst format.
icon.
You can select multiple map files by holding down Ctrl.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

5-3
GENEX Probe
User Guide
4.
l
Click Open.
Import a raster map.

1.
Choose View > OutdoorMap from the system menu, or double-click

OutdoorMap on the View tab page in the navigation area.
2.
In the OutdoorMap window displayed, click the
3.
Select a .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png file and then click Open.
4.
In the Raster Image dialog box, click on the map to add a reference point.
icon.
NOTE
The imported raster map does not contain geographical information; therefore, reference points
must be added for determining geographic locations on the map.
5.
In the Add Control Point dialog box, enter the name of the reference point, longitude,
latitude, and location information. Click OK.
6.
Perform Step 4 through Step 5 repeatedly to add at least three reference points. The
reference points should not be in the same line.
7.
Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can add layers or configure the display properties of layers in an active outdoor map. For
details, see 5 Managing the Map Window.
Related References
12.3 Interface Description: OutdoorMap Window
12.12 Parameters for Importing the Outdoor Raster Map

Only the raster indoor map can be imported. You can import indoor test map during the indoor
test to facilitate the data browse in the indoor map view.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose View > IndoorMap from the system menu, or double-click IndoorMap on the View
tab page in the navigation area.
Step 2 In the IndoorMap window displayed, click the
icon.
Step 3 Choose a .tif file or a .bmp file.

Step 4 Click Open.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can add layer or configure the legends properties of the layer in an active indoor map. For
details, see 5 Managing the Map Window.
5-4

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Related References
12.4 Interface Description: IndoorMap Window
5.3 Adding Layers

This section describes how to add map layers or counter layers such as IE layer, cell layer, and
event layer to an indoor map or an outdoor map so that you can view and analyze test data.
Prerequisite
l
If you want to add map layers, the map files in .tab format must be ready.
If you want to add counter layers, make preparations as follows:

If you want to add IE layers and event layers, external devices must be configured.
If you want to add cell layers, engineering parameters must be imported.
Context
A layer is a set of data displayed in the map window. There are two main types of layer, namely,
map layer and counter layer.
Map layers form the map. Counter layers consist of information about event, IE, cell, alarm, and
GPS counters. A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a map layer contains all the
roads and water areas on the map; a cell layer contains multiple engineering parameters.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the type of layers to be added.
If you need to...
Then ...
Add map layers
Add counter layers
Step 2 In the outdoor map window, click

or right-click in the map display area and then choose
Layer Control from the shortcut menu. The Layer Control dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click Add.
Step 4 Select one or more .tab files, and then click Open.
NOTE
You are advised to add only necessary layers such as base stations, test routes, and main roads on the map.
Step 5 Optional: In the Layer Control dialog box, click Up or Down to move a layer forward or
backward.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 In the Map Layers window of the indoor or outdoor map view, click
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

.
5-5
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Step 8 In the Add Layer dialog box, select the layers to be added.
Step 9 Click OK.
----End
5.4 Configuring Layer Properties

Layer properties consist of layer display properties and layer label properties. Layer display
properties specify the display modes of the objects on a layer. Layer label properties specify the
labeling modes of the objects on a layer. You can configure layer offset properties and adjust
the projection of map layers in the outdoor map window. You can also configure the offset
properties of IE layers in the indoor or outdoor map window. The configuration of layer
properties is temporary and is not saved in projects.
Prerequisite
l
If you want to configure the properties of cell layers, ensure that engineering parameters
are imported.
If you want to configure the properties of counter layers during a test, ensure that external
devices are configured.
If you want to configure the properties of counter layers during a replay, ensure that the
logfile used for the replay contains the information about external devices.
Choose View > Information. Then, you can view the contents in the logfile in the displayed
Information window.
Context
l
Labels are the texts that represent the objects contained on each type of layer in a map.
For example, the fields of the engineering parameters on a cell layer, the values and numbers
of the IEs on an IE layer, and the names of the buildings on a building layer.
For the GSM system, the BTSName and BTSID can be labeled for the base station. By
default, engineering parameter fields BTSName and BCCHNO are labeled.
For the WCDMA system, the NodeBName and NodeBID can be labeled for the base
station. By default, engineering parameter fields NodeBName and P-SC are labeled.
For the CDMA system, the Site Name and Site ID can be labeled for the base station.
By default, engineering parameter fields Site Name and PN are labeled.
For the WiMAX system, the BS Name and BS ID can be labeled for the base station.
By default, engineering parameter fields BSName and Preamble Index are labeled.
For the LTE system, the eNodeBName and eNodeBID can be labeled for the base
station. By default, engineering parameter fields eNodeBName and PCI are labeled.
The map projection refers to the method of projecting the points on the spheroid earth to
the plane coordinates.
The projection varies with layers, and thus a standard is required to normalize the projection,
namely, to adjust the map projection.
5-6
Layer offset refers to the method of making an offset of certain distance on an IE layer in
the longitude or latitude direction so that the objects on each layer can be displayed clearly.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Procedure
l
Configuring layer display properties

1.
In the outdoor map window, click

or right-click the map, and then choose Layer
Control from the shortcut menu. The Layer Control dialog box is displayed.
2.
In the Layers area, select a layer for which the display properties are to be configured.
3.
In the Properties area, select Visible to display the selected layer on the map.
4.
Click Display to configure the display properties of this layer.

For details about the relevant parameters, see Parameters of the Display Properties
Dialog Box.
5.
After the configuration is complete, click OK. The Layer Control dialog box is
displayed.
6.
Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 until the display properties of all the required layers are
configured.
7.
In the Layer Control dialog box, click OK.
Configuring layer label properties

You can configure layer label properties by using either of the following methods:
Cell Label Setting dialog box.
, and then configure layer label properties in the
You can choose to label a base station field or the imported engineering parameter fields.
or right-click the map, and then choose Layer
Control from the shortcut menu. Configure the layer label properties in the Layer
Control dialog box.
For details, see Step 1 through Step 6.
1.
In the Layers area of the Layer Control dialog box, select a layer for which the label
properties are to be configured.
2.
In the Properties area, select Visible and Automatic Labels to display the labels of
the selected layer on the map.
3.
Click Labels to configure the label properties of this layer.

For details about the relevant parameters, see Parameters of the Label Properties
Dialog Box.
4.
After the configuration is complete, click OK. Then, the Layer Control dialog box
is displayed.
5.
Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 until the label properties of all the required layers are
configured.
6.
In the Layer Control dialog box, click OK.

The labels of the configured layers are displayed in the map.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Adjusting the projection of a map layer

1.
In the outdoor map window, right-click the map, and then choose Projection from
the shortcut menu. The Choose Projection dialog box is displayed.
2.
Select a projection mode from the Category drop-down list and select an adjustment
mode in the Category Members area.
3.
Click OK.
5-7
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Configuring the offset properties of IE layers

1.
In the Map Layers window of an indoor or outdoor map view, right-click the IE layer,
and then choose Offset Layer from the shortcut menu. The Layer Offset dialog box
is displayed.
2.
Set the offset.

For detailed description about the parameters, see Parameters for Configuring the
Layer Offset.
3.
After the configuration is complete, click OK.
----End

Legend properties include the colors, shapes, and fonts of legends. You can configure the IE
legend properties of MSs in the indoor or outdoor map window so that IEs are displayed on the
map as dots according to different legends. If legend properties are not configured, the Probe
displays IEs according to the default legend.
Prerequisite
l
If you want to configure IE legend properties during a test, ensure that the MS is configured.
If you want to configure IE legend properties during a replay, ensure that the logfile used
for the replay contains the information about the MS.
Choose View > Information. Then, you can view the contents in the logfile in the displayed
Information window.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Map Layers window of the indoor or outdoor map view, select an IE layer.
or right-click the IE layer, and then choose Edit Layer from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Click the
The Layer Parameter dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the relevant parameters in the Layer Parameter dialog box.
For detailed description about the parameters, see Parameters of the Layer Parameter Dialog
Box.
Step 4 After the configuration is complete, click OK.
----End
Related References
12.13 Parameters for Configuring the Legend Properties
5-8

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Managing Engineering Parameters
About This Chapter

This chapter describes engineering parameters of different network systems supported by the
Probe and the method for importing engineering parameters. You can learn about the details of
base station parameters, antenna parameters, neighboring cell parameters, and various
technology parameters of the current test area through the engineering parameters.
6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems
This describes mandatory fields and optional fields of the engineering parameters supported in
different network system. You can refer to these parameters when you import the engineering
parameters of different network protocol.
6.2 Importing Engineering Parameters
You can import engineering parameters of the test area before the test or replay. After the
engineering parameters are imported, the system detects the best matched BTS from the imported
BTS information according to the network parameter values of the Probe.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

6-1
GENEX Probe
User Guide
6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different

Network Systems
This describes mandatory fields and optional fields of the engineering parameters supported in
different network system. You can refer to these parameters when you import the engineering
parameters of different network protocol.
l
For details on GSM engineering parameters, see GSM Engineering Parameters.
For details on WCDMA engineering parameters, see WCDMA Engineering

Parameters.
For details on CDMA engineering parameters, see CDMA Engineering Parameters.
For details on WiMAX engineering parameters, see WiMAX Engineering Parameters.
For details on LTE engineering parameters, see LTE Engineering Parameters.
The default saving path of the engineering parameters is as follows: Software Installation
Directory\Template\Engineering Parameters.
GSM Engineering Parameters

Field
6-2
Description
Value
Azimuth
Azimuth (degree)
Data type: integer. Range: 0 to

360.
Yes
CI
Cell ID
Data type: double. Range: 0 to

65535.
Yes
LAC
Location area code

65535.
Yes
BCCHNo
Absolute radio frequency

channel number of the
broadcast control channel

1023.
Yes
Longitude
Longitude (degree)
Data type: double. Range: -180.0

to 180.0.
Yes
Latitude
Latitude (degree)
Data type: double. Range: -90.0 to

90.0.
Yes
BTSID
Base transceiver station

(BTS) ID
Data type: character string.
No
BTSName
BTS name
No
CellName
Cell name
No
CGI
Cell global identification
No
TCHList
Traffic channel (TCH) list
No

Mandat
ory (Yes/
No)
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Field
Description
Value
BSIC
Base station identity code,

consisting of network color
code (NCC) and base station
color code (BCC)
Data type: character string. Range

of the NCC and BCC: 0 to 7.
No
AntHeight
Antenna height
Data type: float.
No
MechTilt
Machine downTilt angle

(degree)
Data type: float.
No
ElecTilt
Electronic downTilt (degree)
Data type: float.
No
Altitude
Antenna altitude
Data type: float.
No
GprsSuppo
rt
Indicates whether the general

packet radio service (GPRS)
is supported
No
Polarizatio
n
Polarization type
No
AntGain
Antenna gain
Data type: float.
No
FreqBand
Band
No
EdgeSupp
ort
Indicates whether the EDGE

is supported
No
FH Mode
Frequency hopping mode
No
SiteConfig
NodeB Type
No
City
City
No
Region
Region
No
BTSType
NodeB type
Data type: character string. Value:

Macrocell and Microcell.
No
AntType
Antenna type
No
BSCName
Base station controller (BSC)

name
No
ProjectPha
se
Indicates to which phase the

project belongs
No
RAC
Routing area code

65535.
No
MA
Mobile allocation
No
TMAType
Tower amplification (TMA)

type
No

Mandat
ory (Yes/
No)
6-3
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Field
Description
Value
Mandat
ory (Yes/
No)
TMAGain
TMA gain
Data type: integer.
No
WCDMA Engineering Parameters
6-4
Field
Description
Value
Mandat
ory (Yes/
No)
CellID
Cell ID

65535.
Yes
UARFCN
Carrier frequency point

20000.
Yes
P-SC
Primary scrambling code

511.
Yes
Azimuth
Azimuth (degree)

360.
Yes
Longitude
Longitude

to 180.0.
Yes
Latitude
Latitude

90.0.
Yes
RNCID
Radio network controller

(RNC) ID

255.
No
NodeBID
NodeB ID
No
NodeBNa
me
NodeB name
No
NodeBTyp
e
NodeB type
Data type: character string. Value:

Macrocell and Microcell.
No
SectorID
Sector ID
No
CellName
Cell name
No
DownTilt
Downtilt (degree)
Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90.
No
EDownTilt
Internal E-downTilt (degree)
No
MDownTilt

(degree)
No
GroudHeig
ht
Antenna height above the

ground
Data type: float.
No

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Field
Description
Value
Mandat
ory (Yes/
No)
Altitude
Antenna altitude
Data type: float.
No
AntennaTy
pe
Antenna type
No
AntennaG
ain
Antenna gain
Data type: float.
No
HBeamwidt
h
Width of horizontal halfpower beam
No
VBeamwidt
h
Width of vertical half-power

beam
No
FeederTyp
e
Feeder type
No
FeederLen
gth
Feeder length
Data type: float.
No
NodeBCE
Number of NodeB CEs
Data type: integer.
No
ActiveStat
us
Cell status (active or not)
No
Outdoor
Outdoor station
No
TMA
Tower mounted amplifier
No
CDMA Engineering Parameters
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Field
Description
Value
Mandat
ory
(Yes/
No)
PN
Pseudo-random number

511.
Yes
Longitude
Longitude

to 180.0.
Yes
Latitude
Latitude

90.0.
Yes
Azimuth
Azimuth (degree)

360.
Yes
Cell ID
Cell ID
Data type: integer.
Yes

6-5
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Field
Description
Value
Mandat
ory
(Yes/
No)
ARFCN
Frequency number
Data type: integer.
Yes
Sector ID
Sector ID
Data type: integer.
Yes
DownTilt
Downtilt (degree)
Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 90.
No
Site ID
Site ID
Data type: integer.
No
Site Name
Site name
No
Carrier ID
Carrier ID
Data type: integer.
No
SID
System ID
Data type: integer.
No
NID
Network ID
Data type: integer.
No
Antenna
Height
Antenna height (m)
Data type: integer.
No
BeamWidt
h
Angle of the horizontal lobe

(degree)
No
WiMAX Engineering Parameters
6-6
Field
Description
Value
Mandat
ory (Yes/
No)
BSID
Base station ID, including

Operator ID and Sector ID
Yes
Longitude
Longitude

to 180.0.
Yes
Latitude
Latitude

90.0.
Yes
Freq
Frequency (kHz)
Data type: integer.
Yes
Azimuth
Azimuth of an antenna
(degree)

360.
Yes
Preamble
Index
Preamble index,
corresponding to Segment
and Cell ID

114.
Yes
FA Index
Frequency allocation index
Data type: integer.
No
Operator
ID
Operator ID corresponding to
BSID
Data type: integer.
No

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Field
Description
Value
Mandat
ory (Yes/
No)
Sector ID
Sector ID
Data type: integer.
No
Cell ID
Cell ID
Data type: integer.
No
Cell Name
Cell name
No
BS Name
Base station name
No
Antenna
Height
Antenna height (m)
Data type: integer.
No
DownTilt
Azimuth of an antenna
(degree)
Data type: double. Range: 0 to 90.
No
Angle
Width of the antenna main

lobe (degree)

360, where, 0 indicates the
omnidirectional antenna.
No
PermBase
PermBase in the cell
No
LTE Engineering Parameters
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Field
Description
Value
Mandato
ry (Yes/
No)
eNodeBID
LTE eNodeB ID
Yes
eNodeBNa
me
LTE eNodeB name
Yes
SectorID
Sector ID
Yes
Local
CellID
Local cell ID
Yes
CellID
Cell ID

533.
Yes
UARFCN
Carrier frequency point

20000.
Yes
PCI
ID of the primary cell

503.
Yes
Longitude
Longitude

to 180.0.
Yes
Latitude
Latitude

to 90.0.
Yes

6-7
GENEX Probe
User Guide
6-8
Field
Description
Value
Mandato
ry (Yes/
No)
Azimuth
Azimuth (degree)
Yes
eNodeBTy
pe
LTE eNodeB type
No
CellName
Cell name
No
DownTilt
Downtilt (degree)
No
EDownTilt
Internal E-downTilt (degree)
No
MDownTilt

(degree)
No
GroudHei
ght
Antenna height above the

ground
Data type: float.
No
Altitude
Antenna altitude
Data type: float.
No
AntennaT
ype
Antenna type
No
AntennaG
ain
Antenna gain
Data type: float.
No
HBeamwidt
h
Width of horizontal halfpower beam
No
VBeamwidt
h
Width of vertical half-power

beam
No
FeederTyp
e
Feeder type
No
FeederLen
gth
Feeder length
Data type: float.
No
ActiveStat
us
Cell status (active or not)
The value is Yes or No.
No
Outdoor
Station type (outdoor or not)
The value is Yes or No.
No
TMA
The tower mounted amplifier

is available or not
No

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide

You can import engineering parameters of the test area before the test or replay. After the
engineering parameters are imported, the system detects the best matched BTS from the imported
BTS information according to the network parameter values of the Probe.
Context
According to service requirements, engineering parameters are classified into mandatory
parameters, optional parameters, and neighboring cell parameters. For details, see 6.1
Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems. You can click the
icon to view engineering parameter templates of different networks in the default path provided
by the Probe. In addition, you can modify the format of the current engineering parameter table
based on the project reference template to ensure that the format of the engineering parameter
table meets the requirements of the Probe.
l
The mandatory fields must be totally matched. Otherwise, the corresponding engineering
parameter cannot be imported.
In the case of the optional fields, you can perform the match operation according to the
actual situation. If the optional field is not matched, the Probe does not import the data in
the corresponding column as the engineering parameter.
Neighboring cells are classified into horizontal neighboring cells and vertical neighboring
cells.
Horizontal neighboring cell
The engineering parameter fields of the serving cell and the cell fields are in the same
line of the same table. Horizontal neighboring cells support only the GSM network
system. In this case, engineering parameter fields contain neighboring cell fields.
Vertical neighboring cell
Each line in the table indicates a neighboring cell relation. Vertical neighboring cells
support the GSM, WCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE network systems. In this case,
engineering parameter fields do not contain neighboring cell fields, and you need to
import the corresponding engineering parameter when importing a neighboring cell.
NOTE
In the case of importing vertical neighboring cell fields, pay attention to the following points:
l In GSM network system, LAC and CI of the engineering parameter field must be matched, and
NLAC and NCI of the neighboring cell field must be matched.
l In WCDMA network system, RNCID and CellID of the engineering parameter field must be matched,
and NRNCID and NcellID of the neighboring cell field must be matched.
l In WiMAX network system, BSID of the engineering parameter field must be matched, and NBSID
of the neighboring cell field must be matched.
l In LTE network system, CellID and PCI of the engineering parameter field must be matched, and
NcellID and NPCI of the neighboring cell field must be matched.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Engineering Parameter management.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

6-9
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Step 2 In the Engineering Parameter management window, click

displayed.
. The Select File dialog box is
Step 3 Select the network mode of the imported engineering parameter in Protocol.
Step 4 Perform the operation according to the type of the imported data.
If ...
Then...
The engineering parameter is imported, Open an engineering parameter file in

but no neighboring cell field is imported. Engineering parameter file.
The engineering parameter and the
horizontal neighboring cell field are
imported.
The engineering parameter and the

vertical neighboring cell field are
imported.
1. Select Config Neighboring Cell.

2. Choose Horizontal.
3. Open an engineering parameter file
(containing neighboring cell fields) in
Engineering parameter file.
1. Select Config Neighboring Cell.
2. Choose Vertical.
3. Open an engineering parameter file in
Engineering parameter file.
4. Open a neighboring cell parameter file in
Neighboring cell file.
Step 5 Click Next. The Match Parameters dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Select the sheet that the engineering parameter or neighboring cell field is located in Select
sheet.
Step 7 Click Finish.
The Probe starts to match the engineering parameters in the Probe Param and Excel Param
lists automatically. Then, the engineering parameters are displayed in the Engineering
Parameter management window.
6-10

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
If ...
Then...
The Probe displays a dialog box
You can infer that the mandatory parameters in

the Probe Param and Excel Param lists do not
match. In this case, you must manually match
these mandatory parameters.
1. Click OK.
2. Select the line in which the field does not
match.
3. Click Match Date. The Match dialog box is
displayed.
4. Select the correct field name and click OK.
5. To match other fields, perform 7.2 through
7.4 repeatedly.
6. Click Finish, and then wait until importing the
engineering parameters is complete.
7. Perform Step 8.
The Probe doe not display any dialog box You do not need to manually match the
After the engineering parameters are imported, go
to Step 8.
Step 8 Optional: Edit the engineering parameters.
1.
In the Engineering Parameter management window, select the parameters to be edited,

and then type the new values in the table.
2.
Click
for the new values to take effect.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
In addition, you can click
future use.
to export engineering parameters to XLS file or CSV file for
After importing engineering parameters, you can add engineering parameter layers or view the
engineering parameters and neighboring cell connection line information in the map window.
Related References
12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter management Window
12.11 Parameters for Importing the Engineering Parameters
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

6-11
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Connecting External Devices
About This Chapter

Connecting external devices involves connecting external devices to the PC and in the Probe,
so that the external devices can work with the Probe to perform tests. When you use the Probe
to replay data, you need not connect external devices.
The Probe supports various types of external devices, such as test terminal, scanner, and GPS.
This describes the types and specifications of external devices used in the data collection.
Before a test is performed, ensure that the external devices are properly plugged into the PC and
are correctly positioned.
7.3 Configuring External Devices
This section describes how to configure external devices. After external devices are connected
to the PC installed with the Probe, you need to add and configure related parameters in the
Device Configure window of the Probe so that external devices work with the Probe to collect
data.
7.4 Enabling External Devices
Enabling external devices refers to connecting external devices in the Probe so that the Probe
can recognize the configured external devices.
7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected
Selecting the data to be collected refers to the process in which the Probe selectively collects
the data reported by test terminals. In this case, the logfile records only the selected data. For
the data that is frequently read, you can set data sampling intervals. This avoids the receipt of
redundant data and increases the speed of reading data.
7.6 Configuring Device Alarms
The Probe generates alarm in dialog box or voice mode, when the device is unexpectedly
disconnected or the signal strength of the GPS is weak. You can set alarm events or alarm modes
for special situations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

7-1
GENEX Probe
User Guide

The Probe supports various types of external devices, such as test terminal, scanner, and GPS.
This describes the types and specifications of external devices used in the data collection.
Test Terminal
l
Table 7-1 shows the types and specifications of GSM/WCDMA test terminals.
Table 7-1 Specifications of GSM/WCDMA test terminals
Type of the Test
Terminal
Supported Band
Detect
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
Huawei U120e
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
900/1800/1900
Yes
Support the following

test items:
l Forcing function
test
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
l Speech quality
evaluation test
l Video Phone test
Huawei U1205
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/1800/1900
Yes

test items:
l Forcing function
test
WCDMA (MHz):
850/1900
l Speech quality
evaluation test
l Video Phone test
Huawei U6100
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
900/1800/1900
Yes

test items:
l Forcing function
test
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
l Speech quality
evaluation test
l Video Phone test
Huawei U1211
GSM/GPRS (MHz):
900/2100
Yes
WCDMA (MHz):
900/1800/2100
7-2

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Type of the Test

Terminal
Supported Band
Detect
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
Huawei U1251
GSM/GPRS (MHz):
850/1800/1900
Yes

test items:
l Forcing function
test
WCDMA (MHz):
900/2100
l Speech quality
evaluation test
l Video Phone test
Huawei U1307
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
900/1800/1900
Yes
Yes
Not support the

following test items:
WCDMA (MHz):
850/2100
Huawei U8220
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
l MMS test
WCDMA (MHz):
850/1900/2100
l Video Phone test

l KeyEmul test
l Multi-RAB test
l Async SQE(MSMS) test
l SQE(MS-PSTN)
test
Huawei U8226
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
No
WCDMA (MHz):
850/1900/2100
Not support the

l MMS test
l Video Phone test
l KeyEmul test
l Multi-RAB test
l SQE(MS-PSTN)
test
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

7-3
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Type of the Test

Terminal
Supported Band
Detect
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
Huawei U7519
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
900/1800/1900
Yes
Not support the

l MMS test
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
l Video Phone test

l KeyEmul test
l Multi-RAB test
l SQE(MS-PSTN)
test
Huawei U7517
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
900/1800/1900
Yes
Not support the

l MMS test
WCDMA (MHz):
850/2100
l Video Phone test

l KeyEmul test
l Multi-RAB test
l SQE(MS-PSTN)
test
Huawei U526
GSM/GPRS (MHz):
900/1800/1900
No
No
No
No
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
Huawei U535
GSM/GPRS (MHz):
900/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
Huawei U550
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
900/1800/1900
HSDPA/WCDMA
(MHz): 2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s): 3.6
Huawei U626
GSM/GPRS (MHz):
900/1800
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
7-4

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Type of the Test

Terminal
Supported Band
Detect
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
Huawei U636
GSM/GPRS (MHz):
900/1800
No
No

test items:
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
Huawei U1280-5
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/1800/1900
l Speech quality
evaluation test
WCDMA (MHz):
850/1900
Huawei U3220
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
l Video Phone test

Yes
Not support the

l Speech quality
evaluation test
WCDMA/HSPA+
(MHz): 1700/1900
l Video Phone test

l MMS test
Huawei E176
Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
Yes
Yes
Yes
HSPA/WCDMA
(MHz):
850/1900/2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2
HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2
Huawei E180
Card
GSM (MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
HSPA/WCDMA
(MHz): 900/2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2
HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2
Huawei E270
Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
HSPA/WCDMA
(MHz):
850/1900/2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2
HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

7-5
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Type of the Test

Terminal
Supported Band
Detect
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
Huawei E270+
Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
Yes
Support the Multiple

Input Multiple Output
(MIMO) test.
Yes
Support the MIMO

test.
Yes
Support the MIMO

test.
Yes
HSPA+/WCDMA
(MHz): 1900/2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2
HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2
Huawei E1820
Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
HSPA+/WCDMA
(MHz): 2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s):
21.6
Huawei E182E
Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
HSPA+/HSPA/
WCDMA (MHz):
850/900/1900/2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s):
21.6
HSUPA (Mbit/s):
5.76
Huawei E1823
Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
HSPA+/HSPA/
WCDMA (MHz):
850/900/1900/2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s):
21.6
HSUPA (Mbit/s):
5.76
7-6

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Type of the Test

Terminal
Supported Band
Detect
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
Huawei E372u-8
Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(MHz):
850/900/1800/1900
No
Support the DCHSDPA test.
No
No
No
No
HSPA+/HSPA/
WCDMA (MHz):
850/900/1900/2100
HSDPA (Mbit/s):
21.6
HSUPA (Mbit/s):
5.76
DC-HSPA+ (Mbit/
s): 43.2
Qualcomm
TM6200
GSM/GPRS (MHz):
900/1800
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
Qualcomm
TM6250
GSM/GPRS (MHz):
900/1800
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
Qualcomm
TM6275
GSM (MHz):
900/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
2100
Qualcomm
TM6280
GSM (MHz):
900/1800/1900
WCDMA (MHz):
850/1900/2100
Table 7-2 shows the types and specifications of CDMA test terminals.
Table 7-2 Specifications of CDMA test terminals
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Type of the Test

Terminal
Supported Band
Detect Automatically (Yes/No)
Huawei C300
1x 800 MHz
No
Huawei C506
1x 800 MHz
No
Huawei C2860
1x 800 MHz
No
Huawei C5005
1x 800 MHz
No

7-7
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Type of the Test

Terminal
Supported Band
Detect Automatically (Yes/No)
Huawei C5588
1x 800 MHz
No
Huawei C7100
1x 800 MHz
No
Huawei C7168
1x 800 MHz
No
Huawei C7188
1x 800 MHz
No
Huawei C7200
1x 800 MHz
No
Huawei EC360
Card
1x/DO0/DOA: 800
MHz, 1900 MHz
No
Qualcomm
QTP-6800
1x/DO0/DOA: 800
MHz, 1900 MHz
No
LG KX206
1x 800 MHz
No
LG KX236
1x 800 MHz
No
Table 7-3 shows the types and specifications of WiMAX test terminals.
Table 7-3 Specifications of WiMAX test terminals
7-8
Type of the
Test Terminal
Supported
Band
Detect
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
ZyXEL
MAX100
2500 MHz
No
ZyXEL
MAX210
3500 MHz
No
Seowon GCT
SWU1100
2500 MHz, 3500

MHz
No
Seowon GCT
SWU3020
2300 MHz
No
Seowon GCT
SWU3120
2500 MHz
No
Seowon GCT
SWU3220
3500 MHz
No
Huawei Sequans
BM325
2500 MHz
No
Huawei Sequans
BM355
2300 MHz
No
Huawei Sequans
BM358
2300 MHz
No

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Type of the
Test Terminal
Supported
Band
Detect
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
Huawei Sequans
BM625
2500 MHz
No
Supports only the USB

connection mode.
Huawei Sequans
BM635
3500 MHz
No

connection mode.
Huawei Beceem
BM328
2500 MHz
No

connection mode.
Huawei Beceem
BM338
3500 MHz
No

connection mode.
Table 7-4 shows the specifications of LTE test terminals.

Table 7-4 Specifications of LTE test terminals
Type of the
Test
Terminal
Supported Band
Detect
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
Huawei UE
1.0
Band 4: AWS
No
Supports only the

network port
connection mode.
No
Supports only the

network port
connection mode.
No
Supports only the

network port
connection mode.
Band 7: 2.6GHz
Band 12: 700 MHz
Band 40: 2.3 GHz
DD: 800 MHz
Huawei UE
1.1
Band 4: AWS
Band 7: 2.6 GHz
Band 12: 700 MHz
Band 40: 2.3 GHz
DD: 800 MHz
Huawei UE
2.0
Band 1: 2.1 GHz

Band 3: 1800 MHz
Band 4: AWS
Band 7: 2.6 GHz
Band 8: 900 MHz
Band 12: 700 MHz
Band 38: 2.6 GHz
Band 40: 2.3 GHz
DD: 800 MHz
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

7-9
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Type of the
Test
Terminal
Supported Band
Detect
Automatically
(Yes/No)
Remarks
Huawei
B390
Band 38: 2.6 GHz
No
Supports only the

network port
connection mode.
No

connection mode.
Band 40: 2.3 GHz

Band 64: 2545 MHz to
2575 MHz
Band 7: 2.6 GHz
Band 20: 791 MHz to
821 MHz (Downlink),
and 832 MHz to 862
MHz (Uplink)
Huawei
E398 Card
Band 1: 2.1 GHz

Band 7: 2.6 GHz
Band 3: 1800 MHz
Scanner
The followings scanners are supported by the Probe:
l
GSM/WCDMA
PCTel SeeGull EX GSM 900/1800 WCDMA 900/2100
PCTel SeeGull LX Tri-Band GSM 900/1800 WCDMA 900/2100
PCTel PCT-505
PCTel PCT-520 Tri-Band GSM 900/1800 WCDMA 2100
Anritsu ML8720 GSM 850/900/1800/1900 WCDMA 2100
Anritsu ML8740 GSM 850/900/1800/1900 WCDMA 2100
Anritsu ML8742A WCDMA 2100
Rohde & Schwarz TSML-W
It supports all the WCDMA band class defined by 3GPP by default.
CDMA
PCTel SeeGull LX Dual Mode Quad Band CDMA 850/1900 EV-DO 850/1900
WiMAX
PCTel SeeGull EX Mini Dual Band WiMAX 2500/3500
GPS
The Probe supports the GPS that complies with the National Marine Electronics Association
0183 (NMEA0183) protocol. For example, the GARMIN series and supports the text format of
the GARMIN series. NMEA0183, enacted by the NMEA, is a data protocol that complies with
industrial standards. Based on all ASCII characters, this protocol adapt to custom options . Thus,
this protocol is flexible.
The following GPSs are supported by the Probe:
7-10

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
GARMIN GPS76
Huan Tian BU353

Before a test is performed, ensure that the external devices are properly plugged into the PC and
are correctly positioned.
Prerequisite
The external devices and auxiliary equipment for a test are available. For details, see 8.2
Preparations Before Data Collection.
Context
The connection modes that vary with the types of the external devices are as follows:
l
Test terminal: USB, PCMCIA slot, or Ethernet port
Data card: USB or PCMCIA slot
PCTel SeeGull scanner and Anritsu scanner: USB or COM port
Rohde&Schwarz TSML-W scanner: FireWire (IEEE 1394 port)
GPS: USB or COM port

NOTE
In the case that the Probe performs tests of multiple terminals at a time, the Belkin USB 7-port Hub must
be used to ensure the proper connection between test terminals and a PC.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect all required external devices to a PC and ensure that all cables are plugged in properly.
For details about how to connect the external devices, see the installation guide of the
corresponding external device.
CAUTION
Required drivers of the external devices must be installed so that the PC can identify these
devices. You can find drivers of a variety of external devices in the Accessory\Driver directory
in the Probe software installation package. For details about how to install these drivers, see the
user guide of the corresponding external device.
Step 2 Ensure that the external devices are positioned correctly.
l Ensure that the connection between the external devices and the PC is secure.
l Ensure that the cables connected to the external devices bend naturally.
l Ensure that the receive signals of the test terminals and the GPS are not blocked. Otherwise,
the signals may be insufficient, which affects the data collection.
----End
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

7-11
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Example
For details about the connection mode of an LTE UE, see 13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE
UE?.
Follow-up Procedure
After the external devices are plugged into the PC, you must configure these devices on the
Probe and ensure that the Probe identifies them so that they can work with the Probe to collect
data.

This section describes how to configure external devices. After external devices are connected
to the PC installed with the Probe, you need to add and configure related parameters in the
Device Configure window of the Probe so that external devices work with the Probe to collect
data.
7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically
This section describes how to configure external devices automatically. The Probe automatically
detects external devices that are connected to the PC and automatically adds the detected external
devices to the Device Configure window.
7.3.2 Configuring External Devices Manually
This section describes how to configure external devices manually. Devices which cannot be
detected automatically must be added manually in the Device Configure window.
Related References
12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices
7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically

This section describes how to configure external devices automatically. The Probe automatically
detects external devices that are connected to the PC and automatically adds the detected external
devices to the Device Configure window.
Context
Currently, the Probe supports automatic detection of certain models of test terminals and does
not support automatic detection of scanners and GPS. For details about test terminals that can
be automatically detected by the Probe, see 7.1 Connectable External Devices.
Procedure
l
7-12
in the main interface of the Probe.

Click
The detected external devices are automatically added to the Device Configure dialog box
and Down is displayed in State, as shown in Figure 7-1.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Figure 7-1 Device Configure dialog box
NOTE
If automatic detection fails or external devices do not support automatic detection, you need to
manually configure external devices. For details, see 7.3.2 Configuring External Devices
Manually.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can configure external devices that are connected to the PC on the Probe by referring to
7.4 Enabling External Devices.
7.3.2 Configuring External Devices Manually

This section describes how to configure external devices manually. Devices which cannot be
detected automatically must be added manually in the Device Configure window.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the Probe, click
Step 2 In the displayed dialog box, click
Step 3 From the Type drop-down list box, select an external device such as the MS, GPS, or scanner
to be configured. From the Model drop-down list box, select the model of the selected external
device.
Step 4 Click Next to set the relevant parameters.
For details about the parameters, see 12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

7-13
GENEX Probe
User Guide

TIP
l You can view the value of COM port of the external device under the Ports (COM & LPT) node in
the Device Manager window. In a data service test, you can right-click an external device node under
the Modem node in the Device Manager window and then choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Then, you can view the value of Modem port of the external device on the Modem tab page.
You can enter the Device Manager window by clicking
Configure window.
icon on the toolbar of Device
l You can click Filter to select the data to be received. For the description of the parameters, see 12.8
Parameters for Filtering the Original Data.
l You can also select the data to be received after the external device is configured. For details, see 7.5
Selecting the Data to Be Collected.
Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 Check the configuration status of the external device.
In the Device Configure dialog box, if the value of the configured external device is Down in
the State column, you can infer that the external device is configured in the Probe.
If no value is displayed in the State column, you can infer that the external device is not
configured in the Probe. In this case, repeat Step 2 through Step 5 to configure the external
device based on the actual situation until the values of all the configured external devices are
Down in the State column.
Step 7 Optional: Synchronize the PC time with the GPS time.
1.
Choose Configuration > System Configure to open the System Configure dialog box.
2.
Click
3.
Select Synchronize PC Time with GPS Time, and then select the time zone of the place
where you are located from the Time zone drop-down list box.
The range of time zone is GMT +12 to GMT -12.

4.
Click OK.
NOTE
After synchronizing the time of the GPS with that of the PC, do not modify the system time, otherwise,
the preset time is invalid.
----End
Example
You can enter the Device Manager window by clicking
icon on the toolbar of Device
Configure window. You can view the value of COM port of the external device under the
Ports (COM & LPT) node. In a data service test, you can right-click an external device node
under the Modem node in the Device Manager window and then choose Properties from the
shortcut menu. Then, you can view the value of Modem port of the external device on the
Modem tab page
7-14

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Figure 7-2 The example of COM port
Figure 7-3 The example of Modem port
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

7-15
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
You need to connect the external devices in the Probe. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External
Devices.
7.4 Enabling External Devices

Enabling external devices refers to connecting external devices in the Probe so that the Probe
can recognize the configured external devices.
Prerequisite
The external devices are configured. For details, see 7.3 Configuring External Devices.
Procedure
to open the Device Configure dialog box.
Step 2 Select an added external device.

If ...
Then ...
Connect the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX external device
Skip to Step 3.
Connect the LTE external device
Skip to Step 5.
Step 3 Click
If ...
, and then check whether the port of the external device is available.
Then ...
The system displays Enable in the State In this case, you can infer that the port is
list of the external device in the Device available.
Configure dialog box.
Perform Step 4.
The system prompts you by displaying a In this case, you can infer that the port is
dialog box.
unavailable and cannot be connected properly.
Perform the following steps:
1. Click OK.
The system displays Disconnect in the State
list of the external device in the Device
Configure dialog box.
2. Re-set the port of the external device.
For details, see 13.2 Problems Related to
Device Connections.
3. Perform Step 4.
7-16

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Step 4 Repeat Step 2 to Step 3 until the system displays Enable in the State list of the added external
devices in the Device Configure dialog box.
external devices.
. Then the Probe automatically connects to the
The system displays the connection status in the State list of the corresponding external device
in the Device Configure dialog box.
l Searching: indicates that the external device is being connected.
l Disconnect: indicates that the external device is disconnected or the connection is abnormal.
l Connected: indicates that the external device is connected.
Step 6 Check the connection status of the external devices in the system status bar.
For the description of the system status bar, see System Status Bar.
----End

Selecting the data to be collected refers to the process in which the Probe selectively collects
the data reported by test terminals. In this case, the logfile records only the selected data. For
the data that is frequently read, you can set data sampling intervals. This avoids the receipt of
redundant data and increases the speed of reading data.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Device Configure, or click the
icon on the toolbar.
Step 2 In the Device Configure dialog box, double-click the configured test terminal.
Step 3 Click Filter, and set the relevant parameters.
For detailed description about the parameters, see 12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original
Data.
CAUTION
When the AMR end-to-end delay test is performed, the calling and called terminals must be
connected to the same Probe. In addition, when configuring the terminals, you must select the
data packets related to the AMR in LogCode in the Filter dialog box.
l For the calling terminal, Ox7143 need to be selected.
l For the called terminal, 0x7144 need to be selected.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

7-17
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Related References
12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data

The Probe generates alarm in dialog box or voice mode, when the device is unexpectedly
disconnected or the signal strength of the GPS is weak. You can set alarm events or alarm modes
for special situations.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > System Configure. The System Configure dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click
Step 3 Set Language to specify the language type of the device alarm.
You can set the language type of the device alarm to Chinese or English.
Step 4 Set the device alarm mode.
If ...
Then...
Generating alarms in voice mode
Choose Audio Alarm, and select a voice file (.wav

file) in Sound.
Generating alarms in dialog box mode Choose Visual Alarm.

Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Related References
12.16 Parameters for Configuring the Device Alarm
7-18

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
8 Collecting Data
Collecting Data
About This Chapter

The Probe collects the air interface test data through the test terminal and other external devices
and records test data in logfiles. Before collecting the data, make sure that a computer installed
with the Probe, the test terminal, the scanner, and the GPS are available and the dongle must be
plugged in. You can also import engineering parameters for different network systems and map
files, which helps to provide a vivid view of test data.
Context
You can start the data analysis through operations on the menu bar, toolbar, tabs in navigation
pane, or view windows. This section describes the most commonly used methods on how to
collect data by using the Probe.
CAUTION
When you use the Probe to collect data, the dongle must be always connected to the USB port
on the PC. Otherwise, the Probe cannot be used to collect data.
You can choose Help > Check License to check whether the dongle is plugged in properly.
8.1 Data Collection Process
The data collection function of the Probe is responsible for collection of the test data on the
wireless air interface.
8.2 Preparations Before Data Collection
Before data collection, you need to have the following items ready: Probe of the latest version,
external devices and auxiliary equipment for the test. In addition, you need to ensure that the
external devices are running properly.
8.3 Creating a Project
All operations on the Probe are based on the project. Therefore, before the data collection or
data analysis, you need to create a project or open an existing project.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

8-1
GENEX Probe
User Guide
8 Collecting Data
A test plan is a customized test task that consists of test items provided by the Probe. You can
configure different test items for the MS or the scanner based on the actual situation to guide
various data service tests and voice service tests during the drive test.
8.5 Performing a Test Plan
Performing a test plan refers to performing the configured test items of the MS or scanner through
the Probe to collect test data. You can use the Probe to perform indoor tests and outdoor tests.
Before performing a test plan, ensure that external devices are properly connected and test plans
are assigned for the scanner or MS. After the test plan is started, the system carries out the plan
and records the test data. You can monitor the test process in real time during the test.
8-2

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
8 Collecting Data
8.1 Data Collection Process

The data collection function of the Probe is responsible for collection of the test data on the
wireless air interface.
Table 8-1 shows the procedure for data collection on the Probe.
Table 8-1 Data collection procedure
Proce
dure
Operation
Description
Preparations Before Data

Collection
Make preparations for the data collection to

improve the data collection efficiency.
Connecting External Devices
Connect the external devices used for the data

collection to the test PC and then configure the
relevant parameters on the Probe.
Creating a Project
Create a project for data collection. You can also

import the map or relevant engineering
parameters to the project to facilitate data
observation.
Designing a Test Plan
Design the test plan for the test terminal or

scanner to test the voice service or data service.
Performing a Test Plan
Start a test plan and record a logfile.
Browsing Data in Real Time
During the test, you can view the test data in real
time in the view window.
8.2 Preparations Before Data Collection

Before data collection, you need to have the following items ready: Probe of the latest version,
external devices and auxiliary equipment for the test. In addition, you need to ensure that the
external devices are running properly.
It is recommended that you perform the following operations before the drive test:
l
Determine the test objective and test area, plan the test route, and update the base station
information to improve the data collection efficiency.
Have the engineering parameter table and map for the drive test ready.
For the engineering parameters supported by the Probe, see 6.1 Engineering
Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems.
For the maps supported by the Probe, see 5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps.
Have the Probe and GENEX Shared components of the latest version ready.
Have the relevant hardware and software ready.

A PC installed with the Probe and GENEX Shared components is available.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

8-3
GENEX Probe
User Guide
8 Collecting Data
The dongle and the corresponding driver are available.

External devices and the corresponding auxiliary equipment and their drivers used for
the drive test are available. Ensure that the external devices run properly.
Table 8-2 describes the requirements for the external devices.
Table 8-2 Requirements for the external devices
Configu
ration
Item
Configuration Requirement
Auxiliary Equipment
GPS
For the GPS supported by the Probe, see

GPS.
External antenna
Scanner
For the scanner supported by the Probe, see

Scanner.
Vehicle-mounted DC/
AC converter, external
antenna, and so on
Test
terminal
For the test MS and PC card supported by

the Probe, see Test Terminal.
Spare battery, charger,

data cable, and so on
NOTE
During the drive test, ensure that the power supply of the connected devices is sufficient.
8.3 Creating a Project

All operations on the Probe are based on the project. Therefore, before the data collection or
data analysis, you need to create a project or open an existing project.
Context
Upon the startup of the Probe, an empty project is created automatically by default. You can
perform subsequent operations for this default project.
The Probe can display only one project at a time. To open another project, you need to close the
current project.
Procedure
Step 1 In the navigation pane, expand the Project tab and then click the
icon.
Step 2 Choose a project template.

l Empty Project: creates an empty project.
l GSM View Template: project template used in GSM tests provided by the Probe.
l WCDMA View Template: project template used in WCDMA tests provided by the Probe.
l WiMAX Beceem View Template: project template used in WiMAX Beceem tests provided
by the Probe.
l LTE View Template: project template used in LTE tests provided by the Probe.
8-4

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
8 Collecting Data
After a template is selected, the system automatically names the new project Untitled.
NOTE
You can open an existing project through the Project tab in the navigation pane.
Step 3 Configure the related parameters.

For example, configure data related to external devices, make test plan, or specify other system
settings.
Step 4 Optional: Save the current project as required.
If you need to ...
Then ...
Directly save the current project
Choose Project > Save.
Rename and then save the current project
Choose Project > Save As.
The folders provided by the Probe for saving project files are under the following path: software
installation path\Projects. The following folders are contained:
l Site Verification
Saves the project files for single-site verification tests.
l Optimize
Saves the project files for optimization tests.
l Benchmark
Saves the project files for benchmark tests.
l Acceptance
Saves the project files for acceptance tests.
l Customize
Saves the customized project files.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can close or delete a project by choosing Project, clicking the corresponding icon on the
toolbar, or clicking the corresponding icon under the Project tab in the navigation pane on the
main interface. For details about the main interface of the Probe, see 2.3 Main Interface of the
Probe.

A test plan is a customized test task that consists of test items provided by the Probe. You can
configure different test items for the MS or the scanner based on the actual situation to guide
various data service tests and voice service tests during the drive test.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

8-5
GENEX Probe
User Guide
8 Collecting Data
Context
Ensure that the MS is properly connected and the related parameters are set. For details about
how to configure the MS, see 7 Connecting External Devices.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose ConfigurationTest Plan Control, or click
on the Configuration tab page in the
navigation pane to open the Test Plan Control window.
Step 2 Click Click here to config in the left pane to add a test item, and then configure the properties
of the added test item on the Config tab in the right pane.
For the description of test items and related properties, see 14.1 Description of Test Items.
CAUTION
l To perform a data service test, such as the Ping, FTP, HTTP, WAP, Video Streaming, or
Email test, you must configure the Dial Up test item before configuring the test item required
by the data service.
l To perform a speech quality evaluation test, you need to configure the test item according to
the following situations:
l To perform a synchronous speech quality evaluation test, you need to configure the
Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item for the calling PHU terminal.
l To perform an asynchronous speech quality evaluation test, you need to configure the
Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item for the two PHU terminals.
l To perform a speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE
Server, you need to configure the SQE (MS-PSTN) test item for the PHU terminal that
is configured for the Probe and configure the SQE test item for the PSTN SQE Server.
Step 3 Repeat Step 2 to add multiple test items.
If the added test item need to be performed cyclically, you need to add the Loop Start test item.
After the Loop Start test item is added, the Probe adds the Loop End test item automatically,
which indicates that the test items between Loop Start and Loop End are performed cyclically.
Step 4 Optional: Adjust the execution sequence of the test items.
1.
Select a test item whose execution sequence you want to adjust.
2.
Click
or
to move the test item up or down.
Step 5 Set whether to perform the added test item in Enable.

Clicking Yes indicates that this test item is performed. Clicking No indicates that this test item
is not performed.
Step 6 Optional: Click
to save the configured test plan.
----End
8-6

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
8 Collecting Data
Follow-up Procedure
You can also click
to delete unnecessary test items.
Related References
12.1 Interface Description: Test Plan Control Window
12.9 Parameters for Configuring the Test Items
14.1 Description of Test Items
8.5 Performing a Test Plan

Performing a test plan refers to performing the configured test items of the MS or scanner through
the Probe to collect test data. You can use the Probe to perform indoor tests and outdoor tests.
Before performing a test plan, ensure that external devices are properly connected and test plans
are assigned for the scanner or MS. After the test plan is started, the system carries out the plan
and records the test data. You can monitor the test process in real time during the test.
Context
CAUTION
Before performing the test plan, disable the call waiting function of the test terminal.
8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA)
The APN represents the name of an external network that is connected through packet switched
(PS) domain. The APN is used for initializing the modem port of the MS before a data service
test is performed. Therefore, the APN must be set before a data service test is performed.
8.5.2 Performing an Indoor Test
The indoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals inside buildings. Indoor tests are
classified into horizontal tests and vertical tests. The GPS is not required for locating the test
route indoors. Therefore, the manual dot trace is used for indoor tests. Before performing an
indoor test, you do not need to connect the GPS to the PC.
An outdoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals outside buildings. In an outdoor
test, the GPS is required to locate the test route. Therefore, you need to connect the GPS to the
PC before an outdoor test.
8.5.4 Monitoring the Test
You can check the progress and status of the test items and test plans during the test or the test
replay. This enables you to observe and analyze the test procedure.
8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans
If a test plan is complete or you are about to leave the test car for a long period, you need to stop
the test plan and disconnect the external devices.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

8-7
GENEX Probe
User Guide
8 Collecting Data
8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA)

The APN represents the name of an external network that is connected through packet switched
(PS) domain. The APN is used for initializing the modem port of the MS before a data service
test is performed. Therefore, the APN must be set before a data service test is performed.
Prerequisite
The MS is connected and can be recognized by the Probe. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External
Devices.
Context
The APN can be set by using any of the following methods:
l
Setting the APN in the operating system
Setting the APN in the MS
Setting the APN in the Probe

NOTE
Among the three APN setting methods, settings in the operating system are of the highest priority and
settings in the Probe are of the lowest priority. That is, if an APN is set in the operating system and in the
Probe, settings in the operating system take effect.
Likewise, the maximum uplink and downlink rates set in the operating system have higher priorities than
those set in the Probe. If the APN or the maximum uplink and downlink rates do not work during the test,
check whether they are set in the operating system. If they are not set, the Probe initialize the modem based
on the latest successful setting.
Procedure
l
Set the APN in the operating system.

1.
Right-click My Computer and choose Properties to open the System Properties

dialog box.
2.
On the Hardware tab page, click Device Manager to open the Device Manager
dialog box.
3.
Expand the Modem node and then double-click the modem to be set.
4.
Choose Advanced in the displayed Modem dialog box. Enter the initialized command
in the Extra Initialized Command field.
The format of the initialized command is at+cgdcont=1,"ip","APN".
Here, APN is the access point name. For example, the APN of China Mobile is
cmwap or cmnet.
5.
l
Click OK.
Set the APN in the MS.

For details about how to set the APN in the MS, see the user guide of the corresponding
MS.
Set the APN in the Probe.

In the Probe, to set the APN when configuring the properties of the Dial Up test item,
perform the following steps:
1.
8-8
On the Probe main interface, click
icon to open the Test Plan Control dialog box.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
8 Collecting Data
2.
Click Click here to config and choose the Dial Up test item.
3.
Set the PDP APN property of the Dial Up test item.
----End
8.5.2 Performing an Indoor Test

The indoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals inside buildings. Indoor tests are
classified into horizontal tests and vertical tests. The GPS is not required for locating the test
route indoors. Therefore, the manual dot trace is used for indoor tests. Before performing an
indoor test, you do not need to connect the GPS to the PC.
Context
In horizontal tests, fixed points are selected according to the floor plan of a building. You can
perform a horizontal test according to a predefined test route or according to the test route
controlled manually. In vertical tests, the signal distribution in the vertical direction between
floors is tested.
Procedure
Step 1 On the View tab page in the navigation pane, double-click IndoorMap. The IndoorMap
window is displayed.
Step 2 Optional: Click
to open the indoor test map.
Step 3 Right-click on the map area and choose a type of indoor tests from the shortcut menu.
CAUTION
The automatic horizontal type and manual horizontal type can be selected only when the external
devices are disconnected from the PC. The vertical type can be chosen only when the external
devices are connected to the PC.
l To perform a horizontal test, you need to set the test type to the indoor test, connect external
devices to the PC, and then perform subsequent operations.
l To perform a vertical test, you need to connect external devices to the PC before setting the
test type to the indoor test.
If you need to...
Then...
Start an automatic horizontal test 1. Choose Walking Test > Automatic from the
shortcut menu.
2. Click
to draw the test route.
3. Perform Step 4 through Step 5.

During the test, press the Spacebar. The test data that
is already collected is displayed on the map.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

8-9
GENEX Probe
User Guide
8 Collecting Data
If you need to...
Then...
Start a manual horizontal test
1. Choose Walking Test > Manual from the shortcut

menu.
3. On the toolbar of the IndoorMap window, click
to draw the test route manually.
Start a vertical test
1. Choose Vertical Test from the shortcut menu. The

Floor dialog box is displayed.
2. In the displayed Floor dialog box, click Setting. The
Floor Setting dialog box is displayed.
3. In the Floor Setting displayed dialog box, specify
Min floor, Max floor, and Invalid floor.
4. Click OK to switch to the Floor dialog box.
6. In the Floor dialog box, click
route.
or
to draw a test
to start the test plan.
The Probe automatically displays a message for you to select whether to record logfiles. The
default naming convention of a logfile is Probe_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gen.
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS indicates the current PC time, which is precise to seconds, such as
Probe_20100906135414.gen.
Step 5 Optional: View the test data.
For details, see 10.2 Browsing Data.
----End

An outdoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals outside buildings. In an outdoor
test, the GPS is required to locate the test route. Therefore, you need to connect the GPS to the
PC before an outdoor test.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar to start the test plan.
The Probe automatically displays a message for you to select whether to record logfiles. The
default naming convention of a logfile is Probe_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gen.
Probe_20100906135414.gen.
8-10

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
8 Collecting Data
NOTE
After the test plan is started, the Probe automatically saves a .tab file of which the name is same as the
recorded logfile. The .tab file is used to store GPS information. You can set the attributes of the .tab file
in the Route File Setting area in Other Settings of the System Configure dialog box. For details about
the parameters, see 12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings.
Step 2 Optional: View the test data.

----End

You can check the progress and status of the test items and test plans during the test or the test
replay. This enables you to observe and analyze the test procedure.
Procedure
icon on the toolbar. The Test Plan Control window is displayed.
Step 1 Click the
For details about the parameters in the Test Plan Control window, see 12.10 Parameters for
Monitoring the Test.
Step 2 Monitor the test.
Then ...
If ...
You need to check the status of test items. Check the information about the test item
progress at the bottom of the Test Plan
Control window.
You need to check the statistics of test
plans.
Check the information listed on the Statistic tab

page in the Test Plan Control window.
Step 3 Check the color of the device status indicator in the system status bar to monitor the connection
status of the external devices.
For details about the status bar, see System Status Bar.
NOTE
If an external device is disconnected or the connection is abnormal and the connection cannot be enabled
within 10 seconds, it is recommended that you stop the test, re-connect the external devices, and find and
record the fault causes.
----End
Related References
12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test
8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans

If a test plan is complete or you are about to leave the test car for a long period, you need to stop
the test plan and disconnect the external devices.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

8-11
GENEX Probe
User Guide
8 Collecting Data
Context
Before stopping a test, you need to terminate the call or disconnect the data service of the MS,
stop the test plans, stop recording logfiles, and finally disconnect the external devices. In this
way, the integrity of the recorded data is guaranteed.
Procedure
Step 1 Disconnect the voice or data service interaction with the test terminal.
Step 2 Stop the test plan by clicking
on the toolbar.
Step 3 Stop the logfile recording by clicking
on the toolbar.
Step 4 Disconnect the external devices by clicking
on the toolbar.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After a test plan is stopped, save the logfile properly to avoid data loss.
8-12

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
9 Managing Logfiles
Managing Logfiles
About This Chapter

During tests, test data is saved in .gen files that are called logfiles. This chapter describes how
to record, replay, segment, and export logfiles.
9.1 Recording Logfiles
The logfile recorded during a test is used for replaying the test process or import the related data
into the GENEX Assistant for further analysis. If the logfile recording is performed for an
outdoor test, the Probe will automatically save a .tab file with the same name of the recorded
logfile to store the GPS information.
9.2 Segmenting Logfiles
You can segment logfiles as required. You can record logfiles of different sizes or different
periods in different files for better management. The Probe supports automatic logfile
segmentation and manual logfile segmentation. Automatic logfile segmentation had better be
performed before the logfile is recorded, and manual logfile segmentation should be performed
when the logfile is recorded.
9.3 Replaying Logfiles
The purpose of replaying logfile is to reproduce the drive test process. Replay logfile does not
require the dongle. Before replaying logfile, you can preview the drive test route and the key
events in the map window. During a replay, you can adjust the replay rate and specify the start
point for the replay. You can open only one logfile at a time.
9.4 Exporting Logfiles
This describes how to export logfiles. You can convert a logfile to a binary file, .txt file containing
separators, or an MDM file and convert a PHU file to a logfile for future analysis.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

9-1
GENEX Probe
User Guide
9 Managing Logfiles
9.1 Recording Logfiles

The logfile recorded during a test is used for replaying the test process or import the related data
into the GENEX Assistant for further analysis. If the logfile recording is performed for an
outdoor test, the Probe will automatically save a .tab file with the same name of the recorded
logfile to store the GPS information.
Prerequisite
Context
l
The Probe supports the logfile segmenting, including the automatic segmenting and manual
segmenting. For details, see 9.2 Segmenting Logfiles.
The Probe supports the recording of geographic information about the test location in texts
and automatically saves the information in logfiles for further analysis and problem
location. The geographic information includes the features of buildings and interference
source. This type of text is called filemark.
Procedure
Step 1 Click
to record a logfile.
You can specify the save path and logfile name as prompted.
l The default save path is the same as the setting in the Logfile Setting area on the Other
Settings tab page in the System Configure dialog box.
It is recommended that logfiles are not saved in the system installation disk.
l The default naming convention of a logfile is Probe_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gen.
Probe_20100906135414.gen.
Logfile names must be easy to understand. For example, a logfile can be named as
Probe_20100906135414_FTPDownload.gen.
NOTE
You can also enable the Probe to record logfiles when the test plan is executed. In this case, the Probe
records data of the test terminal in the service state. However, in the case specified in Step 1, the Probe
records data of the test terminal in the idle state.
Step 2 Optional: Insert a filemark.

.
1.
Click
2.
Type the filemark in the Filemark dialog box.

The length of the filemark cannot exceed 30 Chinese characters.
3.
Click OK.
The Probe automatically saves the typed filemark, including the information about the
current time and longitude and altitude of current geographic location, in the logfiles.
----End
9-2

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
9 Managing Logfiles
9.2 Segmenting Logfiles

You can segment logfiles as required. You can record logfiles of different sizes or different
periods in different files for better management. The Probe supports automatic logfile
segmentation and manual logfile segmentation. Automatic logfile segmentation had better be
performed before the logfile is recorded, and manual logfile segmentation should be performed
when the logfile is recorded.
Procedure
l
Automatically segment logfiles.

It is recommended that the logfile size be equal to or more than 10 MB.
NOTE
If a logfile records more than 1048064 data packages, the logfile size is invalid, and the system
automatically segments the logfile.
1.
Choose Configuration > System Configure. The System Configure dialog box is
displayed.
2.
Click
3.
Set the relevant parameters in the Logfile Setting area.
For details about the parameters, see 12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings.
4.
l
Click OK.
Manually segment logfiles.

. Then, the system closes the logfile being recorded and creates a logfile
Click
automatically.
The new logfile is automatically stored to the path where the previous logfile is stored. The
new logfile is named as name of the file before being segmented_N. The value of N is equal
to or greater than 1, indicating the number of segmentation times.
----End
9.3 Replaying Logfiles

The purpose of replaying logfile is to reproduce the drive test process. Replay logfile does not
require the dongle. Before replaying logfile, you can preview the drive test route and the key
events in the map window. During a replay, you can adjust the replay rate and specify the start
point for the replay. You can open only one logfile at a time.
Prerequisite
l
The ongoing test is stopped and the external devices are disconnected.
If you want to preview the drive test route before the replay, the logfile storing the test route
must be available.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

9-3
GENEX Probe
User Guide
9 Managing Logfiles
If you want to preview key events before the replay, the open logfile must contain the
information about key events, and you must set the display mode of the events on the map
in the System Configure dialog box.
Context
The replay rate supported by the Probe ranges from 1/8 to 32 times of the test rate.
Currently, you can preview only the key events and the drive test route that are in the outdoor
test data.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Logfile > Open Logfile or click
on the replay toolbar.
Step 2 Select a logfile in .gen format. Then, click Open.

l Preview Route in Map indicates that you can preview the drive test route in the
OutdoorMap window. If you also select Clear Historical Info, the Probe will clear the test
route in the logfile that is last imported.
l Preview Event in Map indicates that you can preview the key events route in the
OutdoorMap window.
NOTE
You can also select both Preview Route in Map and Preview Event in Map to preview the drive test
route and the key events in the OutdoorMap window.
Step 3 Optional: Search for an event in the logfile and find the location where the event occurs.
. The Find Event dialog box is displayed.
1.
2.
Select a device from the Device drop-down list box and select an event to be searched for
from the Event drop-down list box.
3.
Click Search.
The Probe displays the search result in the Search Result area. If no information is
displayed, you can infer that the logfile does not contain this event.
NOTE
The Probe supports the searching of the filemark event so that the filemark area can be located for
users to analyze the coverage status of the radio network.
4.
In the Search Result area, select the event that you want to locate on the map.
5.
Click Find.
The Probe marks the location where the event occurs with
in the OutdoorMap window.
Step 4 Start the replay.

Choose Logfile > Play or click
on the replay toolbar.
Step 5 Optional: Browse the test data.

----End
9-4

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
9 Managing Logfiles
Follow-up Procedure
You can click the corresponding icons on the replay toolbar to control the replay progress. For
details, see Replay Toolbar.

This describes how to export logfiles. You can convert a logfile to a binary file, .txt file containing
separators, or an MDM file and convert a PHU file to a logfile for future analysis.
Prerequisite
l
The ongoing test is stopped and the external devices are disconnected.
For details, see 8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans.
The ongoing replay is stopped and the logfile is closed.

The procedure is as follows:
on the replay toolbar to stop a replay.
1.
Click
2.
Choose Logfile > Close Logfile to close the logfile.
Context
l
A logfile can be converted to the file in the following formats:

Bin: indicates the binary file.
The extension is .gen. The binary file can be directly imported to the Probe.
CSV: indicates the .txt file containing separators.
The extension is .csv. In the exported .txt file, the test data is separated by separators
such as the comma, semicolon, or colon.
MDM: indicates the Qualcomm file.
The extension is .dlf. The logfile must contain the test data of the Qualcomm test
terminal.
The PHU file contains the data collected by the PHU MS. The extension is .phu.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Logfile > Export Data. The wizard for exporting the test data is displayed.
If you need to ...
Then ...
Convert a logfile to a binary file
Select Bin.
l To export multiple logfiles as a binary file,
select Multi-f.
l To export a logfile as a binary file, clear Multif.
Convert a logfile to a .txt file containing Select Csv.

separators
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

9-5
GENEX Probe
User Guide
9 Managing Logfiles
If you need to ...
Then ...
Convert the messages and events in the Select Csv (Messages_Events).

Logfile to a .txt file containing
separators
Convert a logfile to a Qualcomm file
Select MDM.
Convert a PHU file (.phu file) to a logfile Select PHU.

(.gen file)
Step 2 Click Next to set corresponding parameters.
For details about parameters, see 12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data.
Step 3 Repeat Step 2 until Next in the dialog box is changed to Start.
Step 4 Click Start and wait for data conversion.
Step 5 In the displayed prompt box, click corresponding buttons to complete the data conversion.
If you need to ...
Then ...
Continue to export data
Click Yes.
Exit the wizard for exporting data
Click No.
----End
Related References
12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data
12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of the Scanner
9-6

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
10
Managing View Windows
About This Chapter

This section describes how to view data in view windows and how to configure properties of
view windows. View windows are key windows of the Probe. You can view IEs, events, Layer
2 or Layer 3 messages, and statistical values of indicators in view windows.
10.1 Presentation of IEs and Events
IEs and events are displayed in the Event List window and other IE views of the Probe. In
addition, IEs and events can be presented as symbols and audio signals.
10.2 Browsing Data
The view window is used to display test data. During a test or a replay, you can open the view
window to browse data in the view as required.
10.3 Configuring the View Window
You can customize the view window before a test or a replay. You can also modify the
configuration of the view window during a test or a replay. The configuration of the view window
is temporary and is not saved in projects.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

10-1
GENEX Probe
User Guide
10.1 Presentation of IEs and Events

IEs and events are displayed in the Event List window and other IE views of the Probe. In
addition, IEs and events can be presented as symbols and audio signals.
IEs and events can be presented as:
l
Symbols on a map
For details, see 12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event.
Symbols and vertical lines in line charts

For details, see 12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View.
Audio signals
For details, see 12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications and 12.15
Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event.
10.2 Browsing Data

The view window is used to display test data. During a test or a replay, you can open the view
window to browse data in the view as required.
Prerequisite
l
If you want to browsing data in a view during a test, ensure that external devices are
connected and can be recognized by the Probe so that the open view window can display
data.
For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.
If you want to browse data in a view during a replay, ensure that the replay is ongoing so
that the open view window can display data.
For details, see 9.3 Replaying Logfiles.
Context
The views provided by the Probe consist of the air interface parameter view, data service view,
signaling view, event list view, event statistics view, map view, KPI statistics view, scanner
view, GPS view, line chart view, and information view.
In the Probe, the views are displayed in chart, list, plain text, line chart mode or in chart-and-list
mixed mode. For the description of the view window, see 12.5 Interface Description: Test
Data View.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose View or click the View tab in the navigation pane to display a view window. Then,
browse data in the view window.
Step 2 Optional: Configure the properties of the view window as required.
For details, see 10.3 Configuring the View Window.
----End
10-2

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Related References
12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View
12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View
10.3 Configuring the View Window

You can customize the view window before a test or a replay. You can also modify the
configuration of the view window during a test or a replay. The configuration of the view window
is temporary and is not saved in projects.
10.3.1 Configuring the Line Chart View
The line chart view can display the changes of IEs over time. You can configure two charts in
the line chart view to facilitate the comparison between IEs.
10.3.2 Configuring the List View
The list view displays test data in tables. You can configure the properties of the list view as
required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.
10.3.3 Configuring the Chart View
The chart view displays test data in charts. You can configure the properties of the chart view
as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.
10.3.4 Configuring the Plain Text View
The plain test view displays the basic information about the logfile and the events and statistics
in the logfile in plain texts. You can configure the properties of the plain text view as required
to facilitate data browse and data analysis.

The line chart view can display the changes of IEs over time. You can configure two charts in
the line chart view to facilitate the comparison between IEs.
Context
For the description of the line chart view, see 12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose View > Custom Line Chart.
Step 2 Right-click any area in the Custom Line Chart dialog box, and then choose Properties from
the shortcut menu.
l The Color shortcut menu item is used to configure the color properties of the line chart view.
l The Time shortcut menu item is used to set the amount of that is allowed to be displayed in
the current line chart.
By default, the data within 60 seconds can be displayed. The data within 3600 seconds can
be displayed at most.
Step 3 In the Set Chart Properties dialog box, select the chart to be configured, and then click Edit.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set relevant parameters.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

10-3
GENEX Probe
User Guide
For the description of the parameters, see Parameter of the Modify Chart Properties dialog
box.
Step 5 Click OK. The Set Chart Properties dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Repeat Step 3 through Step 5 until all the required chart properties are configured.
Step 7 In the Set Chart Properties dialog box, click OK.
----End
Related References
12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View

The list view displays test data in tables. You can configure the properties of the list view as
required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.
Prerequisite
The view window to be configured is displayed. For details, see 10.2 Browsing Data.
Context
For the description of the view window, see 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click any area in the list view, and then choose Custom from the shortcut menu. The
ListView Custom Properties dialog box is displayed.
l The Device shortcut menu item is used to display the parameters of different devices.
If no device is added to the current system, the Device shortcut menu item does not provide
any options.
l The SetTitle shortcut menu item is used to change the title of the current list view.
Step 2 Click the Mode tab and Cell Contents tab. Then configure the layout and appearance of the
view window.
For the description of the parameters, see 12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties
of the List Views.
TIP
Select an IE, and then click Edit. Alternatively, double-click an IE. In the IE Information dialog box,
configure IE-related information.
Step 3 After the configuration, click OK.

----End
Related References
12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views
10-4

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide

The chart view displays test data in charts. You can configure the properties of the chart view
as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.
Prerequisite
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click any area in the chart view, and then choose Custom from the shortcut menu. The
ChartView Custom Properties dialog box is displayed.
l The Legend shortcut menu item is used to display the legend of the current chart view.
l The Color shortcut menu item is used to configure the legend properties of the current chart
view.
Step 2 Click the Chart General tab, and then set relevant parameters.
Step 3 After the configuration, click OK.
----End
Related References

The plain test view displays the basic information about the logfile and the events and statistics
in the logfile in plain texts. You can configure the properties of the plain text view as required
to facilitate data browse and data analysis.
Prerequisite
Context
The plain text views provided by the Probe consist of the information view, event list view, and
statistics view. They are used to display the basic information about the logfile, the event
information, and the statistics of events and KPIs in the logfile.
Procedure
l
Configure the properties of the event list view and the statistics view.
1.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Right-click any area in the view, and then choose Event Filter or KPI Filter from
the shortcut menu.
10-5
GENEX Probe
User Guide
The list in the left pane of the event list view or the statistics view displays the events
or KPIs provided by the Probe.
2.
From the list in the left pane of the view, select the event or KPI to be displayed.
3.
Optional: During the test or replay, right-click any area in the view, and then choose
Clear List from the shortcut menu. The displayed events or KPIs are cleared.
Configure the properties of the information view.

1.
Choose View > Information. The Information view window is displayed.

NOTE
l The Log File tab page displays the information related to logfiles.
l The FTP Info tab page displays the information related to FTP upload or download.
l The PHU Info tab page displays the version of the PHU terminal.
You can check the version of the PHU terminal during terminal connecting or data
replaying. When the Probe can not get the version of the PHU terminal, the Unknown
Version will be displayed.
l The IE Audio Indications Info tab page displays the Information Elements (IEs) which
played audio indications.
2.
Right-click any area in the Information view window, and then choose Font from
the shortcut menu. Then, configure the fonts of the texts in the view window.
The Copy menu item is used to copy the texts in the view window to the clipboard of
the Windows. Then, the texts can be pasted to other documents conveniently.
----End
Related References
10-6

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
11
Typical Application
About This Chapter

This section describes typical test methods supported by the Probe.
11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests (GSM/WCDMA)
The voice service is a basic radio network service. The Probe supports speech quality evaluation
tests. The Probe uses the Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) algorithm to evaluate
the speech quality by comparing the speech sample file and the speech result file.
11.2 Forcing Function Tests
The Probe supports forcing function tests in GSM, WCDMA, and LTE modes. The forcing
function test involves the setting of the GSM NV (Nonvolatile) parameter, carrier-to-adjacent
(C/A) measurement, forcing feature test, and frequency scanning.
11.3 IP Analysis
The Probe obtains the raw data packets of data service tests through the WinPcap tool and then
obtains the information about the transport layer protocols and the network layer protocols
through the IP analysis.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

11-1
GENEX Probe
User Guide
11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests (GSM/WCDMA)

The voice service is a basic radio network service. The Probe supports speech quality evaluation
tests. The Probe uses the Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) algorithm to evaluate
the speech quality by comparing the speech sample file and the speech result file.
11.1.1 Synchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test
This section describes the synchronous speech quality evaluation test. One Probe is connected
with two PHU terminals and performs the synchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling
the calling PHU terminal to play speech sample and the called PHU terminal to record result
file so that the MOS is obtained.
11.1.2 Asynchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test
This section describes the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test. Two PHU terminals that
are configured for different Probes call each other. The Probes perform the asynchronous speech
quality evaluation test by enabling the PHU terminals to play and record speech files alternatively
so that the MOS is obtained.
11.1.3 Speech Quality Evaluation Test Between PHU Terminal and PSTN SQE Server
This section describes the speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE
Server. The Probe is configured with a PHU terminal and performs the speech quality evaluation
test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server by enabling the PHU terminal to play voices and
the PSTN SQE Server to record voices or enabling the PSTN SQE Server to play voices and the
PHU terminal to record voices so that the uplink or downlink MOS is obtained.
11.1.1 Synchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test

This section describes the synchronous speech quality evaluation test. One Probe is connected
with two PHU terminals and performs the synchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling
the calling PHU terminal to play speech sample and the called PHU terminal to record result
file so that the MOS is obtained.
Prerequisite
The Probe is configured with two terminals installed with the PHU of
V100R002C01B010SPC120 or a later version.
Context
The PHU terminals supported by the Probe are Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, Huawei U1251,
and Huawei U6100.
Procedure
Step 1 Design the test plan.
Only the test plan for the calling PHU terminal need to be designed.
11-2
1.
icon on the Configuration tab page of the navigation pane to open the Test
Click the
Plan Control window.
2.
On the left pane of the window, click Click here to config to add the Sync SQE(MSMS) test item, and then set the properties of this test item on the Config tab page.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
For details about the properties of the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item, see Sync SQE(MSMS) (GSM/WCDMA).
Step 2 Perform the test plan.
1.
Click the
icon to start the logfile recording.
2.
Click the
icon to start the test plan.
Step 3 View the test data.

Choose View > MOS > Speech Quality Evaluation to view the IEs of the speech quality
evaluation.
Step 4 Optional: End the test plan.
If the test is complete or you are carrying the PHU terminal far away from the test vehicle for a
long time, the test plan needs to be stopped.
1.
Click
on the toolbar to stop the test plan.
2.
Click
on the toolbar to stop the logfile recording.
3.
Click
on the toolbar to disconnect the PHU terminals from the Probe.
----End
11.1.2 Asynchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test

This section describes the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test. Two PHU terminals that
are configured for different Probes call each other. The Probes perform the asynchronous speech
quality evaluation test by enabling the PHU terminals to play and record speech files alternatively
so that the MOS is obtained.
Prerequisite
1.
The Probe is installed on two PCs.
2.
The terminals installed with the same PHU version are configured for the two Probes
separately.
The PHU version is V100R002C01B010SPC120 or a later version.
3.
The PHU terminals quit from the PHU running mode.
Context
and Huawei U6100.
Procedure
Step 1 Design the test plan.
When designing the test plan, you need to design the test plan for the calling PHU terminal
before designing the test plan for the called PHU terminal.
1.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Click the
11-3
GENEX Probe
User Guide
2.
On the left pane of the window, click Click here to config to add the Async SQE(MSMS) test item, and then set the properties of this test item on the Config tab page.
For details about the properties of the Async SQE(MS-MS) test item, see Async SQE(MSMS) (GSM/WCDMA).

When performing the test plan, you need to perform the test plan of the called PHU terminal
before performing the test plan of the calling PHU terminal.
1.
Click the
icon to record the data in a logfile.
2.
Click the

In the two Probes, choose View > MOS > Speech Quality Evaluation to view the IEs of the
speech quality evaluation.
long time, the test plan needs to be stopped. Note that you need to stop the test plan of the calling
PHU terminal first.
1.
Click
2.
Click
3.
Click
on the toolbar to disconnect the PHU terminals from the Probe.
----End
11.1.3 Speech Quality Evaluation Test Between PHU Terminal and

PSTN SQE Server
This section describes the speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE
Server. The Probe is configured with a PHU terminal and performs the speech quality evaluation
test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server by enabling the PHU terminal to play voices and
the PSTN SQE Server to record voices or enabling the PSTN SQE Server to play voices and the
PHU terminal to record voices so that the uplink or downlink MOS is obtained.
Prerequisite
1.
The two PCs are installed with the Probe and the PSTN SQE Server respectively. The
system time of the two PCs is consistent.
2.
The Probe is configured with a PHU terminal.

The PHU version is V100R002C01B010SPC120 or a later version.
3.
The coloring ring back tone (CRBT) services are disabled for the PHU terminal.
Context
In the case of the uplink speech quality evaluation, the PHU terminal is used as the calling MS
and the PSTN SQE Server is used as the called MS. In the case of downlink speech quality
evaluation, the PSTN SQE Server is used as the calling MS and the PHU terminal is used as the
called MS.
11-4

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
and Huawei U6100.
Procedure
Step 1 Design the test plan for the PHU terminal on the Probe:
1.
Click the
2.
On the left pane of the window, click Click here to config to add the SQE(MS-PSTN)
test item, and then set the properties of this test item on the Config tab page.
For details about the properties of the SQE(MS-PSTN) test item, see SQE(MS-PSTN)
(GSM/WCDMA).
Step 2 Perform the following operations on the PSTN SQE Server:

For details, see 14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server.
1.
Configure a voice card.
2.
Configure a speech channel.
3.
Configure the SQE test item.

When performing the test plan, you need to perform the test plan of the calling MS before
performing the test plan of the called MS. This section takes the PHU terminal that is used as
the calling MS and the PSTN SQE Server that is used as the called MS as an example.
1.
2.
Perform the test plan on the Probe.

a.
Click the
icon to start the logfile recording.
b.
Click the
Perform the test plan on the PSTN SQE Server.

Click the
l If you perform the uplink speech quality evaluation, choose View > MOS > Speech Quality
Evaluation to view the uplink MOS.
l If you perform the downlink speech quality evaluation, choose View > Speech/TV to view
the downlink MOS.
long time, the test plan needs to be stopped. Note that you need to stop the test plan of the PHU
terminal before stopping the test plan of the PSTN SQE Server.
This section takes the PHU terminal that is used as the calling MS and the PSTN SQE Server
that is used as the called MS as an example.
1.
End the test plan on the Probe.

a.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Click

11-5
GENEX Probe
User Guide
2.
b.
Click
c.
Click
on the toolbar to disconnect the PHU terminal from the Probe.
End the test plan on the PSTN SQE Server.

Click
----End
11.2 Forcing Function Tests

The Probe supports forcing function tests in GSM, WCDMA, and LTE modes. The forcing
function test involves the setting of the GSM NV (Nonvolatile) parameter, carrier-to-adjacent
(C/A) measurement, forcing feature test, and frequency scanning.
11.2.1 Setting the GSM Nonvolatile Parameters
This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to set Nonvolatile parameters, thus enabling
the terminal to attach to the GPRS or EDGE.
11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A Measurements
This describes how to conduct the GSM C/A measurement. The C/A measurement is used to
check whether the planning of the radio network frequency is reasonable and whether the
adjacent-channel interference occurs on the network. In the GSM, the C/A indicates an amplitude
of the level difference between the serving cell and the cell whose frequency is adjacent to the
frequency of the serving cell.
11.2.3 Conducting GSM Frequency Scanning
This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to perform the frequency scanning test. You
can perform the scanning test in the specified frequency range or band.
11.2.4 Conducting the GSM Forcing Function Test
This describes how to test the forcing functions of the GSM. The forcing functions include the
handover feature, ARFCN control, band control, and cell bar access (CBA) inversion. The
handover features must be performed on the MS in dedicated state. The ARFCN control and
band control must be performed in idle state.
11.2.5 Conducting the WCDMA Forcing Function Test
The WCDMA forcing function involves locking the specified UARFCN and locking scramble
codes. When locking frequencies or scramble codes, the test terminal must be in idle mode.
11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing Function Test
This section describes how to perform the LTE forcing function test. The LTE forcing functions
consist of locking network, frequency band, cells, turning over the cell bar access (CBA), and
locking the transmit power of the PUSCH.
11.2.1 Setting the GSM Nonvolatile Parameters

This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to set Nonvolatile parameters, thus enabling
the terminal to attach to the GPRS or EDGE.
Prerequisite
Test terminals are connected, and the Probe can enable the test terminals. For details, see 7.4
Enabling External Devices.
11-6

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM NV Setting. The GSM Nonvolatile Parameters
Setting dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select a test terminal in the Device Select drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the forcing feature in MS NV Setting.
If ...
Then...
Attach to the GPRS.
Choose GPRS.
Attach to the EDGE.
Choose EDGE.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the test terminal performs the forcing feature test.
Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire MS State. Then, the latest forcing feature status of the test terminal is
displayed in the MS Current State area.
----End

This describes how to conduct the GSM C/A measurement. The C/A measurement is used to
check whether the planning of the radio network frequency is reasonable and whether the
adjacent-channel interference occurs on the network. In the GSM, the C/A indicates an amplitude
of the level difference between the serving cell and the cell whose frequency is adjacent to the
frequency of the serving cell.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM C/A Setting. The GSM C/A Setting dialog box is
displayed.
For details about the parameters related to the GSM C/A Setting dialog box, see 12.24
Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM.
Step 2 Select an MS from the Device Select drop-down list.
Step 3 Select a C/A measurement type from the MS C/A State area.
Objective
Action
Disable the C/A measurement
Choose OFF.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

11-7
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Objective
Action
Calculate the C/A values of the two neighboring

frequencies of the current serving cell
Choose 1 Channel (-1, +1).
Calculate the C/A values of the four neighboring

frequencies of the current serving cell
Choose 2 Channel (+2, +1, -1, -2).
Step 4 Click Apply. The C/A measurement is performed on the MS.

Step 5 Optional: Click Search MS State. The latest C/A state of the MS is displayed in the MS C/A
State area.
Step 6 Optional: Choose View > GSM > Interference > GSM C/A to browse the C/A measurement
data in the displayed GSM C/A window.
l SS: indicates the signal strengths of the four adjacent frequencies of the current serving cell.
The range is -110 to -47 and the unit is dBm.
l C/A, indicates the carrier-to-adjacent. The calculation method is to subtract the adjacentfrequency received signal strength from the received signal strength of the current serving
ARFCN.
----End
Related References
12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM
11.2.3 Conducting GSM Frequency Scanning

This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to perform the frequency scanning test. You
can perform the scanning test in the specified frequency range or band.
Prerequisite
The GSM test terminal is connected. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM Frequency Scan. The GSM Frequency Scan dialog
box is displayed.
Step 2 Select a test terminal in Device Select.
Step 3 Choose the scanning mode.
11-8

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
If ...
Then...
Perform the scanning test in a specified

frequency range.
Choose Specific Scan, and then enter the

frequency value in From and To.
The Probe supports the scanning in the
frequency range 0 to 124, 512 to 885, 512 to
810, or 975 to 1023.
CAUTION
The value of (To - From) must be smaller than 32.
Perform the scanning test when no

frequency range is specified.
Choose Unspecific Scan, and then select the

band to be scanned in Scan Band.
The Probe supports the scanning in the band
GSM 900, DCS 1800, or PCS 1900. You can
select All to scan all bands.
Recover the MS to the non-scanning status. Choose Disable.

Step 4 Click Apply, and then the test terminal performs the scanning test.
Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire Scan State, and then check the scanning status of the test terminal in
the Scan State regional box.
Step 6 Optional: Choose View > GSM > GSM Frequency Scan Result to browse the GSM scanning
data in the GSM Frequency Scan Result view window.
l ARFCN: Indicates the scanned frequency, which ranges from 0 to 1023.
GSM 900 MHz: 0 to 124 and 975 to 1023
DCS 1800 MHz: 512 to 885
PCS 1900 MHz: 515 to 810
l RxLev: Indicates the received signal level, which ranges from -110 to -47 (Unit: dBm).
l BSIC: Indicates the base station identity code, which ranges from 00 to 77.
l BAND: Indicates the scanned band. The value can be set to GSM 900 MHz, DCS 1800 MHz,
or PCS 1900 (Unit: MHz).
----End

This describes how to test the forcing functions of the GSM. The forcing functions include the
handover feature, ARFCN control, band control, and cell bar access (CBA) inversion. The
handover features must be performed on the MS in dedicated state. The ARFCN control and
band control must be performed in idle state.
Prerequisite
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

11-9
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Context
l
Handover feature
The handover feature consists of forcing handover and forbid handover. The forcing
handover is used to check whether the neighboring relation between cells is added properly.
The forbid handover is used to measure the coverage range of the newly constructed site.
The forcing handover and forbid handover are independent of each other.
If the forbid handover is successfully performed, the MS in dedicated state is not
switched until the MS is disconnected from the network.
If the forcing handover is successfully performed and the neighboring relation between
the serving cell and the neighboring cells is normal, the MS can be switched to the
destination cell other than the non-destination cell.
ARFCN control and band control

After the ARFCN is controlled in idle state, the system automatically prohibits the handover
if the MS originates a call. In such a case, the MS remains on the destination ARFCN. After
the band is controlled in idle state, the band is controlled in dedicated state. In such a case,
the system filters the neighboring cells of the non-destination band.
CBA inversion
The CBA is a parameter set by the BSC in the GSM system and is used to control the access
of a cell. When the cell is under construction, the value of the CBA cannot be accessed by
common users. During this time, the MS can access the cell to verify the functions of the
newly-constructed cell through the CBA inversion function.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM Forcing Feature. The GSM Forcing Feature dialog
box is displayed.
For details about the parameters related to the GSM Forcing Feature dialog box, see 12.21
Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM.
Step 2 Select an MS from the Device drop-down list.
The ARFCNs of the current serving cell of the selected MS are displayed in Serving ARFCN.
Step 3 Choose the forcing feature.
If You Need To ...
Then ...
Perform the forcing handover
1. Select Forcing Function.

2. Select Force HO (Dedicated) from the
Function Select area.
3. Select Input ARFCN from the Target
ARFCN Setting area. Then, enter the ARFCN
in Target ARFCN or select Select Neighbor
to select the ARFCN of a neighboring cell.
Perform the forbid handover

2. Select Forbid HO (Dedicated) from the
11-10

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
If You Need To ...
Then ...
Control a band
1. Select Band Control.

2. Select a band from the Band Setting area.
Control the specified ARFCN

2. Select Lock Specific ARFCN (Idle) from the
3. Select Input ARFCN from the Target
ARFCN Setting area. Then, enter the ARFCN
in Target ARFCN or select Select Neighbor
to select the ARFCN of a neighboring cell.
Control the ARFCN of the serving cell 1. Select Forcing Function.

2. Select Lock Serving ARFCN (Idle) from the
Invert the CBA

2. Select CBA Invert from the Function Select
area.
NOTE
l For the forcing handover, if the entered or selected ARFCN is not the ARFCN of a neighboring cell,
the forcing handover fails.
l If the specified ARFCN or the ARFCN of a serving cell is controlled successfully, the cell reselection
is not performed on the MS in idle state until the MS is in non-dedicated state.
Step 4 Click Apply. The forcing feature is performed on the MS.

Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire MS State. The latest forcing feature state of the MS is displayed in
the MS Current State area.
----End
Related References
12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM

The WCDMA forcing function involves locking the specified UARFCN and locking scramble
codes. When locking frequencies or scramble codes, the test terminal must be in idle mode.
Prerequisite
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

11-11
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Context
After the UARFCN is locked successfully, the test terminal can perform cell reselection or cell
handover only in the cell that uses the locked UARFCN. The cell reselection or cell handover
cannot be performed in the cell that spans UARFCN.
When a scrambling code is locked, the corresponding UARFCN needs to be locked at the same
time. After the scrambling code is locked successfully, the test terminal is not allowed to perform
cell reselection or cell handover.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > WCDMA Forcing Feature. The WCDMA Forcing
Feature dialog box is displayed.
For details about the parameters, see 12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test.
Step 2 Select a test terminal in the Device Select drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the forcing feature.
If ...
Then ...
Lock the specified UARFCN 1. Choose Lock ARFCN.

2. Enter a UARFCN that exists on the current network in the
Target ARFCN area.
If the entered UARFCN does not exist on or covered by
the current network, the UARFCN cannot be locked.
Lock the scrambling code
1. Choose Lock ARFCN&PSC.

2. Select the mode for obtaining a scrambling code.
l If you choose Select PSC, select a scrambling code
among the scrambling codes under the current
UARFCN.
l If you choose Input PSC, enter a UARFCN that exists
on the current network in the Target ARFCN area, and
then enter the scrambling code in the Input PSC text
box.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the test terminal performs the forcing feature test.
You can click Default to recover the terminal status.
Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire UE State. Then, the latest forcing feature status of the test terminal is
displayed in the UE Current State area.
----End
Related References
12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test
11-12

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide

This section describes how to perform the LTE forcing function test. The LTE forcing functions
consist of locking network, frequency band, cells, turning over the cell bar access (CBA), and
locking the transmit power of the PUSCH.
Prerequisite
The Probe is connected with UEs, and the UEs can be enabled by the Probe. For details, see 7.4
Context
l
Locking the network

According to the mobile country code (MCC) and mobile network code (MNC), the UE
camps on a specific PLMN after the network is locked.
Locking EARFCN and band

After the EARFCN is locked in idle state, the system automatically prohibits the handover
if the UE originates a call. In such a case, the UE remains on the destination EARFCN.
After the band is locked in idle state, the band is locked in dedicated state. In such a case,
the system filters the neighboring cells of the non-destination band.
Locking a cell
According to the EARFCN and physical cell identity (PCI), the UE camps on a specific
serving cell after a cell is locked.
Turning over the CBA

The CBA is a parameter configured for the LTE system to control whether the UE is allowed
to access a cell. When the cell is under construction, the CBA value indicates that the
common subscriber cannot access the cell. In this case, the UE can access this cell through
the CBA turn-over function to verify the functions of this cell.
Locking the transmit power of the PUSCH

According to the transmit power of the PUSCH within the specified range, perform the
related operations. Then, the UE uses the constant transmit power to transmit signals and
the power control function does not take effect. In this case, the cell performance can be
evaluated.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > LTE Forcing Feature. The LTE Forcing Feature dialog
box is displayed.
For details about the parameters in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box, see 12.21 Parameters
for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM.
Step 2 Select a UE from the Device drop-down list.
The EARFCN of the serving cell that the UE camps on is displayed in Serving ARFCN. The
PCI of the serving cell is displayed in Serving PCI.
Step 3 Select the forcing feature.
For details about the parameters, see 12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature
Test.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

11-13
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the UE performs the forcing feature test.
The latest forcing feature status of the UE is displayed in the MS Current State area.
Click Reset. Then, the UE status is recovered.
----End
Related References
12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature Test
11.3 IP Analysis
The Probe obtains the raw data packets of data service tests through the WinPcap tool and then
obtains the information about the transport layer protocols and the network layer protocols
through the IP analysis.
Prerequisite
l
The WinPcap tool is already installed on the PC.
The Network Monitor Driver protocol components are already installed.

If the Network Monitor Driver protocol components are not installed, the network
protocol analysis cannot be performed.
The method for installing the Network Monitor Driver protocol components is as follows:
1.
Right-click Local Area Connection and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
2.
Choose Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) on the General tab page. Then, click Install.
3.
Double-click Protocol in the Select Network Component Type dialog box.
4.
Select Network Monitor Driver in the Select Network Protocol dialog box.
5.
Click OK. The installation is complete.
The test plan related to the data services is already configured on the Probe. For details,
see 8.4 Designing Test Plans.
Context
The Probe supports the analysis of the following network protocols:
l
Transport layer protocols: Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and User Datagram
Protocol (UDP)
Network layer protocols: Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) and Internet Protocol version
6 (IPv6)
The Probe disables the IP analysis function by default.
Procedure
Step 1 Enable the IP analysis function.
1.
11-14
Choose Configuration > System Configure. The System Configure dialog box is
displayed.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
2.
Click
. The IP Settings dialog box is displayed.
3.
Select On in Packet Capture to enable the IP analysis function.

Off indicates that the IP analysis function is disabled.
4.
Click OK.
Step 2 Execute the configured test plan.

For details, see 8.5 Performing a Test Plan.
Step 3 View the information about the protocols used by data packets.
Choose View > Message > IP Messages.
l Time: indicates the time for reporting data packets.
l Source: indicates the source IP address.
l Destination: indicates the destination IP address.
l Protocol: indicates the used protocols.
l Info: indicates the information about data packets.
----End
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

11-15
GENEX Probe
User Guide
12
Interface Reference of the Probe
About This Chapter

This describes the interface and parameters of the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when
you collect, view, and replay the data through the Probe.
This describes the Test Plan Control window and helps you understand the window component,
the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon.
12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter management Window
This describes the Engineering Parameter management window and helps you understand
the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon.
This describes the OutdoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the
function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon.
This describes the IndoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the
This describes the test data view. You can learn the mode in which the Probe displays the data.
This describes the Line Chart window and helps you understand the window components, the
This section describes the parameters for configuring external devices. You can refer to this
section when configuring parameters for a test terminal, a GPS, or a scanner.
This describes the parameters for filtering the original data in the Filter dialog box. You can
refer to these parameters when you configure whether to report or collect the signaling on a test
terminal.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

12-1
GENEX Probe
User Guide
This describes the parameters for configuring the test items and attributes of the MS and scanner.
You can refer to these parameters when you configure the MS or scanner test plan in the Test
This describes the parameters for monitoring the test. During the test or replay, you can refer to
these parameters when you query the status and statistics value of each test item in the test plan
in the Test Plan Control window.
This describes the parameters for importing the engineering parameters. You can refer to these
parameters when you import the engineering parameters.
This describes the parameters for importing the outdoor raster map. You can refer to these
parameters when you import the outdoor raster map or add the outdoor raster map.
This describes the parameters for configuring the legend properties of the IE layer and layer
offset properties. You can refer to the description when configuring the legend properties of the
IE layer in the Layer Parameter dialog box or configuring the layer offset properties in the
Layer Offset dialog box.
12.14 Parameters for Configuring the Layer Control Properties
This describes the parameters for configuring the layer control properties, such as layer display
properties and layer label properties. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the
layer display properties in the Layer Control dialog box.
12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event
This describes the proprieties of the predefined event. You can refer to these parameters when
you set the properties of the predefined event in the System Configure dialog box.
This describes the parameters for configuring the device alarm. You can refer to these parameters
when you configure the device alarm in the System Configure dialog box.
12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications
This describes the parameters about setting audio indications for IEs. You can set related
parameters according to the following information when configuring audio indications for IEs.
12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings
This describes the parameters related to other system settings. You can refer to this part when
synchronizing the external device time, setting logfile storage properties, or setting event replay
mode.
This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the list view. You can refer to
the description when configuring the properties of the list view.
12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View
This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the line chart view. You can refer
to these parameters when you configure the properties of the line chart view.
This describes the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM. You can refer to this
part when setting the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM in the GSM Forcing
Feature dialog box.
12-2

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
This describes the parameters related to the WCDMA forcing feature test. You can refer to this
part when setting WCDMA forcing feature test parameters in the WCDMA Forcing Feature
dialog box.
This section describes the parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test. You can set
parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box by
referring to this section.
12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM
This describes the parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM. You can refer
to this part when setting parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM in the
GSM C/A Setting dialog box.
This describes the parameters for exporting data. You can refer to this part when converting
a .gen file to the file in other formats or converting a .phu file to a .gen file.
12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of the Scanner
This describes the parameters for configuring the export format of the CW data of the PCTel
DTI scanner. You can refer to this part when exporting the CW data of the PCTel DTI scanner.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

12-3
GENEX Probe
User Guide

This describes the Test Plan Control window and helps you understand the window component,
the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon.
Figure 12-1 shows the Test Plan Control window and Table 12-1 provides the description of
the Figure 12-1.
Figure 12-1 Test Plan Control window
Table 12-1 Description of the Test Plan Control window
12-4
No.
Name
Description
Toolbar for Controlling the

Test Plan
Provides the shortcut icon for editing the test

item and controlling the test plan.
Test item list
Provides the default test item. You can select the

test item according to requirements.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
No.
Name
Description
Attribute and statistics value

list
Contains the Config and Statistic tab pages.

l Config tab page: You can set the properties
of each test item.
l Statistic tab page: Displays the statistics
value of the test item that is performed. For
detailed description of the parameters, see
12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the
Test.
List of the test item that is

performed
Displays the test item that is performed.
Toolbar for Controlling the Test Plan

You can edit the test item and control the test plan by clicking the corresponding icons. Table
12-2 shows the toolbar.
Table 12-2 Description of the Test Plan Control window toolbar
Icon
Name
Description
Importing the test plan
Enables you to open a configured

test plan (in .xml format).
Exporting the test plan
Enables you to save a configured test

plan (in .xml format).
Starting the test plan
Enables you to start performing the

test item configured in the test plan.
Stopping the test plan
Enables you to stop all the test items

that are being performed.
Moving the test item

upward
Enables you to move the selected

test item upward.
Moving the test item

downward
Enables you to move the selected

test item downward.
Deleting
Enables you to delete the selected

test item.
Related Tasks
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

12-5
GENEX Probe
User Guide
12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter

management Window
This describes the Engineering Parameter management window and helps you understand
the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon.
Figure 12-2 shows the Engineering Parameter management window. Table 12-3 provides
the description of the Figure 12-2.
Figure 12-2 Engineering Parameter management window
Table 12-3 Description of the Engineering Parameter management window
12-6
No.
Name
Description
Engineering Parameter
toolbar
Provides shortcut icons for importing, exporting,

adding, and deleting a row.
Field name of the

engineering parameter
Displays the field name of the engineering

parameter.
Engineering parameter list
Displays the value corresponding to each field

name of the engineering parameter.
Status bar of the engineering

parameter
Displays the network protocol corresponding to

the imported engineering parameter.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Engineering Parameter Toolbar

The engineering parameter toolbar is in the upper areal of the Engineering Parameter
management window. The icon description is provided in Table 12-4.
Table 12-4 Toolbar description of the Engineering Parameter management window
Icon
Name
Description
Importing the
Enables you to import the

engineering parameter. You can
click the icon to open the Select
File dialog box. For detailed
description about the parameter, see
12.11 Parameters for Importing
the Engineering Parameters.
Exporting the
Enables you to export the

engineering parameter. After you
click the icon, the xls or xlsx file is
opened automatically. If the
engineering parameters of multiple
network protocols exist, the xls or
xlsx file contains multiple sheets
whose names are corresponding to
the network protocols displayed in
the status bar of the Engineering
Parameter management dialog
box.
Application
Enables you to make the editing

operation to take effect. You can
click the icon to apply the editing
result to the file of the current
engineer parameter.
Adding a row
Enables you to add a row in the sheet.

You can click the icon to add a row
in the engineer parameter sheet.
Checking the templates

of engineering
parameters
Enables you to view engineering

parameter templates of different
networks in the default path provided
by the Probe. You can modify the
format of the current engineering
parameter table based on the project
reference template to ensure that the
format of the engineering parameter
table meets the requirements of the
Probe.
The default path is as follows:
Software Installation Directory
\Template\Engineering
Parameters.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

12-7
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Icon
Name
Description
Deleting a row
Enables you to delete a row. You can

click the icon to delete a row where
the selected engineer parameter is
located.
Related Tasks

This describes the OutdoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the
Figure 12-3 shows the OutdoorMap window. Table 12-5 provides the description of the Figure
12-3.
Figure 12-3 OutdoorMap window
12-8

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Table 12-5 Description of the OutdoorMap window

No.
Name
Description
Outdoor map toolbar
Provides the shortcut icons for common outdoor map

operations.
Displaying area of the

outdoor map
Displays the outdoor map imported, event occurred, and

drive test route.
Map Layers window
Indicates the layer management window that provides

the operation entry for the layer management of the
device layer and air interface parameters.
Outdoor map status bar
Displays the longitude and latitude of the current

position and distance of the test points on the map.
Outdoor Map Toolbar

The OutdoorMap window provides the entry for common outdoor map operations. You can
open the related window or perform related operations by clicking certain icons. For the
description of the toolbar, see Table 12-6.
Table 12-6 Description of the OutdoorMap window toolbar
Icon
Map Shortcut Menu
Name
Description
Opening the
MapInfo map
Enables you to open the

MapInfo map. The
extension is .tab or .gst.
Saving a map
Enables you to save the

map to a .gst file.
Opening the
raster map
Enables you to open the

raster map. The extension
is .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif,
or .png.
Layer Control
Layer control
Enables you to manage

layers or change
displaying or labeling
properties. For details, see
5.4 Configuring Layer
Properties.
Changes are only
temporary and cannot be
saved in the project.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

12-9
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Icon
Map Shortcut Menu
Name
Description
Cell search
Searches for the

information about a
specified cell on the map.
Currently, only the GSM
and WCDMA network
systems are supported.
Search results are valid
only engineering
parameters are used.
12-10
Tools > Zoom In
Zooming in
Enables you to enlarge a

portion of the map to view
it in more detail.
Tools > Zoom Out
Zooming out
Enables you to view a

larger area than the current
map view.
Tools > Zoom
Zooming in or
out
Enables you to zoom in or

out in an area on the map.
Clicking the map and then
dragging the mouse
rightward indicates
zooming in on the map;
clicking the map and then
dragging the mouse
leftward indicates
zooming out on the map.
Tools > Pan
Moving the
map
Enables you to move the

map. You can click the
map and hold down the
mouse to move the map.
Tools > Center
Center map
Enables you to set any

point on the map as the
center. You can click the
icon and then click a spot
on the map. The map is
centered around the spot.
Tools > Center
Selection tool
Enables you to select the

object contained in the
current layer. You can
select multiple objects by
holding down Ctrl.
Tools > Rectangle

Select
Rectangle
selection tool
Enables you to select all

the objects in a rectangle.
You can click the map and
move the mouse to form a
rectangle area.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Icon
Map Shortcut Menu
Name
Description
Tools > Distance
Ruler
Enables you to measure the

distance between two
points on the map. You can
click a point on the map as
the starting point and drag
the mouse to any direction.
The system displays the
distance from the starting
point to the point where the
mouse stops on the status
bar at the bottom of the
outdoor map window.
Entire Map
Viewing
Enables you to view the

map. You can open the
Zoom to dialog box to
selectively zoom out the
selected layer.
Tools > Arrow
Arrow tool
Displays a position in the

map. You can move the
mouse to the position
where you are interested
in. Then, the name of the
position is displayed.
Drawing a grid
Displays the grid and

legend of a map.
Label
Enables you to label the

engineering parameters on
the map.
Clearing the
map
Enables you to clear the IE

or track information in the
current map layer. The cell
site information is not
cleared.
Map Layers Window

The Map Layers window is in the right pane of the OutdoorMap window. You can right-click
the map and choose Layer Bar to configure whether to display the Map Layers window.
Figure 12-4 shows the Map Layers window and Table 12-7 provides the description of Figure
12-4.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

12-11
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Figure 12-4 Map Layers window
Table 12-7 Description of the Map Layers window
12-12
No.
Name
Layer
toolbar
Icon
Map Shortcut
Menu
Description
Add Layer
Enables you to add

the air interface
parameter layer.
You can click the
icon to open the
Add Layer dialog
box to add the air
interface parameter
layer.
Remove Layer
Enables you to
remove a selected
layer. After you
click the icon, the
layer node in the
Map Layers
window is deleted.
In addition, the data
that displays the
layer on the map is
deleted.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
No.
Name
Icon
Map Shortcut
Menu
Description
Edit Layer
Enables you to edit

the layer properties.
You can click the
icon to open the
Layer Parameter
dialog box to edit
the layer properties.
For details, see 5.5
Configuring
Legend
Properties.
Area of
editing the
layer
Enables you to edit

the added layer.
Related Tasks

This describes the IndoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the
Figure 12-5 shows the IndoorMap window. Table 12-8 provides the description of the Figure
12-5.
Figure 12-5 IndoorMap window
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

12-13
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Table 12-8 Description of the IndoorMap window

No.
Name
Description
Indoor map toolbar
Provides the shortcut icons for common

indoor map operations.
Displaying the display area of the

indoor map
Displays the indoor map imported, event

occurred, and drive test route.
Map Layers window
Indicates the layer management window that

provides the operation entry for the layer
management of air interface parameters.
Indoor Map Toolbar

The IndoorMap window provides the entry for common map operations. You can open the
related window or perform related operations by click certain icons. For the detailed description
of the toolbar, see Table 12-9.
Table 12-9 Description of the IndoorMap window toolbar
Icon
12-14
Map Shortcut Menu
Name
Description
Opening the raster

map
Enables you to open the grid

map (the extension is .tif
or .bmp.)
Localizer
Locating the point

manually
Zoom In
Zooming in
Enables you to zoom in on

the map.
Zoom Out
Zooming out
Enables you to zoom out on

the map.
Pan
Zooming in or out
Enables you to zoom in or

out in an area on the map.
Clicking the map and then
dragging the mouse
rightward indicates
zooming in on the map;
clicking the map and then
dragging the mouse
rightward indicates
zooming out on the map.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Icon
Map Shortcut Menu
Name
Description
Arrow
Arrow tool
Displays a position in the

map. You can move the
mouse to the position where
you are interested in, and
then the name of the
position is displayed.
Viewing
Enables you to selectively

zoom out the selected layer.
Undo
Undoing the last

operation
Enables you to cancel the

previous operations of
locating the points.
This tool is enabled to the
drive test mode.
Clearing the map
Enables you to clear the IE

or track information in the
current map layer.
During a horizontal test, the
IE information and track
information can be cleared
when the tracks of points are
controlled manually. When
the tracks of points are
controlled automatically,
that is, the test is performed
according to the predefined
tracks, only IE information
is cleared, and the track
information is not cleared.
Map Layers Window

The Map Layers window is in the right pane of IndoorMap. You can right-click the map and
choose Layer Bar to configure whether to display the window.
Figure 12-6 shows the Map Layers window. Table 12-10 provides the description of the Figure
12-6.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

12-15
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Figure 12-6 Map Layers window
Table 12-10 Description of the Map Layers window

No.
Name
Layer toolbar
Icon
Description
Enables you to add the air
interface parameter layer.
Enables you to delete the layer.
After you click the icon, the layer
node in the Map Layers window
is deleted. In addition, the data
that displays the layer on the map
is deleted. You can click the
icon to add the layer that is
deleted.
Enables you to edit the layer
properties. You can click the icon
to open the Layer Parameter
dialog box to edit the layer
properties.
For details, see5.5 Configuring
Legend Properties.
Area of
editing the
layer
Displays the name of the layer

that is added and configures
whether to display the layer on the
map.
Related Tasks
12-16

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide

This describes the test data view. You can learn the mode in which the Probe displays the data.
Figure 12-7 shows the test data view of the Probe. Table 12-11 shows the description of Figure
12-7.
NOTE
Take the BA List, Radio Parameter, Information, and Power views as examples.
Figure 12-7 Interface of the test data view
Table 12-11 Description of the test data view
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
View Name
View Type
Description
BA List view
List view
Displays test data in tables.
Power view
Chart view
Displays test data in charts.
Radio Parameter view
Mixed view
Displays the changed value of each

parameter directly by using the
combination chart and list view.

12-17
GENEX Probe
User Guide
View Name
View Type
Description
Information view
Plain text view
Displays the basic information about the

logfile, the event information, and the
statistics of events and KPIs in the
logfile.
Related Tasks
10.2 Browsing Data

This describes the Line Chart window and helps you understand the window components, the
Figure 12-8 shows the Line Chart window. Table 12-12 provides the description of the Figure
12-8.
Figure 12-8 Line Chart window
12-18

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Table 12-12 Description of the Line Chart window

No.
Name
Description
Chart display
area
Displays the IE information of each chart in a line chart or

bar chart.
Axis display area
Displays the value range and color of the selected IE in the

axes of each chart. You can change the properties of the IE
through the shortcut menu in the view window. For the
description of the shortcut menu, see 12.20 Parameters for
Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View.
Scroll bar of the

chart display
area
l If you click , the scroll bar moves leftwards by one

second, and the data presented one second ago is
displayed in the view.
l If you click , the scroll bar moves rightwards by one
second, and the data presented one second later is
displayed in the view.
and , the scroll
l If you click the blank area between
bar moves leftwards by one page, and the data presented
60 seconds ago is displayed in the view.
l If you click the blank area between and , the scroll
bar moves rightwards by one page, and the data presented
60 seconds later is displayed in the view.
l If you click Lock, the system status is changed to
UnLock. In this case, you can drag to check the data
of the specific position. If you click UnLock again, the
system status is changed to Lock. The Probe resumes the
test or replay.
Legend area
Legend of an IE. You can double-click the name of an IE to

change its properties.
Text display area
IE information displayed in text format, which consists of

the IE name, value, and the name of the corresponding
terminal.
Related Tasks
10.2 Browsing Data

This section describes the parameters for configuring external devices. You can refer to this
section when configuring parameters for a test terminal, a GPS, or a scanner.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

12-19
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameters in the Device Configure Window

Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of the added device.
Model
Indicates the model of the added device.
COMPort
Indicates the COM port of the added device.
ModemPort
Indicates the modem port number of the added device.

If Modem port is not configured in the Device Configure dialog
box, Not Configure is displayed.
State
Indicates the current state of the added device.

l Down: The device is added but not connected.
l Searching: The system is searching for the port corresponding
to the device.
l Disconnect: The device is disconnected.
l Connected: The device is connected.
Common Parameters for Configuring External Devices

Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of the external device. The system names the
added device automatically and displays the name.
Type
Indicates device types. The options are as follows:

l MS
l GPS
l Scanner
Model
Indicates the model of the external device. For the type and
specifications of the external devices that are supported by the
Probe, see 7.1 Connectable External Devices.
Parameters for Configuring GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA Test Terminals
12-20
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of the currently added test terminal.
Type
Indicates the type of the currently added device: MS.
Model
Indicates the actual model of the MS. For the models of the test
terminals that are supported by the Probe, see Test Terminal.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Baud rate
Indicates the baud rate of the MS. It must be the same as the actual
setting of the MS. The options are 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
38400, 56000, 57600, 115200, 128000, 230400, 256000, 460800,
and 921600.
COM port
Indicates the actual COM port used by the MS after the MS is

connected to the PC.
You can view the actual port number of the MS under the Ports
(COM & LPT) node in the Device Manager window.
Modem port
Indicates the actual modem port used by the MS after the MS is

In the Device Manager window, right-click the corresponding
device under the Modem node, and then select Properties. You
can view the actual modem port number on the Modem tab page.
If you want to perform a data service test or send AT commands,
Modem port must be set. In other cases, Modem port need not
be set.
Adjust antenna
Indicates the antenna gain of the MS. Only the GSM and WCDMA
modes are supported.
You can select either of the following values:
l Disable: not set the antenna gain of the MS.
l Enable: set the antenna gain of the MS.
If you select Enable, you can set the antenna gain in the
displayed UE External Antenna Setting dialog box. The value
ranges from 1 to 100 and can be a decimal.
The default value is Disable.
CAUTION
For the MS to which an external antenna is connected, you can set the
antenna gain as required.
For the MS to which an external antenna is not connected, if you set the
antenna gain, the accuracy of counters such as the Received Signal Strength
Indicator (RSSI), Received Signal Level (RxLev), or Received Signal Code
Power (RSCP) may be affected. Therefore, you are advised to select
Disable.
Parameters for Configuring the WiMAX Test Terminal
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of the currently added MS.
Type
Model
Indicates the model of the WiMAX test terminal. For the models
of the test terminals that are supported by the Probe, see Test
Terminal.

12-21
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
TE
Indicates the terminal that is connected to the PC.

l WiMAX_GCT: Four GCT terminals can be configured.
l WiMAX_Runcom: Only one terminal can be configured.
Card Index
Indicates the index of the terminal. The system allocates one index
according to the selected TE. The index is allocated from 1.
Parameters for Configuring the LTE Test Terminal

Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of the currently added MS.
Type
Model
Indicates the model of the LTE test terminal. For the models of the
test terminals that are supported by the Probe, see Test Terminal.
OMAGENT IP address
Indicates the IP address of a PC that is connected to an LTE UE

1.X terminal. For LTE UE 2.0 terminals, this parameter is not
required.
OMAGENT port
Indicates the port corresponding to OMAGENT IP address. You

need not set this parameter manually. The default value, 3000, is
recommended.
UE IP address
Query the IP address of the host through the HyperTerminal

provided by the Windows operating system.
For details, see 13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?.
UE port
Indicates the port corresponding to UE IP address. You do not

need to set this parameter manually. The default value, 5000, is
recommended.
Parameters for Configuring the GPS
12-22
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of the currently added GPS.
Type
Indicates the type of the currently added device: GPS.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Model
Indicates the protocol used for the communication with the

configured GPS. You can select NMEA or TEXT. NMEA is the
GPS protocol that is used internationally. TEXT is the protocol
provided by GARMIN, and only support the GPS of the GARMIN
series such as 12XL and Vista.
NOTE
If you select TEXT, you need to change the default output format of the
GPS to TEXT.
For the GPS models supported by the Probe, see GPS.

Baud rate
Indicates the baud rate of the GPS. The options are 4800, 9600,
14400, 19200, 38400, 56000, 57600, 115200, 128000, 230400,
256000, 460800, and 921600.
COM port
Indicates the actual COM port used by a GPS after the GPS is
You can view the actual port number of the GPS under the Ports
Parameters for Configuring Scanners

Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of the currently added scanner.
Type
Indicates the type of the currently added device: Scanner.
Model
Indicates the model of a scanner. Note that PCTEL EX scanners

support multi-mode tests and multi-band tests.
For the scanner models supported by the Probe, see Scanner.
COM port
Indicates the actual COM port used by the scanner after the scanner
is connected to the PC.
You can view the actual port number of the scanner under the Ports
Protocol
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Indicates the protocol that is supported by the connected scanner.

12-23
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Band
Indicates the frequency band that is supported by the connected

scanner.
l GSM
GSM850 (869 MHz to 894 MHz), E-GSM (925 MHz to 960
MHz), DCS1800 (1805 MHz to 1880 MHz), and PCS 1900
(1930 MHz to 1990 MHz).
l WCDMA
Band I DL (2110.0 MHz to 2170.0 MHz), Band I UL (1920.0
MHz to 1980.0 MHz), Band II (1930.0 MHz to 1990.0
MHz), Band III (1805.0 MHz to 1880.0 MHz), Band IV
(2110.0 MHz to 2155.0 MHz), Band V (869.0 MHz to 894.0
MHz), and Band VIII (925.0 MHz to 960.0 MHz).
l CDMA
Band 0 (869.61 MHz to 893.40 MHz), Band 0 (860.64 MHz
to 874.38 MHz), Band 1 (1930.65 MHz to 1989.35 MHz),
Band 3 (860.6375 MHz to 869.3625 MHz), and BAND 5
(461.95 MHz to 466.85 MHz).
l WiMAX
2.5 GHz (2498.50 MHz to 2687.50 MHz) and 3.5 GHz
(3402.50 MHz to 3597.50 MHz).
Instance
Indicates the interface number that is used by the scanner of the

Anritsu ML874X series (for example, ML8740 or ML8742) after
the scanner is connected to the PC. You need to select an interface
number that is not used by another scanner.
If the scanner of the Anritsu ML874X series is not connected to the
PC, select Not Configure.
1394
Indicates the interface number that is used by the scanner of the

Rohde & Schwarz TSMX series after the scanner is connected to
the PC. You need to select an interface number that is not used by
another scanner.
If only one TSMX scanner is connected, select 1. If the scanner of
the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX series is not connected to the PC,
select Not Configure.
12-24

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Adjust antenna
Indicates the antenna gain of the scanner. Only the scanners of the
PCTel SeeGull LX series and the EX series are supported.
You can select either of the following values:
l Disable: not set the antenna gain of the scanner.
l Enable: set the antenna gain of the scanner.
If you select Enable, you can set the antenna gain in the
displayed Scanner External Antenna Setting dialog box. The
Probe may automatically compensate the antenna or cable loss
of the scanner.
CAUTION
For the scanner to which an external antenna is connected, you can set the
antenna gain as required.
For the scanner to which an external antenna is not connected, if you set the
antenna gain, the accuracy of indicators such as the RSSI, RxLev, or RSCP
may be affected. Therefore, you are advised to select Disable.
Related Tasks

This describes the parameters for filtering the original data in the Filter dialog box. You can
refer to these parameters when you configure whether to report or collect the signaling on a test
terminal.
Parameter
Description
LogCode
Displays the name of the data package.
Select
Indicates that whether the test terminal reports the data package.
Filter
Indicates the mode that the Probe adopts to collect data packages:
l No Filter: The Probe collects all the data packages reported by
the terminal.
l By Periods: The Probe collects the data packages reported by
the terminal periodically.
l All Filter: The Probe does not collect the data packages reported
by the terminal.
Interval
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Indicates the sampling interval. The Probe collects data packets at

the sampling intervals set here. Redundant data packets are
discarded.

12-25
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Related Tasks

This describes the parameters for configuring the test items and attributes of the MS and scanner.
You can refer to these parameters when you configure the MS or scanner test plan in the Test
Parameter
Description
Adds the parameters of the test item.

Name
Displays the selected test item.
Status
Displays the current status of the test item.

l Ready: Indicates the ready status.
l Testing: Indicates the testing status.
l Finish: Indicates the finish status.
Progress
Displays the count for which the test item is performed. The
format is n/N. n indicates the count for which a test item is
currently performed and N indicates the total count for which a
test item is performed.
Parameters for setting the properties of the added test item.

Property
Displays the property name of the test item.
Value
Enables you to set values of the Property.
Related Tasks

This describes the parameters for monitoring the test. During the test or replay, you can refer to
these parameters when you query the status and statistics value of each test item in the test plan
in the Test Plan Control window.
Parameters for Monitoring the Test

The list for monitoring the test is in the lower pane of the Test Plan Control window to display
the status of the test item.
12-26
Parameter
Description
Time
Displays the time for performing the current test item.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Name
Displays the name of the test item that is currently performed.
Info
Displays the status of the test item that is currently performed,

containing begin, failure, and success.
Parameter Description of the Statistic Tab Page

The Statistic tab is in the right pane of the Test Plan Control window to display the statistics
value of the test item.
Parameter
Description
Type
Displays the statistics type defined by the system.

l Total Count: Indicates the total count for which the current test item
is performed.
l Success Count: Indicates the count for which the current test item
is successfully performed.
l Failure Count: Indicates the count for which the current test item
fails to be performed.
l Success Rate: Indicates the percentage of the count for which the
current test item is performed to the total count for which the current
test item is performed.
Displays the statistics result of the test item that is currently performed.
Value
Related Tasks

This describes the parameters for importing the engineering parameters. You can refer to these
parameters when you import the engineering parameters.
Parameters in the Select File Dialog Box
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter
Description
Engineering
parameter file
Enables you to choose the required engineering parameter file in

xls, xlsx, or csv format.
Select Protocol
Enables you to select the network protocol corresponding to the

engineering parameter, including GSM, WCDMA, CDMA,
WiMAX, and LTE.

12-27
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Config Neighboring
Cell
Indicates whether to configure the neighboring cell parameters.

l Horizontal: indicates the horizontal neighboring cell
The engineering parameter fields of the serving cell and the cell
fields are in the same line of the same table. Horizontal
neighboring cells support only the GSM network system. In this
case, engineering parameter fields contain neighboring cell
fields.
l Vertical: indicates the vertical neighboring cell
Each line in the table indicates a neighboring cell relation.
Vertical neighboring cells support the GSM, WCDMA,
WiMAX, and LTE network systems. In this case, engineering
parameter fields do not contain neighboring cell fields, and you
need to import the corresponding engineering parameter when
importing a neighboring cell.
Neighboring cell file
Enables you to choose the required vertical neighboring cell file.
Parameters in the Match Parameters Dialog Box
12-28
Parameter
Description
Select Sheet
Enables you to select the form where the project parameters are
located.
Excel Param
Displays all the field names of the imported engineering parameter.
Probe Param
Displays the field name corresponding to the engineering

parameters on the Probe.
Match
Enables you to match the field name in the form where the
engineering parameters are located. You can select the row where
the unmatched field is located, and then click Match to open the
Match Data dialog box. Perform related matching operation. For
the parameter description, see Parameters in the Match Data
Dialog Box.
Cancel
Enables you to cancel the matching operation.
Customize
Enables you to customize the engineering parameters. You can

click Customize to open the Customize Parameters dialog box.
Perform related customizing operation. For the parameter
description, see Parameters in the Customize Parameters
Dialog Box.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameters in the Match Data Dialog Box

Parameter
Description
Excel Parameter
Displays the selected field name in the Match

Parameters that needs to be matched.
Param List
Displays the imported engineering parameters.
Parameters in the Customize Parameters Dialog Box

Parameter
Param List
Description
Mandatory
Displays the mandatory field name of the

engineering parameter.
For the parameter description, see 6.1
Engineering Parameters Supported in
Different Network Systems.
Optional
Displays the optional field name of the

engineering parameter.
For the parameter description, see 6.1
Engineering Parameters Supported in
Custom
Displays the customized field names of the

Add
Enables you to add the customized field

name.
Delete
Enables you to delete the customized field.

You can choose the field under the
Custom node. Click Delete to delete the
customized field.
Related Tasks

This describes the parameters for importing the outdoor raster map. You can refer to these
parameters when you import the outdoor raster map or add the outdoor raster map.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter
Description
Label
Indicates the name of the reference point.
Longitude
Indicates the longitude of the reference point.

12-29
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Latitude
Indicates the latitude of the reference point.
PixelX
Indicates the X coordinate value of the reference point. The range

is the range of the pixel point of the imported raster map.
PixelY
Indicates the Y coordinate value of the reference point. The range

is the range of the pixel point of the imported raster map.
Related Tasks

This describes the parameters for configuring the legend properties of the IE layer and layer
offset properties. You can refer to the description when configuring the legend properties of the
IE layer in the Layer Parameter dialog box or configuring the layer offset properties in the
Layer Offset dialog box.
Parameters of the Layer Parameter Dialog Box

Parameter
Range List
12-30
Description
Interval
Displays the range within which the

legend is configured.
Symbol
Displays the symbol whose legend is

configured.
Add
Enables you to add the legend. You can

click the icon to open the Add Color
Range dialog box to add the legend.
For detailed description of the
parameter, see Parameters for
Editing the Legend Attributes.
Edit
Enables you to set the legend

properties. You can click the icon to
open the Edit Color Range dialog box
to configure the properties for the
legend that is selected. For detailed
description of the parameters, see
Parameters for Editing the Legend
Attributes.
Remove
Enables you to remove a selected

legend.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Auto Setup
Enables you to set the color of the

legend. You can click the icon to open
the Color Range Auto Setup dialog
box to configure the number of color
ranges of the legend in Interval.
Parameters for Editing the Legend Attributes

Parameter
Description
Start
Enables you to set the start value of the

legend.
End
Enables you to set the end value of the

legend.
Symbol
Font
Enables you to set the font of the

legend.
Size
Enables you to set the size of the

legend.
Shape
Enables you to set the shape of the

legend.
Color
Enables you to set the color of the

legend.
Example
Displays the example whose legend is

configured.
Parameters for Configuring the Layer Offset

Parameter
Description
X(m)
Indicates the distance (m) of the layer offset to the total length
of the map.
Y(m)
Indicates the distance (m) of the layer offset to the total width
of the map.
Lock X and Y
Indicates whether to zoom in or zoom out the map.
Related Tasks
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

12-31
GENEX Probe
User Guide
12.14 Parameters for Configuring the Layer Control

Properties
This describes the parameters for configuring the layer control properties, such as layer display
properties and layer label properties. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the
layer display properties in the Layer Control dialog box.
Parameters of the Layer Control Dialog Box

Parameter
Description
Up
Enables you to move a selected layer upwards on the map.
Down
Enables you to move a selected layer downwards on the map.
Add
Enables you to add a layer above a selected layer. You can click
Add, select a .tab file in the displayed dialog box, and then click
Open.
Remove
Enables you to remove a selected layer.
Visible
Enables you to set whether the selected layer is visible.
Selectable
Enables you to set whether the selected layer is selectable.
Automatic Labels
Enables you to set whether the label of the selected layer is visible.
If the label of the selected layer is visible, the layer must also be
visible, that is, if you select Automatic Labels, you must select
Visible at the same time.
Editable
Enables you to set whether the selected layer can be edited.
Display
Enables you to set the properties of the layer.

In the Layers area, select a layer, and then click Display. The
Display Properties dialog box is displayed. Set the display
properties of the selected layer. For the description of the
parameters, see Parameters of the Display Properties Dialog
Box.
Labels
Enables you to set the label properties of the layer.

In the Layers area, select a layer, and then click Labels. The Label
Properties dialog box is displayed. Set the label properties of the
selected layer. For the description of the parameters, see
Parameters of the Label Properties Dialog Box.
12-32

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameters of the Display Properties Dialog Box

Parameter
Description
Override style
Indicates whether to change the style

of the selected layer.
The style of a layer consists of areas,
lines, symbols, and texts.
Zoom Layering
Display Within Zoom

Range
Indicates whether to display map

layer within the zooming range (Min
Zoom to Max Zoom).
Min Zoom
Indicates the minimum zoom range.

You can set the maximum zooming
range after selecting Display Within
Zoom Range.
Max Zoom
Indicates the maximum zoom range.

You can set the maximum zooming
range after selecting Display Within
Zoom Range.
Parameters of the Label Properties Dialog Box

Parameter
Description
Label with
Visibility
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
DataSet
Indicates the data contained in the

selected layer.
Field
Indicates the label field list.
Display within Range
Whether to display layer within the

zoom range (Min Zoom to Max
Zoom).
Min Zoom
Indicates the minimum zooming

range. You can set the maximum
zooming range after selecting
Display Within Zoom Range.
Max Zoom
Indicates the maximum zooming

range. You can set the maximum
zooming range after selecting
Display Within Zoom Range.
Allow Overlapped Text
Indicates whether to allow

overlapped texts.
Allow Duplicated Text
Indicates whether to allow duplicated

texts.
Label Partial Objects
Indicates whether to label the partial

object.

12-33
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Maximum labels
Indicates the maximum number of

labeled objects.
Styles
Enables you to set the style of the

label text.
Label Lines
Enables you select the label lines.
None
Indicates that no label line exists.
Simple
Indicates the simple label line.
Arrow
Indicates the label line with the

arrow.
Enables you to set the corresponding
line style.
Position
Orientation
Indicates the direction of the anchor

point.
Rotation
Enables you to set the rotating

direction.
None
Indicates no rotation.
Parallel to One Segment
Enables you to rotate a text to make

its direction parallel to one line
segment.
Parallel to Multiple
Segments
Enables you to rotate a text to make

its direction parallel to all the line
segments.
Label Offset
Enables you to set rotation offset of

the label.
12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event

This describes the proprieties of the predefined event. You can refer to these parameters when
you set the properties of the predefined event in the System Configure dialog box.
12-34
Parameter
Description
Mute all event sounds
Indicates whether to disable the sounds of all

predefined events.
Language
Displays the voice type. The Probe supports

English and Chinese.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Restore properties of all events
Enables you to restore the properties of the all

predefined events. You can click Reset to
restore.
Property
EventName
Displays the name of a selected predefined

event.
Shown in
EventList
Indicates whether to display a predefined event

in the Event List view window. You can select
True or False.
Shown in Map
Indicates whether to display a predefined event

in the indoor map window or outdoor map
window. You can select True or False.
Icon
Indicates the icon displayed on the map after a

predefined event is selected.
Voice enabled
Indicates whether to play voice when a selected

predefined event occurs. You can select True
or False.
Voice
Indicates the voice file that is used during voice

playing.
The parameter is valid when Voice enabled is
set to True.
Value
Enables you to set the value of Property.

This describes the parameters for configuring the device alarm. You can refer to these parameters
when you configure the device alarm in the System Configure dialog box.
Parameter
Description
Icon
Indicates the alarm icon displayed on the

map.
AlarmName
Indicates the list of alarms, including MS

Disconnection, GPS Disconnection,
Scanner Disconnection, Inadequacy of
GPS Signal, and No Signal.
Setup
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Alarm Name
Displays the name of the selected device

alarm.
Language
Displays the voice type. The Probe supports

English and Chinese.

12-35
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Alarm
Type
Visual Alarm
Indicates whether to inform you of the alarm

event by visual alarm.
Audio Alarm
Indicates whether to inform you of the alarm

event by audio alarm.
Sound
Enables you to select the audio alarm. If you

select the audio alarm, select Audio
Alarm and selects a voice file. Then, the
system automatically plays the voice file
when an alarm of the device occurs.
Description
Displays the details about the selected

alarm.
Related Tasks
12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications

This describes the parameters about setting audio indications for IEs. You can set related
parameters according to the following information when configuring audio indications for IEs.
Parameter
Description
System
Enables you to select the network system.
Condition Setting
Audio Indication
Setting
IE Name
Enables you to select the IE name.
Operator
Enables you to select the operator.
Value
Indicates the IE value, which must be

within the value range of the IE.
Play
Indicates whether to play the IE audio

indication during data test or replay.
Sound
Indicates the audio indication file.
12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings

This describes the parameters related to other system settings. You can refer to this part when
synchronizing the external device time, setting logfile storage properties, or setting event replay
mode.
12-36

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Logfile Time Setting
Event Replay Mode
Logfile Setting
Synchronize PC Time
with GPS Time
Indicates whether to synchronize the PC

time with the GPS time.
Time zone
Enables you to select the time zone of the

district where you are located. The range
is GMT +12 to GMT -12. After you
select Synchronize PC Timewith GPS
Time, Time Zone becomes available,
and you can set the time zone.
Normal Replay
Replays the events recorded in the

logfile.
Rejudge Event
Rejudges the occurred events according

to the signaling messages in the logfile
during the replaying process.
Limit type
Indicates how to slice the logfile. The

options are as follows:
l No limit: not to slice the logfile
l By time: to slice the logfile by time
(in minutes), working with File size
limit
l By file size: to slice the logfile by file
size (in MB), working with File size
limit
File size limit
Indicates the size of the sliced logfile. It

is recommended that the value of this
field be equal to or larger than 10 MB.
File name
Indicates the name of a logfile. It is

recommended that its name illustrate the
meaning of the logfile.
File directory
Indicates the path where the logfile is

stored.
The default path is C:\GENEX Logfile.
You can click File directory on the right
of
to change the path for storing the
logfile. It is not recommended that the
file be stored in the system disk.
Operating System
Setting
TCP window size
Indicates the TCP window size, which

ranges from 1 to 65535 bytes.
You are recommended to validate the
settings by restarting the PC after the
settings are complete.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

12-37
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Route File Setting
Autosave
Indicates whether to automatically save

the GPS information (.tab file) when
recording the logfile. You can select
Yes or No.
Autosave period
You can set this parameter when

Autosave is Yes.
The parameter specifies the automatic
save period, and the value ranges from 1
to 300. The default value is 3, and the unit
is second.
Rout file directory
Indicates the storage path of the .tab file

containing GPS information.
The name of the .tab file containing GPS
information is the same as that of the
logfile.
The default path is C:\GENEX Logfile.
You can click Rout file directory on the
to change the path for storing
right of
the logfile. It is not recommended that
the file be stored in the system disk.
12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List

Views
This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the list view. You can refer to
the description when configuring the properties of the list view.
Tab
Parameter
Description
Mode
Title
Indicates the title of the table in the list view.

It can be set based on the actual situation.
Header
Indicates the header of the table in the list

view. Select Header to display the header
and deselect Header to hide the header.
The contents of the header can be set on the
Cell Contents tab page.
12-38
GridLines
Indicates whether to display the grid lines.
Columns
Indicates the number of columns of the table

in the list view.
Rows
Indicates the number of rows of the table in

the list view.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Tab
Parameter
Description
Font
Indicates the fonts of the texts in the table in

the list view. Click Browse to set fonts.
Device
Indicates the device list.

If you select a device from Device, the IEs
that are currently displayed in the view
window are collected by the device. The
contents of each IE can be set on the Cell
Contents tab page.
Cell Contents
Edit
Used to edit the information about a selected

IE.
Select an IE, and then click Edit. Modify the
information about the IE in the displayed IE
Information dialog box.
Description of the parameters in the IE Information dialog box

Contents
Device
Indicates the device list.

If you select a device from Device, the IEs
that are currently displayed in the view
window are collected by the device.
System
Indicates the network protocol of an IE.
Information
Indicates the IE list.
Text
Specifies the name or value of an IE.

If you select Text, you need not set the
parameters on the View and Color tab pages.
View
Value
Specifies the value of an IE in the form of

letters and numbers. You can adjust
alignment modes such as Left, Center, and
Right of the value.
Bar
Displays the value of an IE through a bar.

The options are as follows:
l Constant Length: Draw a bar with
constant length.
Only a limited number of IEs can be
displayed.
l Max/Min Indicate: Use a vertical line to
indicate an all-time-low or all-time-high
value.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

12-39
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Tab
Parameter
Description
Color
Use Default Color

Ranges
Indicates the default color ranges of an IE.

If Use Default Color Ranges is selected, it
indicates that the default values are used. If
Use Default Color Ranges is deselected, it
indicates that the default values are not used.
You can customize the color range according
to your requirements.
Related Tasks
12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line

Chart View
This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the line chart view. You can refer
to these parameters when you configure the properties of the line chart view.
Parameter of the Set Chart Properties dialog box

Parameter
Description
Add
Enables you to add a view. Currently, you can add two views
at most.
Edit
Enables you to set the properties of the IE in the selected

view. Click this button to open the Modify Chart
Properties dialog box. Then you can set the properties of the
IE in the dialog box. For details about parameters, see
Parameter of the Modify Chart Properties dialog box.
Delete
Enables you to delete the selected view.
Parameter of the Modify Chart Properties dialog box

Parameter
Description
System
Network protocol of the IE. The IE matching System is

displayed in the Available area.
For details about the IE, see 14.3 Description of
Information Elements.
Model
12-40
Displays the name of the configured terminal.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Edit IE
Enables you to edit the IE selected in the Selected area. You

can set the maximum value, minimum value, color, and style
of the IE.
Add all
Enables you to add all the IEs in the Available area to the
Selected area.
Add
Enables you to add the IEs selected in the Available area to

the Selected area.
Remove
Enables you to remove the IEs selected in the Selected area

to the Available area.
Remove all
Enables you to remove all the IEs in the Selected area to the
Available area.
Selected
Displays the added IEs.
Related Tasks

This describes the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM. You can refer to this
part when setting the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM in the GSM Forcing
Feature dialog box.
Parameter
Description
Device
Indicates the drop-down list of MSs. You can

select only one MS from the drop-down list at a
time.
Serving ARFCN
Indicates the ARFCN of the current serving cell.
Forcing Function
Indicates whether to use the forcing function of

the GSM.
Function Select
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Lock Serving
ARFCN (Idle)
Indicates that the ARFCN of the serving cell is

locked in idle state.
Lock Specific
ARFCN (Idle)
Indicates that the specified ARFCN is locked in

idle state. After selecting Lock Specific
ARFCN (Idle), you can enter an ARFCN in the
Target ARFCN Setting area or select the
ARFCN of the neighboring cell from this area.
Forbid HO
(Dedicated)
Indicates that the handover is forbidden in

dedicated state.

12-41
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Target ARFCN
Setting
Forbid HO
(Dedicated)
Indicates that the handover is performed forcibly

in dedicated state.
CBA Invert
Indicates that the CBA is inverted.
Input ARFCN
This parameter is used to specify the destination

ARFCN. After selecting Input ARFCN, enter
an ARFCN in Target ARFCN.
Select Neighbor
This parameter is used to select the ARFCN of

the destination neighboring cell. After selecting
Select Neighbor, select the ARFCN of the
neighboring cell from the text box at the bottom.
The selected ARFCNs of the neighboring cell are
displayed in the Target ARFCN area.
Target ARFCN
This area is used to enter the destination ARFCN.
Band Control
Indicates whether to use the band control

function of the MS.
Band Setting
Indicates the controlled band. After selecting

Band Control, you can select the controlled
band from Band Setting.
MS Current State
Indicates the current forcing state of the MS.
Related Tasks

This describes the parameters related to the WCDMA forcing feature test. You can refer to this
part when setting WCDMA forcing feature test parameters in the WCDMA Forcing Feature
dialog box.
Parameter
Description
Device Select
Indicates the drop-down list of the test terminals.

You can select only one terminal each time.
Lock ARFCN
Locks the frequency point in idle status. You can

enter the frequency point in Target ARFCN.
Lock
ARFCN&PSC
12-42
Target ARFCN
Specifies the target frequency point.
Input PSC
Locks the scramble code in idle status. After

choosing Lock ARFCN&PSC, you can enter or
select the scramble code in PSC Setting.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Select PSC
UE Current State
Specifies the target scramble code. After

choosing Select PSC, you can select the
scramble code in the text box below. Then, the
selected scramble code is displayed in the
Target PSC area.
Displays the current forcing status of the UE.
Click Inquire UE State. Then, the current
forcing status of the UE is displayed.
Related Tasks

This section describes the parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test. You can set
parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box by
referring to this section.
Parameter
Description
Device Select
Indicates the drop-down list of the UEs. You can

select only one UE each time.
Serving EARFCN
Indicates the E-UTRA absolute radio frequency

channel number (EARFCN) used by the serving
cell.
Serving PCI
Indicates the physical cell identifier (PCI) of the

serving cell.
Setting
Function Select
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
EARFCN
Indicates the EARFCN used by the locked cell.
PCI
Indicates the PCI of the locked cell.
Upper Band
Indicates the upper threshold of the locked band.
Lower Band
Indicates the lower threshold of the locked band.
MCC
Indicates the mobile country code (MCC) for the

locked public land mobile network (PLMN).
MNC
Indicates the mobile network code (MNC) for

the locked public land mobile network (PLMN).
PUSCH Power
Indicates the transmit power of the locked

physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH).
Lock EARFCN
Indicates the locked EARFCN of the serving

cell.

12-43
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Lock EARFCN
and PCI
Indicates the specified EARFCN and PCI that

are locked.
Lock Band
Indicates the locked frequency band.
Lock PLMN
Indicates the locked PLMN.

According to the MCC and MNC, the UE camps
on a specific PLMN after the network is locked.
CBA Invert
Indicates that the CBA turnover is performed on

a cell or all cells.
Lock PUSCH
Power
Indicates the transmit power of the locked

PUSCH.
Related Tasks
12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of

the GSM
This describes the parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM. You can refer
to this part when setting parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM in the
GSM C/A Setting dialog box.
Parameter
Description
Device Select
Indicates the drop-down list of MSs. You can

select only one MS from the drop-down list at a
time.
MS C/A State
12-44
OFF
Indicates that the C/A measurement is disabled.
1 Channel (-1, +1)
Indicates two neighboring ARFCNs of the

current serving cell. For example, if the ARFCN
of the current serving cell is 80, the level
difference between the current serving cell and
the cells whose ARFCNs are 79 and 81 is
respectively calculated in C/A measurement.
2 Channel (+2, +1,

-1, -2)
Indicates four neighboring ARFCNs of the

current serving cell. For example, if the ARFCN
of the current serving cell is 80, the level
difference between the current serving cell and
the cells whose ARFCNs are 78, 79, 81, and 82
is respectively calculated in C/A measurement.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Apply
Indicates that the parameters for performing the

C/A measurement take effect, and then the MS
performs the C/A measurement.
l If the C/A measurement is successful, the
system displays C/A Setting Command
send successfully.
l If the C/A measurement is failed, the system
displays C/A Setting Command send
unsuccessfully. In such a case, you
need to set the parameters again to perform
the C/A measurement.
l If no response is received in two seconds, the
system displays C/A Setting Command
send Timeout. In such a case, you need
to set the parameters or click Apply again to
perform the C/A measurement.
Search MS State
Indicates the latest C/A state of the MS, which is

displayed in the MS C/A State area.
l If OFF is performed successfully, the system
displays Phones C/A measurements
NOT be set.
l If 1 Channel (-1, +1) is performed
successfully, the system displays Phones
C/A measurements be set to
measure 1 channel (1).
l If 2 Channel (+2, +1, -1, -2) is performed
successfully, the system displays Phones
C/A measurements be set to
measure 2 channels (1, 2).
MS C/A State
Indicates the C/A measurement state of the

current MS.
Related Tasks

This describes the parameters for exporting data. You can refer to this part when converting
a .gen file to the file in other formats or converting a .phu file to a .gen file.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

12-45
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameters for Converting a Logfile to a Binary File (Clear Multi-f)

Parameter
Description
Log Wizard - Step Two dialog box

Source
Enables you to select the source file. You can

click the
icon next to Source to select the
logfile to be exported.
Destination
Enables you to set the file name and the save

path. You can click the
icon next to
Destination to set the save path and file name
of the exported test data.
File Information area
Packet Selection area
Total
Indicates the number of data package

contained in the selected logfile.
Start
Indicates the start time of recording the data

of the selected logfile.
End
Indicates the end time of recording the data

Index
Enables you to set the range of the data

package contained in the exported test data.
Index indicates that the location of the data
package is used as the range of the data
package.
Time

Time indicates that the record time of the
data package is used as the range of the data
package.
Start

exported test data. If the data is exported by
Index, you need to enter the location of the
start data package. If the data is exported by
Time, you need to enter the start time.
End

end data package. If the data is exported by
Time, you need to enter the end time.
Log Wizard - Step Three dialog box

Log Selection area
12-46
Device
Indicates the list of the device contained in

the logfile.
Log
Enables you to select the test data to be

exported.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Explore the Exporting Destination
Enables you to set whether to automatically

open the exported file. If you select Explore
the Exporting Destination, the folder of the
exported file is automatically opened after
exporting data is complete.
Parameters for Converting a Logfile to a Binary File (Select Multi-f)

Parameter
Description

Source
Indicates the list of the selected logfile.
Add

click Add to select the logfile to be exported.
Delete
Enables you to delete the selected logfile in the

Source area.
Destination area
Displays the save path and file name of the

exported test data.
Open
Enables you to set the save path and file name

Selected Source
File Information
area
File
Indicates the size of the selected logfile in the

Source area. The unit is MB.
Total
Indicates the number of data packages

contained in the selected logfile in the
Source area.
Start
Displays the time at which the system

completes recording the data in the logfile
selected in the Source area.
End
Displays the time at which the system

completes recording the data in the logfile
selected in the Source area.

Log Selection area
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Device
Indicates the list of the device contained in the

logfile.
Log

exported.

12-47
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description

Parameters for Converting a Logfile to a CSV File

Parameter
Description

Time Formation
Enables you to select the time formation for

the first column of the exported CSV file. The
options are as follows:
l GMT: Indicates the GMT time when the
data package is parsed. The format is
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
l TickCount: Indicates the Tick value of
the CPU when the data package is parsed.
The unit is ms.
Source
click the
Destination

icon next to
12-48
Total

Start

End

Index

package.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Time

package.
Start

End


Log Selection area
Device

the logfile.
Log

exported.

Log Wizard - Step Four dialog box

Time Formation
Separate Character
Set Text
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Enables you to select the time formation. You

can select GMT and TickCount.
Comma
Enables you to separate exported CSV files

by using commas.
Tab

by using tabs.
Semicolon

by using semicolons.
Customize
Enables you to customize the separator (you

can enter the character.)
Output Character
to head
The exported CSV files contains the column.
Output unit
The exported CSV files contains the unit.

12-49
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameters for Converting a Logfile to an MDM File

Parameter
Description

Source

click the
Destination

icon next to
Total

Start

End

Index

package.
Time

package.
Start

End


Log Selection area
12-50
Device

the logfile.
Log

exported.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Description

Parameters for Converting a PHU File to a Logfile

Parameter
Description

PHU File
Enables you to select the source file. Click

following PHU File to select the PHU file
to be exported.
Destination File
Enables you to set the save path and file

name. Click
following Destination File
to set the save path and file name of the
exported test data.
IMSI
Displays the mobile subscriber identity

(IMSI) of the PHU.
Start Time
Displays the time when the PHU data is

recorded.

exported file is automatically open after the
data exporting is complete.
Related Tasks
12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of

the Scanner
This describes the parameters for configuring the export format of the CW data of the PCTel
DTI scanner. You can refer to this part when exporting the CW data of the PCTel DTI scanner.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

12-51
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Parameter
Columns
Description
Data Type
Indicates the test data type. Currently, only CW data

is supported.
The parameter is valid when CW Channel or CW
RSSI is selected in the Log area of the Log Wizard
- Step Three dialog box.
Format
Column Header
Indicates the header of a column in the file.
Reset
Indicates the reset button. It is used to reset the header

modified in Column Header to the default header.
Display Date & Time

with two columns
Indicates whether the data and the time are displayed

in the same column.
GPS
Indicates the format of GPS information. You can

select the following values:
l Decimal fraction: Display GPS information in
the format of angle.
l Degree: Display GPS information in the format
of degree, minute, and second.
File Size
Date & Time
Indicates the format of the date and time.
Display with quotation

marks
Indicates that the date and time are enclosed with

quotation marks.
Frequency
Indicates the unit of frequency.
FileSize Limited
Indicates the size of an exported file. You can select

the following values:
l Records: indicates that the size of the exported
file is determined by the number of data packets
specified in Count.
l Sizes: indicates that the size of the exported file
is the size specified in Count.
CW Data
GPS information is
necessary
Indicates whether the exported file includes GPS

information. If the parameter is selected, the
exported file includes GPS information. If the
parameter is not selected, the exported file does not
include GPS information.
Binning by distance
Indicates to filter CW data by distance.
Threshold Lower Limit
Indicates the threshold of the RSSI. The threshold

ranges from Lower Limit to Upper Limit, in dBm.
Threshold Upper Limit
Related Tasks
12-52

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
13
FAQs
About This Chapter

This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the software and the corresponding
causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the using skills.
13.1 Problems Related to Software Start
This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to
software start.
13.2 Problems Related to Device Connections
This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem that the external
device fails to be connected.
13.3 Problems Related to Views
This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to the
views.
13.4 Problems Related to Tests
This describes the problems that result in test failures due to the malfunction of the Probe, and
provides the possible causes and solutions.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

13-1
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
13.1 Problems Related to Software Start

This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to
software start.
13.1.1 What Should I Do When the Verification of the Dongle Fails?
13.1.2 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails?
13.1.3 How to Install the East Asian Language Package?
13.1.4 How to Uninstall the Main Program
13.1.5 How to Uninstall the GENEX Shared Components
13.1.1 What Should I Do When the Verification of the Dongle Fails?

Symptom
The Probe cannot be started normally and the system displays Lock Error:Verify Lock
Failed.
Possible Causes
The possible causes of the fault that the Probe fails to verify the dongle are as follows:
l
The dongle is plugged in improperly.
The system time is changed before the Probe is started.
The dongle expires.
The GENEX Shared is abnormal.
Other dongles exist.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the dongle is plugged in.
Step 2 Check whether the connection between the dongle and the USB port is normal.
Step 3 Check whether the dongle drive is installed correctly. It is recommended that you reinstall the
dongle drive.
Step 4 Check whether the system time is changed. Do not change the system time before starting the
Probe. The dongle controls the authority through the system time. The system time must be the
current time or later than the current time.
Step 5 Check whether the dongle expires. The license of the dongle that expires cannot be used. You
need to apply for a new license.
Step 6 Check whether the GENEX Shared components are installed properly. It is recommended that
you reinstall the GENEX Shared components.
13-2

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
Step 7 Check whether another dongle exists and whether a dongle conflicts with the dongle of the
Probe. It is recommended that you uninstall the Sentinal Drive and reinstall the GENEX Shared.
----End
13.1.2 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails?

Symptom
When the license edition of the Probe is used, the message Error: ESN is not
correct! is displayed and the Probe cannot be started properly.
Possible Causes
The ESN changes and cannot match the license.
Procedure
l
Use the dongle edition of the Probe.
Apply for multiple licenses based on the number of network adapters on the PC.
The Probe cannot identify the ESN of the hard disk on the PC because of PC configuration.
In this case, the Probe selectively identifies the ESN of the network adapter on the PC. If
multiple network adapters exist on the PC, the network adapter ESN changes after the
operating system is started. Therefore, you are advised to apply for licenses based on the
number of network adapters on the PC. When the message Error: ESN is not
correct! is displayed, load the corresponding license file to the system again.
----End
13.1.3 How to Install the East Asian Language Package?

Question
The system displays Selected collating sequence not supported by the
operating system when the Probe is started in the operating system of non-Chinese
version.
Answer
1.
Choose Start > Control Panel > Regional and Language Options.
2.
In the Regional and Language Options dialog box, click the Languages tab page.
3.
Select Install files for East Asian languages and install the files for East Asian languages
as the system prompts you.
13.1.4 How to Uninstall the Main Program

Question
How to uninstall the main program?
Answer
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

13-3
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
After the Probe main program is uninstalled, the PSTN SQE Server and system templates are
deleted but the operation logs and recorded logfiles are left.
Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > Uninstall
Probe. The uninstalling interface is displayed.
Step 2 Choose Remove.
Step 3 Click Next.
----End
13.1.5 How to Uninstall the GENEX Shared Components

Question
How to uninstall the GENEX shared components?
Answer
The GENEX shared components remain after the Probe main program is uninstalled. You can
determine whether to uninstall the GENEX shared components according to the actual situation.
Step 1 Choose Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
Step 2 In the displayed Add or Remove Programs window, click Change or Remove Programs.
Step 3 Choose Shared.
Step 4 Click Delete.
Step 5 In the uninstall interface displayed, choose Remove.
Step 6 Click Next.
Step 7 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click OK.
----End
13.2 Problems Related to Device Connections

This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem that the external
device fails to be connected.
13.2.1 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the MS Fails?
13.2.2 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the Scanner Fails?
13.2.3 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the GPS Fails?
13-4

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
13.2.4 What Should I Do When the Mouse Becomes Invalid After the GPS Is Connected to the
PC?
13.2.5 What Should I Do When the PCTel DTI Scanner Fails to Receive the GPS Signals?
13.2.1 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the MS

Fails?
Symptom
After the MS is connected to the PC, the Probe fails to search for the MS and fails to check the
connection status of the MS. The system displays The MS cannot be connected!.
Possible Causes
l
The MS is not connected correctly.
The MS parameters are not set correctly.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the connection between the MS and the USB port or COM port is normal.
Step 2 Check whether the USB drive is installed properly.
1.
Right-click My Computer..
2.
Choose Manage from the shortcut menu to open the Computer Management dialog box.
3.
Click the Device Manager node.
4.
Check whether the corresponding MS port exists under the Ports (COM & LPT)
navigation tree, and check whether the MS port is normal. If the port works abnormally,
reinstall the drive.
Step 3 Check whether the port is correct.

1.
icon on the Configuration tab page in the

On the Probe main interface, click the
navigation area to open the Device Configure dialog box.
2.
In the device list of the Device Configure dialog box, double-click the MS.
3.
Check whether the settings in the Device Configure dialog box are consistent with the
settings of the MS. If the settings are inconsistent, set the settings again.
----End
13.2.2 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the Scanner
Fails?
Symptom
After the scanner is connected to the PC, the Probe fails to search for the scanner and fails to
check the connection status of the scanner.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

13-5
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
Possible Causes
l
The scanner is not connected correctly.
On the Probe, the scanner parameters are not set correctly.
Settings of the scanner parameters are inconsistent with the parameters on the Probe.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the connection between the scanner and the parallel port or USB port is normal.
Step 2 In the Device Configure window on the Probe, check whether the settings of the port ID, baud
rate, and GPS model are correct.
Step 3 Check whether the scanner protocol is set to Direct and whether the setting of the baud rate of
the scanner is consistent with the setting of the baud rate on the Probe. Default settings, such as
8 data bit, 1 stop bit, and no parity check, are used for the other elements.
----End
13.2.3 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the GPS
Fails?
Symptom
After the GPS is connected to the PC, the Probe fails to search for the GPS and fails to check
the connection status of the GPS.
Possible Causes
l
The GPS is not connected correctly.
On the Probe, the GPS parameters are not set correctly.
The Probe does not support the interface protocol of the GPS.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the connection between the GPS and the parallel port or USB port is normal.
Step 2 In the Device Configure window on the Probe, check whether the settings of the port ID, baud
rate, and GPS model are correct.
Step 3 Check whether the interface protocol of the GPS is set correctly. Currently, the Probe supports
the GPS based on the NEMA0183.
----End
13.2.4 What Should I Do When the Mouse Becomes Invalid After

the GPS Is Connected to the PC?
Symptom
The mouse of the PC cannot be used normally after the GPS is connected. The pointer moves
randomly in a large scale on the screen.
13-6

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
Possible Causes
The system mistakes the GPS as the PS/2 mouse.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click My Computer and choose Properties to open the System Properties dialog box.
Step 2 On the Hardware tab page, click Device Manager.
Step 3 In the Device Manager window, expand the Mice and Other Pointing Devices node.
Step 4 Right-click Microsoft PS/2 Mouse and choose Properties to open the Microsoft PS/2 Mouse
Properties dialog box.
Step 5 On the Driver tab page of the Microsoft PS/2 Mouse Properties dialog box, click Uninstall.
Step 6 In the displayed Confirm Device Removal dialog box, click OK.
----End
13.2.5 What Should I Do When the PCTel DTI Scanner Fails to

Receive the GPS Signals?
Symptom
The GPS module of the PCTel DTI equipment does not report data.
Possible Causes
l
The GPS module does not receive sufficient satellite signals.
The GPS module of the PCTel DTI equipment does not function.
The GPS module of the PCTel DTI equipment is damaged.
Procedure
Step 1 Find out whether the GPS signals are blocked.
Step 2 Connect the testing PC with external handset GPS device. The recommended model is GARMIN
60.
Step 3 Send the PCTel DTI equipment to the specified servicing station to repair.
----End

Question
Before performing service tests in the LTE network, the Probe must be configured with LTE
UEs. How can I configure an LTE UE?
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

13-7
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
Answer
Step 1 Connect an LTE UE to a PC.
Two Ethernet ports and one serial port on the PC are used to connect to the debug Ethernet port
(ETH) and service Ethernet port (FE/GE) on the UE.
l A Y-shaped cable is connected to the debug Ethernet port on the UE. The connector (Debug)
of the Y-shaped cable is connected to the serial port on the PC through a serial cable. The
connector (Ethernet) of the Y-shaped cable is connected to one Ethernet port on the PC
through an Ethernet cable. For details, see Figure 13-1.
l The service Ethernet port on the UE is connected to the other Ethernet port on the PC through
an Ethernet cable.
Figure 13-1 Y-shaped cable
The connector numbered 1 is used to connect to the LTE UE.

The connector numbered 2 is used to connect to the Ethernet port on the PC.
The connector numbered 3 is used to connect to the serial port on the PC.
Step 2 Query the IP address of the host through the HyperTerminal provided by the Windows operating
system. For details, see Figure 13-2.
NOTE
When configuring an LTE UE on the Probe, you must ensure that the typed value of UE IP is the same as
the queried IP address of the host.
13-8

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
Figure 13-2 Querying the IP address of the host
e indicates the IP address of the target board, that is, the IP address of the debug Ethernet port of the UE board.
h indicates the IP address of the host, that is, the IP address of the PC that is used to control and communicate
with the UE board. The IP address of the host must be on the same network segment as the IP address of the
debug Ethernet port on the target board.
Step 3 Start the OMT tool.

1.
Type the IP address of the host queried in Step 2 in IP.
2.
Click OK. The OMT tool is started.
Step 4 Configure parameters that are used for tests on the OMT.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter
Description
Source
IMSI
Indicates the
international mobile
subscriber identity
(IMSI) of a UE.
The core network (CN) allocates the IMSI to

a UE.
PLMN ID
Indicates the ID of a
public land mobile
network (PLMN)
where a UE camps on.
It is composed of
mobile network code
(MNC) and mobile
country code (MCC).
This parameter is determined by the operator

network where a UE accesses.

13-9
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
Parameter
Description
Source
Freq
Indicates the EUTRA absolute radio

frequency channel
number (EARFCN)
of a UE.
This parameter setting must be consistent with

that of the eNodeB.
Bandwidth
Indicates the
bandwidth supported
by a UE.

that of the eNodeB.
FDD/TDD Mode
Indicates whether the

FDD or TDD mode is
adopted.

that of the eNodeB.
Step 5 Run the following command to set the IP address of the service Ethernet port on the PC in
command mode:
You must set the IP address of the PC network interface card (NIC) that is connected to the
service Ethernet port of a UE to the service IP address of the UE on the core network side.
arp -s IP address of the PC NIC MAC address of the UE Service IP address of the UE on the
core network side
NOTE
l IP address of the PC NIC: indicates the IP address of the PC NIC that is connected to the service
Ethernet port of the UE.
l Service IP address of the UE: indicates the service IP address of the UE. You can obtain it from the
core network.
Run the following command to check the configuration result:
arp -a
Step 6 Run the following command to set the route in command mode:
route add IP address of the PC NIC mask Subnet mask Service IP address of the UE -p
NOTE
l IP address of the PC NIC: indicates the IP address of the PC NIC that is connected to the service
Ethernet port of the UE.
l Service IP address of the UE: indicates the service IP address of the UE. You can obtain it from the
core network.
l p: indicates the permanent route.
Run the following command to check the configuration result:
route print
----End
13.3 Problems Related to Views

This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to the
views.
13-10

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
13.3.1 What Should I Do When Opening the Map View Fails?

13.3.2 What Should I Do When Opening the Chart View Fails?
13.3.3 What Should I Do When Importing Engineering Parameters Fails?
13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is Displayed in the WCDMA View Windows?
13.3.1 What Should I Do When Opening the Map View Fails?

Symptom
The Probe fails to open the map windows, including the indoor test map window and outdoor
test map window. The system displays Please install the MapX plug-in.
Possible Causes
The GENEX Shared component package is not installed, or it is damaged.
Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall the GENEX Shared component package.
----End
13.3.2 What Should I Do When Opening the Chart View Fails?

Symptom
The Probe fails to open the chart window. The system displays Failed to Create
TeeChart Control! Be sure to have installed it.
Possible Causes
The GENEX Shared component package is not installed, or it is damaged.
Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall the GENEX Shared component package.
----End
13.3.3 What Should I Do When Importing Engineering Parameters

Fails?
Symptom
Exceptions occur when the Probe imports engineering parameters.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

13-11
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
Possible Causes
l
The network protocol that is selected during the import of engineering parameters is
different from the actual network protocol of the engineering parameters.
Any of the values of the mandatory fields in the engineering parameter table does not meet
the requirements for the Probe.
The Microsoft Office 2003 or higher is not installed in the PC.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the network protocol selected during the import of engineering parameters is the
same as the actual network protocol.
For details about how to import engineering parameters, see 6.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.
To rectify this fault, do as follows:
Step 2 Check whether the values of the mandatory fields in the engineering parameter table meet the
requirements for the Probe.
For details about engineering parameters, see 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in
Step 3 If the system prompts Open Excel Failed! Please check the Excel
Version!, install the Microsoft Office 2003 or higher.
----End
13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is Displayed in the WCDMA

View Windows?
Symptom
When the Probe performs WCDMA tests, no data is displayed in the following view windows:
AMR Codecs, Vocoder Usage, Cell Search, DRX Mode, and RACH and PRACH.
Possible Causes
When configuring terminals on the Probe, you do not select data packets related to the WCDMA
test in the Filter dialog box. As a result, no data is displayed in the related view windows.
Procedure
l
When configuring terminals, select data packets related to the WCDMA test in the Filter
dialog box.
For details, see 7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected.
Table 13-1 shows data packets that need to be selected.
13-12

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
Table 13-1 Data packets need to be selected

View Window
Name
Data Packet
AMR Codecs
l Ox7143
l 0x7144
Vocoder Usage
l 0x5079
l Ox7143
l 0x7144
Cell Search
l Ox414C
l Ox4018
l Ox414D
l Ox4019
l Ox414E
l Ox401A
DRX Mode
Ox4004
RACH and
PRACH
l Ox4106
l Ox4160
l Ox410D
----End
13.4 Problems Related to Tests

This describes the problems that result in test failures due to the malfunction of the Probe, and
provides the possible causes and solutions.
13.4.1 What Should I Do When FTP Service Tests Fail?
13.4.2 What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated?
13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to Access the Network During the LTE Forcing Feature
Test?
13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into UARFCNs (WCDMA)?
13.4.5 What Should I Do When the Automatic Answer Setting of Huawei U1251 Is Invalid?
13.4.1 What Should I Do When FTP Service Tests Fail?

Symptom
l
Symptom I: Activating PDP contexts failed and the FTP service test cannot be performed
normally.
Symptom II: Activating PDP contexts succeeded; however, the FTP service test still cannot
be performed normally.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

13-13
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
Symptom III: The FTP upload or FTP download is disrupted.
Possible Causes
Table 13-2 lists the fault causes.
Table 13-2 Fault cause
Fault Symptom
Possible Cause
Symptom I
l The modem port is not configured or the configuration is

incorrect.
l The APN is not set.
l The configuration of the dial-up encryption protocol is incorrect.
l The FTP server does not work.
Symptom II
The properties of the FTP upload or FTP download test item are set
incorrectly.
Symptom III
l The network is blocked.

l The FTP server is overloaded.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the modem port is configured.
. The Device Configure dialog box is displayed.
1.
2.
Check the value in the ModemPort column.

If the value in the ModemPort column of the corresponding device is Not Configure, you
can infer that the modem port is not configured. Then, you need to configure the modem
port of the device. For details, see 7.3 Configuring External Devices.
Step 2 Check whether the configuration of the modem port is correct.

1.
. The Device Configure dialog box is displayed.

View the port number in the ModemPort column.
2.
In the Device Manager window, right-click the corresponding device under the Modem
node, select Properties, and then view the actual port number of the device on the
Modem tab page.
If the set port number is different from the actual port number, you need to configure the
modem port again. For details, see 7.3 Configuring External Devices.
Step 3 Check whether the setting of the APN is correct.

For details, see 8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA).
Step 4 Check whether the setting of the dial-up encryption protocol is correct.
Check and ensure that the setting of Security Protocol of the Dial Up test item is correct. For
the description of the Dial Up test item, see 14.1 Description of Test Items.
Step 5 Check whether the properties of the FTP Upload or FTP Download test item are set correctly.
13-14

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
For the description of the FTP Upload and FTP Download test items, see 14.1 Description of
Test Items.
----End
13.4.2 What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated?

Symptom
l
Symptom I: The SQE (MS-PSTN) test fails to be performed.
Symptom II: The SpeechView of the PSTN SQE Server contains invalid MOS values, that
is, certain MOS values are smaller than 2.5.
Possible Causes
Fault Symptom
Possible Cause
Symptom I
l The version number of the Probe is incorrect.

l The used test terminal is not Huawei U120e PHU, Huawei U1205
PHU or Huawei U6100 PHU.
l The version number of the PHU is incorrect.
l The RBT service of the PHU is not disabled.
Symptom II
The invalid MOS value may be caused by network problems if the

following reasons are excluded.
l The speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are
different.
l Other operations are performed on the keypad of the test MS.
l An extension may be connected to the PSTN telephone cable that
is connected to the PSTN SQE Server.
l The configuration of the PC installed with the PSTN SQE Server
does not meet the requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the version number of the Probe.
Use the Probe V200R002C01SPC010 or a later version.
On the main interface of the Probe, choose Help > About PROBE to view the version number
of the Probe.
Step 2 Check the version number of the PHU.
Use the PHU V100R002C01B010SPC110 or a later version.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

13-15
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
For details on how to view the version number of the PHU, see the help of the PHU.
Step 3 Check whether the speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are the same.
1.
On the main interface of the Probe, click

. The Test Plan Control window is displayed.
View the value of the Sample Type property of the SQE (MS-PSTN) test item.
2.
On the main interface of the PSTN SQE Server, click

. The Test Plan Editor window
is displayed. View the values of the Sample Time and Language Of Sample properties
of the SQE test item.
If the time of playing the speech sample and the language type of the speech sample are
different, reconfigure the two properties of the SQE (MS-PSTN) and SQE test items.
----End
13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to Access the Network

During the LTE Forcing Feature Test?
Symptom
During the LTE forcing feature test, the UE fails to access the network if the locked ARFCN or
PCI does not exist. The problem persists when users click Reset in the LTE Forcing Feature
dialog box. What should I do?
Possible Causes
When the UE fails to access the network, click Reset in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box.
After that, the UE does not respond.
Procedure
l
Start the UE by using the OMT so that the UE can access the network successfully.
----End
13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into UARFCNs (WCDMA)?

Question
In the WCDMA, how to convert frequencies into UARFCNs?
Answer
l
Convert frequencies into UARFCNs.

Uplink
Uplink UARFCN = 5 (FUL - FUL_Offset). FUL indicates the uplink carrier frequency,
and the range is from FUL_low to FUL_high. FUL_Offset indicates the UARFCN formula
offset.
Downlink
13-16

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
Downlink UARFCN = 5 (FDL - FDL_Offset). FDL indicates the downlink carrier

frequency, and the range is from FDL_low to FDL_high. FDL_Offset indicates the UARFCN
formula offset.
For parameters in the formula are defined in Figure 13-3 and Figure 13-4.
Figure 13-3 UARFCN definition (general)
Figure 13-4 UARFCN definition (additional channels)
----End
13.4.5 What Should I Do When the Automatic Answer Setting of

Huawei U1251 Is Invalid?
Question
How do I solve the problem that the automatic answer setting of Huawei U1251 is invalid?
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

13-17
GENEX Probe
User Guide
13 FAQs
Answer
l
Check whether Huawei U1251 is connected to earphones.

The automatic answer function can be enabled only after you connect Huawei U1251 to
earphones. Otherwise, the automatic answer setting is invalid.
----End
13-18

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
14
Appendix
About This Chapter

This describes the test items, information elements (IEs), predefined events, and keyboard
shortcuts supported by the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when you collect or view
data through the Probe.
This describes the test items of the MS, Scanner, and PSTN SQE Server and describes properties
of all test items. You can refer to this part and perform the related operations when designing a
test plan.
14.2 Description of Predefined Events
This describes the system predefined events of the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX and
LTE networks. You can refer to this part when configuring event parameters on each network.
14.3 Description of Information Elements
This describes the MS and Scanner information elements supported by the Probe. You can refer
to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the view window.
14.4 Keyboard Shortcuts
This describes certain keyboard shortcuts of the Probe.
This provides the guidelines for using the PSTN SQE Server and methods for speech quality
evaluation. The PSTN SQE Server is an important component of the speech evaluation solution
of Huawei GENEX series. The PSTN SQE Server is deployed on the PSTN as the application
management program and is used to test the speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink
of the GSM and WCDMA networks.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-1
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix

This describes the test items of the MS, Scanner, and PSTN SQE Server and describes properties
of all test items. You can refer to this part and perform the related operations when designing a
test plan.
14.1.1 Test Items Supported in Different Networks
This describes the test items supported various systems. You can refer to this part when designing
the test plan, and then complete related settings.
14.1.2 Test Items of MSs
This describes the MS test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing
a test plan for the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX, or LTE MS, and then perform the related
operations.
14.1.3 Test Items of PCTel Scanners
This describes the PCTel scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when
designing a test plan for the PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations.
14.1.4 Test Items of Anritsu Scanners
This describes the Anritsu scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when
designing a test plan for the Anritsu scanner, and then perform the related operations.
14.1.5 Test Items of Rohde & Schwarz Scanners
This describes the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner test items and their properties. You can
refer to this part when designing a test plan for the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner, and then
perform the related operations.
Related Tasks
14.1.1 Test Items Supported in Different Networks

This describes the test items supported various systems. You can refer to this part when designing
the test plan, and then complete related settings.
Test Items Supported by the GSM/WCDMA

This describes the test items supported by the GSM and WCDMA.
14-2
Test Item
Description
AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS)
Indicates the test of the delay in sending AMR

packets from the calling terminal to the called
terminal, which can be used to detect the end-toend delay in a voice call.
AT Control
Indicates the access terminal (AT) command test.
Dial Up/Hang Up
Indicates the dial-up test.
Email
Indicates the email sending test.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Test Item
Description
FTP Download
Indicates the FTP download test. It enables you

to detect the network performance when
downloading files.
FTP Upload
Indicates the FTP upload test. It enables you to

detect the network performance when uploading
files.
HTTP
Indicates the HTTP test. It enables you to detect

the network performance when accessing the
specified web page.
KeyEmul
Indicates the key emulation test.
Loop
Indicates the loop implementation of multiple test

items.
PS Attach/PS Detach
Indicates the attach or detach test of PS services.
MMS
Indicates the multimedia message service

(MMS) test. It enables you to detect the network
performance when sending multimedia files.
Multi-FTP
Indicates the test of simultaneous FTP upload and

download of a terminal.
Multi-RAB
Indicates the test of CS and PS concurrence.
PDP
Indicates the test of activating or deactivating the

packet data protocol (PDP).
Ping
Indicates the network connectivity test.
SMS
Indicates the short message service (SMS) test.
Async SQE(MS-MS)
Indicates the bidirectional speech quality

evaluation test between MSs.
SQE(MS-PSTN)
Indicates the uplink and downlink speech quality

evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN
SQE Server.
Sync SQE(MS-MS)
Indicates the unidirectional speech quality

evaluation test between MSs.
Video Phone
Indicates the video phone test.

It is supported by the WCDMA only.
Video Streaming
Indicates the video streaming test.

It is supported by the WCDMA only.
Voice Call
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Indicates the voice call test.

14-3
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Test Item
Description
Wait
Indicates the wait duration, that is, the time from

the previous test item execution to the beginning
of the next test item execution.
WAP Download
Indicates the wireless application protocol

(WAP) download test.
WAP Gateway Connection
Indicates the WAP gateway connection test.
WAP Logon
Indicates the WAP login test.
WAP Page Refresh
Indicates the WAP page refreshing test.
Test Items Supported in the CDMA Network

This describes the test items supported by the CDMA.
Test Item
Description
Dial Up/Hang Up
Indicates the dial-up test.
FTP Download
Indicates the FTP download test. It enables you to

detect the network performance when downloading
files.
FTP Upload
Indicates the FTP upload test. It enables you to detect

the network performance when uploading files.
HTTP
Indicates the HTTP test. It enables you to detect the

network performance when accessing the specified
web page.
Loop

items.
MMS
Indicates the multimedia message service (MMS)

test. It enables you to detect the network performance
when sending multimedia files.
Ping
SMS
Indicates the short message service (SMS) test.
Voice Call
Indicates the voice call test.
Wait
Indicates the wait duration, that is, the time from the
previous test item execution to the beginning of the
next test item execution.
Test Items Supported in the WiMAX Network System

This describes the test items supported in the WiMAX network system.
14-4

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Test Item
Description
FTP Download

files.
FTP Upload

HTTP

web page.
NetEntry
Indicates the network entry test of the MS.
NetSearch
Indicates the Beceem frequency scanning test.
Ping
Wait
Indicates the wait duration, that is, the time from the
previous test item execution to the beginning of the next
test item execution.
Test Items Supported by the LTE

This describes the test items supported by the LTE.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Test Item
Description
FTP Download

files.
FTP Upload

HTTP

web page.
Iperf
Indicates the network performance test of the transfer

control protocol (TCP) and the user datagram protocol
(UDP).
Loop

items.
LTE Attach/LTE Detach
Indicates the attach/detach test of data services.
LTE Cell Searching
Indicates the cell scanning test on the RRC layer.
LTE Scanning
Indicates the RRC spectrum scanning test.
Ping

14-5
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
14.1.2 Test Items of MSs

This describes the MS test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing
a test plan for the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX, or LTE MS, and then perform the related
operations.
AMR E2E Delay (GSM/WCDMA)

This section describes the properties of the AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS) test item. You can set
the AMR end-to-end delay test by referring to the following descriptions.
The AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS) test item is used to detect the end-to-end delay in a voice call.
CAUTION
When the AMR end-to-end delay test is performed, the calling and called terminals must be
connected to the same Probe. In addition, when configuring the terminals, you must select the
data packets related to the AMR in LogCode in the Filter dialog box.
l For the calling terminal, Ox7143 need to be selected.
l For the called terminal, 0x7144 need to be selected.
For details, see 7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Destination MS
Indicates the destination MS. The MS

is another terminal that is connected
to the Probe.
Destination Number
Indicates the called number.
Test Count
Indicates the number of tests.
Test Interval
Unit: s
Indicates the interval between two

tests.
Indicates the maximum time for call
setup.
14-6
Setup Timeout
Unit: s
Exceptional Interval
Unit: s
Indicates the call exceptional interval,

that is, the time from the previous call
drop to the beginning of the next call.
Speech Sample File
Indicates the voice file that is played

after a call is set up.
If the call cannot be set up within the

period specified by this parameter, the
call setup fails.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Command Type
The values are as follows:
Indicates the terminal command type.
l Qualcomm Command:
This command type is
applicable to Qualcomm
chipset-based terminals.
If terminals fail to initiate
calls through Qualcomm
commands, you can
configure a modem port
and set Command
Type to AT Command.
Select the command type according to

the terminal type. Otherwise, call
setup initiated by terminals may fail.
l AT Command: After
you set Command
Type to AT Command,
AT commands can be
issued.
Before setting
Command Type to AT
Command, you need to
check that a modem port
has been configured.
The default value is
Qualcomm Command.
Async SQE(MS-MS) (GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the Async SQE(MS-MS) test item. You can refer to this part
when performing a speech quality evaluation test by making calls between the PHU test terminals
(such as Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, Huawei U6100, or Huawei U1251) configured on two
Probes.
In this scenario, the version numbers of the two PHU terminals must be the same. In addition,
both the PHU terminals must be configured with the Async SQE(MS-MS) test item.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Call Count
You can set this property when

Call Type is set to Call by Call.
Indicates the number of calls.
The default value is 5.

Call Duration

Indicates the call duration.
The default value is 120, and the

unit is second.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-7
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Call Interval

Indicates the call interval.
The value ranges from 1 to 120,

and the default value is 30, and
the unit is second.
Call Mode
Indicates the call mode.
l Outgoing: Refers to the

outgoing call mode.
l Incoming: Refers to the
incoming call mode.
When selecting Incoming,
you need to set Source
Number and SaveFile only.
The default value is Outgoing.
Call Type
Indicates the call type.
l Continuous Call: Refers to a

long call.
l Call by Call: Refers to a short
call, which is controlled by
the number of times a speech
file is played.
The default value is Call by
Call.
Destination
Number

Call Mode is set to Outgoing.
Exceptional
Interval

unit is second.
Indicates the call exceptional

interval, that is, the time from the
previous call drop to the beginning
of the next call.
MOS Algorithm
Indicates the MOS algorithm.
l PESQ.862.1
l PESQ.862
l PESQ LQ
l PESQ Ie
The default value is PESQ.
862.1.
MOS Direction
Indicates the MOS direction.

The Half duplex mode, that is the
half duplex interaction mode is
supported by the Probe.
14-8

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Sample Type
Indicates the type of a speech

sample.
The 5s,English type is supported by
the Probe, that is the five seconds
are spent in playing a speech
sample, and the language of the
speech sample is English.
Save All Result

Files
You can select Yes or No.
Determines whether to save all

speech result files.
Source Number

Call Mode is set to Ingoing.
Indicates the caller number.
Score Threshold

Save All Result Files is set to
No.
Indicates the number of times for

scoring the speech quality during
the current call process.
Setup Timeout

unit is second.

setup.
If the call cannot be set up within
the period specified by this
parameter, the call setup fails.
Speech Sample
File
The default speech sample file is

Software installation directory
\Bin\SQE\ResultFile
\VQA_Result.wav.
Indicates the storage path and name

of the recorded speech file.
Time Sync
Before performing a speech quality

evaluation test, check whether to
synchronize the PC time of the
calling part with the PC time of the
called part.
AT Control (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the AT Control test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the Access Terminal (AT) control test, and then perform the related operations.
The AT commands and their formats supported by different vendors greatly differ in many ways,
therefore, you need to test the AT commands on each MS.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Property
Value/Range/
Unit
Description
Test Count
The default value

is 5.
Indicates the number of AT control

tests.

14-9
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/
Unit
Description
Command Edition
This property is used to edit test

commands. Click the button in the
right area. Then, add multiple test
commands in the displayed AT
Command Edit dialog box.
Idle Time
Unit: s
Indicates the idle time.
AT
Command
The default value

is AT.
Indicates the AT command. The

format of the entered commands
must meet the requirements for the
format of the AT commands.
Add
This parameter is used to add the

values of AT Command and Idle
Time to the list in the left area.
Update
This parameter is used to update the

selected parameters of the
command.
Up
This parameter is used to move a

command upwards.
Save
This parameter is used to save a

command file.
Delete
This parameter is used to delete a

command.
Load
This parameter is used to load a

command file.
Down
This parameter is used to move a

command downwards.
AT Command Edit dialog box

AT Command
area
Operate area
Dial Up/Hang Up (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)

This describes the properties of the Dial Up and Hang Up test items. You can refer to this part
when performing the data service dial-up connection test, such as FTP, HTTP, Ping, and Wap,
and then perform the related operations.
Dial Up and Hang Up are used to allow several data service sessions to be conducted after one
another. The Dial Up test item enables you to establish a data service connection. The Hang
Up test item enables you to terminate a data service connection.
14-10

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Test Item
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Dial
Test Count
Indicates the number of

dial-up tests.
Test Interval
The default value is 3, and

the unit is second.
Indicates the interval

between two dial-up tests.
Dial User
Indicates the dial-up user

name.
Certain operators require
authentication in order to
establish a data service
connection. Therefore, you
need to enter the user name
before the dial-up
connection.
Dial Password -
Indicates the password for

the dial-up connection.
connection. Therefore, you
need to enter the user
password before the dial-up
connection.
Phone
Number
The default value is *99#.
Indicates the phone number

for the dial-up connection.
PDP Type
You can select IP or PPP.
Indicates the protocol used

in PDP tests.
l IP: Internet Protocol

l PPP: Point-to-Point
Protocol. It is a linklayer protocol of pointto-point links that carry
the data packets of the
network layer.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
PDP APN
Indicates the name of the

PDP access point. For
example, the PDP APN of
China Mobile is cmwap or
cmnet.
Timeout
You can select 30, 60, 120,

300, or 600. The unit is
second.
Indicates the amount of time

to wait for the success of
dial-up. If the dial-up
connection is not set up
during this period, the dialup connection attempt times
out.

14-11
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Test Item
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Security
Protocol
You can select PAP or

CHAP.
Indicates the network

security authentication
protocol.
l PAP: Password
Authentication
Protocol. It is used for
authenticating the users
who attempt to log in to
the service system using
the PPP protocol. If the
user name and password
that a user submits to the
PAP needs to be sent to
another program
without encryption, the
PAP protocol must be
used.
l CHAP: Challenge
Handshake
Authentication
Protocol. It is an
acknowledgement mode
used by the PPP server.
It is used for
authenticating a user
when the user initiates a
connection or later.
CHAP.
Dial Type
You can select RAS or

NDIS.
Indicates the dial-up type.
l RAS: Remote Access

Service. It indicates that
the dial-up is performed
through the modem.
l NDIS: Network Driver
Interface Specification.
It indicates that the dialup is performed through
a network adapter. In
this case, Network
Card must be set.
Huawei E1820 Card or
Huawei E182E Card is
recommended.
14-12

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Test Item
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Network Card
You can set this property

when Dial Type is set to
NDIS.
Specifies the network

adapter corresponding to
the data card that is in use
currently.
Under the Network
adapters node in the
Device Manager window,
you can view the name of
the network adapter
corresponding to the data
card that is in use currently.
Traffic Class
You can select the

following values:
Indicates the traffic class.
l background class:
refers to the background
class.
l conversational class:
refers to the
conversational class.
l interactive class: refers
to the interactive class.
l streaming class: refers
to the streaming class.
l subscribed value:
refers to the subscribed
value.
background class.
UL Max Rate

256, 384, 2048, or 4096.
The unit is kbit/s.
Indicates the maximum

uplink rate.
DL Max Rate

256, 384, 2048, 4096, or
8192. The unit is kbit/s.

downlink rate.
UL
Guaranteed
Rate

when Traffic Class is set to
conversational class,
streaming class, or
subscribed value.
Indicates the uplink

guaranteed rate.

256, 384, 2048, or 4096.
The unit is kbit/s.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-13
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Test Item
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
DL
Guaranteed
Rate

when Traffic Class is set to
conversational class,
streaming class, or
subscribed value.
Indicates the downlink

guaranteed rate.

256, 384, 2048, 4096, or
Hang Up
Email (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the Email test item. When performing the email sending test,
you can refer to the following descriptions.
Before performing the Email test, you must perform the Dial Up test.
14-14
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
From
Indicates the email address of the

originator.
To
Indicates the email address of the

destination.
Subject
Indicates the email subject.
Body Text
Indicates the email body text.
Attachment
Indicates the name of file to enclose

with the email as attachment
(optional).
SMTP server
Indicates the IP address of the

Simple Message Transfer Protocol
(SMTP) server (for example,
smtp.myserver.com).
Email User
Indicates the user name that

accesses the SMTP server.
Email Password
Indicates the password for accessing

the SMTP server.
Test Interval

unit is second.

continuous email tests.
Test Count
Indicates the number of email tests.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Disconnection Mode
Indicates the mode for

disconnecting the current activated
data connection.
l Keep Connected
After the download is
complete, the Probe
performs the next email test
instead of disconnecting
the data connection when
the time specified in Test
Interval is up.
l Disconnected after
transfer completed
The Probe disconnects the
data connection until the
current activated email
service is complete. In the
next email test, you must
perform the dial up test
first.
Disconnected after transfer
completed.
Dial Type
You can select RAS or NDIS.
Indicates the dial-up type.
l Remote access service

(RAS): It indicates that the
dial-up is performed
through the modem.
l Network driver interface
specification (NDIS): It
indicates that the dial-up is
performed through a
network adapter. In this
case, Network Card must
be set.
Huawei E1820 Card and
Huawei E182E Card are
recommended.
Dial User
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Disconnection Mode is set to
completed.
Indicates the dial-up user name.

authentication for establishing a
data service connection. Therefore,
you need to enter the user name
before originating the dial-up
connection.

14-15
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Dial Password

completed.
Indicates the password for the dialup connection.

completed.
Indicates the phone number for the

dial-up connection.
Phone Number

authentication for establishing a
data service connection. Therefore,
you need to enter the user password
before originating the dial-up
connection.
FTP Download
This section describes the properties of the FTP Download test item. You can refer to this section
when performing an FTP download test.
Through the FTP download test, you can check network performance during file download.
Before performing an FTP download test, you must check whether your account enables you to
download files to the specified directory. That is, whether you are authorized to access the FTP
server.
FTP Download (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA) describes the properties of the FTP Download test
item supported by the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA network. FTP Download (WiMAX/LTE)
describes the properties of the FTP Download test item supported by the WiMAX or LTE
network.
FTP Download (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)

You must perform a Dial Up test before the GSM, WCDMA or CDMA FTP Download test.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
User
Indicates the user name for

accessing the FTP server.
Password
Indicates the user password for

Remote File
Indicates the IP address of the FTP

server.
The format is ftp://IP address or
domain name/file name
Port
14-16

Indicates the port number of the

FTP server.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Write Local File
You can select either of the

following values:
Indicates whether the file needs to

be saved.
l True: indicates that this file is

saved after it is downloaded.
l False: indicates that this file is
not saved after it is
downloaded.
The default value is False.
Local File

Write Local File is set to True.
Indicates the filename and the path

for saving files.
You need to set a complete path
such as C:\test.dat.
Multi Task Count
The value ranges from 1 to 5, and

the default value is 1.
Indicates the number of tasks

downloaded through the FTP.
Test Interval
The default value is 15, and the unit

is second.

FTP download tests.
Test Count
Indicates the number of FTP

download tests.
Disconnection
Mode
You can select one of the following

values:

disconnecting the active data
connection.
l Keep Connected
After the download is
complete, the Probe initiates
the next FTP download test
instead of disconnecting the
data connection when the time
specified in Test Interval
arrives.
l Disconnected by time
The Probe disconnects the data
connection based on the period
when the time specified in Test
Interval arrives.
l Disconnected after transfer
completed
connection until the active FTP
download is complete. In the
next FTP download test, you
must perform a dialup test first.
The default value is Disconnected
after transfer completed.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-17
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Port Type
Indicates the active or passive

mode of the FTP.
l PASV: FTP passive mode. In

this mode, the Probe functions
as the client to actively connect
to the FTP server.
l PORT: FTP active mode. In
this mode, the FTP server
actively connects to the client.
If this mode is used for a test,
you are advised to disable the
network firewall.
The default value is PASV.
Valid FTP
Duration

Disconnected by Time.
Indicates the valid duration for the

FTP download test.

unit is second.
Dial Type

Disconnected by Time or
completed.
Indicates the dialup type.

l RAS: Remote Access Service.
It indicates that dialup is
performed through the modem.
Interface Specification. It
indicates that dialup is
performed through a network
adapter. In this case, Network
Card must be set.
Huawei E1820 Card or Huawei
E182E Card is recommended.
Network Card

Dial Type is set to NDIS.
Indicates the network adapter

corresponding to the data card that
is in use currently.
Under the Network adapters node
in the Device Manager window,
you can view the name of the
network adapter corresponding to
the data card that is in use currently.
14-18

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Dial User

completed.
Indicates the dialup user name.

completed.
Indicates the password for the

dialup connection.

completed.

dialup connection.
Dial Password
Phone Number

authentication in order to establish
a data service connection.
Therefore, you need to enter the
user name before the dialup
connection.

user password before the dialup
connection.
FTP Download (WiMAX/LTE)

Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
User

Password

Remote File
Indicates the file on the FTP

server.
domain name/file name.
Port
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


FTP server.
14-19
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Port Type
Indicates the FTP active and

passive modes.

to the FTP server.
network firewall.
Disconnection
Mode

following values:
Indicates the data disconnection

mode.
Data connection is
disconnected after Valid FTP
Duration.
This property is applicable to

terminals.

completed
Data connection is
disconnected after the active
FTP download service is
complete.
by time.
Valid FTP
Duration

Write Local File
Indicates the valid duration for an

FTP download test.

unit is second.

terminals.

following values:
Indicates whether a file needs to

be saved.
l True: indicates that this file is

saved after it is downloaded.
l False: indicates that this file is
not saved after it is
downloaded.
Local File

Write Local File is set to True.
Indicates the file name and the

path for storing files.
14-20

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Multi Task Count


downloaded through FTP.
Test Interval

is second.

FTP download tests.
Test Count

download tests.
FTP Upload
This section describes the properties of the FTP Upload test item. You can refer to this section
when performing an FTP upload test.
By performing FTP upload tests, you can check network performance during file upload. Before
performing FTP upload tests, you must check whether your account enables you to upload files
to the specified directory. That is, whether you are authorized to access the FTP server.
FTP Upload (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA) describes the properties of the FTP Upload test item
supported by the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA network. FTP Upload (WiMAX/LTE) describes
the properties of the FTP Upload test item supported by the WiMAX or LTE network.
FTP Upload (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)

You must perform the Dial Up test before the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA FTP Upload test.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
User

Password

Remote File
Indicates the file on the FTP server.

Port

FTP server.
Local File
Indicates the drive letter, path, and

file name identifying the file to be
uploaded.
Multi Task Count
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
The value ranges from 1 to 5 and



uploaded to the FTP server.
14-21
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Test Interval
The default value is 15 and the unit

is second.

FTP upload tests.
Test Count

upload tests.
Port Type

mode of the FTP.

to the FTP server.
network firewall.
Disconnection
Mode
You can select one of the following

values:
l Keep Connected
After the upload is complete,
the Probe initiates the next FTP
upload test instead of
disconnecting the data
connection when the time
specified in Test Interval
arrives.

disconnecting the active data
connection.
connection based on the period
when the time specified in Test
Interval arrives.
completed
connection until the active FTP
upload is complete. In the next
FTP upload test, you must
perform a dialup test first.
Valid FTP
Duration

Indicates the valid duration for an

FTP upload test.
The default value is 300 and the

unit is second.
14-22

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Dial Type

completed.
Indicates the dialup type.

l RAS: Remote Access Service.
It indicates that dialup is
performed through the modem.
Interface Specification. It
indicates that dialup is
performed through a network
adapter. In this case, Network
Card must be set.
Huawei E1820 Card or Huawei
E182E Card is recommended.
Network Card

Dial Type is set to NDIS.
Specifies the network adapter

corresponding to the data card that
is in use currently.
Under the Network adapters node
in the Device Manager window,
you can view the name of the
network adapter corresponding to
the data card that is in use
currently.
Dial User
Dial Password
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

completed.
Indicates the dialup user name.

completed.

dialup connection.


user name before the dialup
connection.

user password before the dialup
connection.
14-23
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Phone Number

completed.

dialup connection.
FTP Upload (WiMAX/LTE)

Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
User

Password

Remote File
Indicates the file on the FTP server.

Port

FTP server.
Local File
Indicates the drive letter, path, and

file name identifying the file to be
uploaded.
14-24
Multi Task Count
The value ranges from 1 to 5 and


uploaded to the FTP server.
Test Interval
The default value is 1 and the unit

is second.

FTP upload tests.
Test Count

upload tests.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Port Type

mode of the FTP.

to the FTP server.
network firewall.
Disconnection
Mode

following values:
Indicates the data disconnection

mode.
Data connection is
disconnected after Valid FTP
Duration.

terminals.

completed
Data connection is
disconnected after the active
FTP download service is
complete.
by time.
Valid FTP
Duration

unit is second.
Indicates the valid duration for the

FTP upload test.
terminals.
HTTP
This describes the properties of the HTTP test items. You can refer to this part when performing
the HTTP test, and then perform the related operations.
Through the HTTP test, you can test the network performance when accessing specified web
pages.
You must perform the Dial Up test before the HTTP test.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
URL
The address starting with http://.
Indicates the address of the HTTP

server.

14-25
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Port

HTTP server.
Show Web Page
You can select True or False.

The default value is True.
Whether the page set in URL is

displayed automatically.
Test Interval

is second.

HTTP tests.
Test Count
Indicates the number of HTTP

tests.
Disconnection
Mode
You can select the following

values:

disconnecting the current
activated data connection.
l Keep Connected
After the test is complete, the
Probe originates the next HTTP
test instead of disconnecting the
specified in Test Interval is up.
completed
connection until the current
activated HTTP service is
complete. In the next HTTP
test, you must perform the dial
up test first.
Dial User
Dial Password
14-26

completed.

completed.

dial-up connection.


connection. Therefore, you need
to enter the user name before the
dial-up connection.

connection. Therefore, you need
to enter the user password before
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Phone Number

completed.
Indicates the phone number for

KeyEmul (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the KeyEmul test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the key emulation test, and then perform the related operations.
Not all functions of a test MS can be executed by issuing commands. The function such as video
phone calling can be automatically dialed through only the key emulation.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Key Emulation
List
Indicates the key emulation list. Click the

button next to this item. The Key Emul
Config dialog box is displayed. In the
displayed dialog box, set corresponding
parameters.
Test Interval
The value must be a

positive integer. The
default value is 30. The
unit is second.
Indicates the interval between two Key-Emul

tests.
Test Count
The value must be a

default value is 5.
Key Emul Config dialog box
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Phone Type
Indicates the phone types

Phone type.
Delay
The value must be a

default value is 300. The
unit is ms.
Key pressing delay. Indicates the interval

between two pressings.
Key Emulation
List
Indicates the key emulation list. Maps the key

input.
Key Input
Displays the key emulation.
Test
Indicates the test button. This item is used to

test whether the sequence of key emulation
meets the expectation.

14-27
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Define Key
Value
Defines the key emulation map. Click the

button next to this item. The Key Emulation
Map Setting dialog box is displayed. In the
displayed dialog box, set corresponding
parameters.
Key Emulation Map Setting dialog box

Key Emulation
Map
Indicates the mapping table of key values of the

key emulation.
Phone Type
Phone type. Indicates the selected phone type.
Add & Edit
This item is used to add new phones.
Key Value
Indicates the key value.
Reset
Indicates the reset button for the key value.

Reset key values to 0x00.
Press
Press the key corresponding to a value of the

Key Value.
Next & Press
Press the key corresponding to the result of

adding 1 to a value of the Key Value.
Loop Start
This describes the properties of the Loop Start test item. You can refer to this part when
performing a cyclic test, and then perform the related operations.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Test Count
Indicates the times of executing test items

circularly.
PS Attach/PS Detach (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)

This describes the properties of the PS Attach and PS Detach test items. You can refer to this
part when performing the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX attach or detach test, and then
NOTE
The Attach and Detach tests are performed alternately. If an Attach test is performed, the next Attach test
cannot be performed until the Detach test is performed.
14-28

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Test Item
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
PS Attach
Attach
Mode
You can select the following values:
Indicates the packet

service attach test
mode.
l Attach only: Only the Attach test

is performed.
If you select the Attach only
mode, you must perform a
Detach test before the next
Attach test.
l Detach before Attach: A
Detach test is performed before
the Attach test.
PS Detach
Timeout
The value must be a positive integer.

The value range is 15 to 60. The
default value is 15. The unit is
second.
Indicates the time to

wait for the attach
successful or attach
failed.
Timeout

second.
Indicates the time to

wait for the detach
successful or detach
failed.
MMS (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)
This describes the properties of the MMS test item. You can refer to this part when performing
the multimedia message service (MMS) test, and then perform the related operations.
Through the MMS test, you can test the network performance when multimedia files are being
sent.
The Probe supports the GSM MMS test and WCDMA MMS test performed by using Huawei
U120e or Huawei U535 test terminals. Also the Probe supports the CDMA MMS test performed
by using Huawei C5588 test terminal.
Table 14-1 describes the properties of the MMS test item. If an MMS fails to be sent, you need
to manually set the parameters listed in Table 14-2 on your test terminal.
CAUTION
By default, the Probe sends the first MMS in the inbox of the test terminal. Thus, before
performing MMS test, you should ensure that MMSs are present in the test terminal and the
MMS to be sent is the first MMS in the inbox.
You can use other terminal to send MMSs to the test terminal to ensure that MMSs are present
in the test terminal.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-29
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Table 14-1 Properties of the MMS test item

Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Test Count
Indicates the number of MMS tests.
Test Interval

is second.

MMS tests, that is, the interval
between the ended MMS test and the
MMS test to be started.
Table 14-2 Auxiliary parameters

Property
Description
MMS Gateway
Indicates the IP address of the WAP gateway of an operator. The value

is a string, for example, 10.10.10.1.
Gateway Port
Indicates the gateway port on the server. For example, 80.
APN
Indicates the access point name. For example, the APN of China Mobile
is cmwap or cmnet.
MMS Center URL
Indicates the URL of the MMS center, starting with http://. For example,
http://mmsc.monternet.com.
Multi-FTP (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the Multi-FTP test item. You can refer to this part when using
a terminal to perform FTP upload and download tests simultaneously, and then perform the
related operations.
Property
FTP
Download
Value/Range/Unit
Description
DL User
Indicates the user name

for accessing the FTP
server when downloading
files.
DL Password
Indicates the user

password for accessing
the FTP server when
downloading files.
DL Remote File
Indicates the file on the

FTP server.
The input format is ftp://
IP address or domain
name/File name.
DL Port
14-30

Indicates the port number

of the FTP server.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
DL Write Local
File
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Specifies whether to save

the file.
l True: Indicates that the

file is saved after it is
downloaded.
l False: Indicates that the
file is not saved after it is
downloaded.
DL Local File

when DL Write Local File is
set to True.
Indicates the file name

and the path for saving
the file.
You need to set a
complete path, such as C:
\test.dat.
FTP
Upload
DL Multi Task
Count

and the default value is 1.

FTP download tasks.
DL Count

FTP download tests.
UL User

user that accesses the FTP
server when uploading
files.
UL Password
Indicates the user

the FTP server when
uploading files.
UL Remote File
Indicates the file on the

FTP server.
The input format is ftp://
IP address or domain
name/File name.
UL Port

of the FTP server.
UL Local File
Indicates the file name

and the path for saving
the file.
You need to set a
complete path, such as C:
\test.dat.
UL Multi Task
Count
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



FTP upload tasks.
14-31
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Common
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
UL Count

FTP upload tests.
Dial User

name.
authentication for
establishing a data
service connection.
Therefore, you need to
enter the user name
before originating the
dial-up connection.
Dial Password
Indicates the password

for the dial-up
connection.
authentication for
establishing a data
service connection.
Therefore, you need to
enter the user password
before originating the
dial-up connection.
Phone Number
Indicates the phone

number for the dial-up
connection.
Port Type
Indicates the FTP active

and passive modes.
l PASV: FTP passive mode.

In this mode, the Probe
functions as the client to
actively connect to the FTP
server.
l PORT: FTP active mode.
In this mode, the FTP
server actively connects to
the client.
If this mode is used for a
test, you are advised to
disable the network
firewall.
Test Interval
14-32

the unit is second.


between two continuous
Multi-FTP tests.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Multi-RAB (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the Multi-RAB test item. You can refer to this part when testing
the CS and PS concurrently, and then perform the related operations.
You can test the CS and PS concurrently through the Multi-RAB test item and resolve the failed
hang up of the MS for the automatic adaptive multi rate test in the case of the normal dial-up
connection of the PS. The Multi-RAB test item involves the concurrent test of AMR and FTP
and the concurrent test of video phone (VP) and FTP.
Property
Multi-RAB
Concurrent Type
Value/Range/Unit
Description
You can select the

following values:
Indicates the type of the

concurrent test.
l AMR & FTP:

indicates the
concurrent tests of the
AMR and FTP.
l Video & FTP:
indicates the
concurrent tests of the
Video and FTP.
The default value is AMR
& FTP.
Startup Priority
You can select the

following values:
l CS First: indicates
that the CS test is
performed first.
Indicates the startup

priority of subservices
during the concurrent test.
l FTP First: indicates

that the FTP test is
performed first.
The default value is CS
First.
CS
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Test Count

tests.
Test Interval
The default value is 10,

and the unit is second.
Indicates the time interval

between two tests, that is,
the time from the previous
test to the beginning of the
next test.
CS and FTP Interval

the unit is second.
Indicates the time from

the call originated by the
MS to the beginning of
the FTP service.
Destination Number
Indicates the destination

number.

14-33
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Setup Timeout


time for call setup. If the
call cannot be set up
within a defined period,
the call setup fails.
Command Type
Indicates the terminal

command type.
l Qualcomm
Command: This
command type is
applicable to
Qualcomm chipsetbased terminals. If
terminals fail to
initiate calls through
Qualcomm
commands, you can
configure a modem
port and set
Command Type to
AT Command.
Select the command type

according to the terminal
type. Otherwise, call
setup initiated by
terminals may fail.
l AT Command: After
you set Command
Type to AT
Command, AT
commands can be
issued.
Before setting
Command Type to
AT Command, you
need to check that a
modem port has been
configured.
Qualcomm Command.
FTP
FTP Type
You can select the

following values:
Indicates the FTP type.
l Upload: indicates the

FTP upload.
l Download: indicates
the FTP download.
Download.
14-34

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Write Local File
Value/Range/Unit
Description
You can select the

following values:
Indicates whether the file

needs to be saved.
l True: indicates that

this file is saved after
it is downloaded.
l False: indicates that
this file is not saved
after it is downloaded.
False.
Local File
End Type

when Write Local File is
set to True.
Indicates the filename and

the path for saving files.
You can select the

following values:
Indicates the end type.
You need to set a

complete path such as C:
\test.dat.
l By Time: indicates
that the test ends until
the time specified in
FTP Time for
transmitting data
through the FTP is up.
l By File: indicates that
the test ends until the
file download is
complete.
The default value is By
Time and is set in FTP
Time.
FTP Time

when End Type is set to
By Time.
Indicates the duration of a

FTP transmission.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
FTP Retry Count

number of allowed retries
when the FTP connection
fails.
Port

of the FTP server.
User
Indicates the user name

for accessing the FTP
server.

14-35
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Password
Indicates the user

the FTP server.
Remote File
Indicates the IP address of

the FTP server.
The format is ftp://IP
address or domain name/
file name
FTP Dial
Multi Thread Count

tasks downloaded
through the FTP.
PDP Type
You can select IP and

PPP.
Indicates the protocol of

PDP test.
PDP APN

PDP access point. For
example, the APN of
China Mobile is cmwap
or cmnet.
Dial User

name.
connection. Therefore,
you need to enter the user
name before the dial-up
connection.
Dial Password
Indicates the password for

connection. Therefore,
you need to enter the user
password before the dialup connection.
Phone Number
14-36

*99#.

Indicates the phone

number for the dial-up
connection.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
FTP QoS
Traffic Class
Value/Range/Unit
Description
You can select the

following values:
l background class:
refers to the
background class.
l conversational class:
refers to the
l interactive class:
refers to the
interactive class.
l streaming class:
refers to the streaming
class.
l subscribed value:
refers to the
subscribed value.
background class.
UL Max Rate
You can select 32, 64,

128, 256, 384, 2048, or

uplink rate.
DL Max Rate

128, 256, 384, 2048,
kbit/s.

downlink rate.
UL Guaranteed Rate

when Traffic Class is set
to conversational class,
streaming class, or
subscribed value.

guaranteed rate.

128, 256, 384, 2048, or
DL Guaranteed Rate

when Traffic Class is set
to conversational class,
streaming class, or
subscribed value.

guaranteed rate.

128, 256, 384, 2048,
kbit/s.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-37
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
PDP (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the PDP test item. You can refer to this part when performing
the Packet Data Protocol (PDP) activation and deactivation tests, and then perform the related
operations.
By sending the AT commands to the MS, you can test whether the MS can activate or deactivate
the GPRS properly.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
PDP Type
You can select IP and PPP.
Indicates the PDP type.
PDP APN
Indicates the name of the PDP

access point.
Traffic Class
l background class: refers to the

background class.
l conversational class: refers to the
l interactive class: refers to the
interactive class.
l streaming class: refers to the
streaming class.
l subscribed value: refers to the
subscribed value.
The default value is background
class.
UL Max Rate
You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128,

256, 384, 2048, or 4096. The unit is
kbit/s.
Indicates the maximum uplink

rate.
DL Max Rate
You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128,

256, 384, 2048, 4096, or 8192. The
unit is kbit/s.

downlink rate.
UL Guaranteed
Rate

Traffic Class is set to conversational
class, streaming class, or subscribed
value.

guaranteed rate.
You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128,

256, 384, 2048, or 4096. The unit is
kbit/s.
DL Guaranteed
Rate

Traffic Class is set to conversational
class, streaming class, or subscribed
value.

guaranteed rate.
You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128,

256, 384, 2048, 4096, or 8192. The
unit is kbit/s.
14-38

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Auto Dialup
Indicates whether to set up the

dial-up connection of the
packet service after the PDP
activation.
l False: disables the dial-up

connection.
l True: enables the dial-up
connection.
Reserved Duration

The default value is 5. The unit is
second.
Indicates the PDP duration,

that is, the time from the
previous PDP activation to the
beginning of the PDP
deactivation.
Test Interval

second.
Indicates the time from the

previous PDP deactivation to
the beginning of the next PDP
activation.
Test Count
Exceptional
Interval

second.

interval, that is, the time from
the failed PDP activation to the
beginning of the next PDP
activation.
Ping
This describes the properties of the Ping test item. You can refer to this part when testing the
delay of a transmitted or received packet, and then perform the related operations.
The Ping test is used to test the communication connectivity of a network. The test result acts
as an evidence for diagnosing daily network faults.
You must perform the Dial Up test before the Ping test.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
IP
Enter an IP address such as

10.10.10.1.
Indicates the destination IP

address.
Packet Size
The range is 8 to 1024. The default

value is 32. The Unit is byte.
Indicates the packet size. The

size of a transmitted packet
affects the delay.

14-39
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Fragment Flag
The value can be either of the

following:
Indicates whether to split a Ping

packet.
l False: Disable the fragment test.

l True: Enable the fragment test.
Test Control Mode
Currently, only the Test by Count

mode is supported. That is, the test
is controlled by Test Count.
Indicates the test control mode.
Test Count
Test Interval

is second.
Indicates the interval between

two ping tests.
SMS (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)
This describes the properties of the SMS test item. You can refer to this part when testing the
short message service (SMS), and then perform the related operations.
You can test whether the short message service is normal by sending an SMS to the destination
MS.
NOTE
The test terminal on which the SMS test is performed must be configured with the modem port. For details,
see 7.3 Configuring External Devices
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Test Count
The value must be a positive

integer. The default value is 5.
Test Interval
The value must be a positive

integer. The default value is 5. The
unit is second.

tests.
Service Center
Number
Only numbers, * and # can be

used.
Indicates the SMS center number.
Message
The length of the short message

content must be less than or equal
to 160 characters. The default
value is Happy Everyday!.
Indicates the short message

contents. You can enter a string.
Destination
Number
Only numbers, * and # can be

used.
Indicates the number of the

destination MS.
SQE(MS-PSTN) (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the SQE(MS-PSTN) test item. You can refer to this part when
performing a speech quality evaluation test by making calls between the PHU test terminal (such
14-40

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
as Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, Huawei U6100, or Huawei U1251) and the PSTN SQE
Server.
In this scenario, you need to configure the SQE(MS-PSTN) test item for the PHU terminal in
the Probe and configure the SQE test item in the PSTN SQE Server. For details about the PSTN
SQE Server, see the relevant user guide.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Call Count

Indicates the number of calls.

Call Duration


unit is second.
Call Interval


and the default value is 30, and
the unit is second.
Call Mode
l Outgoing: Refers to the

outgoing call mode.
l Incoming: Refers to the
incoming call mode.
When selecting Incoming,
you need to set Source
Number and SaveFile only.
Call Type
l Continuous Call: Refers to a

long call.
l Call by Call: Refers to a short
call, which is controlled by
the number of times a speech
file is played.
The default value is Call by
Call.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Destination
Number

Call Mode is set to Outgoing.
Exceptional
Interval

unit is second.

interval, that is, the time from the
previous call drop to the beginning
of the next call.

14-41
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
MOS Algorithm
l PESQ.862.1
l PESQ.862
l PESQ LQ
l PESQ Ie
The default value is PESQ.
862.1.
MOS Direction

The Half duplex mode, that is the
half duplex interaction mode is
Sample Type
Indicates the type of a speech

sample.
The 5s,English type is supported by
the Probe, that is the five seconds
are spent in playing a speech
sample, and the language of the
speech sample is English.
Save All Result

Files
Determines whether to save all

speech result files.
Source Number

Call Mode is set to Ingoing.
Indicates the caller number.
Score Threshold

Save All Result Files is set to
No.
Indicates the number of times for

scoring the speech quality during
the current call process.
Setup Timeout

unit is second.

setup.
If the call cannot be set up within
the period specified by this
parameter, the call setup fails.
14-42
Speech Sample
File

Software installation directory
\Bin\SQE\ResultFile
\VQA_Result.wav.
Indicates the storage path and name

of the recorded speech file.
Time Sync
Before performing a speech quality

evaluation test, check whether to
synchronize the PC time of the
calling part with the PC time of the
called part.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Sync SQE(MS-MS) (GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item. You can refer to this part
when performing a speech quality evaluation test by making calls between the PHU test terminals
(such as Huawei U120e , Huawei U1205, Huawei U6100, or Huawei U1251) configured on a
Probe.
In this scenario, the version numbers of the two PHU terminals must be the same. In addition,
only the calling PHU terminal needs to be configured with the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Destination MS
Indicates the destination MS.

You can select the destination
MS from the drop-down list.
The MS is another terminal
that is connected to the Probe.
Destination
Number
Call Type
l Continuous Call: refers to a long call.

l Call by Call: Refers to a short call,
which is controlled by the number of
times a speech file is played.
l Call by Count: It is controlled by the
number of speech evaluation scoring
times.
The default value is Call by Count.
Call Duration
You can set this property when Call

Type is set to Call by Call.
The default value is 120, and the unit is

second.
Call Interval


second.
Test Count


Score Count

Type is set to Call by Count.
The value ranges from 1 to 9999.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Indicates the number of times

for scoring the speech quality
during the current call
process.
14-43
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Exceptional
Interval

second.

the previous call drop to the
beginning of the next call.
Setup Timeout

second.
Indicates the maximum time

for call setup.
If the call cannot be set up
within the period specified by
this parameter, the call setup
fails.
MOS Algorithm
l PESQ.862.1
l PESQ.862
l PESQ LQ
l PESQ Ie
The default value is PESQ.862.1.
Speech
Destination File
The default speech destination file is

Software installation directory\Bin
\SQE\ResultFile\VQA_Result.wav.
Indicates the storage path and

name of the recorded speech
file.
Speech Sample
File

Software installation directory\Bin
\SQE\narr_ukasts_8.wav.
Indicates the speech sample

file provided by the Probe.
Save All Result

Files
Determines whether to save

all speech result files.
Score Threshold
You can set this property when Save All

Result Files is set to No.
Indicates the MOS threshold

for saving the speech result
file.
Send DTMF
You can select Yes or No. The default

value is No.
Determines whether to send

the dual tone multi-frequency
(DTMF) signaling.
When the MOS score is
smaller than the value of
DTMF Score Threshold, the
Probe sends the DTMF
signaling to the BSC.
14-44

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
DTMF Score
Threshold
You can set this property when Send

DTMF is set to Yes.
Indicates the MOS threshold

for sending the DTMF
signaling.
l When MOS Algorithm is set to

PESQ Ie, DTMF Score Threshold
ranges from 1 to 140.
l When MOS Algorithm is set to
PESQ.862.1, PESQ.862, or PESQ
LQ, DTMF Score Threshold ranges
from 1 to 5.
Noise Type

l No Noise: not to perform noise test
l Car Noise: car noise
l Street Noise: street noise
l White Noise: white noise
The default value is No Noise.
You can set this property when Noise
Type is set to Car Noise, Street Noise,
or White Noise.
Noise Value
The noise test is performed

during the speech quality
evaluation test.
Noise Type indicates the
noise type, such as the car
noise, street noise, and white
noise.
Indicates the SNR obtained
from the noise sample file.
You can select 5dB, 10dB, or 10dB.

Command Type

l Qualcomm Command: This
command type is applicable to
Qualcomm chipset-based terminals. If
terminals fail to initiate calls through
Qualcomm commands, you can
configure a modem port and set
Command Type to AT Command.

command type.
according to the terminal type.
Otherwise, call setup initiated
by terminals may fail.
l AT Command: After you set

Command Type to AT Command,
AT commands can be issued.
Before setting Command Type to AT
Command, you need to check that a
modem port has been configured.
The default value is Qualcomm
Command.
Video Phone (WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the Video Phone test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the video phone test, and then perform the related operations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-45
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Destination
Number
Indicates the destination number.
Setup Timeout

unit is second.

setup.
If the call cannot be set up within the
defined period, the call setup fails.
Call Duration

unit is second.
Indicates the duration of a call, that is,

the time from call setup to normal call
release.
Test Interval

unit is second.

calls, that is, the time from the
previous call disconnection to the
Exceptional
Interval

unit is second.
Indicates the call Exceptional Interval,

that is, the time from the previous call
drop to the beginning of the next call.
Test Count
Indicates the total number of calls.
Video Streaming (WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the WCDMA Video Streaming test item. You can refer to the
description when performing a video streaming test and then perform relevant operations.
To ensure that video files can be played normally, ensure that the PC is installed with an video
player, for example, RealPlayer.
Before performing a Video Streaming test, you must perform a Dial Up test.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
URL
The URL starting with http://.
Indicates the URL of video files.

The Probe supports only .rm video
files.
14-46
Test Interval

second.

tests.
Test Count
Indicates the number of times the

test is performed.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Disconnectio
n Mode

disconnecting the current
activated data connection.
l Keep Connected
After a test is complete, the Probe
originates the next video streaming
test instead of disconnecting the
specified in Test Interval is up.
completed
connection until the current
activated video steaming service is
complete. Before the next video
steaming test, you must perform the
dial-up test first.
Dial User
Dial
Password
Phone
Number
You can set this property after selecting

completed from Disconnection
Mode.

Mode.

dial-up connection.

Mode.

dial-up connection.

Therefore, you need to type the
user name before the dial-up
connection.

Therefore, you need to type the
user password before the dial-up
connection.
Voice Call (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)

This describes the properties of the Voice Call test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the voice call test, and then perform the related operations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-47
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Destination
Number
Indicates the outgoing call

number.
Call Type
l Continuous Call: refers to a long

call.
The Probe does not disconnect this
call until an exception occurs. If the
call setup fails or a call drop occurs
during the calling, the Probe
terminates the current call test and
starts another call test.
l Call by Call: refers to a short call.
Under the control of the Probe, an
MS initiates a call that lasts for the
period of time specified by Call
Duration and then waits for the
period of time specified by Test
Interval before initiating another
call. The number of times call tests
are performed is defined by Test
Count.
The default value is Call by Call.
Setup Timeout

second.

for call setup.
If the call cannot be set up
within the defined period, the
call setup fails.
Call Duration

second.
14-48

call, that is, the time from call
setup to normal call release.
Test Interval

second.

between two calls, the time
from the previous call
disconnection to the
Exceptional
Interval

second.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Call Mode

Indicates the mode of call

count.

l Finite: indicates that the number of
calls is limited. The number of calls
cannot exceed the value of Test
Count.
l Infinite: indicates that the number
of calls is unlimited.
The default value is Finite.
Test Count

Type is set to Call by Call and Call
Mode is set to Finite.
Indicates the total number of

calls.

Call Start Mode

l Unlimited: The Probe performs the
voice call test without determining
the current status of the terminal.
Indicates the mode in which

the Probe starts a voice call
test.
l Idle: When the terminal is not in idle

state, if the current call is not
terminated after the duration
specified by Waiting Time, the
Probe automatically disconnects the
call and performs the voice call test.
l Wait for call end: The Probe
performs the voice call test after the
current service performed on the
terminal is automatically complete.
Waiting Time

Start Mode is set to Idle.
Indicates the waiting time of

a test.
You can select 0s, 5s, 10s, 15s, 30s,

60s, or 90s.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-49
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Command Type

command type.
l Qualcomm Command: This

command type is applicable to
Qualcomm chipset-based terminals.
If terminals fail to initiate calls
through Qualcomm commands, you
can configure a modem port and set
Command Type to AT
Command.

according to the terminal
type. Otherwise, call setup
initiated by terminals may
fail.
l AT Command: After you set

Command Type to AT
Command, AT commands can be
issued.
Before setting Command Type to
AT Command, you need to check
that a modem port has been
configured.
The default value is Qualcomm
Command.
Wait
This describes the properties of the Wait test item. You can refer to this part when setting the
time interval between two test items, and then perform related operations.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Wait Duration

unit is second.
Indicates the wait duration, that is, the

time from the previous test item execution
to the beginning of the next test item
execution.
WAP Download (GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the WAP Download test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the WAP download test, and then perform the related operations.
You can test the download state of the WAP file by downloading file resources such as rings or
pictures.
You must perform the Dial Uptest before the WAP Download test.
14-50
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Test Count


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Test Interval

second.

tests.
Timeout

second.
Indicates the timeout period. The

timing starts when the first download
request is sent. If the download page
is not obtained within the preset time,
you can infer that the connection
fails.
Download
Type
Indicates the type of a downloaded

file.
l Ring&Picture: refers to
downloading pictures and rings.
l Java: refers to downloading
KJava.
The default value is Ring&Picture.
Local Path
Indicates the local path for saving the

downloaded file.
URL List
The URL starts with http://.
Indicates the URL for downloading

pictures, rings, or KJava.
IP
Contact local network operators to

obtain the IP address.
Indicates the IP address of the WAP

gateway.
Port


WAP.
WAP Gateway Connection (GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the WAP Gateway Connection test item. You can refer to this
part when performing the WAP gateway connection test, and then perform the related operations.
You can test the gateway connection by sending the ping packet to the gateway.
You must perform the Dial Up test before the WAP Gateway Connection test.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Test Count

Test Interval

second.

tests.

14-51
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Timeout

second.
Indicates the timeout time. The

timing starts when the first gateway
connection request is sent. If the
connection is not set up within the
preset time, you can infer that the
connection fails.
IP


gateway.
WAP Logon (GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the WAP Logon test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the WAP login test, and then perform the related operations.
You can test the WAP login and upload.
You must perform the Dial Up test before the WAP Logon test.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Test Count

Test Interval

second.

tests.
Timeout

second.

connection fails.
URL
Indicates the URL of the tested WAP

page.
Download
Icon
Indicates whether to download icons

on the title page.
l True: downloads icons on the

title page.
l False: not download icons on the
title page.
14-52
IP


gateway.
Port


WAP.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
WAP Page Refresh (GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the WAP Page Refresh test item. You can refer to this part
when performing the WAP page refreshing test, and then perform the related operations.
You can test the upload state of a WAP page by refreshing the same page many times.
You must perform the Dial Up test before the WAP Page Refresh test.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Test Count

Test Interval

second.

tests.
Timeout

second.

download fails.
Download
Icon
Indicates whether to download icons

on the title page.
l True: downloads icons on the title

page.
l False: not download icons on the
title page.
URL
Indicates the URL of the tested

WAP page.
IP


gateway.
Port


WAP.
NetEntry (WiMAX)
This section describes the properties of the WiMAX NetEntry test item. You can refer to this
section when the Probe performs NetEntry tests.
NetEntry tests are used for measuring the network access performance. Before accessing the
network during a test, the MS must exit from the network.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Test Count
Indicates the number of NetEntry tests.

14-53
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Test Interval
The default value is 5, and Indicates the interval between two

the unit is second.
NetEntry tests.
NetSearch (WiMAX)
This section describes the properties of the NetSearch test item of the WiMAX system. You
can perform the frequency scan test by referring to this part.
The NetSearch test is used to scan the frequencies that are searched by the UE.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Scan Type
Indicates the scan

type.
l Specified Frequency Scan: Indicates the

frequency to be scanned.
You can set the frequency in Center Frequency
List.
l Continuous Frequency Scan: Indicates the
continuous frequency scan.
The default value is Specified Frequency Scan.
Center Frequency
List
You can set this property when Scan Type is set to

Specified FrequencyScan.
Indicates the
center frequency
to be scanned.
CenterFreqStart

Continuous FrequencyScan.
Indicates the start

frequency of the
continuous
frequency scan.
Range:
l WiMAX 2.3GHz: 2.3 to 2.4
l WiMAX 2.5GHz: 2.496 to 2.69
The default value is 0 and the unit is MHz.
CenterFreqStep

The value ranges from 0.25 to 10 and the unit is
MHz.
14-54

Indicates the step

of the continuous
frequency scan.
The value of this
property must be
multiples of 0.01.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
CenterFreqEnd

Indicates the end

frequency of the
continuous
frequency scan.
Range:
l WiMAX 2.5GHz: 2.496 to 2.69
BandWidth

Indicates the
bandwidth.
The value can be 5, 7, 8.75, or 10.

Exceptional
Interval
The default value is 15. The value ranges from 0 to

30 and the unit is s.
Indicates the scan

timeout period.
When the value of
CINR is set to a
small value, you
are advised to set
this property to 15
or a greater value.
0 indicates the
scan with
indefinite scan
period. In this
case, the scanner
performs
continuous scan
until an exception
occurs.
Attach/Detach (LTE)
This describes the properties of the Attach and Detach test items. You can refer to this part
when performing the LTE attach or detach test, and then perform the related operations.
NOTE
The attach and detach tests are performed alternately. If an attach test is performed, the next attach test
cannot be performed until the detach test is performed.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-55
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Test
Item
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Attach
Attach
Type
Indicates the attach

test type. Currently,
only the attach test
of PS is supported.
l PS: Indicates that the attach tests for

only data services are to be performed.
l PS_CS: Indicates that the attach tests for
data and voice services are to be
performed.
Timeout
The value is a positive integer ranging from

15 to 60, and the default value is 15, and the
unit is second.
Indicates the time

to wait for the
attach success or
failure.
Attach
Mode
Indicates the attach

test mode.
l Attach only: Indicates that only the

attach test is performed.
Before performing the next attach test,
you must configure the LTE Detach test
item.
l Detach before Attach: Indicates that a
detach test must be performed before the
PS Attach test is performed.
TestCount
Indicates the test

count.
Detach
Type
Indicates the detach

only the detach test
of PS is supported.
l PS: Indicates that the detach tests for

only data services are to be performed.
l CS: Indicates that the detach tests for
only speech services are to be
performed.
l PS_CS: Indicates that the detach tests
for data and voice services are to be
performed.
Detach
Detach
Type

l PS: Indicates that the detach tests of only
data services are to be performed.
l CS: Indicates that the detach tests of
only speech services are to be
performed.
Indicates the detach

only the detach test
of PS is supported.
l PS_CS: Indicates that the detach tests of

data and voice services are to be
performed.
14-56

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Test
Item
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Timeout
The value is a positive integer ranging from

15 to 60, and the default value is 15. The unit
is second.
Indicates the time

to wait for the
detach success or
failure.
Cell Scan (LTE)

This section describes the properties of the Cell Scan test item. You can perform the
corresponding LTE cell scanning tests by referring to this part.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
FreqBandSear
chType
Indicates the type of a

cell to be scanned.
l Spec Band specifies that the cell searching is

performed on the specified frequency band. The
value ranges from Low Band to High Band.
l Spec Freq specifies that the cell searching is
performed on the specified EARFCNs. Note
that the cell searching can be performed on a
maximum of three EARFCNs.
The number of EARFCNs to be scanned can be
set in FreqCount. The values of EARFCNs can
be set in SpecFreqx (x ranges from 1 to 3).
Low Band
The value is an integer ranging from 0 to 39650,

Indicates the start

value of a frequency
band to be scanned.
High Band

Indicates the end

value of a frequency
band to be scanned.
Iperf (LTE)
This describes the properties of the Iperf test item. You can refer to this part when performing
the TCP or UDP of the LTE network performance test, and then perform the related operations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-57
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Mode
Indicates the test mode.
l Server: Indicates the server mode.

As the server, the Probe listens the
specified port, performs the related
operations according to the
configuration after receiving a
connection request or data from the
client, and displays the network
performance indicator.
l Client: Indicates the client mode.
As the client, the Probe sends TCP or
UDP packets to the specified server in
a period according to the
configuration.
Protocol
Supports the TCP and UDP.
Indicates the data transmission

protocol type.
Port
The value ranges from 0 to 65535.
l When Mode is set to Server,

it refers to the port listened by
the server.
l When Mode is set to Client,
it indicates the client port
connected to the server.
Report
Interval
The value is an integer, and the unit is

second.
Indicates the data report cycle.
The default value is 0, which indicates that

the data is not periodically reported.
Test Count
Indicates the number of Iperf

tests.
Test Interval

second.

two continuous Iperf tests.
BandWidth
You can set this property when Mode is

set to Client.
Indicates the data transmission

bandwidth.
The value is an integer, and the default

value is 1000. The unit is kbit/s.
Server
Address
14-58

set to Client.

Indicates the IP address of the

server accessed by the client.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Test Mode

set to Client.
Indicates the client test mode.

l Normal: Indicates the unidirectional
test mode.
l DualTest: Indicates the half duplex
test mode.
l Tradeoff: Indicates the duplex test
mode.
The default value is Normal.
Test Time

set to Client.
Indicates the test duration.
The value is an integer, and the default

value is 10, and the unit is second.
Frequency Scan (LTE)

This describes the properties of the Frequency Scan test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the LTE frequency scanning test, and then perform the related operations.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
FreqBandSearchType
Indicates the band

searching type.
l All Band: Search the cell in all bands

supported by the UE.
l Spec Band: Search the cell in the specified
band.
The default value is All Band.
FreqBandSearchDelay
The value can be set to 100, 300, 500, and 1000.

The unit is ms.
Low Band

FreqBandSearchType is set to Spec Band.
Indicates the cycle

for reporting the
frequency scanning
result.
Indicates the start
band.

High Band

FreqBandSearchType is set to All Band.
Indicates the end

band.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-59
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
14.1.3 Test Items of PCTel Scanners

This describes the PCTel scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when
designing a test plan for the PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations.
Test Items Supported By the PCTel Scanners

This provides the test items supported by the scanners of the PCTel series.
N
et
w
or
k
PCTel DTI EX
Test Items
PCTel DTI LX
Test Items
PCTel PCT-505
Test Items
PCTel PCT-520
Test Items
G
S
M
l CW
l CW
l CW
l GSM Scanning
l GSM Scanning
l GSM Scanning
l Spectrum
Analysis
l Spectrum
Analysis
l Spectrum
Analysis
W
C
D
M
A
l CW
l CW
l CW
l CW
l RSSI Scanning
l Pilot Scanning
l RSSI Scanning
l RSSI Scanning
l Spectrum
Analysis
l RSSI Scanning
l Spectrum
Analysis
l Spectrum
Analysis
l TopN Pilot
Scanning
l TopN Pilot
Scanning
l TopN Pilot
Scanning
C
D
M
A
l Spectrum
Analysis
l TopN Pilot
Scanning
l CW
l Pilot Scanning
l RSSI Scanning
l Spectrum
Analysis
l TopN Pilot
Scanning
W
i
M
A
X
l CW
l RSSI Scanning
l TopN Preamble
Index Scanning
CW (PCTel)
This section describes the properties of CW test item. You can refer to this section when
performing the CW test by using the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX PCTel scanners.
14-60

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Description
Channel
l For GSM, WCDMA, and CDMA scanners, Channel indicates the tested
ARFCN.
You can manually enter ARFCNs. Multiple ARFCNs are separated by
commas. A maximum of 100 ARFCNs can be set.
l For WiMAX scanners, Channel indicates the channel corresponding to
the tested frequency. The format is [frequency | channel].
in the right area. Enter the value of Frequency in the
You can click
displayed Channel Setting dialog box. The system automatically
calculates the channel to which this frequency belongs.
Output Mode
Indicates the interval of reporting GSM or WCDMA scanner data. You can
select either of the following values:
l Normal: Indicates that scanner data is reported at the default interval.
l Stacked: Indicates that scanner data is reported at an interval of 20 ms.
This property can be set for only EX or LX PCTel scanners.
GSM Scanning
This describes the properties of the GSM Scanning test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the scanning test by using the GSM PCTel scanner, and then perform the related
operations.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Channel List
l The ARFCNs of GSM 850 (869

MHz - 894 MHz) range from
127 to 252.
l The ARFCNs of E-GSM (925
MHz - 960 MHz) range from 0
to 124.
Description
Indicates the tested ARFCN. Click
on the right of the Channel List. In the
displayed GSM channel dialog box,
select the ARFCNs to be scanned.
The maximum number is 255.
l The ARFCNs of DCS 1800

(1805 MHz - 1880 MHz) range
from 511 to 886.
l The ARFCNs of PCS 1900
(1930 MHz - 1990 MHz) range
from 511 to 811.
RSSI
Threshold
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
The value ranges from -115 to -80.

The default value is -105. The Unit
is dBm.
Indicates the threshold of the received

signal strength indicator.

14-61
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Option Code
Indicates the function option of the

scanner.
l BSIC & C/I, which indicates

that the scanner used for the test
supports both the BSIC and C/
I functions.
l BSIC, which indicates that the
scanner used for the test
supports only the BSIC
function.
If the scanner does not support the C/I

function, Option Code must be set to
BSIC. Otherwise, the test cannot be
performed normally. In the IE view,
The C/I value is displayed as -10.
Spectrum Analysis
This describes the properties of the Spectrum Analysis test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the spectrum analysis by using the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA PCTel scanner, and
then perform the related operations.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Center Frequency
Unit: MHz
Indicates the center frequency.
Span
Unit: MHz
Indicates the bandwidth

measured in the spectrum
analysis.
RBW
You can select 5, 10, 20, 40, or 80.

kHz.
Indicates the resolution

bandwidth, which is used to
calculate the start frequency and
the number of ARFCNs.
NumberSweeps
You can select 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16. The

default value is 2.
Indicates the number of scanning

times.
Pilot Scanning
This describes the properties of the Pilot Scanning test item. You can refer to this part when
performing the pilot scanning test by using the WCDMA or CDMA PCTel scanner, and then
14-62
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Channel
A maximum of six ARFCNs can

be tested simultaneously.
Multiple ARFCNs are separated
by commas. Each pilot code
ranges from 0 to 511.
Indicates the tested ARFCN.

Click
on the right of Channel,
and then set the pilot code to be
scanned.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
ChipWindowSize
You can manually enter the size

ranging from 1 to 64. The
dB.
Indicates the size of the chip

window.
PNThreshold
You can manually enter the

threshold. The value ranges
from -30 to 0. The default value
is -20. The unit is dB.
Indicates the threshold of the

available pseudo-random number.
RSSI Scanning
This section describes the properties of the RSSI Scanning test item. You can refer to this section
when performing the signal strength scan test by using the WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX PCTel
scanners.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
BandWidth
You can select 5MHz or

10MHz.
Indicates the used bandwidth of the

WiMAX scanner.
Channel for
BandWidth
Format: [frequency |
channel]
Indicates the channel corresponding to the

tested frequency of the WiMAX scanner.
The procedure for setting this property is
as follows:
1. Select a used bandwidth from
BandWidth.
in the right area. The
2. Click
Channel Setting dialog box is
displayed.
3. Enter the value of Frequency in the
displayed Channel Setting dialog
box. The system automatically
calculates the channel to which this
frequency belongs.
Channel
Indicates the tested ARFCN of the

WCDMA or CDMA scanner.
You can manually enter ARFCNs.
Multiple ARFCNs are separated by
commas.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-63
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Output Mode
You can select either of

Indicates the scanner data reporting mode.

This property can be set for only EX or LX
PCTel scanners.
l Normal: Indicates
that scanner data is
reported at the
default interval.
l Stacked: Indicates
that scanner data is
reported at an
interval of 20 ms.
TopN Pilot Scanning

This describes the properties of the TopN Pilot Scanning test item. You can refer to this part
when measuring TopN pilots by using the WCDMA or CDMA PCTel scanner, and then perform
the related operations.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
You can manually enter the number ranging

from 1 to 32.
Indicates the number

of pilots to be scanned.
Channel
A maximum of six ARFCNs can be tested

simultaneously. Multiple ARFCNs are
separated by commas.
Indicates the tested

ARFCN.
ChipWindowSize
You can manually enter the size ranging

from 1 to 64. The default value is 32. The
unit is dB.
Indicates the size of

the chip window.
PNThreshold
You can manually enter the threshold. The

value ranges from -30 to 0. The default value
is -20. The unit is dB.
Indicates the threshold

of the available
pseudo-random
number (PN).
TopN Preamble Index Scanning

This describes the properties of the TopN Preamble Index Scanning test item. You can refer
to this part when measuring Top N preamble index by using the WiMAX PCTel scanner, and
14-64
Property
Value/Range/Unit
You can manually enter Indicates the number of preamble indexes to be

the number ranging
scanned.
from 1 to 32. The default
value is 3.
Description

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
BandWidth
You can select 5MHz or

10MHz.
Indicates the used bandwidth.
Channel for
BandWidth
Format : [frequency |
channel]
Indicates the channel corresponding to the

tested frequency. The setting steps are as
follows:
1. Select a used bandwidth from
BandWidth.
2. Click
in the right area. The Channel
Setting dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter the value of Frequence in the
displayed Channel Setting dialog box. The
system automatically calculates the channel
to which this frequency belongs.
14.1.4 Test Items of Anritsu Scanners

This describes the Anritsu scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when
designing a test plan for the Anritsu scanner, and then perform the related operations.
Test Items Supported By the Anritsu Scanners

This provides the test items supported by the scanners of the Anritsu ML series.
No.
Test Item
ML8720
ML8740
ML8742
CW
GSM Specified/
UNSpecified
MultiNetwork Specified
MultiNetwork UNSpecified
Specified Base Station

Measurement
UNSpecified Base Station

Measurement
NOTE
l : indicates that the corresponding scanner supports the test item.

l : indicates that the corresponding scanner does not support the test item.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-65
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
CW (Anritsu, GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the CW test item. You can refer to this section when testing a
continuous wave by using the GSM or WCDMA Anritsu scanner.
Property
Unspecifie
d
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Calibrate User
Unit: dB
Indicates the user correction

value, which is used for
compensating antenna loss.
Reference
The value can be any of the

following:
Indicates whether Calibrate

User is valid.
l True
l False
Adjust Antenna

following:

adjusting the antenna gain.
l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
Disable.
Conditions
Carrier
Frequency
The value ranges from 925.0

to 960.0, 1805.0 to 1880.0,
and 2110.0 to 2170.0, at a
step length of 0.1. The unit is
MHz.
Indicates the carrier

frequency to be tested.
Trigger
Demultiplier
The value range is 1 to 500
Indicates the external

triggering demultiplier. One
sampling is performed every
time a triggering pulse of the
preset value is detected.
ScanRate
l When External Trigger

is set to 0, ScanRate
ranges from 0.01 to 0.09,
0.1 to 0.9, 1 to 9, 10 to 90,
and 100 to 500. The unit
is second.
Indicates the measurement

duration.

is set to 1, ScanRate
ranges from 1 to 500. The
unit is times.
If ScanRate is set to a value
less than 10 (ms), the
measurement duration is 10
ms.
14-66

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
External
Trigger
Value/Range/Unit
Description

following:
Indicates whether to adopt

the external triggering mode.
l 0: The external triggering

mode is not adopted, that
is, CWs are sampled
according to the internal
timing mode.
l 1: The external triggering
mode is adopted, that is,
CWs are sampled
according to the external
triggering mode.
Disable.
Data Processing The value can be any of the
Method
following:
l Median: The
measurement duration is
50.
Indicates the method for

processing the data sampled
during each measurement
duration.
l Average: The
measurement duration is
-1.
Average.
Threshold
The unit is dB.
Indicates the threshold of

white noise. The
recommended value is -120.
GSM Specified/UNSpecified (Anritsu, GSM)

This describes the properties of the GSM Specified/UNSpecified test item. You can refer to
this section when testing a specified or unspecified GSM cell by using the GSM Anritsu scanner.
Property
GSM
Specfied/
Unspecifi
ed BTS
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Calibrate User
Unit: dB
Indicates the user

correction value, which is
used for compensating
antenna loss.
Reference

following:
Indicates whether
Calibrate User is valid.
l True
l False
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-67
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Adjust Antenna
Value/Range/Unit
Description

following:

adjusting the antenna
gain.
l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
Specified/
Unspecified
The value can be Unspecified

or Specified.
Specified.
ARFCN/
Frequency
Indicates the specified or

unspecified BTS
measurement.
Enables you to set the

ARFCN or frequency of
the channel to be tested.
You can set this
parameter as follows:
1. Click
on the right
of ARFCN/
Frequency. The
Unspecified Config
Dialog dialog box is
displayed.
2. In the Unspecified
Config Dialog dialog
box, set the starting
and ending ARFCNs
or frequencies, the
number of channels to
be tested, and whether
to perform the test.
Condition
s
Threshold
The threshold must be set to a

value not greater than -120.
The unit is dB.

white noise.
BSIC Decode

following:
Indicates whether to
decode the base station
identify code (BSIC).
l 0: The BSIC is decoded.

l 1: The BSIC is not
decoded.
14-68

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
External Trigger
Value/Range/Unit
Description

following:
adopt the external
triggering mode.
l Disable: Sampling is
performed according to the
internal timing mode.
l Enable: Sampling is
external triggering mode.
Trigger
Demultiplier

triggering demultiplier.
One sampling is
performed every time a
triggering pulse of the
Measurement
Duration
l When External Trigger is

set to Disable,
Measurement Duration
ranges from 0.02 to 0.05 at
a step length of 0.01. The
unit is second.
Indicates the
measurement duration.

set to Enable,
ranges from 1 to 500 at a
step length of 1. The unit is
times.
RSSI Methods
The value can be -1 and 0% to

100% at a step length of 10%.
l The value -1 indicates
Average.

processing the received
signal strength indicator.
l The range 0%-100%

indicates the frequency
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% indicate Minimum,
Median, and Maximum,
respectively.
The default value is Average.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-69
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
C/I Methods
Value/Range/Unit
Description


processing the C/I data.

Average.
l The range 0%-100%
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
respectively.
MultiNetwork Specified (Anritsu, GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the MultiNetwork Specified test item. You can refer to this
section when testing multi-network specified cell by using the GSM or WCDMA Anritsu
scanner.
Property
Common
Setting
External Trigger
Value/Range/Unit
Description

following:

the external triggering
mode.
l Disable: CWs are

sampled according to the
l Enable: CWs are
sampled according to the
Disable.
14-70

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Diversity
Value/Range/Unit
Description

following:

diversity function or the
two carrier frequencies
measurement function.
l OFF: The diversity

function is disabled.
If the required diversity
antenna is not installed,
you can select only
OFF.
l Receive ANT: The
diversity function is
enabled.
l Two Carrier: The two
carrier frequencies
measurement function is
enabled.
The default value is OFF.
GSM
Specified
BTS
Calibrate User
Unit: dB
Indicates the user

antenna loss.
Reference

following:
Indicates whether
l True
l False
Adjust Antenna

following:

l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
Disable.
RF Input Type
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Only RF Input1 is
supported for the GSM
measurement.

Indicates the radio

frequency (RF) input mode.
14-71
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
ARFCN/
Frequency
Value/Range/Unit
Description

ARFCN or frequency to be
scanned.
Click
on the right of
ARFCN/Frequency. In
the displayed Unspecified
Config Dialog dialog box,
set the starting and ending
ARFCNs or frequencies,
the number of channels to
be tested, and whether to
perform the test.
Threshold
The threshold must be set to

a value not greater than -120.
The unit is dB.

white noise.
BSIC Decode

following:
Indicates whether to decode

the BSIC.

l 1: The BSIC is not
decoded.
Trigger
Demultiplier

One sampling is performed
every time a triggering
pulse of the preset value is
detected.
Measurement
Duration

is set to Disable,
ranges from 0.02 to 0.05
at a step length of 0.01.
The unit is second.

duration.

is set to Enable,
ranges from 1 to 500 at a
step length of 1. The unit
is times.
14-72

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
RSSI Methods
Value/Range/Unit
Description
The value can be -1 and 0%

to 100% at a step length of
10%.
Indicates the data

processing method for the
received signal strength
indicator.

Average.
l The range 0% to 100%
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
C/I Methods

10%.
Indicates the data

C/I.

Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
Search Band
Select

following:
Indicates the specified band

to be tested for the GSM.
l Both Band
l Each Band
The default value is Both
Band.
WCDMA
Specified
BTS
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Both Band
You can select any value

from 1 to 32.
Indicates the number of a

dual-band.
Carrier
Frequency
The value ranges from

2110.0 to 2200.0 at a step
length of 0.2. The unit is
MHz.

frequency of an antenna in
RF Input2 mode.

14-73
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
RF Input Type
Only RF Input2 is
supported for the WCDMA
measurement.
Indicates the radio

frequency input mode.
Calibrate User
Unit: dB
Indicates the user

antenna loss.
Reference

following:
Indicates whether
l True
l False
Adjust Antenna

following:

l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
Disable.
Measurement
Duration
The value can be 0.01, 0.02,

0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, or
10. The default value is 0.5.
The unit is second.

duration.
Fingers at ANT2
The value range is 0-6. The

value 0 indicates that the
scanner is not installed with
any diversity antenna.

number of fingers used by
antenna 2.
All Methods

10%.
Indicates that the same data

processing method is used
for the RSCP, ratio of the
pilot energy per chip to total
power spectral density of
the receive bandwidth (Ec/
No), and signal-to-noise
ratio (SIR).

Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
14-74

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
RSCP Method
Value/Range/Unit
Description

10%.
Indicates the data

RSCP.

Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
Ec/No Method

10%.
Indicates the data

Ec/No.

Average.
l The range 0% to -100%
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
SIR Method

10%.
Indicates the data

SIR.

Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-75
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Rake Threshold
The value range is 0 to 20.

The default value is 20. The
unit is dB.

the rake receiver. The valid
receive range of the rake
receiver is from the best
finger minus the rake
threshold to the best finger.
Selection Level

unit is dB.
Indicates the range of the

fingers that can be received.
A finger that is greater than
the receiver noise plus the
selection level can be
received.
Channel Code
Sets the primary and

secondary scrambling
codes and the channel
number.
You can set this parameter
as follows:
on the right of
1. Click
Channel Code. The
MeasureChannel
dialog box is displayed.
2. In the
MeasureChannel
dialog box, set the
primary and secondary
scrambling codes,
channel number, and
coding mode.
MultiNetwork UNSpecified (Anritsu, GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the MultiNetwork UNSpecified test item. You can refer to this
section when testing multi-network unspecified cell by using the GSM or WCDMA Anritsu
scanner.
14-76

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Commo
n
Setting
External Trigger
Value/Range/Unit
Description

following:

the external triggering
mode.
l Disable: Sampling is
l Enable: Sampling is
Diversity

following:
l OFF: The diversity function
is disabled.
antenna is not installed, you
can select only OFF.

diversity function or the
two carrier frequencies
measurement function.
l Receive ANT: The diversity

function is enabled.
l Two Carrier: The two
carrier frequencies
measurement function is
enabled.
GSM
UNSpec
ified
BTS
Calibrate User
Unit: dB
Indicates the user

antenna loss.
Reference

following:
Indicates whether
l True
l False
Adjust Antenna

following:

l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
RF Input Type
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Only RF Input1 is supported for

the GSM measurement.

Indicates the radio

frequency (RF) input
mode.
14-77
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
ARFCN/
Frequency
Value/Range/Unit
Description

ARFCN or frequency to
be scanned.
as follows:
1. Click
on the right of
ARFCN/Frequency.
The Unspecified
box is displayed.
2. In the Unspecified
box, set the starting
and ending ARFCNs
or frequencies, the
number of channels to
be tested, and whether
to perform the test.
Threshold
The threshold must be set to a

value not greater than -120. The
unit is dB.

white noise.
BSIC Decode

following:
decode the BSIC.

l 1: The BSIC is not decoded.
Trigger
Demultiplier

One sampling is
performed every time a
triggering pulse of the
Measurement
Duration

set to Disable, Measurement
Duration ranges from 0.02 to
0.05 at a step length of 0.01.
The unit is second.
Indicates the

set to Enable, Measurement
Duration ranges from 1 to
500 at a step length of 1. The
unit is times.
14-78

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
RSSI Methods
Value/Range/Unit
Description

Indicates the data

received signal strength
indicator.

Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
respectively.
C/I Methods

Average.
Indicates the data

C/I.

distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
respectively.
WCDM
A
UNSpec
ified
BTS
Carrier
Frequency
The value ranges from 2110.0 to

2200.0 at a step length of 0.2. The
unit is MHz.

frequency of an antenna in
RF Input2 mode.
RF Input Type
Only RF Input1 is supported for

the WCDMA measurement.
Indicates the RF input

mode.
Calibrate User
Unit: dB
Indicates the user

antenna loss.
Reference

following:
Indicates whether
l True
l False
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-79
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Adjust Antenna
Value/Range/Unit
Description

following:

l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
Measurement
Duration
The value can be 0.01, 0.02,

0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, or 10.
The default value is 0.5. The unit
is second.
Indicates the
Fingers at ANT2

value 0 indicates that the scanner
is not installed with any diversity
antenna.

antenna 2.
All Methods

Indicates that the same

data processing method is
used for the RSCP, Ec/No,
and SIR.

Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively indicate
Minimum, Median, and
Maximum.
RSCP Method

Average.
Indicates the data

RSCP.

distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
Maximum.
14-80

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Ec/No Method
Value/Range/Unit
Description

Indicates the data

Ec/No.

Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
Maximum.
SIR Method

Average.
Indicates the data

SIR.

distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
Maximum.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Rake Threshold

dB.

the rake receiver. The
valid receive range of the
rake receiver is from the
best finger minus the rake
threshold to the best
finger.
Selection Level

default value is 4. The unit is dB.

fingers that can be
received. A finger that is
greater than the receiver
noise plus the selection
level can be received.

14-81
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Channel Code
Value/Range/Unit
Description

number.
as follows:
on the right of
1. Click
Channel Code. The
MeasureChannel
dialog box is
displayed.
2. In the
MeasureChannel
dialog box, set the
scrambling codes,
channel number, and
coding mode.
CH
Limits
14-82
Group Number
Start
Indicates the starting

number of the primary
scrambling code group.
Group Number
End
Indicates the ending

Cell Number
Start

default value is 0.
Indicates the starting cell

number.
Cell Number
End

default value is 7.
Indicates the ending cell

number.
Min.Secondary
SC

default value is 0.
Indicates the minimum

code.
Max.Secondary
SC

default value is 0.

code.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Searching
Method
Value/Range/Unit
Description

following:
Indicates the searching

method.
l P-CPICH: Scrambling codes

are searched on only the
Common Pilot Channel
(CPICH).
l SCH: Scrambling codes are
searched on the Primary
Synchronization Channel (PSCH) and Secondary
Synchronization Channel (SSCH).
The default value is SCH.
Measurement
Channel


the channel to be
measured.
Specified
Channel
The value can be False or True.


the specified channel.
Measurement Channel is valid

only when Specified Channel is
set to True.
Specified Base Station Measurement (Anritsu, WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the Specified Base Station Measurement test item. You can
refer to this section when testing a specified WCDMA cell by using the Anritsu scanner.
Property
Unspecified
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Calibrate User
Unit: dB
Indicates the user

antenna loss.
Reference

following:
Indicates whether
l True
l False
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-83
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Adjust Antenna
Value/Range/Unit
Description

following:

l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
Disable.
Conditions
Measurement
Duration
The value can be 0.01,

0.02, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1,
2, 5, or 10. The default
value is 0.5. The unit is
second.

duration.
Fingers at
ANT1

The recommended value is
6.

antenna 1.
Fingers at
ANT2

The value 0 indicates that
the scanner is not installed
with any diversity antenna.

antenna 2.
Diversity

following:

diversity function.

you can select only
OFF.
l Receive ANT: The
enabled.
14-84

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
All Methods
Value/Range/Unit
Description
The value can be -1 and

0% to 100% at a step
length of 10%.

for the RSCP, Ec/No, and
SIR.

Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% indicate
Minimum, Median,
and Maximum,
respectively.
Average.
RSCP Method

length of 10%.
Indicates the data

RSCP.

Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% indicate
Minimum, Median,
and Maximum,
respectively.
Average.
Ec/No Method

length of 10%.
Indicates the data

Ec/No.

Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% indicate
Minimum, Median,
and Maximum,
respectively.
Average.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-85
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
SIR Method
Value/Range/Unit
Description

length of 10%.
Indicates the data

SIR.

Average.
distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% indicate
Minimum, Median,
and Maximum,
respectively.
Average.
14-86
Rake
Threshold

unit is dB.

Selection Level

unit is dB.

fingers that can be received.
A finger that is greater than
the receiver noise plus the
selection level can be
received.
Carrier
Frequency

2110.0 to 2200.0 at a step
MHz.

frequency of the antenna
RF input.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
CH Code
Channel Code
Value/Range/Unit
Description

number.
as follows:
on the right of
1. Click
Channel Code. The
MeasureChannel
2. In the
MeasureChannel
dialog box, set the
scrambling codes,
channel number, and
coding mode.
UNSpecified Base Station Measurement (Anritsu, WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the UNSpecified Base Station Measurement test item. You
can refer to this section when testing an unspecified WCDMA cell by using the Anritsu scanner.
Property
Unspecifie
d
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Calibrate User
Unit: dB
Indicates the user

antenna loss.
Reference

following:
Indicates whether
l True
l False
Adjust Antenna

following:

l Disable
l Standard
l Customized
Disable.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-87
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Conditions
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Measurement
Duration
The value can be 0.01,

0.02, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1,
2, 5, or 10. The default
value is 0.5. The unit is
second.

duration.
Fingers at ANT1

The recommended value is number of fingers used by
6.
antenna 1.
Fingers at ANT2

The value 0 indicates that
the scanner is not installed
with any diversity antenna.

antenna 2.
Diversity

following:

diversity function.

you can select only
OFF.
l Receive ANT: The
enabled.
All Methods

length of 10%.
Average.

for the RSCP, Ec/No, and
SIR.
l The range 0% to
100% indicates the
frequency distribution.
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
14-88

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
RSCP Method
Value/Range/Unit
Description

length of 10%.
Indicates the data

RSCP.

Average.
l The range 0% to
100% indicates the
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
Ec/No Method

length of 10%.
Indicates the data

Ec/No.

Average.
l The range 0% to
100% indicates the
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
SIR Method

length of 10%.
Indicates the data

SIR.

Average.
l The range 0% to
100% indicates the
Values 0%, 50%, and
100% respectively
indicate Minimum,
Median, and
Maximum.
Average.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-89
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
CH Limits
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Rake Threshold

unit is dB.

Selection Level

unit is dB.

fingers that can be
received. A finger that is
greater than the receiver
noise plus the selection
level can be received.
Carrier Frequency

2110.0 to 2200.0 at a step
MHz.

frequency of the antenna
RF input.
Group Number
Start
Indicates the starting

Group Number
End
Indicates the ending

Cell Number Start

Indicates the starting cell

number.
Cell Number End

Indicates the ending cell

number.
Min.Secondary SC


code.
Max.Secondary
SC


code.
Searching Method

following:
Indicates the searching

method.
l P-CPICH: Scrambling
codes are searched on
only the CPICH
channel.
l SCH: Scrambling
codes are searched on
P-SCH and S-SCH.
The default value is SCH.
14-90

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Measurement
Channel
The value ranges from 1 to Indicates the number of the

32, and the default value is channel to be measured.
6.
Specified Channel
The value can be False or

True. The default value is
False.

specified channel.
Measurement Channel is
valid only when Specified
Channel is set to True.
CH Code
Channel Code

number.
as follows:
on the right of
1. Click
Channel Code. The
MeasureChannel
2. In the
MeasureChannel
dialog box, set the
scrambling codes,
channel number, and
coding mode.
14.1.5 Test Items of Rohde & Schwarz Scanners

This describes the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner test items and their properties. You can
refer to this part when designing a test plan for the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner, and then
TSMX Spectrum Analysis (WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the TSMX Spectrum Analysis test item. You can refer to this
section when performing the spectrum analysis by using the TSMX scanner.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Center
Frequency
You can manually enter a value ranging

from 80 MHz to 3 GHz.
Indicates the center

frequency.
Span
You can manually enter a value. The

maximum value is 40. The unit is MHz.
Indicates the bandwidth to

be scanned.

14-91
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
RBW
Unit: kHz
Indicates the resolution

bandwidth.
TSMX TopN (WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the TSMX TopN test item. You can refer to this section when
measuring TopN pilots by using the TSMX scanner.
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Frequency
You can set a maximum of six frequencies by using

commas to separate the frequencies. The value ranges
from 80 MHz to 3 GHz.
Indicates the
frequency under
test.
Pilot Number
Indicates the
maximum number
of pilots to be
scanned.
PNThreshold
The value range is -130 to -20. The default value is

-115. The unit is dBm.
Indicates the valid

threshold of the
RSCP signal.
MeasureRate
The value range is 0.5 to 10. The unit is Hz
Indicates the
scanning
frequency.
TimeSyncMod
e
The value can be any of the following:
Indicates the time

synchronization
mode.
l 0: You can use the internal clock to synchronize

the TSMX scanner.
l 1: You can use the GSM signal to synchronize the
TSMX scanner.
l 2: You can use the PSS or GSM signal to
synchronize the TSMX scanner.
l 3: You can use the PPS pulse to synchronize the
TSMX scanner.
l 4: This mode can be used for only the
WCDMA_3GPP PN scanner. The average of
measured CPICH signals is used.
l 256: The synchronization clock source in use is
unknown.
14.2 Description of Predefined Events

This describes the system predefined events of the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX and
LTE networks. You can refer to this part when configuring event parameters on each network.
14-92

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
14.2.1 General Events

This section describes the general events provided by the Probe. You can refer to this section
when configuring general events and then perform the related operations.
14.2.2 GSM Predefined Events
This describes the GSM predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events
on the GSM network.
14.2.3 WCDMA Predefined Events
This describes the WCDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring
events on the WCDMA network.
14.2.4 CDMA Predefined Events
This describes the CDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events
on the CDMA network, and then perform the related operations.
14.2.5 WiMAX Predefined Events
This section describes the predefined events in the WiMAX network. You can refer to this section
when configuring predefined events in the WiMAX network.
14.2.6 LTE Predefined Events
This section describes the predefined events in the LTE network. You can configure LTE
network events by referring to the following descriptions.
14.2.1 General Events

This section describes the general events provided by the Probe. You can refer to this section
when configuring general events and then perform the related operations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Name
Meaning
Description
Call Setup
Timeout
Call setup
timeout
This event occurs when a call setup event times out.
Data Transfer Start
Data transfer start
This event occurs when a data service test, such as

FTP test or HTTP test, starts.
Filemark
A filemark is encountered in the logfile.
Record Pause
Suspension of
logfile recording
This event occurs when you suspend the recording

of logfiles in the Probe.
Record Resume
Resuming of
logfile recording
This event occurs when logfiles continue to be

recorded from the time point the recording is
suspended for the last time.
Test Stop
Stopping of a test
This event occurs when a test is stopped in the

Probe.
MS Connected
MS connection
success
This event occurs when an MS is successfully

connected.
MS Disconnected
MS
disconnection
success
This event occurs when an MS is successfully

disconnected.

14-93
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
14.2.2 GSM Predefined Events

This describes the GSM predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events
on the GSM network.
Packet Service Events

This describes the packet service events of the GSM. You can refer to this part when configuring
the packet service events on the GSM network, and then perform the related operations.
14-94
Name
Meaning
Description
AttachAttem
pt
Attach
attempt
The MS attempts to attach to the packet service.
AttachSuc
Attach
success
If the MS receives the Attach Accept or Attach Complete

message within the specified time after sending the Attach
Request message, you can infer that the attaching is
successful.
AttachFail
Attach
failure
After sending the Attach Request message, the MS receives

the Attach Reject message or does not receive the Attach
Accept or Attach Complete message until the Attach Request
message times out.
Data
Transfer
Start
Data transfer
start
The data services such as FTP and HTTP services start to be

executed, and thus the data transfer starts.
DetachAtte
mpt
Detach
attempt
The MS attempts to detach from the packet service.
DetachSuc
Detach
success
If the MS receives the Detach Accept message within the

specified time after sending the Detach Request message, you
can infer that the detaching is successful.
GSMMMS
MOAttempt
MMS
Sending
attempt
The MS attempts to send an MMS.
GSMMMS
MOSuc
MMS
sending
success
The MS sends an MMS successfully.
GSMMMS
MOFail
MMS
sending
failure
The MS fails to send an MMS.
PDPActivati
onReq
PDP
activation
request
If the MS sends the Activate PDP Context Request message,

you can infer that the PDP request is activated.
PDPActivati
onSuc
PDP
activation
success
If the MS receives the Activate PDP Context Accept message

after sending the Activate PDP Context Request message, you
can infer that the PDP activation is successful.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
PDPActivati
onFail
PDP
activation
failure
If the MS does not receive the Activate PDP Context Accept

message within the specified time after sending the Activate
PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP
activation fails.
PDPDeactiv
ationReq
PDP
deactivation
request
The MS sends the Deactivate PDP Context Request message

to request the PDP deactivation.
PDPDeactiv
ationSuc
PDP
deactivation
success
If the MS receives the Deactivate PDP Context Accept

message after sending the Deactivate PDP Context Request
message, you can infer that the PDP activation is successful.
RAUpdateR
eq
Routing area
update
request
The MS sends the Routing Area Update Request message to

request the routing area update.
RAUpdateS
uc
Routing area
update
success
If the MS receives the Routing Area Update Accept or

Routing Area Update Complete message after sending the
Routing Area Update Request message, you can infer that the
routing area is updated successfully.
RAUpdateFa
il
Routing area
update
failure
If the MS does not receive the Routing Area Update message

after sending the Routing Area Update Request message, you
can infer that the routing area fails to be updated.
RAS Dial
Attempt
RAS dial
attempt
The remote access service (RAS) dial is attempted.
RAS Dial
RAS dial
success
The RAS dial is successful.
RAS Hangup
RAS hangup
The RAS hangs up.
RAS Error
RAS error
The RAS dial is terminated exceptionally.
Session Start
Session start
The packet services such as FTP and HTTP are started. The
session start events include FTP Get and FTP Put.
Session End
Session end
The packet services such as FTP and HTTP are ended.
Session Drop
Session drop
Any of the following conditions indicates that the task is

terminated exceptionally:
l In the FTP service, the data downloading is terminated
exceptionally.
l In the HTTP and WAP Download services, if the cause
value of the Deactivate PDP Context Request message of
the MS is not Regular Deactivation, you can infer that the
PDP session is dropped.
Session
Error
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Session error
The data services such as FTP and HTTP fail to be executed.

14-95
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Voice Service Events

This describes the voice service events of the GSM. You can refer to this part when configuring
the voice service events on the GSM network, and then perform the related operations.
14-96
Name
Meaning
Description
GSMCallAttempt
(MOC)
GSM mobile originating

call attempt
The MS sends the Channel Request

message to request the traffic
channel. The situation varying
according to the cause values is
MOC. MOC indicates a mobile
originating call.
GSMCallAttempt
(MTC)
GSM mobile terminating

call attempt
The MS sends the Channel Request

message to request the traffic
channel. The situation varying
according to the cause values is
MTC. MTC indicates a mobile
terminating call.
GSMCallAttemptRetry
GSM call attempt retry
The MS repeatedly sends the

Channel Request message after
sending a Channel Request message
and before receiving the Immediate
Assignment message.
GSMAssignmentSuc
GSM assignment success
If the MS sends the Assignment

Complete message after sending the
Assignment command message, you
can infer the GSM assignment is
successful.
GSMAssignmentFail
GSM assignment failure
If the MS receives the Assignment

Failure message after receiving the
Assignment command message, you
can infer the GSM assignment fails.
GSMOutgoingCallSetup
GSM outgoing call setup
The outgoing call is set up

successfully.
GSMIncomingCallSetup
GSM incoming call setup
The incoming call is set up

successfully.
GSMOutgoingCallEstablished
GSM outgoing call

establishment success
The calling MS receives the

Downlink Connect message or
Uplink Connect Ack message, you
can infer that the GSM outgoing call
is established successfully.
GSMIncomingCallEstablished
GSM incoming call

establishment success
The called MS receives the

Downlink Connect message or
Uplink Connect Ack message, you
can infer that the GSM incoming call
is established successfully.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
GSMOutgoingCallSetupFailRF
GSM outgoing call

establishment failure
Call abnormally ended prior to

GSMOutgoingCallSetup event
(RF reason).
GSMIncomingCallSetupFailRF
GSM incoming call

establishment failure

GSMIncomingCallSetup event
(RF reason).
GSMOutgoingCallSetupFailNotRF
GSM outgoing call

establishment failure (not
RF reason)

GSMOutgoingCallSetup event
(not RF reason).
GSMIncomingCallSetupFailNotRF
GSM incoming call

establishment failure (not
RF reason)

GSMIncomingCallSetup event
(not RF reason).
GSMCallCompleted
GSM call completed
If the MS receives the Disconnect,

Release, or Release complete
message, you can infer that the GSM
call is complete.
GSMCallDropped
GSM call dropped
The call is terminated exceptionally

after being established successfully.
GSMHandoverReq
GSM inter-cell handover

request
An attempted inter-cell handover in

GSM.
GSMHandoverSuc

success
Successful inter-cell handover in

GSM.
GSMHandoverFail

failure
An attempted inter-cell handover in

GSM failed.
GSMIntracellHandoverReq
GSM intra-cell handover

request
An attempted intra-cell handover in

GSM.
GSMIntracellHandoverSuc

success
Successful intra-cell handover in

GSM.
GSMIntracellHandoverFail

failure
An attempted intra-cell handover in

GSM failed.
GSMSDCCHAssigne
d
GSM SDCCH assignment

success
After the GSM call attempt event

occurs, the MS receives the
Immediate Assignment or
Immediate Assignment Extend
message to assign the stand-alone
dedicated control channel
(SDCCH).
GSMSDCCHCallDro
p
GSM SDCCH call dropped
During the period from the

successful SDCCH assignment to
the call establishment, the signaling
process terminated exceptionally.

14-97
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
GSMCellReselection
GSM cell reselection
The MS selects a new serving cell in

idle status.
GSMLocationUpdateSuc
GSM location update

success
If the MS receives the Location

Updating Accept message, the GSM
location is updated.
GSMLocationUpdateFail
GSM location update

failure
The MS fails to update the location

area code (LAC).
GSMSMSSentAttempt
GSM SMS sent attempt
The MS attempts to send an SMS

message.
GSMSMSSentSuc
GSM SMS sent success
The MS succeeds in sending an SMS

message.
GSMSMSSentFail
GSM SMS sent failure
The MS sends an SMS message

failed.
GSMSMSReceived
GSM SMS received
The MS succeeds in receiving an

SMS message.
CMServiceReq
Connection management
service request
CMServiceAcpt
service accept
CMServiceReqRej
service failure
14.2.3 WCDMA Predefined Events

This describes the WCDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring
events on the WCDMA network.
Authentication Ciphering Events

This describes the authentication ciphering events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part
when configuring the authentication ciphering events on the WCDMA network, and then
14-98
Name
Meaning
Description
AuthenCiph
erReq
Authenticati
on ciphering
request
If the UE receives the Authentication AND Ciphering REQ

message, you can infer that the UE requests the authentication
ciphering.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
AuthenCiph
erSuc
Authenticati
on ciphering
success
If the network receives the Authentication AND Ciphering

REQ message and sends the Authentication AND Ciphering
Resp message, you can infer that the authentication is ciphered
successfully.
AuthenCiph
erFail
Authenticati
on ciphering
failure
When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that
the authentication fails to be ciphered.
l The UE receives the Authentication AND Ciphering REJ
message.
l The UE receives the Authentication AND Ciphering
Failure message.
l The UE does not receive the Authentication AND
Ciphering Resp message within the specified time.
Authentication Events
This describes the authentication events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring the authentication events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related
operations.
Name
Meaning
Description
Authenticat
ionReq
Authenticati
on request
If the network receives the Authentication Request message,

you can infer that the UE originates an authentication request.
AuthenticationRsp
Authenticati
on success
If the network receives the Authentication Request message

and sends the Authentication Response message to the UE,
and then the UE does not receive the Authentication Reject
message within the specified time, you can infer that the UE
authentication is successful.
Authenticat
ionFail
Authenticati
on failure
the authentication fails.
l No response to the Authentication Request message is
received within the specified time.
l The UE receives the Authentication Failure message.
l The UE receives the Authentication Reject message.
Call Connection Events

This describes the call connection events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring call connection events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Name
Meaning
Description
PagingType1
Paging type 1
This is the paging event of the UE in idle status.

14-99
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
PagingType2
Paging type 2
This is the paging event of the UE in dedicated status

during the concurrent service.
OutgoingCallAt
tempt
Outgoing call
attempt
The RRC connection request is sent, and the cause value

of the RRC request is Originating Conversational Call
or Emergency Call. If the UE does not receive the RRC
request or the cause value of the RRC request is
incorrect but receives the CM Service or Call
Proceeding request, the Outgoing Call Attempt event
also occurs.
IncomingCallAt
tempt
Incoming call
attempt
The RRC connection request is sent, and the cause value

of the RRC request is any of the following values:
l Terminating Conversational Call
l Paging Type2
l Paging response
14-100
OutgoingCallSe
tupSuc
Outgoing call
setup success
IncomingCallSe
tupSuc
Incoming call
setup success
OutgoingCallSe
tupFailRFReaso
n
Outgoing call
setup failure
(RF reason)
IncomingCallSe
tupFailRFReaso
n
Incoming call
setup failure
(RF reason)
OutgoingCallSe
tupFailNotRFR
eason
Outgoing call
setup failure
(not RF reason)
The outgoing call is interrupted or cancelled.
IncomingCallSe
tupFailNotRFR
eason
Incoming call
setup failure
(not RF reason)
The incoming call is interrupted or cancelled.
CallSetupLinkRestore
Call
establishment
link restored
The call reestablishment caused by the interrupted

signal link during the call establishment process also is
successful.
OutgoingCallEs
tablished
Outgoing call
established
The outgoing call receives the Connect message or

sends the Connect Acknowledge message.
IncomingCallEs
tablished
Incoming call
established
The incoming call sends the Connect message or

receives the Connect Acknowledge message.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
CallDropped
Call dropped
l When the UE is in dedicated status and does not

perform inter-system handovers, if the UE receives
any of the following messages, you can infer that the
call is dropped.
Master Information Block message
System Information1 message
The RRC state is RRC Disconnected.
l The UE receives the RRC Connection Release
message whose cause value is RRC Abnormal
Release.
l The UE receives the CC Disconnect or CC Release
Complete message whose cause value is not any of
Normal Call Clearing
Normal Unspecified
User alerting no answer
User busy
Call rejected
Destination out of order
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
CallCompleted
Call completed
The call is connected and ended properly.
LinkRestoreAttempt
Link restored
attempt
l The RRC state received by the UE is CELL_FACH.
LinkRestoreSuc
Link restored
success
l The RRC state sent to the UE is CELL_DCH.
LinkRestoreFail
Link restored
failure
The reported RRC state is RRC_Disconnect.
WCDMASMSS
entAttempt
WCDMA SMS
sending
attempt
The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message

whose cause value is Originating Low Priority
Signaling and then receives the CM Service Request
message within the specified time.
WCDMASMSS
ent
WCDMA SMS
sending
success
The UE receives the CM Service Request message.
WCDMASMSR
eceiveAttempt
WCDMA SMS
reception
attempt
The UE sends the Paging Type1 or Paging Type2

message and then receives the RRC Connection Request
message whose cause value is Terminating Low Priority
Signaling within the specified time.
WCDMASMSR
eceived
WCDMA SMS
reception
success
After receiving the Paging Response message, the UE

receives the Downlink CP-ACK message.
l The UE sends the Cell Update message.
l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration

Complete message.

14-101
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
RAS Dial
Attempt
RAS dial
attempt
The RAS dial is attempted.
RAS Dial
RAS dial
success
The RAS dial is successful.
RAS Hangup
RAS hangup
The RAS hangs up.
RAS Error
RAS error
The RAS dial is terminated exceptionally.
Session Start
Session start
The packet services such as FTP and HTTP are started.
Session End
Session end
This event occurs when all data transmission or

reception are complete.
Session Drop
Session
dropped
CMServiceReq
Connection
management
service request
CMServiceAcpt
Connection
management
service accept
CMServiceReq
Rej
Connection
management
service failure
Security Events
This describes the security events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring
security events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations.
Name
Meaning
Description
SecurityMo
deReq
Security
mode request
The UE sends the Security Mode Command message to

request for the security mode.
SecurityMo
deSuc
Security
mode success
If the UE receives the Security Mode Command message,

sends the Security Mode Complete message, and does not
receive the Security Mode Fail message, you can infer that the
security mode is successful.
SecurityMo
deFail
Security
mode failure
the security mode fails.
l The UE receives the Security Mode Failure message.
l The UE does not send the Security Mode Complete
14-102

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
GMM Process Events

This describes the GPRS Mobility Management (GMM) process events of the WCDMA. You
can refer to this part when configuring the GMM process events on the WCDMA network, and
Name
Meaning
Description
AttachSuc
Attach
success
If the UE receives the Attach Accept or sends the Attach

Complete message, you can infer that the attaching is
successful.
AttachFail
Attach
failure
The UE does not receive the Attach Accept message or does

not send the Attach Complete message.
PDPActivat
ionReq
PDP
activation
request
If the UE sends the Activate PDP Context Request message,

you can infer that the PDP request is activated.
PDPActivat
ionSuc
PDP
activation
success
If the UE receives the Activate PDP Context Accept message

after sending the Activate PDP Context Request message, you
can infer that the PDP activation is successful.
PDPActivat
ionFail
PDP
activation
failure
If the UE does not receive the Activate PDP Context Accept

message after sending the Activate PDP Context Request
message, you can infer that the PDP activation fails.
Detach
Detach
If the UE receives the Detach Accept message, you can infer

that the detaching is successful.
RAUpdate
Req
Routing area
update
request
The UE sends the Routing Area Update Request message to

request the routing area update.
RAUpdateS
uc
Routing area
update
success
If the UE receives the Routing Area Update Complete message

after sending the Routing Area Update Request message, you
can infer that the routing area is updated successfully.
RAUpdateF
ail
Routing area
update
failure
the routing area fails to be updated.
l The UE receives the Routing Area Update Reject message.
l The UE does not receive the Routing Area Update Accept,
Routing Area Update Complete, or GPRS Suspension
Request message.
Handover Events
This describes the handover events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring
the soft handover and hard handover events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the
related operations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-103
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
14-104
Name
Meaning
Description
SoftHOAttempt
Soft
handover
attempt
The UE receives the ActiveSet Update message.
SoftHO
Soft
handover
The UE sends the ActiveSet Update Complete message.
SoftHOFail
Soft
handover
failure
l The UE receives the ActiveSet Update message.
Event1A
Event 1A
The UE sends the Measurement Report 1A message.
Event2A
Event 2A
Event3A
Event 3A
Event4A
Event 4A
Event1B
Event 1B
The UE sends the Measurement Report 1B message.
Event2B
Event 2B
Event3B
Event 3B
Event4B
Event 4B
Event1C
Event 1C
The UE sends the Measurement Report 1C message.
Event2C
Event 2C
Event3C
Event 3C
Event1D
Event 1D
The UE sends the Measurement Report 1D message.
Event2D
Event 2D
Event3D
Event 3D
Event1E
Event 1E
The UE sends the Measurement Report 1E message.
Event2E
Event 2E
The UE sends the Measurement Report 2E message.
Event1F
Event 1F
The UE sends the Measurement Report 1F message.
Event2F
Event 2F
The UE sends the Measurement Report 2F message.
PhChannelRecfgSuc
Physical
channel
reconfigurat
ion success
The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration

Complete message within the fixed time.
l The UE receives the ActiveSet Update message.

l After receiving the ActiveSet Update message, the UE
does not send the ActiveSet Update Complete

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
PhChannelRecfgFail
Physical
channel
reconfigurat
ion failure
The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration

Fail message in the fixed time or the event times out.
TrChannelRecfgSuc
Transport
channel
reconfigurat
ion success
The UE sends the Transport Channel Reconfiguration

TrChannelRecfgFail
Transport
channel
reconfigurat
ion failure
The UE receives the Transport Channel Reconfiguration

Fail message within the fixed time or the event times out.
RBReconfigSuc
Radio
bearer
reconfigurat
ion success
The UE sends the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration

RBReconfigFail
Radio
bearer
reconfigurat
ion failure
The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Failed

message within the fixed time or the event times out.
RBRelease
Radio
bearer
release
The UE sends the Radio Bearer Release Complete

message.
RBReleaseFail
RB release
failure
The UE receives the Radio Bearer Release Fail message

within the fixed time or does not send the Radio Bearer
Release Complete message.
IntraFreqHHO
Intrafrequency
hard
handover
The UE receives any of the following messages sent from

the network:
l Radio Bearer Reconfiguration
l Transport Channel Reconfiguration
l Physical Channel Reconfiguration
If the downlink frequency of the cell FrequencyInfo of
this message is the same as that of the current active set,
the primary scrambling code of the cell Primary CPICH
info is not included in the current active set, and the UE
gives the response to corresponding complete message,
the intra-frequency hard handover is successful.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-105
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
IntraFreqHHOFa
il
Intrafrequency
hard
handover
failure

the network:
this message is the same as that of the current active set,
the primary scrambling code of the cell Primary CPICH
info is not included in the current active set, and the UE
gives the response to corresponding failure message, the
intra-frequency hard handover fails.
InterFreqHHO
Interfrequency
hard
handover

the network:
this message is different from that of the current active
set, and the UE gives the response to corresponding
complete message, the inter-frequency hard handover is
successful.
InterFreqHHOFa
il
Interfrequency
hard
handover
failure

the network:
this message is different from that of the current active
set, and the UE gives the response to corresponding
failure message, the inter-frequency hard handover fails.
14-106
IntraFrequencyCellReselection
Intrafrequency
cell
reselection
In the idle state, the UE performs cell reselection between

intra-frequency cells.
InterFrequencyCellReselection
Interfrequency
cell
reselection
In the idle state, the UE performs cell reselection between

inter-frequency cells.
CellReselectionConnectMode
Cell
reselection
connection
mode
The UE receives the Cell Reselection cause message.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
CSConnectionH
O2Gto3GAttemp
t
CS
handover
attempt
from 2G to
3G
If the UE receives the (GSM RR DL_DCCH) Inter

System To UTRAN Handover Command message, you
can infer that the UE requests the CS handover from 2G
to 3G.
CSConnectionH
O2Gto3GSuc
CS
handover
succeeded
from 2G to
3G
After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE

sends the (RRC UL_DCCH) Handover to UTRAN
Complete message within the specified time, you can
infer that the CS handover from 2G to 3G is successful.
CSConnectionH
O2Gto3GFail
CS
handover
failed from
2G to 3G

receives the Handover Failure message within the
specified time or does not send the Handover Complete
message, you can infer that the CS handover from 2G to
3G fails.
CSConnectionH
O3Gto2GAttemp
t
CS
handover
attempt
from 3G to
2G
If the UE receives the (RRC DL_DCCH) Handover From

UTRAN Command-GSM message, you can infer that the
UE requests the CS handover from 3G to 2G.
CSConnectionH
O3Gto2GSuc
CS
handover
succeeded
from 3G to
2G

sends the Handover Complete message within the
specified time, you can infer that the CS handover from
3G to 2G is successful.
CSConnectionH
O3Gto2GFail
CS
handover
failed from
3G to 2G

receives the Handover from UTRAN Failure message
within the specified time or does not send the Handover
Complete message, you can infer that the CS handover
from 3G to 2G fails.
PSConnectionH
O2Gto3GAttemp
t
PS handover
attempt
from 2G to
3G
The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message to

request for the PS handover from 2G to 3G.
PSConnectionH
O2Gto3GSuc
PS handover
succeeded
from 2G to
3G

sends the RB Setup Complete message within the
specified time, you can infer that the PS handover from
2G to 3G is successful.
PSConnectionH
O2Gto3GFail
PS handover
failed from
2G to 3G

receives the Routing Area Update Reject (NAS GMM)
message within the specified time or does not receive the
RB Setup Complete message, you can infer that the PS
handover from 2G to 3G fails.

14-107
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
PSConnectionH
O3Gto2GAttemp
t
PS handover
attempt
from 3G to
2G
If the UE sends the (RRC DL_DCCH) Cell Change Order

From UTRAN message, you can infer that the UE
requests for the PS handover from 3G to 2G.
PSConnectionH
O3Gto2GSuc
PS handover
succeeded
from 3G to
2G

receives the (NAS GMM) Routing Area Update Accept
message or sends the RB Setup Complete message within
the specified time, you can infer that the PS handover
from 3G to 2G is successful.
PSConnectionH
O3Gto2GFail
PS handover
failed from
3G to 2G

receives the (RRC DL_DCCH) Cell Change Order From
UTRAN Failure message within the specified time or
does not send the Routing Area Update Accept/Routing
Area Update Complete message, you can infer that the PS
handover from 3G to 2G fails.
CellResel3Gto2G
Cell
reselection
from 3G to
2G
If the UE receives the Location Update Accept message

after the WtoGIdle occurs, you can infer that the cell from
3G to 2G is reselected.
CellResel2Gto3G
Cell
reselection
from 2G to
3G
If the UE receives the Location Update Accept message

after the GtoWIdle occurs, you can infer that the cell from
2G to 3G is reselected.
CompressedModeActivation
Compressio
n mode
activation
Before the hard handover (including the intra-frequency

hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, and intersystem hard HO), the network sends the Measurement
Control message to activate the compression mode, and
then performs the measurement.
CompressedMod
eDeActivation
Compressio
n mode
deactivation
The network sends the Measurement control message to

notify the UE of activating the compression mode, and
then performs the measurement before hard handover. If
the cell measured in compression mode does not meet the
requirements for the hard handover, the network sends the
Measurement Control message to notify the UE of
deactivating the compression mode within the specified
time, and then activates the compression mode again. If
the cell is qualified, the hard handover is performed. The
UE automatically deactivates the compression mode after
the hard handover is successful.
HSDPA Events
This describes the HSDPA events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring
HSDPA events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.
14-108

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
H2HIntraFreqCellChangeSuc
HSDPA to HSDPA intrafrequency serving cell update

success
The UE receives the Physical

Channel Reconfiguration message
from the network and then sends the
Physical Channel Reconfiguration
Complete message to the network.
H2R99IntraFreqSHOSuc
HSDPA to R99 intrafrequency soft handover

success
l The UE receives the Radio bearer

reconfiguration message from the
network and then sends the Radio
bearer reconfiguration complete
message to the network.
l The UE receives the Activeset
update message from the network
and then sends the Activeset
update complete message to the
network.
H2R99IntraFreqHHOSuc
HSDPA to R99 intrafrequency hard handover

success

l The UE receives the Physical
channel reconfiguration message
from the network and then sends
the Physical channel
reconfiguration complete
R992HIntraFreqSHOSuc
R99 to HSDPA intrafrequency soft handover

success
The UE receives the Radio bearer

R992HIntraFreqHHOSuc
R99 to HSDPA intrafrequency hard handover

success

Channel Reconfiguration
message from the network and
then sends the Physical Channel
Reconfiguration Complete
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-109
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
H2HIntraFreqCellChangeFail
HSDPA to HSDPA intrafrequency serving cell update

failure
The UE receives the Physical

Channel Reconfiguration message
from the network and does not send
the Physical Channel
Reconfiguration Complete message
to the network.
H2R99IntraFreqSHOFail
HSDPA to R99 intrafrequency soft handover

failure

network and does not send the Radio
H2R99IntraFreqHHOFail
HSDPA to R99 intrafrequency hard handover

failure

channel reconfiguration message
from the network and sends the
Physical channel reconfiguration
failed message to the network or
does not send the Physical
channel reconfiguration complete
message to the network within the
specified time.
R992HIntraFreqSHOFail
R99 to HSDPA intrafrequency soft handover

failure

network and does not send the Radio
R992HIntraFreqHHOFail
R99 to HSDPA intrafrequency hard handover

failure

Channel Reconfiguration
message from the network and
then sends the Physical Channel
Reconfiguration Complete
network and sends the Radio
bearer reconfiguration failed
Alternatively, the UE does not
send the Radio bearer
reconfiguration complete
message to the network within the
specified time.
14-110

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
H2GHHOSuc
HSDPA to 2G hard handover

success
l The UE receives the Cell Change

order from UTRAN message
from the UTRAN network.
l The UE receives the Routing
Area Update Accept message
HSDPA to 2G hard handover

failure
H2GHHOFail
l The UE receives the Cell Change

order from UTRAN message
l The UE receives the system
message that cannot be received
from the network in DCH state.
l The UE receives the GSM system
message, indicating the idle status
from the network.
l The UE sends the Cell Change
order from UTRAN fail message
to the network.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
H2HInterFreqCellChangeSuc
HSDPA to HSDPA interfrequency serving cell update

success
H2HInterFreqCellChangeFail
HSDPA to HSDPA interfrequency serving cell update

failure
H2R99InterFreqHHOSuc
HSDPA to R99 interfrequency hard handover

success
H2R99InterFreqHHOFail
HSDPA to R99 interfrequency hard handover

failure
R992HInterFreqHHOSuc
R99 to HSDPA interfrequency hard handover

success
R992HInterFreqHHOFail
R99 to HSDPA interfrequency hard handover

failure
CompressedModeActivation
Compression mode
activation
Before the hard handover (including

the intra-frequency hard handover,
inter-frequency hard handover, and
inter-system hard HO), the network
sends the Measurement Control
message to activate the compression
mode, and then performs the
measurement.

14-111
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
CompressedModeDeActivation
Compression mode
deactivation
The network sends the Measurement

control message to notify the UE of
activating the compression mode,
and then performs the measurement
before hard handover. If the cell
measured in compression mode does
not meet the requirements for the
hard handover, the network sends the
Measurement Control message to
notify the UE of deactivating the
compression mode within the
specified time, and then activates the
compression mode again. If the cell
is qualified, the hard handover is
performed. The UE automatically
deactivates the compression mode
after the hard handover is successful.
HSUPA Events
This describes the HSUPA events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring
HSUPA events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations.
Name
Meaning
Description
CellChangeUtoUBySHOAttempt
HSUPA serving
cell update attempt
triggered by soft
handovers
l The active set has multiple links. One of them

is served as the enhanced dedicated channel
(E-DCH) serving cell.
HSUPA serving
cell update attempt
triggered by intrafrequency hard
handovers

is served as the E-DCH serving cell.
CellChangeUtoUByIntraHHOAttempt
l The UE receives the Physical Channel

Reconfiguration message send by the RNC.
l The UE reports the measurement report on the

1D event and obtains the primary scrambling
code of the reported cell.
Reconfiguration message from the RNC.
CellChangeUtoUByInterHHOAttempt
14-112
HSUPA serving
cell update attempt
triggered by interfrequency hard
handovers


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
CellChangeUtoUBySHOSuc
HSUPA serving
cell update success
triggered by soft
handovers

l The UE sends the Physical Channel
Reconfiguration Complete message to the
SRNC.
CellChangeUtoUByIntraHHOSuc
HSUPA serving
cell update success
handovers

SRNC.
CellChangeUtoUByInterHHOSuc
CellChangeUtoUBySHOFail
HSUPA serving
cell update success
handovers

HSUPA serving
cell update failure
triggered by soft
handovers
l The active set has multiple links. One cell is

the E-DCH serving cell.

SRNC.

Reconfiguration Failure message to the
SRNC.
CellChangeUtoUByIntraHHOFail
HSUPA serving
cell update failure
handovers

SRNC.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-113
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
CellChangeUtoUByInterHHOFail
HSUPA serving
cell update failure
handovers

PSConnectionHO
UtoGPRSAttempt
Handover attempt
between HSUPA
and GPRS
The UE receives the Cell Change Order from

UTRAN message from the UTRAN network.
PSConnectionHO
UtoGPRSSuc
Handover success
between HSUPA
and GPRS
l The UE receives the Cell Change Order from

Handover failure
between HSUPA
and GPRS
l The UE receives the Cell Change Order from

GPRS to HSUPA
inter-system
handover success
l The UE sends the RRC Connection Setup

Request message to the UTRAN network.
GPRS to HSUPA
inter-system
handover failure
l The UE sends the RRC Connection Setup

Request message to the UTRAN network.
HSUPA to R99
inter-cell intrafrequency hard
handover attempt

PSConnectionHO
UtoGPRSFail
PSConnectionHOGPRStoUSuc
PSConnectionHOGPRStoUFail
ChannelChangeIn
terCellIntraFreEtoDAttempt
14-114

SRNC.
l The UE sends the Routing Area Update Accept

Complete message to the GPRS network.
l The UE receives the system message of the

GSM or WCDMA, returns to the UTRAN
network and responds the Cell Change Order
from UTRAN Failure message, or receives no
message indicating success or failure in the
fixed time.
l The UE sends the Routing Area Update Accept

Complete message to the UTRAN network.
l The UE receives the system message of the

GSM or WCDMA, receives the RRC
Connection Setup Request message, receives
the Routing Area Update Failure message, or
does not receive the response of the RRC
Connection Setup message.
l The UE receives the Radio Bearer


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
ChannelChangeIn
terCellIntraFreEtoDSuc
HSUPA to R99
handover success

l The UE sends the Radio Bearer
SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn
terCellIntraFreEtoDFail
HSUPA to R99
handover failure

SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn
terCellInterFreEtoDAttempt
HSUPA to R99
inter-cell interfrequency hard
handover attempt

ChannelChangeIn
terCellInterFreEtoDSuc
HSUPA to R99
handover success



SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn
terCellInterFreEtoDFail
HSUPA to R99
handover failure

SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn
traCellEtoDAttempt
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
HSUPA to R99
intra-cell channel
type change
attempt


14-115
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
ChannelChangeIn
traCellEtoDSuc
HSUPA to R99
intra-cell channel
type change
success

SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn
traCellEtoDFail
HSUPA to R99
intra-cell channel
type change failure

SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn
traCellDtoEAttempt
R99 to HSUPA
intra-cell channel
type change
attempt

ChannelChangeIn
traCellDtoESuc
R99 to HSUPA
intra-cell channel
type change
success



SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn
traCellDtoEFail
R99 to HSUPA
intra-cell channel
type change failure

SRNC.
ChannelChangeEtoFAttempt
EDCH to FACH
channel change
attempt
l The latest active set of the UE has multiple

links. One of them is served as the E-DCH
serving cell.
Reconfiguration message from the network.
14-116

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
ChannelChangeEtoFSuc
EDCH to FACH
channel change
success

serving cell.
network.
ChannelChangeEtoFFail
EDCH to FACH
channel change
failure

serving cell.
network and receives no corresponding
fixed time.
ChannelChangeFtoEAttempt
FACH to EDCH
channel change
attempt

serving cell.
ChannelChangeFtoESuc
FACH to EDCH
channel change
success

serving cell.
network.
ChannelChangeFtoEFail
FACH to EDCH
channel change
failure

serving cell.
network and receives no corresponding
fixed time.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-117
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
MM Process Events
This describes the mobility management (MM) process events of the WCDMA. You can refer
to this part when configuring the MM process events on the WCDMA network, and then perform
the related operations.
Name
Meaning
Description
LAUpdateR
eq
Location update
request
The UE sends the Location Updating Request message

to update its location.
LAUpdateS
uc
Location update
success
If the UE receives the Location Updating Accept

message, you can infer that the location is updated
successfully.
LAUpdateF
ail
Location update
failure
If any of the following cases occurs, you can infer that

the location fails to be updated.
l The UE receives the Location Update Reject
message.
l If the UE does not receive the Location Update
Accept message within the specified time.
IMSIDetac
h
International mobile
subscriber identity
(IMSI) detach
If the UE sends the IMSI Detach Indication message,

you can infer that the IMSI detach occurs.
IdentityReq
Identity request
The UE sends the Identity Request message to request

the identity identification.
IdentityRsp
Identity response
If the UE sends the Identity Request message and

receives the Identity Response message, you can infer
that the identity identification is successful.
MMS Events
This describes the MMS events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring
MMS events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.
14-118

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
MMSMOAtte
mpt
MMS mobile originating

(MO) attempt
The following process is referred to as an

MMSMOAttempt event.
1. The UE sends the RRC Connection Request
message.
2. The UE sends the RRC Connection Setup
Complete message.
3. The UE sends the Service Request message.
4. The UE sends the Activate PDP Context
Request message within the specified time.
5. The UE receives the Activate PDP Context
Accept message.
MMSMOSuc
MMS MO sending
success
The following process is referred to as an

MMSMOSuc event.
1. After the MMSMOAttempt event occurs, the
UE sends the Deactivate PDP Context
Request message during the period from the
time when the service is ended to the time
when the UE receives the system message.
2. The UE receives the Deactivate PDP Context
Accept and RRC Connect Release messages,
and the Release Cause value of the RRC
Connect Release message is Normal
Event.
3. The UE sends the RRC Connection Release
Complete message.
MMSMOFail
MMS MO sending
failure
After the MMSMOAttempt event occurs, during

the period from the time when the service is
ended to the time when the UE receives the
system message, if any of the following
situations occurs, the MO fails to sent the MMS.
l The UE does not send the Deactivate PDP
Context Request message.
l The UE does not receive the Deactivate PDP
Context Accept message.
l The UE receives the RRC Connect Release
signaling but the Release Cause value of the
RRC Connection Release message is not
Normal Event.
Radio Bearer Establishment Events

This describes the radio bearer (RB) events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring RB events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-119
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
RBSetupRe
q
RB setup
request
The UE receives the Radio Bearer Setup message to request

the RB setup.
RBSetupSu
c
RB setup
success
If the UE sends the Radio Bearer Setup Complete message,

you can infer that the RB is set up successfully.
RBSetupFai
l
RB setup
failure
When any of the following cases occurs, you can infer that the
RB setup fails.
l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Setup Failure message.
l The UE does not receive the Radio Bearer Setup Complete
RRC Events
This describes the radio resource control (RRC) events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this
part when configuring RRC events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.
Name
Meaning
Description
RRCSetup
Req
RRC
connection
setup request
The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message to the

network to request for the RRC connection setup.
RRCSetupS
uc
RRC
connection
setup success
If the UE sends the RRC Connection Setup Complete message

to the network, you can infer that the RRC connection setup
is successful.
RRCSetupF
ail
RRC
connection
setup failure
The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message to the

network and does not receive the RRC Connection Setup
RRCConne
ctionRel
RRC
connection
release
The UE receives the RRC Connection Release message whose

cause value is Normal Event or User Inactivity. Alternatively,
the UE sends the RRC Connection Release Complete
message.
RRCConne
ctionAbnor
mal
RRC
connection
abnormal
release
the RRC connection is released exceptionally.
l The UE receives the RRC Connection Release message
whose cause value is not Normal Event or User Inactivity.
l If RRC state is set to CELL_DCH and the UE does not
receive RRC Connection Release, the received RRC state
is Disconnected, Master Information Block, System
Information 1, or System Information 2.
RRCState
14-120
RRC State
This event occurs when the UE sends the RRC State packets.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
14.2.4 CDMA Predefined Events

This describes the CDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events
on the CDMA network, and then perform the related operations.
The system defines the following states of the MS:
l
INITorIDLE: indicates the state combining the initial state with the idle state.
SYS_ACC: indicates the system access state.
TC: indicates the traffic state.
EV-DO Events
This describes events of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. You can refer to this part when configuring
events on the CDMA2000 EV-DO network, and then perform the related operations.
Name
Meaning
Description
DOATConnectR
eq
AT connection
request
The AT sends the Connection Request message on

the access channel.
DOATConnectSu
c
AT connection
success
The AT sends the Traffic Channel Complete message

on the reverse traffic channel.
DOATConnectFa
il
AT connection
failure
When any of the following situations occurs, you can

infer that the connection fails.
l The AT receives the Connection Deny message
on the control channel.
l The AT does not send the Traffic Channel
Complete message within the specified time after
sending the Connection Request message.
DOANConnectR
eq
AN connection
request
The AN sends the Connection Request message on

the access channel.
DOANConnectS
uc
AN connection
success
The AN sends the Traffic Channel Complete

message on the reverse traffic channel.
DOANConnectF
ail
AN connection
failure

infer that the connection fails.
l The AN receives the Connection Deny message
on the control channel.
l The AN does not send the Traffic Channel
Complete message within the specified time after
sending the Connection Request message.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-121
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
DOANNormalRe
lease
AN normal release

infer that the release is normal.
l The AN receives the Connection Close message
on the forward traffic channel.
l The AT gives the response to the Connection
Close message on the reverse traffic channel.
DOATNormalRe
lease
AT normal release
The AT sends the Connection Close message on the

reverse traffic channel.
DO-CallDrop
Call dropped
DOReverseSoftH
OReq
Reverse soft handoff

request
The AN sends the Traffic Channel Assignment

message on the control channel or on the forward
traffic channel.
DOReverseSoftH
OSuc

success
The AT sends the Traffic Channel Complete

message.
DOReverseSoftH
OFail

failure
On the reverse traffic channel, the AT does not

receive the Traffic Channel Complete message
corresponding to the Traffic Channel Assignment
sent from the AN within the specified time.
DOSessionReq
Session request
An EV-DO session request occurs.
DOSessionSuc
Session success
An EV-DO session attempt completed successfully.
MMS Events (1x)

This describes the MMS events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when
configuring the MMS on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related operations.
14-122
Name
Meaning
Description
1xMMSESendReq
MMS sending request
In idle status, the MS sends an Origination

Message, and then parses it to determine
whether this call is about the MMS service.
If yes, the MS requests for sending MMSs.
1xMMSESendCon
MMS sending connected
In sync status, the MS sends the Service

Connect Complete Message.
1xMMSESendCompl
ete
MMS sending complete
The MS originates an Order Release

message or receives an Order Release
message from the mobile switching center
(MSC).

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Packet Service Events (1x)

This describes the packet service events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when
configuring the PS events on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related
operations.
Name
Meaning
Description
1xPSOutgoing
CallReq
PS outgoing
call request
In INIT or IDLE status, the MS sends an Origination Message,

and then parses it to determine whether this call is about the
PS service. If yes, the MS requests the PS outgoing call.
1xPSOutgoing
CallSuc
PS outgoing
call success
After originating an outgoing call request for the PS services,

if the MS receives any of the following log packets in
SYS_ACC status, you can infer that the PS outgoing call is
successful.
l Service Connect Completion Message in the log packet of
the Reverse Link Channel Traffic
l Diagnostic packet in TC status
1xPSOutgoing
CallFail
PS outgoing
call failure

if the MS receives any of the following log packets in
SYS_ACC status, you can infer that the PS outgoing call is
failed.
l Log packet of the Sync Channel
l Log packet of the Paging Channel
l Diagnostic packet in INIT or IDLE status
1xPSCallDrop
ped
PS call
dorpped

if the MS receives any of the following log packets and does
not receive or originate the Release Order message before
receiving the log packet, you can infer that the PS call is
dropped.
1xPSCallCom
pleted
PS call
completed
In TC status, if the MS originates a Release Order and the BSS

also originates a Release Order, you can infer that the PS call
is complete.
SMS Events (1x)

This describes the SMS events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when configuring
the SMS events on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related operations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-123
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
1xSMSSentReq
SMS sending
request
In idle status, the MS sends an Origination Message,

and then parses it to determine whether this call is
about the SMS service. If yes, the MS requests for
sending SMSs.
1xSMSSendCon
SMS sending
connected
In sync status, the MS sends the Service Connect

Complete Message.
1x-SMSSend
SMS sending
In dedicated status, the MS sends the Data Burst

Message.
1xSMSSendComp
lete
SMS sending
complete
The MS or MSC sends the Order Release message.
1xSMSReceiveRe
q
SMS reception
request
In idle status, the MS receives the Service Connect

Complete message.
1xSMSReceiveCo
n
SMS reception
connected
In sync status, the MS sends the Service Connect

Complete Message.
1x-SMSReceive
SMS received
In dedicated status, the MS receives the Data Burst

Message.
1xSMSReceiveCo
mplete
SMS reception
complete
The MS or MSC sends the Order Release message.
Voice Service Events (1x)

This describes the voice service events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when
configuring the CS voice service events on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the
related operations.
Name
Meaning
Description
1xCSOutgoingCallReq
CS outgoing call
request
In INIT or IDLE status, the MS sends an Origination

Message, and then parses it to determine whether
this call is about the CS service. If yes, the MS
requests the CS outgoing call.
1xCSOutgoingCallSuc
CS outgoing call
success
After originating an outgoing call request for the CS

services, if the MS receives any of the following
information in SYS_ACC status, you can infer that
the CS outgoing call is successful:
l Service Connect Completion Message in the log
packet of the Reverse Link Channel Traffic
14-124

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
1xCSOutgoingCallFail
CS outgoing call
failure

services, if the MS receives any of the following log
packets in SYS_ACC status, you can infer that the
CS outgoing call is failed.
1xCSIncomingCallReq
CS incoming
call request
In INIT or IDLE status, the MS sends a Paging

Response Message, and then parses it to determine
whether this call is about the CS service. If yes, the
MS requests the CS incoming call.
1xCSIncomingCallSuc
CS incoming
call success
After the CS incoming call request event occurs, if

the MS receives any of the following information,
you can infer that the CS incoming call is successful.
l Service Connect Completion Message in the log
packet of the Reverse Link Channel Traffic
1xCSIncomingCallFail
CS incoming
call failure
After the CS incoming call request event occurs, if

the MS receives any of the following log packets,
you can infer that the CS incoming call is failed.
1xCSCallDropped
CS call dropped

services, if the MS receives any of the following log
packets and does not receive or send the Release
Order message before receiving the log packet, you
can infer that the CS call is dropped.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
1xCSCallCompleted
CS call
completed
In TC status, if the MS sends a Release Order

message and the base station subsystem (BSS) also
sends a Release Order message, you can infer that
the CS call is complete.
1xSoftHandoffReq
Soft handoff
request
The request for adding, deleting, or replacing pilots

in the active set occurs. When pilots are replaced,
the number of pilots in the active set must be greater
than one.

14-125
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
1xSoftHandoffSuc
Soft handoff
success
The pilots in the active set are added, deleted, or

replaced successfully. When pilots are replaced, the
number of pilots in the active set must be greater than
one.
1xSoftHandoffFail
Soft handoff
failure
The pilots in the active set fail to be added, deleted,

or replaced. When pilots are replaced, the number of
pilots in the active set must be greater than one.
1xInterFreqHandoffReq
Inter-frequency
hard handoff
request
Refers to the handoff in traffic state to another

frequency or a different band.
1x-InterFreqHandoffSuc
Inter-frequency
hard handoff
success
Refers to the successful handoff in traffic state to

another frequency or a different band.
1x-InterFreqHandoffFail
Inter-frequency
hard handoff
failure
Refers to the failed handoff in traffic state to another

frequency or a different band.
1xIntraFreqHandoffReq
Intra-frequency
hard handoff
request
Refers to the handoff in traffic state to the same

frequency.
1x-IntraFreqHandoffSuc
Intra-frequency
hard handoff
success
Refers to the successful handoff in traffic state to the

same frequency.
1x-IntraFreqHandoffFail
Intra-frequency
hard handoff
failure
Refers to the failed handoff in traffic state to the

same frequency.
14.2.5 WiMAX Predefined Events

This section describes the predefined events in the WiMAX network. You can refer to this section
when configuring predefined events in the WiMAX network.
14-126
Name
Meaning
Description
WXBSDeREGSuc
Base station (BS) out of

service success
The BS is out of service.
WX-BSDSAFail
BS service flow setup failure
The service flow setup fails.
WX-BSDSAReq
BS service flow setup

request
The BS initiates a service flow setup

request.
WX-BSDSASuc
BS service flow setup

success
The service flow setup is successful.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
WX-BSDSCFail
BS service flow change

failure
The service flow change fails.
WX-BSDSCReq

request
The BS initiates a service flow change

request.
WX-BSDSCSuc

success
The service flow change is successful.
WX-BSDSDFail
BS service flow deletion

failure
The service flow deletion fails.
WX-BSDSDReq

request
The BS initiates a service flow deletion

request.
WX-BSDSDSuc

success
The service flow deletion is successful.
WXBSEnterIdleFail
BS entering idle state failure
The BS fails to initiate the state

conversion of an MS to idle state.
WXBSEnterIdleReq
BS entering idle state

request
The BS initiates a request for triggering

the state conversion of an MS to idle
state.
WXBSEnterIdleSuc
BS entering idle state

success
The BS successfully initiates the state

conversion of an MS to idle state.
WX-Drop
MS call drop at the data link

layer
Signal loss occurs on an MS.
WX-DSAFail
Dynamic service addition

failure
The service flow allocation fails.
WX-DSAReq

request
The MS initiates a request for the service

flow allocation.
WX-DSASuc

success
The service flow allocation is successful.
WX-HOCancel
Handover cancellation
After sending a handover request, the

MS sends a MOB_HO-IND message to
cancel the handover.
WX-HOFail
Handover failure
After sending a handover request, the

MS does not receive a Ranging response
message or sends a MOB_HO-IND
message with the cause value of
rejection.
WX-HOReq
Handover request
After sending a MOB_MSHO-REQ

message to the BS, the MS receives a
MOB_BSHO-RSP message from the BS
or sends a Ranging request for handover.

14-127
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
14-128
Name
Meaning
Description
WX-HOSuc
Handover success
After MS sends a handover request, a

new BS serves as the serving BS and
services are not disrupted.
WXLocationUpdateFail
MS location update failure
The MS fails to perform location update.
WXLocationUpdateReq
MS location update request
The BS initiates a request for MS

location update.
WXLocationUpdateSuc
MS location update success
The MS performs location update

successfully.
WXMSDeREGReq
MS request for out of service
The MS requests for out of service.
WXMSDeREGSuc
MS out of service success
The MS is out of service.
WX-MSDSAFail
MS service flow setup

failure
WX-MSDSAReq

request
WX-MSDSASuc

success
WX-MSDSCFail
MS service flow change

failure
WX-MSDSCReq

request
WX-MSDSCSuc

success
WX-MSDSDFail
MS service flow deletion

failure
WX-MSDSDReq

request
WX-MSDSDSuc

success
WXMSEnterIdleFail
MS entering idle state

failure
WXMSEnterIdleReq

request

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
WXMSEnterIdleSuc

success
WXMSExitIdleFail
MS exiting idle state failure
WXMSExitIdleReq
MS exiting idle state request
WXMSExitIdleSuc
MS exiting idle state success
WXNetEntryAttempt
Network access attempt
The MS sends an RNG-REQ (initial

network access) message to the BS to
request for accessing the network.
WX-NetEntryFail
Network access failure
The MS fails to access the network when

the WX-RNGFail, WX-SBCFail, WXPKMFail, and WX-REGFail events
occur or the MS receives an RNG-REQ
message before the service flow
allocation is successful.
WX-NetEntrySuc
Network access success
MS access success refers to that the MS

registers on the BTS before the service
stream is allocated successfully.
WX-PKMFail
Authentication failure
The MS receives a PKM-RSP (Fail)

message.
WX-PKMReq
Authentication request
The specified MS initiates an

authentication request for network
access during the basic capability
negotiation.
WX-PKMSuc
Authentication success
The MS receives a PKM-RSP (Success)

message after the authentication on the
BS side is successful.
WX-REGFail
Registration failure
The MS receives the registration failure

message from the network side or does
not receive any registration response.
WX-REGReq
Registration request
The MS sends an RNG-REQ (initial

network access) message to the BS to
request for registration.
WX-REGSuc
Registration success
After sending a registration request, the

MS receives an REG-RSP message from
the BS.
WX-RNGFail
Initial distance
measurement failure
The MS receives an RNG-RSP (Fail)

message.

14-129
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
WX-RNGReq
Initial distance
measurement request
The MS initially accesses the network,

performs handover or accesses the
network again.
WX-RNGSuc
Initial distance
measurement success
The MS receives an RNG-RSP

(Success) message.
WX-SBCFail
Basic capability negotiation

failure
The MS does not receive an SBC-RSP

WX-SBCReq

request
The basic capability negotiation request

is initiated when the MS initially
accesses the network or after the
distance measurement is successful.
WX-SBCSuc

success
The MS receives an SBC-RSP message.
WXNetConnectSuc
MS connection success
A service stream is set up successfully

after the MS is connected to the network.
WXNetConnectFail
Network connection failure
A service stream setup fails when the MS

accesses the network.
14.2.6 LTE Predefined Events

This section describes the predefined events in the LTE network. You can configure LTE
network events by referring to the following descriptions.
14-130
Name
Meaning
Description
AttachAttem
pt
Attach attempt
A UE attempts to attach to the data service.
AttachSuc
Attach success
A UE attaches to the data service successfully.
AttachFail
Attach failure
A UE fails to attach to the data service.
DetachAttem
pt
Detach attempt
A UE attempts to detach from the data service.
DetachSuc
Detach success
A UE detaches from the data service successfully.
RRCSetupRe
q
RRC connection
setup request
A UE sends an RRC Connection Request message to

the network to request for the RRC connection setup.
RRCSetupSu
c
RRC connection
setup success
If a UE sends an RRC Connection Setup Complete

message to the network, you can infer that the RRC
connection setup is successful.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Meaning
Description
RRCSetupFa
il
RRC connection
setup failure
A UE receives an RRC Connection Reject message

or does not receive an RRC Connection Setup
message within the specified time after sending an
RRC Connection Request message to the network.
ERABSetup
Attempt
ERAB setup attempt
If an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message

contains the specified information element (drbToAddModList or drb-ToAddModifyList), you
can infer that a UE attempts to set up the Evolved
Radio Access Bearer (ERAB).
ERABSetupS
uc
ERAB setup success
If a UE receives an RRC Connection

Reconfiguration Complete message after the
ERABSetupAttempt event occurs, you can infer that
the ERAB setup is successful.
ERABSetupF
ail
ERAB setup failure
If a UE does not receive an RRC Connection

Reconfiguration Complete message within the
specified time after the ERABSetupAttempt event
occurs, you can infer that the ERAB setup fails.
ERABNorma
lRel
ERAB normal
release
If a UE receives an RRC Release or RRC Connection

Reconfiguration message after receiving a
Deactivate Eps Bearer Context Request message,
you can infer that the ERAB is released normally.
ERABAbnor
malRel
ERAB abnormal
release
If a UE receives an RRC Release or RRC Connection

Reconfiguration message but does not receive a
Deactivate Eps Bearer Context Request message,
you can infer that the ERAB is released abnormally.
HOA3Measu
rereport
Handover A3
measurement report
If measId of a MeasurementReport message is the

same as measId of the previous RRC
ConnectionReconfiguration message, a handover A3
measurement report is generated.
HOAttempt
Handover attempt
A UE attempts to perform a handover.
HOSuc
Handover success
A UE performs a handover successfully.
HOFail
Handover failure
A UE fails to perform a handover.
14.3 Description of Information Elements

This describes the MS and Scanner information elements supported by the Probe. You can refer
to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the view window.
14.3.1 GSM Information Elements of MSs
This describes the GSM information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the GSM MS air interface views.
14.3.2 WCDMA Information Elements of UEs
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-131
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
This describes the WCDMA information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the WCDMA UE air interface views.
14.3.3 CDMA Information Elements of MSs
This describes the CDMA information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the CDMA MS air interface views.
14.3.4 WiMAX Information Elements of UEs
This describes the WiMAX information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the WiMAX UE air interface views.
This describes the LTE information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the LTE UE air interface views.
14.3.6 Information Elements of Scanners
This describes the IEs of the PCTel, Anritsu, and Rohde & Schwarz scanners. You can refer to
the description when browsing the IEs in the views of these scanners.
14.3.7 Packet Service Testing Information Elements
This describes the packet service testing information elements. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the packet service views.
14.3.8 Speech Quality Evaluation Information Elements
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Speech Quality Evaluation. The following table
provides information about IEs related to the speech quality service.
14.3.9 Noise Test Information Elements
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Noise Test KPI. The following table provides
the information noise test information elements.
14.3.1 GSM Information Elements of MSs

This describes the GSM information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the GSM MS air interface views.
3G Neighboring Cell Measurement

This describes meanings of the IEs related to 3G Neighboring Cell Measurement of the GSM.
The following table provides the information about the 3G neighboring cells, such as the
ARFCN, quality, and level.
14-132
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
UARFCN
Range: 0 to 16383
Indicates the ARFCNs of measured GSM

neighbors.
P-SC
Range: 0 to 511
Indicates the primary scrambling code of

measured GSM neighbors.
Diversity
0 or 1
Indicates whether to use the diversity mode. 0

refers to No and 1 refers to Yes.
Squal
Unit: dB
Indicates the quality of the received signal,

which is applicable to cell selection criteria S.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Srxlev
Unit: dB
Indicates the rank of the received signal level,

which is applicable to cell selection criteria S.
RSCP
Range: -115 to -25. Unit:

dBm.
Indicates the received signal code power.
Ec/Io
Range: -30 to 0. Unit: dB.
Indicates the ratio of energy per chip to the total

power density of received bandwidth.
AMR Call Average

This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Call Average of the GSM. The following
table provides the distribution of AMR codec usage for the whole of the call currently in progress.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Codec
Range: 0 to 7
Indicates the AMR codec:

l 0: 12.2 kbit/s
l 1: 10.2 kbit/s
l 2: 7.95 kbit/s
l 3: 7.40 kbit/s
l 4: 6.70 kbit/s
l 5: 5.90 kbit/s
l 6: 5.15 kbit/s
l 7: 4.75 kbit/s
Uplink
Range: 0 to 100. Unit:

%.
Indicates the distribution of uplink AMR codec

usage for the current call. This IE is invalid if no
call is ongoing.
Downlink

%.
Indicates the distribution of downlink AMR

codec usage for the current call. This IE is invalid
if no call is ongoing.
AMR Cell Average

This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Cell Average of the GSM. The following
table provides the distribution of AMR codec usage in the current serving cell before the
handover..
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-133
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Codec
Range: 0 to 7
Indicates the AMR codec:

l 0: 12.2 kbit/s
l 1: 10.2 kbit/s
l 2: 7.95 kbit/s
l 3: 7.40 kbit/s
l 4: 6.70 kbit/s
l 5: 5.90 kbit/s
l 6: 5.15 kbit/s
l 7: 4.75 kbit/s
Uplink
Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %.
Indicates the distribution of uplink AMR

codec usage since the MS started using the
current serving cell.
Downlink
Indicates the distribution of downlink

AMR codec usage since the MS started
using the current serving cell.
AMR Codec Usage

This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Codec Usage of the GSM. The following
table provides the information about the uplink and downlink AMR codec rates for the current
terminal.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Codec UL
l 12.2 kbit/s
Indicates the uplink codec rate.
l 10.2 kbit/s
l 7.95 kbit/s
l 7.40 kbit/s
l 6.70 kbit/s
l 5.90 kbit/s
l 5.15 kbit/s
l 4.75 kbit/s
Uplink
14-134

%.
Indicates the distribution of uplink AMR codec

usage across the active set being used.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Codec DL
l 12.2 kbit/s
Indicates the downlink codec rate.
l 10.2 kbit/s
l 7.95 kbit/s
l 7.40 kbit/s
l 6.70 kbit/s
l 5.90 kbit/s
l 5.15 kbit/s
l 4.75 kbit/s
Downlink

%.
Indicates the distribution of downlink AMR

codec usage across the active set being used.
AMR Setting GSM

This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Setting GSM of the GSM. The following
table provides the current active set of AMR speech coders on the uplink and downlink
respectively, along with hysteresis and threshold values governing AMR mode switches.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Active Set UL
Range: 0 to 3
Indicates the current active set of AMR speech

codecs on the uplink, each codec being
described by a text string, such as 12.2 kbit/s
rate.
Active Set DL
Range: 0 to 3
Indicates the current active set of AMR speech

codecs on the downlink, each codec being
described by a text string, such as 12.2 kbit/s
rate.
Hysteresis
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the hysteresis value in the AMR

mode switch mechanism.
Threshold
Range: 0 to 63
Indicates the threshold value in the AMR

mode switch mechanism.
Lower Limit
Range: -5 to 35. Unit:

dB.
Indicates the C/I limit for codec change to

lower bit rate, calculated from Hysteresis and
Threshold.
The C/I value used as input to mode control in
AMR. This parameter is distinct from the
ordinary C/I information elements, although
the value should be similar.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-135
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Upper Limit

dB.
Indicates the C/I limit for codec change to

higher bit rate, calculated from Hysteresis and
Threshold.
The C/I value used as input to mode control in
AMR. This parameter is distinct from the
ordinary C/I information elements, although
the value should be similar.
BA List
This describes meanings of the IEs related to BA List of the GSM. The following table provides
the signal strength of the neighboring cells of the current cell, including the information about
IEs such as the BCCH, level and BSIC.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
BCCH ARFCN
Range: 0 to 1023
Indicates the ARFCN of the broadcast

control channel.
l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251

l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124
l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124,
975 to 1023
l DCS 1800: 512 to 885
l PCS 1900: 512 to 810
BAND
l GSM-R 850
l P-GSM 900
Indicates the frequency band of BCCH

carrier.
l E-GSM 900
l DCS 1800
l PCS 1900
RxLev

dBm.
Indicates the received signal strength.
BSIC
Range: 00 to 77
Indicates the base station identity code.
GPRS Data Bytes Sent/Received

This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Data Bytes Sent/Received of the GPRS.
The following table provides the total data bytes that are sent and received through the
application, subnetwork dependent convergence protocol (SNDCP), logical link control (LLC),
and radio link control (RLC) layers.
14-136

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Application Bytes
Received (DL)
Range: 0 to 2 x 109. Unit:

byte.
Indicates the number of bytes

received at the application protocol
level.
Application Bytes
Sent (UL)

byte.
Indicates the number of bytes sent

at the application protocol level.
SNDCP Bytes
Received (DL)

byte.

received at the SNDCP protocol
level since GPRS attach.
SNDCP Bytes Sent

(UL)

byte.

at the SNDCP protocol level since
GPRS attach.
LLC Bytes Received

(DL)

byte.

received at the LLC protocol level
since PS attach.
LLC Bytes Sent (UL)

byte.

at the LLC protocol level since PS
attach.
RLC Bytes Received

(DL)

byte.

received at the RLC protocol level
since GPRS attach.
RLC Bytes Sent (UL)

byte.

at the RLC protocol level since
GPRS attach.
GPRS Data Throughput

This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Data Throughput of the GPRS. The
following table provides the information about IEs related to the data throughput ratio at the
application, SNDCP, LLC, and RLC layers.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
App Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the data throughput on the

uplink and downlink at the
application layer.
SNDCP Throughput
Range: 0 to 400. Unit: kbit/

s.

uplink and downlink at the SNDCP
layer.
LLC Throughput

s.

uplink and downlink at the LLC
layer.

14-137
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
RLC Throughput

s.

uplink and downlink at the RLC
layer.
LLC Retrasimission
Rate
Indicates the retransmission rate on

the uplink at the LLC layer.
RLC Retrasimission
Rate
Indicates the retransmission rate on

the uplink at the RLC layer.
RLC BLER
Indicates the block error rate on the

downlink at the RLC layer.
GPRS Data Timeslots

This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Data Timeslots of the GPRS. The following
table provides the information about IEs related to the GPRS data timeslots.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
TS used
Indicates the used timeslot number on the

uplink and downlink.
TS Channel Type
Indicates the type of channel in each timeslot

on the uplink and downlink.
CS-n Data

%.
These elements contain the distribution of

coding scheme usage for each timeslot.

%.
These elements contain the distribution of

modulation coding scheme usage for each
timeslot.
GMSK rate

%.
Indicates the usage percentage of the

Gaussian minimum shift-frequency keying
(GMSK) coding scheme.
8PSK rate

%.
Indicates the usage percentage of 8 phase

shift keying (8PSK) coding scheme.
n: 1 to 4
MCS-n Data
n: 1 to 9
GPRS Line Chart

This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Line Chart of the GPRS. The following
table provides the information about IEs such as the APP, SNDCP, LLC, and RLC throughput
ratio and timeslot usage of the GPRS.
14-138

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
APP Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the data throughput on the uplink

and downlink at the application layer.
SNDCP Throughput

kbit/s.

and downlink at the SNDCP layer.
LLC Throughput

kbit/s.

and downlink at the LLC layer.
RLC Throughput

kbit/s.

and downlink at the RLC layer.
Number Of Used
Timeslot (DL)
Indicates the number of used timeslots on

the downlink.
Number Of Used
Timeslot (UL)
Indicates the number of used timeslots on

the uplink.
Current CS (DL)
Range: 1 to 4
Indicates the coding scheme currently

used on downlink.
Current CS (UL)
Range: 1 to 4
Indicates the coding scheme currently

used on uplink.
Current MCS (DL)
Range: 1 to 9
Indicates the modulation coding scheme

currently used on downlink.
Current MCS (UL)
Range: 1 to 9
Indicates the modulation coding scheme

currently used on uplink.
GPRS PDP Context

This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS PDP Context of the GPRS. The following
table provides the information about IEs related to the PDP.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Active PDP Contexts
0 or 1
Indicates whether to active the PDP

contexts.
l 0: Active
l 1: Inactive
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
PDP NSAPI
An integer ranging
from 5 to 15
Indicates the service access point identity at

the network layer.
PDP LLC SAPI
Range: 3 to 11
Indicates the service access point identity at

the logical link control layer.
PDP Delay Class
Indicates the delay class as defined by

subscription.

14-139
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
PDP Reliability Class
Indicates the reliability class as defined by

subscription.
PDP Precedence Class
Indicates the precedence class as defined by

subscription.
PDP Peak Throughput
Indicates the peak throughput as defined by

subscription.
PDP Mean
Throughput
Indicates the mean throughput.
PDP Radio Priority
Indicates the radio priority as defined by

subscription.
PDP Access Point

Name
Indicates the host name or network address

for each active PDP context.
PDP Address
IPv4 or IPv6
Indicates the user address.
GPRS Status
This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Status of the GPRS. The following table
provides the information about IEs related to the GPRS status.
14-140
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Number of TS Used
(DL)
Range: 0 to 8
Indicates the number of timeslots used on

the downlink.
Number of TS Used
(UL)
Range: 0 to 8
Indicates the number of timeslots used on

the uplink.
PBCCH TS
Range: 0 to 7
Indicates the timeslots of the packet

broadcast control channel.
RAC
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the Routing Area Code.
GMM State
Indicates the state of GPRS Mobility

Management (GMM) protocol: Idle,
Ready, or Standby.
GRR State
Indicates the state of GPRS Radio Resource

(GRR) protocol: Packet Idle or Packet
Transfer.
TLLI
Indicates the temporary logical link

identity.
TFI (DL)
Range: 0 to 31
Indicates the Temporary Flow ID on the

downlink. Used to identify the temporary
block flow.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
TFI (UL)
Range: 0 to 31
Indicates the Temporary Flow ID on the

uplink. Used to identify the temporary
block flow.
NC
Indicates the network control mode.
NMO
Indicates the network operation mode.
Coding Scheme UL
l 1 to 4 corresponds
to CS 1 to CS 4.
Uplink coding scheme. Refers to the coding

mode with the maximum usage ratio on the
uplink within 500 ms.
l 7 to 15 corresponds
to MCS 1 to MCS
9.
Coding Scheme DL
l CS 1 to CS 4
l MCS 1 to MCS 9
Downlink coding scheme. Refers to the

coding mode with the maximum usage ratio
on the downlink within 500 ms.
Mean BEP
Mean value of the bit error probability

(BEP)
CV BEP
Coefficient of variation of BEP
GSM C/A
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to GSM C/A of the GSM. The following table
provides the information about IEs such as the signal strength of the frequency used by the
current MS and the adjacent-frequency signal strength.
The Probe disables the GSM C/A measurement function by default. You can obtain
corresponding IE information only after the C/A measurement function is enabled. For details
about how to enable the C/A measurement function, see 11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A
Measurements.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
SS

dBm.
Indicates the signal strengths of the four adjacent

frequencies of the current serving cell.
C/A +1
Range: -110 to +100.

Unit: dB.
Indicates the carrier-to-adjacent ratio. Calculation

formula: Received signal strength at the serving
frequency - Received signal strength at the adjacent
frequency that is equal to the serving frequency plus
200 kHz.
C/A +2
Range: -110 to +100.

Unit: dB.

frequency that is equal to the serving frequency plus
400 kHz.

14-141
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
C/A -1
Range: -110 to +100.

Unit: dB.

frequency that is equal to the serving frequency
minus 200 kHz.
C/A -2
Range: -110 to +100.

Unit: dB.

frequency that is equal to the serving frequency
minus 400 kHz.
GSM C/I
This describes meanings of the IEs related to GSM C/I of the GSM. The following table provides
the information about IEs such as the channel ARFCN, received signal strength, and intrafrequency carrier-to-interference ratio.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
ARFCN
Indicates the channel ARFCN.
RxLev

dBm.
Indicates the received signal strength.
C/I
Unit: dB
Indicates the intra-frequency carrier-tointerference ratio.
Hopping Parameters
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Hopping Parameters of the GSM. The following
table provides the GSM hopping parameters.
14-142
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Hopping State
0 or 1
Indicates whether to use the frequency

hopping. 0 indicates no and 1 indicates
yes.
Hopping Freq List
Range: 0 to 1023
Indicates the ARFCNs of the channels

in the hopping frequency list, for
example, 1, 10, 19, and 28.
Hopping Freq count
Indicates the number of hopping

frequencies in the Hopping Freq
List.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
MAIO
Range: 0 to 63
Indicates the mobile allocation index

offset. The mobile allocation index
offset indicates the position from
which the frequency hopping starts in
the hopping frequency list. This IE is
valid only when the frequency
hopping is used.
HSN
Range: 0 to 63
Indicates the hopping sequence

number. The hopping sequence
number indicates which hopping
frequency list is being used.
Other Radio Parameters

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Other Radio Parameters of the GSM. The
following table provides the GSM channel and cell reselection parameters.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
ATT
0 or 1
Indicates whether to allow IMSI attach. 0

indicates no and 1 indicates yes.
AGBLK
Range: 0 to 7
Indicates the number of reserved blocks.
CBA
Not allowed or Allowed
Indicates the cell bar access.
CBQ
Not barred or Barred
Indicates the cell bar qualify.
T3212
Range: 0 to 63
Indicates the periodical location update

counter.
Max Retrans
1, 2, 4, or 7

retransmissions.
Reestablishment
Not qualify or Qualify
Indicates whether to limit cell

reconstruction.
Tx Integer
3 to 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32,

or 50
Indicates the number of extended

transmission timeslots.
MS_TXPWR_M
AX_CCH
Range: 0 to 31. Unit: dBm.
Indicates the maximum level of the

transmit power allowed for an MS to
access the control channel.
RXLEV_ACCE
SS_MIN

dBm.
Indicates the minimum strength of the

received signal allowed for an MS to
access the system.
POWER_OFFSE
T_VALID
Indicates whether POWER_OFFSET is

valid.

14-143
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
POWER_OFFSE
T
Range: 0 to 3
Indicates the power offset, which must be

used with MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH.
l 0: 0 dB
l 1: 2 dB
l 2: 4 dB
l 3: 6 dB
CELL_RESELE
CT_HYSTERES
IS
Range: 0 to 14. Step: 2.

Unit: dB.
Indicates the cell reselection hysteresis.
CELL_RESELE
CT_OFFSET
Range: 0 to 63
corresponding to 0 dB to
126 dB. Step: 2 dB.
Indicates the cell reselection offset.
TEMPORARY_
OFFSET
Range: 0 to 7. The values

from 0 to 6 correspond to 0
dB to 60 dB. The value 7
corresponds to .
Indicates the temporary offset.
PENALTY_TIM
E
Range: 0 to 31,
corresponding to 20s to
620s.
Indicates the penalty time.
Radio Parameters
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Radio Parameters of the GSM. The following
table provides the information about IEs such as the received signal strength and transmit powers
of each cell of the GSM.
14-144
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Rxlev Full

dBm.
Indicates the received signal strength

(Full value).
Rxlev Sub

dBm.
Indicates the received signal strength (Sub

value).
Rxlev Idle

dBm.
Indicates the received signal strength of

the serving cell in idle status.
RxQual Full
Range: 0 to 7
Indicates the received signal quality (Full

value).
RxQual Sub
Range: 0 to 7
Indicates the received signal quality (Sub

value).
TA
Range: 0 to 63. Unit: bit.
Indicates the timing advance. Valid only

in dedicated mode.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Tx Power
The value range is:
Indicates the transmit power. Valid only

in dedicated mode.
l GSM 850 MHz: 5 to 39

(Unit: dBm)
l GSM 900 MHz: 5 to 39
(Unit: dBm)
l GSM 1800 MHz: 0 to 36
(Unit: dBm)
l GSM 1900 MHz: 0 to 33
(Unit: dBm)
Power Control
Level
Range: 0 to 31
Indicates the transmit power level ordered

by the base station. Valid only in
dedicated mode.
NCell RxLev 1-6

dBm.
Indicates the received signal strength of a

neighboring cell.
RLT Actual
Range: 0 to 64
Indicates the actual radio link timeout.
RLT Max
Range: 0 to 64
Indicates the maximum radio link

timeout.
C/I Worst
Range: -5 to +35. Unit: dB
Indicates the worst carrier-to-interference

ratio.
FER Full
Indicates the frame error rate (Full value).

The formula is as follows: Number of
error frames/Total number of frames x
100%.
FER Sub
Indicates the frame error rate (Sub value).

error frames/Total number of frames x
100%.
BER Full
Indicates the bit error rate (Full value).

error bits/Total number of bits x 100%.
BER Sub
Indicates the bit error rate (Sub value).

error bits/Total number of bits x 100%.
DSC Actual
Range: 0 to 45
Indicates the current value of Downlink

Signalling Counter (DSC).
Valid only in idle mode.
MS_DTX
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Indicates the discontinuous transmission

of the MS.

14-145
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
CGI
Indicates the Cell Global Identity,

consisting of the Mobile Country Code,
Mobile Network Code, Location Area
Code, and cell ID.
Cell Name
Indicates the cell name.
TCH ARFCN
Range: 0 to 1023
Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency

Channel Number of Traffic Channel. This
IE is valid only in dedicated mode and
only for channels where no frequency
hopping is used.
l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251

l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124
l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124,
975 to 1023
l DCS 1800: 512 to 885
l PCS 1900: 512 to 810
BCCH ARFCN
Range: 0 to 1023
l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251
l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124
l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124,
975 to 1023
Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency

Channel Number of Broadcast Control
Channel. This IE is valid only in the idle
mode and only for channels where no
frequency hopping is used.
l DCS 1800: 512 to 885

l PCS 1900: 512 to 810
14-146
Timeslot
Range: 0 to 8
Indicates the number of timeslots.
Cell Priority
Indicates the cell priority.
Mode
Indicates the service type performing by

the MS currently, such as Voice. This IE
is displayed as Idle in idle state.
Channel Type
Indicates the channel type that a speech

coder uses.
Ciphering
Algorithm
Indicates the ciphering algorithm used for

the CS or PS domain, for example, A5/1,
A5/2, or GEA5/1.
Sub Channel
Number
Indicates the number of subchannels.
Cell GPRS
Support
YES or NO
Indicates whether to support the GPRS.
Cell EGPRS
Support
YES or NO
Indicates whether to support the enhanced

general packet radio service (EGPRS).
Speech Codec
Indicates the currently used speech codec:

EFR, HR, FR, or AMR.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Serving and Neighboring Cells

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Serving and Neighboring Cells of the GSM. The
following table provides the information about IEs such as the ARFCNs of the broadcast control
channel (BCCH), base station identity codes (BSICs), cell names, frequency bands, received
signal strength, parameters of cell selection and reselection, and location area codes of the
serving and neighboring cells.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
BAND
l GSM-R 850
Indicates the frequency band of BCCH

carrier.
l P-GSM 900
l E-GSM 900
l DCS 1800
l PCS 1900
BCCH ARFCN
Range: 0 to 1023
l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251
Indicates the ARFCN of the broadcast

control channel.
l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124

l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124, 975
to 1023
l DCS 1800: 512 to 885
l PCS 1900: 512 to 810
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
BSIC
Range: 00 to 77
Cell Name
Indicates the cell name. Present only if an

engineering parameter file is used.
Cell ID
Indicates the cell identity. Present only if

an engineering parameter file is used.
C1
Indicates the cell selection criterion. This

IE is valid only in idle mode.
C2
Indicates the cell reselection criterion.

This IE is valid only in idle mode.
C31
Indicates the GPRS cell selection

criterion. This IE is valid only in the
packet service.
C32
Indicates the GPRS cell reselection

criterion. This IE is valid only in the
packet service.
Distance
Unit: km
Indicates the distance between the MS

and the cell.
LAC
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the Location Area Code of the

serving cell.

14-147
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Rxlev (Sub
+Idle)

dBm.

(Sub value) or the idle value in idle status
of the serving cell.
Vocoder Usage
This section describes the IEs related to Vocoder Usage in the GSM network. The following
table provides the usage information about the uplink and downlink AMR codec rates for the
test terminal.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
EFR

%.
Indicates the percentage of the enhanced full rate

(EFR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or
downlink.
FR

%.
Indicates the percentage of the full rate (FR) to all

the AMR rates on the uplink or downlink.
HR

%.
Indicates the percentage of the half rate (HR) to all

the AMR rates on the uplink or downlink.
FAMR

%.
Indicates the percentage of the full adaptive multirate (FAMR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or
downlink.
HAMR

%.
Indicates the percentage of the half adaptive multirate (HAMR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or
downlink.
14.3.2 WCDMA Information Elements of UEs

This describes the WCDMA information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the WCDMA UE air interface views.
AMR Codecs
This section describes the IEs related to AMR Codecs in the WCDMA network. The following
table provides the information about the WCDMA AMR uplink and downlink codecs, voice
type, and frame rate.
14-148
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Bad Frame Indicator
BFI not set or BFI set
Indicates the bad frame indicator

on the downlink.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Error Flag
Normal or Encoder error
Indicates the error flag on the

uplink.
Frame Rate
l 12.2 kbit/s
Indicates the frame rate on the

uplink or downlink.
l 10.2 kbit/s
l 7.95 kbit/s
l 7.40 kbit/s
l 6.70 kbit/s
l 5.90 kbit/s
l 5.15 kbit/s
l 4.75 kbit/s
Frame Type
Indicates the frame type on the

uplink or downlink.
Time Alignment Flag
TAF not set or TAF set
Indicates the time alignment flag

on the downlink.
UnStable Frame
Indicator
UFI not set or UFI set
Indicates the unstable frame

indicator on the downlink.
Vocoder Data
Indicates the vocoder data on the

uplink or downlink.
Vocoder Mode
Indicates the vocoder mode on the

uplink or downlink, such as
AMR, EFR, FR, or HR.
Cell Search
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Cell Search of the WCDMA. The following table
provides the parameter information about searching cells.
The steps for searching cells are as follows:
1.
Synchronize timeslots.
The UE synchronizes timeslots of a cell according to the basic synchronization codes of
the supplemental channel (SCH).
2.
Identify the frame alignment and code group.

The UE searches the frame alignment according to the secondary synchronization codes
of the SCH, and then identifies the obtained timeslot synchronization code groups.
3.
Identify the scrambling code.

The UE confirms that the basic scrambling code of the cell is found.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-149
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Chart of Step One Search
Indicates the first step of searching

cells.
Chart of Step Two Search
Indicates the second step of

searching cells.
Chart of Step Three Search
Indicates the third step of searching

cells.
Step Three
P-SC
Range: 0 to 511
Indicates the primary scrambling

code.
S-SC
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the secondary scrambling

code.
Ec/Io
Range: -30 to 0.
Unit: dB.
Indicates the ratio of the energy per

chip to the total power density of the
received bandwidth.
PN_POS
Indicates the peak position in chipx8

units.
DRX Mode
This describes meanings of the IEs related to DRX Mode of the WCDMA. The following table
provides the parameter information about the discontinuous reception.
IE Name
Description
DRX Cycle Num
Indicates the number of discontinuous reception

mechanism (DRX) cycles.
Paging indicator bit
Indicates the paging indicator bit.
Finger
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Finger of the WCDMA. You can check whether
a barrier or a line-of-sight path exists in the link.
14-150
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Finger ID
Range: 0 to 11
Indicates the Rake finger identifier.
P-SC
Range: 0 to 511
Indicates the primary scrambling code for

each Rake finger.
Ec/Io
Indicates the ratio of the energy per chip to

the total power density of the received
bandwidth.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Finger Pos
Indicates the PN position offsets of the

finger.
HSDPA Link Statistics

This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSDPA Link Statistics of the HSDPA. The
following table provides the information about the HSDPA link statistics.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Scheduled Rate-Delta
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the rate delta of scheduling data

at the MAC layer.
Scheduled Rate-Average
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the average rate of scheduling

data at the MAC layer.
Served Rate-Delta
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the rate delta of transmission at

the MAC layer, including the rate of
failed transmissions and retransmissions.
Served Rate-Average
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the average rate of transmission

at the MAC layer, including the rate of
MAC Layer Rate-Delta
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the rate delta of transmission at

the MAC layer, excluding the rate of
MAC Layer Rate-Average
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the average rate of transmission

at the MAC layer, excluding the rate of
HS-SCCH Success RateDelta
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the usage ratio of the HS-SCCH

channel (transient value).
HS-SCCH Success RateAverage
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the usage ratio of the HS-SCCH

channel (phase average value).
HS-DSCH SBLER-Delta
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the schedule block error rate at

the MAC layer (transient value).
HS-DSCH SBLERAverage
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the schedule block error rate at

the MAC layer (phase average value).
HS-DSCH Res.BLERDelta
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the residual block error rate at

the RLC layer (transient value).
HS-DSCH Res.BLERAverage
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the residual block error rate at

the RLC layer (phase average value).

14-151
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
HS-DSCH Retrans. RateDelta
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the retransmission rate of the

High Speed Downlink Shared Channel
(HS-DSCH) (transient value).
HS-DSCH Retrans. RateAverage
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the retransmission rate of the

HS-DSCH channel (phase average
value).
CQI
Range: 0 to 30
Indicates the average value of the

Channel Quality Indicator (CQI).
Single Stream CQI

(MIMO)
Indicates the single stream CQI.
Dual Stream CQI1

(MIMO)
Indicates the CQI of stream 1 in double

stream transmission mode.
Dual Stream CQI2

(MIMO)
Indicates the CQI of stream 2 in double

stream transmission mode.
Number of HS-PDSCH
Codes
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the average number of codes

used by the UE.
HSDPA Physical Channel

This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSDPA Physical Channel of the HSDPA. The
following table provides the configuration information about the HSDPA physical channel.
IE Name
HS-DSCH
Configuration
HS-SCCH
Configuration
14-152
Range/Unit
Description
H-RNTI UE ID
Indicates the temporary

ID of the UE.
DL DPCH to HSSCCH Timing

Offset
Unit: chip
Indicates the timing

offset of the downlink
dedicated physical
channel (DPCH) relative
to the high speed shared
control channel (HSSCCH).
HARQ Processes

processes of the hybird
automatic repeat request
(HARQ).
HS-SCCH
Indicates the coding and

validity of the HS-SCCH.
OVSF
Indicates the orthogonal

variable spreading factor.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Uplink HS-DPCCH
Configuration
MAC-d Flow
Mapping List
Reordering Queue
Parameters
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Range/Unit
Description
CQI Feedback
Cycle
Unit: ms
Indicates the feedback

cycle of the channel
quality indicator (CQI).
CQI Repetition
Factor
Indicates the CQI

repetition factor.
Ack/Nack
Repetition Factor
Indicates the repetition

factor of the
ACKnowledgement
(ACK) or Negative
ACKnowledgement
(NACK).
UL DPCCH to HSDPCCH Timing

Offset
Unit: chip
Indicates the timing

offset of the high speed
dedicated physical
control channel (HSDPCCH) relative to the
uplink dedicated physical
control channel
(DPCCH).
PO-ACK
Indicates the power offset

of the ACK relative to the
downlink DPCCH.
PO-NACK

of the NACK relative to
the downlink DPCCH.
PO-CQI

of the CQI relative to the
downlink DPCCH.
MAC-d Flow ID
Indicates the ID of the

MAC-d flow.
CCTrCH ID

coded composite
transport channel.
Queue ID List
Indicates the list for

queue ID.
Queue ID
Indicates the queue ID.
Receive Window
Size
Indicates the MAC-hs

window size.
Reordering Release
Timer
Indicates duration of the

MAC-hs reordering
release

14-153
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
MAC-d PDU Sizes
Range/Unit
Description
Indicates the size of the

MAC-d PDU.
HS-DSCH Decoding Statistics

This describes meanings of the IEs related to HS-DSCH Decoding Statistics of the HSDPA.
The following table provides the information about the HSDPA decoding statistics on carrier 0,
carrier 1, and the two carriers.
14-154
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Carrier
Indicates the carrier for statistics, which can be

Carrier0, Carrier1, or Total.
TBS
Unit: bit
Indicates the transport block size. Each frame

transmits only one TB.
QPSK
Unit: frame
Indicates the number of frames modulated in

Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) mode.
16QAM
Unit: frame
Indicates the number of frames modulated in 16

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (16QAM)
mode.
64QAM
Unit: frame

64QAM mode.
SB-
Indicates the number of frames failing to be

transmitted at the MAC layer.
SB+
Indicates the number of frames successfully

transmitted at the MAC layer.
Dup.SB+
Indicates the number of NACK messages to

which the NodeB translates the ACK messages
returned by the UE upon successful decoding.
Other
Indicates the number of exceptional frames, for

example, the frame whose TBS of the current
successful retransmission is different from that of
the latest successful transmission.
SBLER
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the schedule block error rate at the

MAC layer, which is calculated through the
following formula: Number of transmission
failures / Total number of transmissions x 100%.
1st SBLER
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the schedule block error rate of the first

frame at the MAC layer.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Block-
Indicates the number of frames that fail to be

transmitted at the RLC layer. After several
failures at the MAC layer, the RLC initiates the
retransmission.
Block+

transmitted at the RLC layer. The value of Block
+ is the same as the value of SB+.
Res.BLER
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the residual block error rate at the RLC

layer, which is calculated through the following
formula: Number of frames that fail to be
transmitted at the RLC layer / Total number of
transmissions at the RLC layer x 100%.

transmitted at the MAC layer during the first
transmission.

transmitted in the second retransmission after the
first transmission fails.

transmitted in the third retransmission after the
first transmission and the second retransmission
fail.

transmitted in the fourth retransmission after the
first three transmissions fail.

transmitted in the fifth retransmission after the
first four transmissions fail.
>=6

transmitted in the sixth or later retransmission
after all the previous transmissions fail.
HS-SCCH Decoding Statistics

This describes meanings of the IEs related to HS-SCCH Decoding Statistics of the HSDPA.
The following table provides the information about the HSDPA decoding statistics on carrier 0,
carrier 1, and the two carriers.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
HS-SCCH Attempts
Indicates the total number of frames.

14-155
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
14-156
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
HS-SCCH Success
Indicates the number of HS-SCCH

frames scheduled to the UE that is in
the communication.
HS-SCCH Success
Rate
Indicates the success ratio of the HSSCCH channel.
ACK->NACK/DTX
(Duplicate SB +)
Indicates the ratio of NACK messages

to which the NodeB translates the
ACK messages transmitted by the UE
upon successful decoding.
HS-SCCH Less
Operation Rate
Indicates the rate of the transport

blocks (TBs) that use the HS-SCCH
Less operation mode to total TBs.
1 TB
Indicates the number of single stream

transmissions used in the multiple
input multiple output (MIMO).
2 TBs
Indicates the number of double stream

transmissions used in the MIMO.
Percent 1TB
Indicates the percentage of single

stream transmission used in the
MIMO.
Percent 2TBs
Indicates the percentage of double

stream transmission used in the
MIMO.
Percent Single Stream
Indicates the percentage of data using

single stream transmission.
Percent Dual Stream
Indicates the percentage of data using

double stream transmission.
Single Stream SBLER
Indicates the schedule block error rate

of single stream transmission, which
is calculated through the following
formula: NACK / (ACK + NACK)
100%.
Dual Stream1 SBLER

of stream 1 in double stream
transmission mode, which is
calculated through the following
formula: NACK1 / (ACK1 + NACK1)
100%.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Dual Stream2 SBLER

of stream 2 in double stream
transmission mode, which is
calculated through the following
formula: NACK2 / (ACK2 + NACK2)
100%.
HSUPA DL Channel Configuration

This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSUPA DL Channel Configuration of the
HSDPA. The following table provides the configuration information about the downlink channel
of the HSUPA.
IE Name
HSUPA DL
All Channel
Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Range/Unit
Description
SERV_CELL_
INDEX
Indicates the serving cell index of

the uplink packet access (UPA)
service.
TTI
Indicates the transmission time

interval.
SG_SEL
Indicates the type of the initial

serving grant (SG).
P_ERNTI
Indicates the temporary identifier of

the primary radio network, which is
allocated for the UE that performs
the EUL service.
S_ERNTI
Indicates the temporary identifier of

the secondary radio network, which
is allocated for the UE that performs
the EUL service.
AGCH_ACTI
ON
Indicates whether the access grant

channel (AGCH) is activated.
AGCH_VALI
D
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates whether AGCH

information fields are valid.
AGCH_OVSF
Indicates the spreading factor of the

AGCH.
AGCH_STAR
T
Indicates the start frame number or

subframe number of the AGCH.
AGCH_END
Indicates the end frame number or

subframe number of the AGCH.

14-157
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
HSUPA DL
Each Cell
Configuration
in the EUL
Active Set
14-158
Range/Unit
Description
AGCH_DPCH
_OFFSET
Range: 0 to 149
Indicates the offset from the first

AGCH transmission time interval
to the DPCH.
STTD_AGCH
Indicates whether the space time

transmit diversity (STTD) is used
on the AGCH.
CELL_IDX
Range: 1 to 6
Indicates the EUL cell number.
PSC
Range: 0 to 511
Indicates the scrambling code.
SERV_CELL
Indicates whether the current cell is

the serving cell of the EDCH.
RLS_IDX
Range: 0 to 5
Indicates the index of the radio link

set.
REF_FINGER
Range: 0 to 31
Indicates the reference finger index.
TPC_INDEX
Range: 0 to 5
Indicates the index of the hybrid

ARQ indicator channel (HICH).
RGCH_ACTI
ON
Indicates whether the relative grant

channel (RGCH) is activated.
RGCH_VALI
D
Indicates whether RGCH

HICH_ACTIO
N
Indicates whether the HICH is

activated.
HICH_VALID
Indicates whether HICH

HICH_OVSF
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the OVSF code for the

HICH and RGCH.
HICH_START

subframe number for the HICH.
HICH_END

subframe number for the HICH.
HICH_DPCH_
OFFSET
Range: 0 to 149
Indicates the offset from the HICH

to the DPCH.
TAU_HICH
Indicates the timeslot offset of the

HICH to the P-CCPCH.
HICH_SIGNA
TURE
Range: 0 to 39
Indicates the ID of the Handamard

codes for the HICH.
HICH_STTD
Indicates whether the space time

transmit diversity (STTD) is used
on the HICH.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
RGCH_STAR
T

subframe number of the RGCH.
RGCH_END

subframe number of the RGCH.
RGCH_DPCH
_OFFSET
Range: 0 to 149
Indicates the offset from the RGCH

to the DPCH.
RGCH_SIGN
ATURE
Range: 0 to 39
Indicates the signature sequence ID

of the RGCH.
DPCH_CHAN
NEL
Range: 0 to 7
Indicates the number of downlink

dedicated physical channel.
HSUPA Link Statistics

This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSUPA Link Statistics of the HSUPA. The
following table provides the information about the HSUPA link statistics.
IE Name
HSUPA Link
Throughput
Statistics
HSUPA Link
Quality Statistics
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Range/Unit
Description
MAC-e PDU NonDTX Rate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the nonDTX (non

discontinuous
transmission) rate.
MAC-e PDU Served

Rate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the served

rate.
MAC-e PDU
Available Rate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the
available rate.
RxNon-DTX
Probability

%.
Indicates the nonDTX probability.
SBLER

%.
Indicates the schedule

block error rate.
1st SBLER

%.
Indicates the schedule

block error rate of the
first frame.
Power Limited Rate

%.
Indicates the limited

rate of power.
SG Limited Rate

%.

rate of serving grant
(SG).
Buffer Limited Rate

%.

rate of buffer.

14-159
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
HSUPA Grant
Statistics
Range/Unit
Description
Happy Rate

%.
Indicates the HAPPY

rate.
Average AG
Indicates the average

value of absolute
grant (AG).
Combined RG Hold
Rate

%.
Indicates the
combined hold rate of
relative grant (RG).
Combined RG Up
Rate

%.
Indicates the
combined up rate of
relative grant.
Combined RG Down
Rate

%.
Indicates the
combined down rate
of relative grant.
Average SG
Indicates the average

value of serving grant.
HSUPA UL Channel Configuration

This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSUPA UL Channel Configuration of the
HSDPA. The following table provides the configuration information about the downlink channel
of the HSUPA.
IE Name
HSUPA DL
Channel
Configuration
14-160
Range/Unit
Description
TTI
Indicates the transmission time

interval.
IR_CC
Indicates the coding scheme.
DPDCH_PRES
Indicates whether the current

R99 dedicated physical data
channel (DPDCH) is valid.
HS_DPCCH_P
RES
Indicates whether the downlink

HSDPA is valid.
SLOT_FORM
AT
Range: 0 to 3
Indicates the timeslot format of

the DPCCH.
ACTION_TYP
E
Indicates the ACTION type.
MAX_EUL_S
F
Indicates the maximum EUL

spreading factor.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
HSUPA UL
Channel Each
Reference Power
Offset
Range/Unit
Description
UE_MAX_SF
Indicates the maximum EUL

spreading factor exported by
UE.
START_FRA
ME_NUM
Indicates the start EUL frame

number or subframe number.
END_FRAME
_NUM
Indicates the end EUL frame

number or subframe number.
PL_NON_MA
X
Range: 44 to 100

punctuating limit.
MAX_TX_PW
R
Range: -50 to
33. Unit: dBm
Indicates the maximum transmit

power of UE.
IQ_MAP
Indicates the E-DPDCH I/Q

mapping.
SERVING_GR
ANT
Indicates the service grant.
GRANT_SEL
Indicates the grant selection.
2IDX_STEP_T
Range: 0 to 37
Indicates the threshold of the

enhanced transport format
combination indicator (ETFCI).
3IDX_STEP_T
Range: 0 to 37
Indicates the ETFCI threshold.
EDPCCH_PO
Range: 0 to 8
Indicates the power offset from

E-DPCCH to DPCCH.
TFCI_CONFI
G
1 indicates that
the indicator is
configured, and
0 indicates that
the indicator is
not configured.
Indicates whether an indicator is

configured for the Ref E-TFCI.
REF_TFCI
Range: 1 to 127
Indicates the enhanced transport

format combination indicator.
REF_PWR_OF
FSET
Range: 0 to 29
Indicates the power offset.
Inter-RAT GSM Cell Information

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Inter-RAT GSM Cell Information of the
WCDMA. The following table provides the inter-system (such as GSM) cell information.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-161
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
BCCH
ARFCN
Range: 0 to 1023
Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel number for

the BCCH.
BAND
Indicates the inter-system frequency band. The following

frequency bands are included:
l GSM 900 MHz
l DCS 1800 MHz
l PCS 1900 MHz
l GSM 850 MHz
RSSI
Unit: dBm
Indicates the received signal strength indicator.
BSIC
Range: 00 to 77
Power Control
This section describes the IEs related to Power Control in the WCDMA network. The following
table lists the information about power control, such as the signal to interference ratio, transmit
power, and receive power.
14-162
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
SIR

dB.
Indicates the signal to interference ratio of

the dedicated physical control channel
(DPCCH).
Tx Power
Unit: dBm
Indicates the transmit power.
Rx Power
Unit: dBm
Indicates the receive power.
Rx Carr0 Chain0
Range: -128 to -20. unit:

dBm.

link 0 on carrier 0.
Rx Carr1 Chain0

dBm.

Rx Carr0 Chain1

dBm.

Rx Carr1 Chain1

dBm.

UE Tx TPC/frame
Indicates the power control bit that is sent

from the NodeB to the UE for adjusting the
transmit power on the uplink.
Cell Tx TPC/frame
Indicates the power control bit that is sent

from the UE to the NodeB for adjusting the
transmit power on the downlink.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
RACH and PRACH

This describes meanings of the IEs related to RACH and PRACH of the WCDMA. The
following table provides the information about the UE access.
IE Name
RACH
PRAC
H
Range/Unit
Description
AICH State
Indicates the state of the acquisition

indicator channel (AICH) sent by the
latest access timeslot.
Number of
Preamble
Range: 0 to 64
Indicates the number of transmitted

preambles.
Signature
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the signature for the preamble of

the latest access channel.
Slot No
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the subchannel where the latest

preamble signature is transmitted.
SFN
Range: 0 to 4095
Indicates the number of the system frame

where the latest preamble is transmitted.
AICH Timing
Indicates the timeslot of the AICH.
Max Tx Pwr
Range: -50 to 33.

Unit: dBm.
Indicates the allowed maximum transmit

power.
Avail Sig
Mask
Indicates the 16-bit mask of the available

signal.
Sub Ch Mask
Indicates the 12-bit mask of the available

signal.
SF Min
Indicates the minimum spreading factor

used for each random access channel
(RACH) with the period 10 ms.
SC Num
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the number of scrambling codes.
UL Punct
Lmt
Indicates the limit for punctuating on the

uplink.
Trch Id
Range: 1 to 32
Indicates the ID of the transport channel.
Pwr Offset
Unit: dB
Indicates the offset of preamble power.
Max Pream
Num
Range: 1 to 64

transmitted preambles.
RLC Throughput
This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLC Throughput of the WCDMA. The following
table provides the information about the uplink and downlink throughput at the RLC layer of
the WCDMA.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-163
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
RLC UL
Throughput
RB UL Assigned
Throughput
RLC DL
Throughput
RB DL Assigned
Throughput
Range/Unit
Description
RLC PDU
Throughput UL
Unit: kbit/s

packet data unit (PDU)
throughput at the RLC
layer.
RLC SDU
Throughput UL
Unit: kbit/s

signaling data unit (SDU)
throughput at the RLC
layer.
RLC PDU
Retransmission Rate
UL
Unit: %
Indicates the uplink PDU

retransmission rate at the
RLC layer.
ChannelIdentity
Indicates the channel

identifier.
Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the throughput.
RLC PDU
Throughput DL
Unit: kbit/s

PDU throughput at the
RLC layer.
RLC SDU
Throughput DL
Unit: kbit/s

SDU throughput at the
RLC layer.
RLC PDU Errors Rate

DL
Unit: %

PDU error rate at the RLC
layer.
ChannelIdentity
Indicates the channel

identifier.
Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the throughput.
Serving/Active Set and Neighboring Cells

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Serving/Active Set and Neighboring Cells of the
WCDMA. The following table provides the parameters of the active set, monitoring set, or
detection set of a UE.
14-164
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Freq DL
Unit: MHz
Indicates the downlink frequency.
P-SC
Range: 0 to 511
Indicates the primary scrambling code.
Ec/Io

dB.
Indicates the ratio of the combined peak energy per

chip to the total power density of the received
bandwidth.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Peak Ec/Io

dB.
Indicates the ratio of the peak energy per chip to

the total power density of the received bandwidth.
RSCP

dBm.
Indicates the combined received signal code

power.
Peak RSCP

dBm.
Indicates the peak received signal code power.
PS DL
Indicates the downlink resource block bearer type

of an active set for PS services, such as R99 and
HSDPA.
PS UL
Indicates the uplink resource block bearer type of

an active set for PS services, such as R99 and
HSUPA.
S-SC
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the secondary scrambling code.
Cell ID
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the identifier of the cell configured on the

RNC. Present only if an engineering parameter file
is used.
Cell Name

Distance
Unit: m
Indicates the distance between the UE and the cell.
LAC
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the Location Area Code of the serving

cell.
RNC ID
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the RNC identifier. Present only if an

Carrier
l In non-DC-HSDPA mode, the value of

Carrier is null.
l In DC-HSDPA mode, Carrier displays the
information about the carrier in an active set
cell.
UE State
This describes meanings of the IEs related to UE State of the WCDMA. The following table
provides the state information about the UE.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Cell Barred
Indicates the cell barred indicator.
Cell ID
Indicates the cell identity.
Cell Reserved
Indicates the cell reserved flag.

14-165
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
14-166
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Cell Reserved for

SoLSA
Indicates the flag of the cell reserved for

Support of Localized Service Area (SoLSA).
GMM State
Indicates the state of GPRS Mobility

Management (GMM) protocol: Idle, Ready,
or Standby.
GMM Sub State
Indicates the GPRS mobility management

substate.
IMEI
Indicates the international mobile equipment

identity.
IMSI
Indicates the international mobile subscriber

identity.
LAC
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the Location Area Code of the

serving cell.
MCC
Range: 000 to 999
Indicates the Mobile Country Code of the

serving cell.
MM State
Indicates the mobility management state.
MM Sub State
Indicates the mobility management substate.
MM Update
Indicates the mobility management update.
MNC
Range: 000 to 999
Indicates the Mobile Network Code of the

serving cell. May consist of two or three
digits.
RAC
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the Routing Area Code.
RF Mode
Indicates the radio frequency mode.
RNC ID
Indicates the Radio Network Controller

identity.
RRC State
Indicates the radio resource control state.
Service State
Indicates the service state.
UARFCN DL
Indicates the downlink ARFCN of the

UTRAN terrestrial radio access network.
UARFCN UL
Indicates the uplink ARFCN of the UTRAN

terrestrial radio access network.
UE Camped on a cell
Indicates the flag of the UE camped on a cell.
URA ID
Indicates the identity of the user registration

area (URA)

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
WCDMA BLER
This describes meanings of the IEs related to WCDMA BLER of the WCDMA. The following
table provides the information about IEs such as the transport channel number, block error rate
(BLER), size of the window, and number of received blocks that are checked by cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) in the WinSize.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
TrCH
Indicates the transport channel number.
BLER
Indicates the block error rate.
WinSize
Unit: frame
Indicates the size of the window.
CRC REC
Indicates the number of received blocks that

are checked by CRC in the WinSize.
CRC ERROR
Indicates the number of received error blocks

that are checked by CRC in the WinSize.
RACH BLER

%.
Indicates the block error rate of the random

access channel.
FACH BLER

%.
Indicates the block error rate of the forward

access channel.
14.3.3 CDMA Information Elements of MSs

This describes the CDMA information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the CDMA MS air interface views.
MS State
This describes meanings of the IEs related to MS State of the CDMA. The following table
provides the basic information about the MS.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Description
ESN
Indicates the equipment serial number.
IMSI
Indicates the international mobile subscriber identity.
RF Mode
Indicates the radio frequency mode.
Channel
Indicates the central ARFCN.
Slot Cycle Index
Indicates the index of the timeslot cycles.
BS P_REV
Indicates the highest protocol revision supported by the base

station.
P_REV in use
Indicates the protocol revision currently used between the

base and mobile stations.
14-167
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Description
Mobile P_REV
Indicates the highest protocol revision supported by the

CDMA MS.
Combined Ec/Io (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Combined Ec/Io of the CDMA2000 1x. The
following table provides value changes of Combined Ec/Io.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Combined Ec/Io

dB.
Indicates the strength of the pilot, computed by

the ratio of the pilot energy per chip to total
power spectral density.
FCH/SCH FER (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to FCH/SCH FER of the CDMA2000 1x. The
following table provides frame erasure ratios on the forward FCH, SCH 0, and SCH 1.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
F-FCH FER
Unit: %
Indicates the frame error rate on the forward FCH.
F-SCH0 FER
Unit: %
Indicates the frame error rate on the forward SCH

0.
F-SCH1 FER
Unit: %
Indicates the frame error rate on the forward SCH

1.
Finger (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Finger of the CDMA2000 1x. You can check
whether a barrier or a line-of-sight path exists in the link.
14-168
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
PN
Indicates the pilot PN offset of the finger.
Sector
Indicates the sector name corresponding to the pilot of

the finger.
Ec/Io
Range: -30 to 0.
Unit: dB.
Indicates the ratio of the pilot energy per chip of the

finger to total power spectral density of the received
bandwidth.
Delay
Unit: chip
Indicates the absolute finger position.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Status
Indicates the finger state. The following states are

included:
l Locked: indicates the finger is locked in the symbol
combiner.
l UnLocked: indicates the finger is unlocked in the
symbol combiner.
SectorName
Indicates the sector name.
Distance
Unit: m
Indicates the distance between the MS and the serving

cell.
Forward Link Info (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Forward Link Info of the CDMA2000 1x. The
following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the forward traffic channel
and the frame rates of the channel at different time.
IE Name
Description
FFCH
Indicates the forward fundamental channel.
FSCH0
Indicates the statistics for the forward supplemental channel 0.
FSCH1
Indicates the statistics for the forward supplemental channel 1.
Full
Indicates the statistics for the full-rate frames of the forward traffic
channel. Exists on the FCH and SCH.
Half
Indicates the statistics for the half-rate frames of the forward traffic
channel. Exists on only the FCH.
Quarter
Indicates the statistics for the one-quarter rate frames of the forward
traffic channel. Exists on only the FCH.
Eighth
Indicates the statistics for the one-eighth rate frames of the forward
Erasure
Indicates the statistics for the erasure frames of the forward traffic
Markov Statistics (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Markov Statistics of the CDMA2000 1x. The
following table provides information about IEs such as the statistics for the Markov call frames.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-169
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Description
Mode
Indicates the current call type of the MS. Involves all

call types supported by the MS.
Total frames
Indicates the total number of frames received by the

Markov call. The number is cleared when a new Markov
call starts.
State
Indicates the reception state of the MS. The following

states are involved:
l Entering CDMA State: refers to the CDMA
acquisition state.
l Sync Channel State: refers to the synchronization
state.
l Paging Channel State: refers to the paging state.
l Traffic Channel Initialization State: refers to the
traffic initialization state.
l Traffic Channel State: refers to the normal traffic
state.
l Exit State: refers to the exit state.
Bad frames
Indicates the number of bad frames during the Markov

call, including the number of the erasure frames and
full-rate frames with error bits. The number is cleared
when a new Markov call starts.
Markov rate
Indicates the current Markov call rate. The following

rates are involved:
l Rate Variable: refers to the variable rate.
l Rate 1/8: refers to the one-eighth rate.
l Rate 1/4: refers to the one-quarter rate.
l Rate 1/2: refers to the half rate.
l Full: refers to the full rate.
Indicates the Markov call error rate. The calculation
formula is Bad frames/Total frames.
Error rate
Received Frames
Counts
14-170
Full
Indicates the number of full-rate frames received

actually.
D1/2
Indicates the number of half-rate unavailable frames

received actually.
D1/4
Indicates the number of one-quarter rate unavailable

frames received actually.
D1/8
Indicates the number of one-eighth rate unavailable

frames received actually.
Bsig
Indicates the number of signaling frames received

actually.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Description
Expected
Half
Indicates the number of half-rate frames received

actually.
Quarter
Indicates the number of one-quarter rate frames

received actually.
Eighth
Indicates the number of one-eighth rate frames received

actually.
FErrs
Indicates the number of full-rate frames that are actually

received with error bits.
Erasures
Indicates the number of erasure frames received

actually on the fundamental channel (FCH).
BitErrs
Indicates the number of frames that are actually

received with error bits.
Percent
Indicates the percentage of error frames (the frames

with error rates or bits except for the signaling) to total
frames.
Full
Indicates the expected number of full-rate frames.
Half
Indicates the expected number of half-rate frames.
Quarter
Indicates the expected number of one-quarter rate

frames.
Eighth
Indicates the expected number of one-eighth rate

frames.
Pilot Sets (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Pilot Sets of the CDMA2000 1x. The following
table provides information about the serving cell and neighboring cells of the current MS on the
CDMA network.
The pilot set refers to a set of the pilot channels that have the same frequency and different PN
phases. The pilot set includes the parameters of the active set, candidate set, and neighboring
pilot set.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Active Set
Indicates the active set.
Candidate Set
Indicates the candidate set.
Neighbor Set
Indicates the neighboring pilot set.
PN
Range: 0 to 511
Indicates the PN offset of the pilot.

14-171
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Ec/Io

dB.
Indicates the ratio of the pilot energy per chip

to total power spectral density of the received
bandwidth.
SectorName
Distance
Unit: m
Indicates the distance between the MS and the

serving cell.
Power (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table
provides power information about the MS.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Rx Power

dBm.
Indicates the received signal power.
Tx Power

dBm.
TxAdj
Range: -127 to 128.

Unit: dB.
Indicates the power control value, that is, the

adjustment step of the transmit power.
Reverse Link Info (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Reverse Link Info of the CDMA2000 1x. The
following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the reverse traffic channel
and the frame rates of the channel at different time.
14-172
IE Name
Description
RFCH
Indicates the reverse fundamental channel.
RSCH0
Indicates the statistics for the reverse supplemental channel 0.
RSCH1
Indicates the statistics for the reverse supplemental channel 1.
Full
Indicates the statistics for the full-rate frames of the reverse traffic
Half
Indicates the statistics for the half-rate frames of the reverse traffic
channel. Exists on only the FCH.
Quarter
Indicates the statistics for the one-quarter rate frames of the reverse
Eighth
Indicates the statistics for the one-eighth rate frames of the reverse
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Description
Erasure
Indicates the statistics for the error frames of the reverse traffic
RLP Statistics (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLP Statistics of the CDMA2000 1x. The
following table provides statistical values of each type of frames at the radio link protocol (RLP)
layer.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Description
Service ID
Indicates the service ID.
Last Reset Time
Indicates the latest reset time, that is, the last reset
time (ms).
Retransmitted Frames Not Found
Indicates the number of retransmissions that is not

found.
Retransmitted Frames Missing
Indicates the number of missing transmitted frames.
Last RTT Measurement Frames
Indicates the number of 20 ms frames for the last

round-trip time measurement.
Largest Consecutive Erasures
Indicates the largest block of consecutive erasures.
Number of Resets
Indicates the number of resets.
Number of NAK Aborts
Indicates the number of NAK aborts.
Block of Bytes Used
Indicates the method for adding the block of bytes.
RX Queue
Idle Frames
Indicates the number of received idle frames.
Fill Frames
Indicates the number of received fill frames.
Blank Frames
Indicates the number of received blank frames.
Null Frames
Indicates the number of received null frames.
New Data Frames
Indicates the number of received new data frames.
Fundamental
Data Frames
Indicates the number of received 20 ms fundamental

data frames.
Erasures
Indicates the number of received erasures at the radio

link layer.
Multiplexer
Erasures
Indicates the number of received erasures at the

multiplexer layer.
Total Bytes
Indicates the total number of received bytes.

14-173
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Description
TX Queue
TX NAK Counts
Retransmitted
Frames
Indicates the number of retransmitted frames.
Idle Frames
Indicates the number of transmitted idle frames.
New Data Frames
Indicates the number of transmitted new frames.
Fundamental
Data Frames
Indicates the number of transmitted 20 ms

fundamental data frames.
Total Bytes
Indicates the total number of transmitted bytes.
Single
Indicates the number of single NAKs.
Double
Indicates the number of double NAKs.
Triple
Indicates the number of triple NAKs.
RLP Throughput (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLP Throughput of the CDMA2000 1x. The
following table provides changes of the throughput received and transmitted at the RLP layer.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
1x RLP Rx Throughput
Instantaneous
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the instantaneous throughput

on the downlink.
1x RLP Tx Throughput
Instantaneous
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the instantaneous throughput

on the uplink.
Signaling (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Signaling of the CDMA2000 1x. The following
table provides information about the receive and transmit power of the MS.
14-174
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Rx Power
Range: -120 to -10. Unit: dBm.
Indicates the received signal power.
Tx Power
TxAdj
Indicates the power control value,

that is, the adjustment step of the
transmit power.
F-FCH FER
Indicates the frame error rate of the

forward fundamental channel.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Combined Ec/Io
Indicates the strength of the pilot,

computed by the ratio of the pilot
energy per chip to total power
spectral density.
F-SCH Rate
The rate ranges are 0X-1X,

1X-2X, 2X-4X, 3X-8X, 4X-16X,
5X-18X, and 6X-32X. If the rate
is outside the ranges, N/A is
displayed.
Indicates the assignment rate on the

forward supplemental channel.
R-SCH Rate
Indicates the assignment rate on the

reverse supplemental channel.
Air Link Summary (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Air Link Summary of the CDMA2000 EV-DO.
The following table provides information about IEs of the forward signals on the air interface
on the CDMA2000 EV-DO.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Best Predicted ASP Index
Range: 1 to 6
Indicates the sector index of the best

active set pilot (ASP).
Best ASP SINR
Range: -15 to 20.

Unit: dB.
Indicates the signal-to-interference-andNoise ratio (SINR) of the best ASP.
Best ASP Filtered SINR
Range: -15 to 20.

Unit: dB.
Indicates the filtered SINR of the best

ASP.
Data Rate - Current
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the instantaneous data rate.
Data Rate - Short
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the average data rate in a short

period.
Data Rate - Long
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the average data rate in a long

period.
PER - Current
Unit: %
Indicates the instantaneous packet error

rate (PER).
PER - Short
Unit: %
Indicates the average PER in a short

period.
PER - Long
Unit: %
Indicates the average PER in a long

period.
ASP[1] Filtered RPC
Indicates the filtered reverse power

control (RPC) of the ASP 1.
ASP[2] Filtered RPC
Indicates the filtered RPC of the ASP 2.

14-175
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
ASP[3] Filtered RPC
ASP[4] Filtered RPC
ASP[5] Filtered RPC
ASP[6] Filtered RPC
AT Status (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to AT Status of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The
following table provides the state of the AT, including the parameters of the sector to which the
AT is connected, AT connection state, session connection state, and pilot set.
IE Name
Description
Protocol States
AT state
Indicates the AT state. The contained states are as

follows:
l Inactive
l Acquisition
l Sync
l Idle
l Access
l Connected
Session state
Indicates the session connection state. The contained

states are as follows:
l Closed
l AMP setup
l AT-initiated negotiation
l AN-initiated negotiation
l Open
l Closing
ALMP state
Indicates the state of the air link management

protocol (ALMP). The contained states are as
follows:
l Inactive
l Initialization
l Idle
l Connected
14-176

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Description
Initialization state
Indicates the initialization state. The contained states

are as follows:
l Inactive
l Network determination
l Pilot acquisition
l Sync
Idle state
Indicates the idle state. The contained states are as

follows:
l Inactive
l Monitor
l Sleep
l Connection setup
l Suspend
Connected state
Indicates the connection state. The contained states

are as follows:
l Inactive
l Open
Route update
state
Indicates the route update state. The contained states

are as follows:
l Inactive
l Idle
l Connection Setup
l Connected
l Synchronize connection setup
Overhead state
Indicates the state of overhead message processing.

The contained states are as follows:
l Inactive
l Process All messages
l Sleep
l Frequency Change In Progress
l Access Handoff In Progress
l Wait for Link
Session Attempt
Result
Indicates the session attempt result. The results are

as follows:
l Received UATIAssignment message
l Did not received UATIAssignment message
RATI
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Indicates the random access terminal identifier.

14-177
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
AT Status
Description
UATI
Indicates the unicast access terminal identifier

(UATI). When Result is set to 1, the value of
UATI is null.
Color Code
Indicates the color code. When Result is set to 1, the

value of UATI is null.
PN
Indicates the PN offset of the pilot. When Result is

set to 1, the value of UATI is null.
SectorName
Indicates the name of the current serving sector.
AT state
Indicates the AT state. The contained states are as

follows:
l Inactive
l Acquisition
l Sync
l Idle
l Access
l Connected
Session state
Indicates the session connection state. The contained

states are as follows:
l Closed
l AMP setup
l AT-initiated negotiation
l AN-initiated negotiation
l Open
l Closing
14-178
Sector ID
Indicates the ID of the current serving sector.
UATI024 Code
Indicates the latter 24 codes of the UATI.
MAC index
Indicates the MAC index.
Channel
Indicates the ARFCN.
Band Class
Indicates the frequency band.
Subnet mask
Indicates the subnet mask of a sector.
Color code
Indicates the color code.
Serving Sector
PN
Indicates the PN of the current serving sector.
User count
Indicates the number of users.
SectorName
Indicates the name of the current serving sector.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Finger (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Finger of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. You can check
whether a barrier or a line-of-sight path exists in the link.
IE Name
State
Information
Finger
Information
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Range/Unit
Description
Search State
Indicates the search state.
MSTR (chip
x8)
Unit: 1/8 chip
Indicates the mobile station time

reference (MSTR) offset relative to the
real time control (RTC) timebase.
MSTR Error
Unit: 1/8 chip
Indicates the MSTR offset relative to

the earliest arriving in-lock and enabled
active set pilot.
MSTR Pilot
PN
Indicates the pilot PN of the earliest

arriving finger.
PN
Indicates the PN offset of the pilot of

the finger.
RTC Offset
Unit: 1/8 chip
Indicates the offset in the RTC buffer

for this pilot.
C/I
Unit: dB
Indicates the carrier-to-interference

ratio.
Locked
0 or 1
Indicates the locked state. 0 refers to the

unlocked state and 1 refers to the locked
state.
Antenna
0 or 1
Indicates the antenna selection, only

valid when diversity is disabled. 0
refers to Antenna 0, and 1 refers to
Antenna 1.
Diversity
0 or 1
Indicates whether the diversity is

enabled for the AT. 0 refers to Disabled,
and 1 refers to Enabled.
Finger Idx
The range is 1000

to 1011, referring
to finger 0 to finger
11.
Finger index, which indicates the index

of the demodulator finger.
RPC Cell Idx
Range: 1 to 6
Cell index, which indicates the index

assigned to a cell by AT.
ASP Idx
Range: 1 to 6
Sector index, which indicates the index

assigned to a sector by AT.
C/I (Ant0)
C/I equivalent of the finger for antenna

0, only valid when diversity is enabled.

14-179
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
C/I (Ant1)
C/I equivalent of the finger for antenna

1, only valid when diversity is enabled.
SectorName
Distance
Unit: m

and the serving cell.
Pilot Set (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Pilot Set of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following
table provides information about the serving cell and neighboring cells of the current MS of the
CDMA.
The pilot set refers to a set of the pilot channels that have the same frequency and different PN
phases. The pilot set includes the parameters of the active set, candidate set, and neighboring
pilot set.
IE Name
Neighbor
Set
Active Set
14-180
Range/Unit
Description
Pilot PN
Indicates the pilot PN of the

neighboring pilot set.
Pilot Energy
Unit: dB
Indicates the pilot strength Ec/Io of the

neighboring pilot set, that is, the ratio
of the energy per chip to total power
spectral density of the received
bandwidth.
Channel
Number
Indicates the ARFCN of the

neighboring pilot set.
Band Class
Unit: MHz
Window Size
Indicates the search window size of the

neighboring set.
SectorName
Distance
Unit: m

and the neighboring cell.
Pilot PN
Indicates the pilot PN of the active set.
Pilot Energy
Unit: dB

active set, that is, the ratio of the energy
per chip to total power spectral density
of the received bandwidth.
Mac Index
Indicates the MAC index of the active

set.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Candidate
Set
General
Range/Unit
Description
Window Center
(x2)
Indicates the search window center of

the active set.
SectorName
Distance
Unit: m

and the active set cell.
Pilot PN
Indicates the pilot PN of the candidate

set.
Pilot Energy
Unit: dB

candidate set, that is, the ratio of the
energy per chip to total power spectral
density of the received bandwidth.
Channel
Number
Indicates the PN offset of the pilot.
Band Class
Unit: MHz
Window Center
(x2)
Indicates the search window center of

the candidate set.
SectorName
Distance
Unit: m

and the candidate set cell.
Pilot PN
Increment
Indicates the PN increment of the pilot.
Band Class
Unit: MHz
Searcher State
Indicates the search state of the AT.
Active Set
Channel
Indicates the ARFCN of the active set.
Active Set
Window

active set.
Remaining Set
Window

remaining set.
Power (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following
table provides power information about test terminals.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-181
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Power Amplifier
State
On or Off.
Indicates the power amplifier

state.
TX Open Loop
Range: -128 to 127. Unit: dBm.
Indicates the open loop transmit

power.
TX Closed Loop
Indicates the closed loop

transmit power.
TX Pilot
Indicates the pilot power.
TX Total
Indicates the total transmit

power.
RX Antenna 0
Indicates the received power of

antenna 0.
RX Antenna 1
Indicates the received power of

antenna 1.
Rel. 0 Forward LinkInfo (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rel. 0 Forward LinkInfo of the CDMA2000 EVDO. The following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the forward traffic
channel and the frame rates of the channel at different time.
IE Name
Description
Rates
Indicates the frame rate.
Good CRC
Indicates the number of frames that pass the cyclic

redundancy check (CRC).
Bad CRC
Indicates the number of the frames that do not pass

the CRC.
Total
Indicates the sum of Good CRC and Bad CRC

of each rate.
Forward Traffic
Channel
Statistics
14-182
Frames at 38.4 kbit/s
Indicates the statistics for the frames at 38.4 kbit/

s.

s.
Frames at 153.6 kbit/

s

s.
Short frames at 307.2

kbit/s
Indicates the statistics for the short frames at 307.2

kbit/s.
Long frames at 307.2

kbit/s
Indicates the statistics for the long frames at 307.2

kbit/s.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Description
Control Channel
Statistics
TX Queue

kbit/s

kbit/s.

kbit/s

kbit/s.
Frames at 921.6 kbit/

s

s.

Mbit/s

Mbit/s.

Mbit/s

Mbit/s.
Frames at 1.843
Mbit/s
Indicates the statistics for the frames at 1.843

Mbit/s.
Frames at 2.457
Mbit/s
Indicates the statistics for the frames at 2.457

Mbit/s.
Total frames
Indicates the sum of Good CRC of all rates, sum

of Bad CRC of all rates, and sum of Total of all
rates.

s.

s.
Total frames
Indicates the sum of Good CRC of all rates, sum

of Bad CRC of all rates, and sum of Total of all
rates.
Mean served
throughput
Indicates the mean throughput.
Packet Error Rate

(PER)
Indicates the total PER, which is calculated based

on the formula: Total CRC Bad Frames/(Total
CRC Bad Frames + Total CRC Good
Frames).
Rel. 0 Reverse LinkInfo (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rel. 0 Reverse LinkInfo of the CDMA2000 EVDO. The following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the reverse traffic
channel and the frame rates of the channel at different time.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-183
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Description
Reverse Rate Indicator
Actual RRI
Indicates the actual reverse rate

indicator. The following values are
included:
l 0 kbit/s
l 9.6 kbit/s
l 19.2 kbit/s
l 38.4 kbit/s
l 76.8 kbit/s
l 153.6 kbit/s
Reverse Rate Limit
Indicates the reverse rate limit. The

following values are included:
l 0 kbit/s
l 9.6 kbit/s
l 19.2 kbit/s
l 38.4 kbit/s
l 76.8 kbit/s
l 153.6 kbit/s
Traffic Statistics
Power Amplifier Limit
Indicates the power amplifier limit.
9.6kbit/s
Indicates the number of packets

transmitted at 9.6 kbit/s.
19.2kbit/s

38.4kbit/s

76.8kbit/s

153.6kbit/s
Indicates the number of data packets

Rev. A DRC-DSC-ARQ Buffer (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A DRC-DSC-ARQ Buffer of the
CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides information about the data source control
(DSC) and data rate control (DRC).
14-184
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
DRC Cover
Range: 0 to 7
Indicates the DRC coverage.
DSC Value
Range: 0 to 7
Indicates the DSC value.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
DRC Rate

kbit/s.
Indicates the DRC rate.
ASP DRC Lock
Indicates the DRC lock for ASP1 to

ASP6.
Rev. A Forward Link User Packet Throughput (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Forward Link User Packet
Throughput of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides the throughput of the
forward link user packet.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
SUP Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the throughput of the single service user

packet.
Rev. A MultiFlow RLP Statistics (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A MultiFlow RLP Statistics of the
CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides statistical information about the forward or
reverse multi-RLP layer.
IE Name
Forward Link
Statistics
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Range/Unit
Description
Flow ID
Indicates the ID of the RLP

flow.
Version
Indicates the version.
Reset time
Indicates the latest reset time,

that is, the last reset time.
Retransmissions
not found

retransmissions that is not
found.
AT NAK bytes
requested
Unit: byte
Indicates the number of NAK

bytes requested by the AT for
retransmission.
RX retransmitted
bytes
Unit: byte

received retransmitted bytes.
RX new data bytes
Unit: byte

received new data bytes.
RX total bytes
Unit: byte

received data bytes.

14-185
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Reverse Link
Statistics
Range/Unit
Description
NAK timeouts/
aborts

timeouts or aborts.
Resets
AT reset request
count
Indicates the number of resets

requested by the AT.
AN reset ACK
count
Indicates the number of ACKs

received from the AN.
AN reset request
count

requested by the AN.
Flow ID
Indicates the ID of the RLP

flow.
Version
Reset time
Indicates the latest reset time,

that is, the last reset time.
Retransmissions
not found
Indicates the number of frames

that are not received in the
retransmission.
AN NAK bytes
requested
Unit: byte

bytes requested by the AN for
retransmission.
TX retransmitted
bytes

retransmitted bytes.
TX new data bytes
Unit: byte

transmitted new data bytes.
TX total bytes
Unit: byte

transmitted data bytes.
Resets
AT reset request
count

AN reset ACK
count

received from the AN.
AN reset request
count

Rev. A Multi-User Packet Forward Statistics (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Multi-User Packet Forward Statistics
of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides multi-user packet forward statistics.
14-186

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
CRC Count

multi-user traffic channel packets.
Termination Slot Count
Indicates the number of CRCs

transmitted by each timeslot.
Packet Error Rate
Unit: %
Indicates the PER.
Throughput When Served
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the terminal throughput.
Instantaneous Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the instantaneous throughput.
Instantaneous Throughput
(1s)
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the instantaneous throughput,

which is calculated according to the
difference of the previous packet.
Sequence (Elapsed Time)
Indicates the sequence number of the

log packet.
Rev. A Reverse Link Metrics (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Reverse Link Metrics of the CDMA2000
EV-DO. You can obtain counters of the reverse link statistics.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
HiCap SPn ACKs
Indicates the number of ACKs of the

high capacity (HiCap), which is received
by the current instance.
HiCap PARQ NAKs
Indicates the number of NAKs of the

HiCap, which is received by the current
instance.
LoLat SPn ACKs
Indicates the number of ACKs of the low

latency (LoLat), which is received by the
current instance.
LoLat PARQ NAKs
Indicates the number of NAKs of the

LoLat, which is received by the current
instance.
Packets Sent

packets.
Good Packets

transmitted successfully.
PER
Unit: %
Indicates the PER.
Total Packet TX Time
Unit: ms
Indicates the duration for packet

transmission.
n: 0 to 3
n: 0 to 3
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-187
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Transmitted Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the transmission throughput.
Overall Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the overall throughput.
Total PER
Unit: %
Indicates the total PER.
Total Instantaneous PER
Unit: %
Indicates the total instantaneous PER.
Total Transmitted
Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the total transmission

throughput.
Total Overall Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the overall throughput.
Total Instantaneous
Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the total instantaneous

throughput.
Average Latency
Unit: ms
Indicates the average latency.
Total Packets Sent
Indicates the total number of transmitted

packets.
Unexpected HARQ NAKs
Indicates the number of HARQ NAKs

received by the same packet of the
current instance.
HARQ-PARQ Mismatch
Rate
Unit: %
Indicates the ratio of error packets to

total transmitted packets.
Rev. A Reverse Link Throughput (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Reverse Link Throughput of the
CDMA2000 EV-DO. statistical information about the reverse link throughput.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Throughput-Average
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the average throughput.
Throughput-Instantaneous
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the instantaneous throughput.
Throughput-TX Average
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the average transmit

throughput.
Rev. A Single-User Forward Statistics (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Single-User Forward Statistics of the
CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides single-user forward statistics.
14-188

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/
Unit
Description
Forward Traffic
Channel Statistics
Indicates the forward traffic

channel statistics.
Format
Indicates the DRC information

format. The format is [Rate,
Transmit Slot, Transmit Bit].
Passed
Indicates the number of passed

CRCs.
Failed
Indicates the number of failed

CRCs.
Total

CRCs.
Info
Indicates the transmit slot.
Avg
Indicates the average value.
1-16
Indicates the N slot. N ranges from

1 to 16.
DRC kbit/s
Indicates the DRC rate.
DRC Format
Indicates the DRC format.
CRC Count Passed

transmitted successfully.
CRC Count Failed

failed to be transmitted.
CRC Count Total

CRCs.
Termination Slot
Count

transmitted at each slot.
General
Sequence Number
(Elapsed Time)
Indicates the sequence number of

the log packet.
Traffic Channel
Packet Error Rate
Unit: %
Indicates the PER.
Throughput When
Served
Unit: kbit/s
Instantaneous
Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the instantaneous

throughput.
Instantaneous
Throughput (1s)
Unit: kbit/s

throughput, which is calculated
according to the deviation of the
previous packet.
DRC Info
Termination Slot
Count
Forward Control
Channel Statistics
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-189
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Short Control
Channel
Range/
Unit
Description
Throughput When
Served
Unit: kbit/s
Instantaneous
Throughput
Unit: kbit/s

throughput.
Instantaneous
Throughput (1s)
Unit: kbit/s

throughput, which is calculated
according to the deviation of the
previous packet.
RLP (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLP of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following
table provides statistical values of each type of frames at the RLP layer.
14-190
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Service ID
Indicates the service ID.
Last Reset Time
Unit: ms
Indicates the latest reset time, that is,

the last reset time.
Total AN/AT Resets
Indicates the total number of resets

requested by the AN or AT.
AN Resets

AT Resets

Received Reset AN ACKs

received by the AN.
RX
Queue
Total AT Bytes
Unit: byte
Indicates the total number of bytes

received by the AT.
New AT Bytes
Unit: byte
Indicates the number of new data

bytes received by the AT.
Duplicate AT
Bytes
Unit: byte
Indicates the number of duplicate

Retransmitted AT
Bytes
Unit: byte
Indicates the number of retransmitted

AT NAK
Requests
Unit: byte
Indicates the number of NAK bytes

requested by the AT for
retransmission.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
TX Queue
Range/Unit
Description
AT NAK Aborts

timeouts or aborts of the AT.
AT NAK Bytes

received by the AT.
Total AT Bytes
Unit: byte
Indicates the total number of bytes

transmitted by the AT.
New AT Bytes
Unit: byte
Indicates the number of new data

bytes transmitted by the AT.
Duplicate AT
Bytes
Unit: byte
Indicates the number of duplicate

bytes transmitted by the AT.
Retransmissions
Not Found
Unit: byte
Indicates the number of bytes that are

not received in retransmission.
AN NAK
Requests
Unit: byte

requested by the AN for
retransmission.
AN NAK Bytes

transmitted by the AN.
14.3.4 WiMAX Information Elements of UEs

This describes the WiMAX information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the WiMAX UE air interface views.
NETEntry/HO Delay
This describes meanings of the IEs related to NETEntry/HO Delay of the WiMAX. The
following table provides the parameters related to the network entry and handover delay of the
test terminal.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
NetEntry Delay Time
Unit: ms
Indicates the delay time of the network

entry.
HO Delay Time
Unit: ms
Indicates the handover delay time.
Basic Information (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX_Runcom. The
following table provides basic information about the current terminal such as the serving cell
identifier, terminal connection state, and frequency.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-191
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
MS State
Connection
Frame
14-192
Range/Unit
Description
Base ID
Indicates the ID of the BS.
Preamble Index
Range: 0 to 114
Indicates the preamble index.
IDCell
Indicates the cell ID.
Current Frequency
Unit: Hz
Indicates the current

frequency.
Frame Ratio
(DL:UL)
Indicates the frame ratio on the

Permutation

permutation zone.
MAC State
Indicates the MAC state.
Max Tx Power
Unit: dBm

transmit power.
Cell Name

Present only if an engineering
parameter file is used.
Distance
Unit: m
Indicates the distance between

the MS and the serving cell.
Network Entry State
0 refers to success,
and 1 refers to
failure.
Indicates the network entry

state of the MS.
No. of Provisioned
Connection

provisioned connection.
No. of Admitted
Connection

admitted connection.
Basic CID
Indicates the basic connection

identifier (CID).
Primary CID
Indicates the primary CID.
Second CID
Indicates the secondary CID.
DL Traffic
Connections

downlink traffic connections.
UL Traffic
Connections
Indicates the number of uplink

traffic connections.
Frame Number
Indicates the frame number.
Logical Frame
Number
Indicates the logical frame

number.
DL PDU Number

downlink PDUs.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Burst
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Range/Unit
Description
UL PDU Number

PDUs.
DL SDU Number

downlink SDUs.
UL SDU Number

SDUs.
DL Discard Frame
Number
Indicates the number of frames

discarded on the downlink.
Uplink Burst Data

Zone

permutation zone.
Downlink Burst
Data Zone

permutation zone.
Uplink Burst Data

Duration
Unit: slot
Indicates the uplink burst data

duration.
Downlink Burst
Data Duration
Unit: slot
Indicates the downlink burst

data duration.
Uplink Burst Data

Size
Unit: byte
Indicates the size of the uplink

burst data.
Downlink Burst
Data Size
Unit: byte

downlink burst data.
Uplink Burst Data

CID
Indicate the CID

corresponding to the uplink
burst data.
Downlink Burst
Data CID
Indicate the CID

corresponding to the downlink
burst data.
Uplink Burst Data

UIUC
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the uplink interval

usage code (UIUC) of the burst
data.
Downlink Burst
Data DIUC
Range: 0 to 15

interval usage code (DIUC) of
the burst data.
Uplink Burst Data

FEC Scheme
Indicates the FEC scheme of

the uplink burst data.
Downlink Burst
Data FEC Scheme
Indicates the FEC scheme of

the downlink burst data.
DL Map FEC
Scheme
Indicates the MCS of the

downlink MAP.

14-193
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Uplink Burst Data

FEC Repetition
Indicates the MCS repetition

of the uplink burst data.
Downlink Burst
Data FEC Repetition
Indicates the MCS repetition

of the downlink burst data.
Cell Measurement (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Cell Measurement of the WiMAX_Runcom. The
following table provides information about the cell measurement.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
BSID
Preamble
Range: 0 to 114
Indicates the preamble code.
CINR mean
Range: -50 to -30.

Unit: dB.
Indicates the mean CINR.
CellName

Distance
Unit: m
Indicates the distance between the UE and

the serving cell.
RSSI mean
Range: -110 to -10.

Unit: dBm.
Indicates the mean RSSI.
CS_Info (Runcom)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to CS_Info of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following
table provides information about the convergence sublayer (CS).
14-194
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
No.
Indicates the number.
SFID
Indicates the ID of the service flow.
Direction
Indicates the direction.
CID
Indicates the CID.
SF Type
Indicates the type of the service flow.
CS Type
Indicates the type of the convergence

sublayer.
Service Class Name
Indicates the service type.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Basic
PHS
Qos Profile
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Range/Unit
Description
SFID
Direction
CID
Indicates the CID.
SF Type
Indicates the type of the service flow.
Source Port Low

Value
Indicates the low value of the source

port.
Source Port high

Value
Indicates the high value of the source

port.
Destination Port
Low Value
Indicates the low value of the

destination port.
Destination Port
High Value
Indicates the high value of the

destination port.
CS Type
Indicates the CS type.
Qos Set Flag

Provisioned
Indicates whether to use the

provisioned QoS set.
Qos Set Flag

Admitted
Indicates whether to use the admitted

QoS set.
Qos Set Flag Active
Indicates whether to use the active

QoS set.
Classifier Priority
Indicates the classifier priority.
Service Class Name
Indicates the service name.
PHSI
Indicates the ID of the payload header

suppression.
PHSS
Unit: byte
Indicates the size of the payload

header suppression.
PHSV
Indicates whether the payload header

suppression is valid.
PHSM
Indicates the mask of the payload

header suppression.
PHSF
Indicates the payload header

suppression field.
Traffic Priority
Indicates the traffic priority.
Maximum Sustained
Traffic Rate
Unit: bit/s
Indicates the maximum sustained

traffic rate.
Minimum Reserved
Traffic Rate
Unit: bit/s
Indicates the minimum reserved

traffic rate.

14-195
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
IP
Range/Unit
Description
Tolerated Jitter
Unit: ms
Indicates the tolerated jitter.
SDU Size
Unit: byte
Indicates the SDU size.
Maximum Latency
Unit: ms
Indicates the maximum latency.
Unsolicited Grant
Interval
Unit: ms
Indicates the unsolicited grant

interval.
Unsolicited Polling
Interval
Unit: ms
Indicates the unsolicited polling

interval.
Protocol
Indicates the protocol at the IP layer.
IP Source Address
Indicates the source IP address.
IP Source Mask
Address
Indicates the source IP address mask.
IP Destination
Address
Indicates the destination IP address.
IP Destination Mask
Address
Indicates the destination address

mask.
Tos Low
Indicates the service type range of IP

packets (lower limit).
Tos high
Indicates the service type range of IP

packets (upper limit).
Tos Mask
Indicates the service type mask of IP

packets.
DL Frame Prefix and MS Capability (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to DL Frame Prefix and MS Capability of the
WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the uplink frames and MS
capabilities.
IE Name
DL Frame
Prefix
14-196
Range/Unit
Description
FFT Size

subcarriers supported by the BS.
Used Subchannel
Indicates the used subchannel.
FFC Repetition Code
Indicates the number of DL_Map

repetitions.
FEC Coding
Indicates the DL_Map coding

scheme.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
MS Physical
Capability
Range/Unit
Description
TTG
Indicates the transmit-to-receive

time interval.
RTG
Indicates the receive-to-transmit

time interval.
Max Tx Power
Unit: dBm

power.
FFT Support

subcarriers supported by the MS.
Handover and Neighboring Cells (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Handover and Neighboring Cells of the
WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the handover and
neighboring cells.
IE Name
HO Event
Range/Unit
Description
HO Type
Indicates the handover

type.
HO Latency Time

latency.
Serving BSID
Indicates the BS ID of the

serving cell.
CellName

Present only if an
engineering parameter file
is used.
Distance
Unit: m
Indicates the distance

between the UE and the
serving cell.

recommended BS.
The Number of HO Drop

handover drops.
The Number of HO Trial

handover trials.
Ping Pang Count During

HO

ping pang handovers.
HO Drop Rate

drop rate.
Recom. BSID
HO Statistic
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-197
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Cells List
Range/Unit
Description
NO.
Indicates the number.
BSID
Cell ID
Preamble Index
Range: 0 to 114
Indicates the preamble

index.
CINR mean
Range: -50 to -30.

Unit: dB.
Indicates the mean carrierto-interference-and-noise

ratio (CINR).
RSSI mean
Range: -110 to -10.

Unit: dBm.
SNR mean
Unit: dB
Indicates the mean SNR.
CellName

Present only if an
engineering parameter file
is used.
Distance
Unit: m

serving cell.
Freq
Unit: Hz
Indicates the central

frequency.
MAC Throughput (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to MAC Throughput of the WiMAX_Runcom. The
following table provides information about the uplink and downlink throughput.
14-198
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
DL App Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the downlink throughput at the

application layer
UL App Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the uplink throughput at the

application layer
DL Bit Data Rate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the downlink bit rate.
UL Bit Data Rate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the uplink bit rate.
DL Packet Data Rate
Unit: pkt/s
Indicates the downlink packet rate.
UL Packet Data Rate
Unit: pkt/s
Indicates the uplink packet rate.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Modulation and Coding (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Modulation and Coding of the WiMAX_Runcom.
The following table provides information about the current or history MCS.
IE Name
Description
Active
CID
Indicates the CID.
Direction
FEC Type
Indicates the MCS type.
FEC Type ID
Indicates the ID of the MCS type.
Power and PER (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power and PER of the WiMAX_Runcom. The
following table provides information about the transmit power, receive power, and reception
quality.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Power
RSSI Mean
Range: -110 to
-10. Unit: dBm.
RSSI Deviation
Indicates the RSSI deviation.
CINR Mean
Range: -50 to
-30. Unit: dB.
CINR Deviation
Indicates the CINR deviation.
Tx Power
Unit: dBm
Tx Reference
Power
Indicates the reference transmit power.
Tx Headroom
Unit: dB
Indicates the headroom between the current

transmit power and the maximum transmit
power that can be used for the UE.
Tx Power BS
Offset
Indicates the transmit power offset of the

BS.
Power Work
Mode
Indicates the power work mode.
Indicates the packet error rate.
PER
Ranging (Runcom)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Ranging of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following
table provides information about all the reported IEs related to the ranging.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-199
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Ranging
Method
Range/Unit
Description
UL Ranging Code
Indicates the uplink ranging

codes.
UL Ranging Seed
Indicates the random seed of the

uplink ranging.
Ranging Type
Indicates the ranging type. The

following types are included:
l Initial: refers to the initial
ranging.
l Periodic: refers to the
periodic ranging.
l BW Request: refers to the
bandwidth request ranging.
l Handover: refers to the
handover ranging.
Ranging Code
Ranging
Backoff
14-200
Ranging Method
Indicates the ranging method.
UL Initial Ranging
Power
Unit: dBm
Indicates the uplink initial

ranging power.
Tx Reference Power
Indicates the reference transmit

power.
Start of Ranging
Codes Group
Range: 0 to
255
Indicates the start of a ranging

code group.
Initial Ranging Codes
Range: 0 to
255
Indicates the initial ranging

codes.
Periodic Ranging
Codes
Range: 0 to
255
Indicates the periodic ranging

codes.
Bandwidth Requests
Codes
Range: 0 to
255
Indicates the bandwidth request

ranging codes.
Handover Ranging
Codes
Range: 0 to
255
Indicates the handover ranging

codes.
2N. The range

of N is 0 to 15.
Indicates the backoff window

size of the initial ranging.
Periodic Ranging
Codes
2N. The range

of N is 0 to 15.

size of the periodic ranging.
BW Request Ranging
Codes
2N. The range

of N is 0 to 15.

size of the bandwidth request
ranging.
Handover Ranging
Codes
2N. The range

of N is 0 to 15.

size of the handover ranging.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Ranging
Statistic
Range/Unit
Description
Initial Ranging
Indicates the initial ranging.
Periodic Ranging
Indicates the periodic ranging.
BW Request Ranging
Indicates the bandwidth request

ranging.
Handover Ranging
Indicates the handover ranging.
Secondary Connect Profile (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Secondary Connect Profile of the
WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides the information about the secondary CID.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Secondary CID
ARQ Support
Not Supported: supports the ARQ.

Supported: not support the ARQ.
Indicates whether to support

the automatic repeat request
(ARQ).
IP Management Mode
Unmanaged: disables the IP

management mode. Managed:
enables the IP management mode.
Indicates the IP management

mode.
IP Version
The IP versions are IP4 and IPv6.
Indicates the supported IP

versions.
Basic Information (GCT)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX_GCT. The
IE Name
MS State
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Range/Unit
Description
BSID
IDCell
Frequency
Unit: kHz
Indicates the central frequency.
Frame Ratio
Indicates the frame ratio on the

Preamble Index
Range: 0 to 114
MAC State
Indicates the MAC state.

14-201
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
FCH
Frame
Burst
14-202
Range/Unit
Description
Max Tx Power
Unit: dBm

power.
Segment
Range: 0 to 2
Indicates the preamble carrier set.
DL PermBase
Range: 0 to 31
Indicates the permutation base for

specified downlink.
UL PermBase
Range: 0 to 69
Indicates the permutation base for

specified uplink.
Cell Name
Indicates the cell name. Present

only if an engineering parameter
file is used.
Distance
Unit: m
Indicates the distance between the

MS and the serving cell.
FA Index
Indicates the frequency

assignment (FA) index.
FCH Bitmap
Indicates the bitmap information

about the frame control header
(FCH).
DL MapLen
Indicates the length of the

downlink MAP message.
CodingInd
Indicates the FCH coding

scheme.
RptCodingInd
Indicates the index of the FCH

repeat coding.
UsedSubch (Total
6 Group)
Indicates the number of used

subchannels.
Frame Number
Indicates the number of frames.
UL PDU Number
Indicates the uplink PDU number.
DL PDU Number
Indicates the downlink PDU

number.
Uplink Burst Data

CID
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the connection

identifier (CID) corresponding to
the uplink burst data.
Downlink Burst
Data CID
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the CID corresponding

to the downlink burst data.
Uplink Burst Data

UIUC
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the UIUC

corresponding to the uplink burst
data.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Downlink Burst
Data DIUC
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the DIUC

corresponding to the downlink
burst data.
Uplink Burst Data

FEC Scheme
Indicates the FEC scheme of the

uplink burst data.
Downlink Burst
Data FEC Scheme
Indicates the FEC scheme of the

BCS (GCT)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to BCS of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table
provides information about the parameters related to the background cell search (BCS) test.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Preamble Index
CINR mean
Unit: dB
RSSI mean
Unit: dBm
Handover and Neighboring Cells (GCT)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Handover and Neighboring Cells of the
WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides information about the handover and neighboring
cells.
IE Name
HO Event
HO Type
Range/Unit
Description
Indicates the handover type:

l HO Intra FA: refers to
the intra-FA handover.
l HO Inter FA: refers to
the inter-FA handover.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Current Preamble
Index
Range: 0 to 133
Indicates the preamble index

of the current serving cell.
Current Serving
ACOR
Indicates the ACOR of the

Previous Preamble
Index
Range: 0 to 133

of the previous cell.
Previous Serving
ACOR
Indicates the ACOR of the

previous cell.

14-203
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
HO Statistic
Cells List
Range/Unit
Description
HO Traffic Latency
Time
Unit: ms
Indicates the handover traffic

latency.
HO Latency Time
Unit: ms

latency.
The Number of HO
Drop

handover drops.
The Number of HO
Trial

handover trials.
Ping Pang Count

During HO
Indicates the number of ping

pang handovers.
HO Drop Rate
Indicates the handover drop

rate.
Preamble Index
Range: 0 to 114
CINR mean
Range: -50 to
-30. Unit: dB.
RSSI mean
Range: -110 to
-10. Unit: dBm.
Freq
Unit: kHz

frequency.
Modulation and Coding (GCT)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Modulation and Coding of the WiMAX_GCT.
The following table provides information about the current or history modulation coding scheme
(MCS).
14-204
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
CID
Indicates the ID of the CID.
Direction
Indicates the transmit direction.
UIUC/DIUC
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the uplink interval usage

code or downlink interval usage
code.
FEC Type
Indicates the type of the forward

error correction (FEC).
Repetition
Indicates the number of repetitions.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Power and PER (GCT)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power and PER of the WiMAX_GCT. The
following table provides information about the transmit power, receive power, and reception
quality.
IE Name
Power
PER
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Range/Unit
Description
Tx Power
Unit: dBm
Tx Power Offset
(BS)
Unit: dBm
Indicates the transmit power

offset on the BS side.
Tx Power Offset
(SS)
Unit: dBm
Indicates the transmit power

offset on the subscriber station.
Min Tx Power
Unit: dBm
Indicates the minimum transmit

power in a period.
Max Tx Power
Unit: dBm

transmit power in a period.
Noise Interference
(BS)
Unit: dBm
Indicates the noise interference

on the BS side.
Noise Interference
(SS)
Unit: dBm
Indicates the noise interference

on the subscriber station.
Power Work Mode
Indicates the power work mode.
Burst PER
Unit: %
Indicates the burst PER.
Burst Lost
Indicates the number of lost

burst packets.
Burst

received burst packets.
MAP PER
Unit: %
Indicates the MAP PER.
MAP Lost
Indicates the number of lost

MAP packets.
MAP

received MAP packets.
PDU PER
Unit: %
Indicates the PDU PER.
PDU ERROR
Indicates the number of error

PDU packets.
PDU RX

received PDU packets.

14-205
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Ranging (GCT)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Ranging of the WiMAX_GCT. The following
table provides information about the initial ranging codes, periodic ranging codes, bandwidth
request ranging codes, and handover ranging codes.
IE Name
Description
Ranging Backoff
Ranging Code
Indicates the backoff window size of the

initial ranging.
Periodic Ranging Codes

periodic ranging.
BW Request Ranging
Codes

bandwidth request ranging.
Handover Ranging Codes

handover ranging.
Start of Ranging Codes

Group
Indicates the start of a ranging code group.
Indicates the initial ranging codes.
Indicates the periodic ranging codes.
BW Requests Ranging
Codes
Indicates the bandwidth request ranging

codes.
Handover Ranging Codes
Indicates the handover ranging codes.
UL and DL (GCT)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to UL and DL of the WiMAX_GCT. The following
table provides information about the uplink, downlink, and antenna.
IE Name
ATN 1
ATN 2
DL
14-206
Range/Unit
Description
RSSI
Unit: dBm
Indicates the RSSI value.
CINR
Unit: dB
Indicates the CINR value.
AGC
Indicates the value of the automatic gain

control (AGC).
RSSI
Unit: dBm
CINR
Unit: dB
AGC
Indicates the AGC value.
Frequency
Offset
Unit: Hz
Indicates the downlink frequency

offset.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
UL
Range/Unit
Description
Min FO
Unit: Hz
Indicates the minimum downlink

frequency offset.
Max FO
Unit: Hz
Indicates the maximum downlink

frequency offset.
Sync Lost
Indicates the synchronization lost.
Tx Timing
Offset
Unit: m
Indicates the transmit timing offset.
BR ranging
tries
Indicates the number of bandwidth

request ranging tries.
BRH Tries
Indicates the number of BRH tries.
Max200
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Max200 of the WiMAX Max. The following table
provides the basic information about the current UE.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
CINR Mean
Range: -50 to -30.

Unit: dB.
BSID
Indicates the base ID.
CINR Deviation
Unit: dB
Indicates the CINR deviation.
Cell ID
RSSI
Range: -110 to -10.

Unit: dBm.
Frequency
UL Data Rate
Unit: bit/s
Indicates the uplink data rate.
DL Data Rate
Unit: bit/s
Indicates the downlink data rate.
WiMAX State
Indicates the state of the WiMAX.
Tx Power
Unit: dBm
MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address.
PER
Unit: %
Cell Name
Distance
Unit: m
Indicates the distance between the UE and

the serving cell.

14-207
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Basic Information (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX Sequans. The
IE Name
MS State
Range/
Unit
Description
BSID
Bandwidth
Unit: MHz
Indicates the bandwidth.
Cell Name

Distance
Unit: m
Indicates the distance between the MS and the

serving cell.
FFT Size
Indicates the number of subcarriers.
Frequency
Unit: kHz
MAC
Address
MAC Version
Indicates the MAC version.
PHY Type
Indicates the multiple access type:

l SC, that is single carrier.
l SCA, that is selective call acceptance.
l OFDM, that is orthogonal frequency division
multiplex.
l OFDMA., that is orthogonal frequency
division multiple access.
Connect
ion
14-208
Preamble
Index
Range: 0 to
114
SS State
Indicates the signal strength (SS) state of the MS.
Basic CID
Indicates the basic CID.
Frame
Number
Primary CID
Indicates the primary CID.
Second CID
UL Permbase
Range: 0 to
69
Indicates the uplink permutation base, which

determines the combination mode of uplink
subchannels.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Burst Profiles (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Burst Profiles of the WiMAX_Sequans. The
following table provides burst information about the uplink and downlink frames such as interval
usage code (IUC), and FEC.
IE Name
Description
DL Qty
Indicates the number of burst profiles on the downlink.
FEC Code
Indicates the FEC scheme of the burst data on the downlink or

uplink.
IUC Code
Indicates the interval usage code on the downlink or uplink.
UL Qty
Indicates the number of burst profiles on the uplink.
Downlink Channel Descriptor (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Downlink Channel Descriptor of the
WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the IEs related to the
downlink channel descriptor (DCD) signaling.
IE Name
DCD Info
Range/Unit
Description
Indicates the number of DCDs.
Unit: dBm
Indicates the effective isotropic

radiated power (EIRP) of the BS.
Unit: dBm
Indicates the maximum EIRP

received by the initial ranging on the
BS side.
Frequency
Unit: kHz
MAC Version
Indicates the MAC version.
HysteresisMargin
Indicates the handover hysteresis.
TimeToTrigger
Duration
Indicates the statistics duration.
Range: 0 to
255
Indicates the number of BS restart

attempts.
DLBurstProfiles
Qty

burst profiles.
PHY Type
Indicates the multiple access type.
Indicates the channel number. This

IE is displayed only when the
channel is assigned manually.
Configuration
Count
BS EIRP
MaxRSS For
InitRanging
BS Restart Count
DCD PHY
Specific
Channel Number
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-209
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Channel Switch
Frame Number
Indicates the channel switch frame

number.
BSID
Indicates the transmit-to-receive

time interval.
Indicates the receive-to-transmit

time interval.
HARQ ACK Delay

UL
Unit: frame
Indicates the acknowledgement

delay of the HARQ on the uplink.
Perm Type For

Broadcast In
HARQ
Indicates the permutation zone used

by the HARQ.

HARQ retransmissions on the
downlink.
Def RSSI And

CINR Aver
Parameter
Indicates the default RSSI and CINR.
DL AMC Allocated
Band Bitmap
Indicates the bitmap of the downlink

AMC assignment.
Indicates the threshold for adding

neighboring cells.
Indicates the threshold for deleting

neighboring cells.
Indicates the slot length and

switching period of the anchor switch
reporting (ASR).
Indicates the supported handover

type.
Indicates the FEC type of the

Indicates the number of paging

groups.
Indicates the target threshold of the

neighboring cell quality.
Indicates the average value of the

handover.
TTG (PS)
RTG (PS)
Max
Retransmission
H-Add Threshold
H-Delete
Threshold
ASR Slot Len And
Switching Period
HO Type Support
DL BP For Multi
FEC Types
Paging Group Qty
Neighbor BS
Trigger Qty
HO Aver Params
14-210

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Indicates the cell name. Present only

if an engineering parameter file is
used.
Unit: m

UE and the serving cell.
Unit: frame
Indicates the paging interval time.
Cell Name
Distance
Paging Interval Len
Frame Configuration Definition (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Frame Configuration Definition of the
WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the frame structure.
IE Name
FCD
Range/Unit
Description
Configuration
Count

frame
configuration
definitions (FCDs).
Channel Started
TURE or FALSE
Indicates the start channel.
Channel Gain Ratio
Indicates the ratio of the

cyclic prefix to the available
frame duration.
Bandwidth
Unit: MHz
Frame Duration
Indicates the frame duration.
PHY Type
Indicates the multiple access

type.
FFT Size

subcarriers.
Preamble Index
Range: 0 to 114
SubChannel
Bitmap
Indicates the subchannel

structure bitmap.
MCS and Zone Info (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to MCS and Zone Info of the WiMAX Sequans.
The following table provides information about the current or historical modulation coding
scheme.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Description
DL FEC Type
Indicates the downlink forward error correction (FEC) type.

14-211
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Description
UL FEC Type
Indicates the uplink FEC type.
DL Repetition
Indicates the number of repetitions on the downlink.
UL Repetition
Indicates the number of repetitions on the uplink.
Current Zone
Indicates the current zone where the terminal transmits data. The
values are as follows:
l pusc with all: indicates that all the channels can be used for
data transmission.
l pusc with 1/3: indicates that 1/3 of all the channels can be
used for data transmission.
Indicates the multiple input multiple output (MIMO) used by the
terminal. The values are as follows:
MIMO Type
l MIMO A: indicates that the data stream is divided into

multiple data streams. Within the same duration, the data
transmitted by multiple antennas is the same.
l MIMO B: indicates that the high-speed data stream is
divided into multiple data streams based on the number of
antennas, and then data streams are modulated separately and
transmitted through the corresponding antennas to improve
the channel capacity directly.
Neighbor BS List (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Neighbor BS List of the WiMAX_Sequans. The
following table provides information about the neighboring cells such as the ID of the BS,
preamble index, SINR value, and signal strength.
IE Name
BS
Information
BS List
14-212
Range/Unit
Description
Neighbor BS Qty

neighboring cells.
Current Serving
BSID
Indicates the BS ID of the

Current Serving
PreambleIdx

of the current serving cell.
Current Serving
Frequency
Unit: kHz

frequency of the current
serving cell.
BSID
PreambleIdx

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
HO Statistics
Range/Unit
Description
Frequency
Unit: kHz
Indicates
frequency.
CINR
Unit: dB
RSSI
Unit: dBm
Cell Name

Present only if an engineering
Distance
Unit: m

serving cell.
Min HO Latency
Time
Unit: ms

handover latency.
Max HO Latency
Time
Unit: ms

handover latency.
Mean HO Latency
Time
Unit: ms
Indicates the mean handover

latency.
Last HO Latency
Time
Unit: ms
Indicates the last handover

latency.
the
central
Power and PER (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power and PER of the WiMAX_Sequans. The
following table provides information about the power and signal of the UE.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
MeanRSSI
Unit: dBm
StdDevRSSI
Unit: dB
Indicates the RSSI standard

deviation.
MeanCINR
Unit: dB
StdDevCINR
Unit: dB
Indicates the CINR standard

deviation.
MeanCINRReuse1
Unit: dB
Indicates the mean CINR of the

serving cell when all subchannels
are used.
StdDevCINRReuse1
Unit: dB

deviation of the serving cell when
all subchannels are used.

14-213
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
MeanCINRReuse3
Unit: dB
Indicates the mean CINR of the

serving cell when one-third
subchannels are used.
StdDevCINRReuse3
Unit: dB

deviation of the serving cell when
one-third subchannels are used.
BS EIRP
Unit: dBm
Indicates the dffective isotropic

radiated power of the BS.
Up PowerOffset Adjust Step
Unit: dB
Indicates the power control

adjustment step on the uplink.
Down PowerOffset Adjust

Step
Unit: dB
Indicates the power control

adjustment step on the downlink.
Min
Adjustment
PowerOffset
Unit: dB
Indicates the minimum power

control adjustment value.
Max
Adjustment
PowerOffset
Unit: dB
Indicates the maximum power

control adjustment value.
Current Tx Power
Unit: dBm
Indicates the current transmit

power.
Max Tx Power
Unit: dBm

power of the UE.
PER
Unit: %
Frequency Offset
Unit: Hz
Indicates the downlink frequency

offset.
Power Mode
The power control mode

includes open loop and
closed loop.
Indicates the power control mode.
Ranging (Sequans)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the Ranging of the WiMAX Sequans. The
following table provides information about all the reported IEs related to the ranging.
IE Name
Ranging Backoff
14-214
Range/Unit
Description
Initial Ranging
2N. The range of

N is 0 to 15.

size of the initial ranging.
Periodic Ranging
2N. The range of

N is 0 to 15.

size of the periodic ranging.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
2N. The range of

N is 0 to 15.

size of the bandwidth request
ranging.
2N. The range of

N is 0 to 15.

size of the handover ranging.
RangingCode
Group Start
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the start number of

the ranging codes.
Initial Ranging
Codes
Range: 0 to 255

codes.
Periodic Ranging
Codes
Range: 0 to 255

codes.
Bandwidth
Request Codes
Range: 0 to 255

request ranging codes.
Handover Ranging
Codes
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the handover ranging

codes.
Unit: dBm

effective isotropic radiated
power (EIRP) of the initial
ranging.
Unit: frame
Indicates the assignment

interval of the initial ranging.
BW Request
Ranging
Handover Ranging
Ranging
and Other
Code
MaxRSS For
InitRanging
InitRanging
Interval
SF List (Sequans)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to SF List of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following
table provides information about all the reported IEs related to the server flower (SF).
IE Name
ARQ
Authenticate
Algorithm
Baisc CID
CID
Delivery Service
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Range/Unit
Description
The value is Disabled or Enabled.

the ARQ.
Indicates the authentication

algorithm.
Indicates the basic

connection identifier.
Indicates the connection

identifier.
Indicates the delivery

service.

14-215
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Direction
The value is Uplink or Downlink.
Indicates the encrypt

algorithm.
The value is Disabled or Enabled.

the HARQ.
Unit: bit/s

traffic rate.
Unit: ms

latency.
Unit: bit/s

traffic rate.
Indicates the ID of the safety

set.
Scheduling Service
Type
Indicates the scheduling

service type.
Service Class Name
Indicates the service class.

server flowers.
Indicates the SF state:
Encrypt Algorithm
HARQ
Max Traffic Rate
Maximum Latency
Min Traffic Rate
SAID
SF Qty
l Provisioned
SF State
l Admitted
l Active
-
Indicates the SF type:

l Basic SF
l Primary SF
SF Type
l Secondary SF
l Data SF
l Multicast SF
-
Indicates the ID of the server

flower.
ToleRated Jitter
Unit: ms
Indicates the tolerated jitter.
Traffic Priority
Indicates the traffic priority.
SFID
14-216

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Uplink Channel Descriptor (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Uplink Channel Descriptor of the
WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the IEs related to the uplink
channel descriptor (UCD) signaling.
IE Name
UCD Info
UCD PHY
Specific
Range/Unit
Description
Configuration Count
Indicates
UCDs.
Initial Ranging Backoff

Start
Indicates the start backoff

window size of the initial
ranging.
Initial Ranging Backoff

End
Indicates the end backoff

window size of the initial
ranging.
BW Request Backoff
Start
Indicates the start backoff

window size of the bandwidth
request ranging.
BW Request Backoff
End
Indicates the end backoff

window size of the bandwidth
request ranging.
Reservation Timeout
Indicates the interval for

originating the rangings of the
same type.
Frequency
Unit: kHz
Indicates
frequency.
ULBrustProfile Qty
Indicates the number

uplink burst profiles.
Indicates the multiple access

type.

codes.

codes.

request ranging codes.
Indicates the start of the

periodic ranging backoff
codes.
Indicates the end of the

periodic ranging backoff
codes.
PHY Type
Bandwidth
Codes
Request
Periodic
Ranging
Backoff Start
Periodic
Backoff End
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Ranging

the
number
the
of
central
of
14-217
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
RangingCode
Start
Group
Permutation Base
Ul Alloc Subch Bitmap
Range/Unit
Description
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the start of a ranging

code group.
Indicates
the
permutation zone.
Indicates the bitmap of all the

uplink subcarriers.
Optional Ul
Subch Bitmap
Alloc
Indicates the bitmap of

optional uplink subcarriers.
Band
AMC
Threshold
Alloc
Unit: dB
Indicates the threshold for

allocating the band AMC.
Release
Unit: dB

releasing the band AMC.
Unit: frame
Indicates the allocation

duration of the band AMC.
Unit: frame
Indicates the release duration

of the band AMC.
Unit: frame

period for refreshing the band
CINR.
Unit: frame
Indicates the assignment and

retry duration of the band
AMC.
Allo
Unit: dB

assigning the channel.
Release
Unit: dB

releasing the channel.
Unit: frame
Indicates the duration of the

channel assignment.
Unit: frame

channel release.
Unit: frame

period for refreshing the bin
CINR.
Unit: frame
Indicates the re-assignment

duration.
Unit: frame
Indicates
the
HARQ
acknowledgement delay.
Band AMC
Threshold
Band AMC Allo Timer

Band AMC
Timer
Release
Band Status ReportMax

Period
Band AMC Retry Timer

Safety
Ch
Threshold
Safety Ch
Threshold
Safety Ch Allo Timer

Safety
Timer
Ch
Release
Bin Status ReportMax

Period
Safety Ch Retry Timer
HARQ ACK Delay DL
14-218
uplink

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Indicates
the
AMC
transmission delay of the
channel quality information
channel (CQICH).
Indicates the
number
of
retransmissions.
Indicates the normalized

carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N)
overrides.
Range: 0-7
Indicates the CQICH field

size.
Range: 0-15
Indicates the size of the start

backoff window where the
UE performs the ranging
during the handover.
Range: 0-15
Indicates the size of the end

backoff window where the
UE performs the ranging
Indicates the normalized C/N

overrides 2.
Unit: dB
Indicates the average CINE

required for the band AMC
entry.
Unit: dB
Indicates the preamble upper

bound step of the adaptive
antenna system (AAS).
Unit: dB
Indicates the preamble lower

bound step of the AAS.
Allow AAS Beam

Select Messages
The value is No or
Yes.
Indicates whether to send the

AAS Beam Select message.
Use CQICH Indication

Flag
Indicates whether to use the

CQICH.
Unit: dB
Indicates
the
upper
adjustment step of the uplink
power.
Unit: dB
Indicates
the
lower
adjustment step of the uplink
power.
CQICH Band
Trans Delay
AMC
Max Retransmission In
UL-HARQ
Normalized
Overrides
C/N
CQICH Field Size
Handover
Ranging
Backoff Start
Handover
Backoff End
Normalized
Overrides2
Ranging
C/N
Band
AMC
Average CINR
Entry
UpperBound
Preamble
AAS
LowerBound
Preamble
AAS
Up PowerOffset Adjust
Step
Down
PowerOffset
Adjust Step
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

maximum
HARQ
14-219
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Min
PowerOffset
Adjustment
Unit: dB
Indicates the adjustment step

of the minimum power.
Max
PowerOffset
Adjustment
Unit: dB
Indicates the adjustment step

of the maximum power.
Handover
Codes
Indicates
the
ranging codes.

transmitting
the
initial
ranging.
Indicates the report on the

transmit power.
The value ranges

from 0 to 14, and
the unit is dB.

transmitting the report on the
transmit power.

transmitting the report on the
transmit power.
Indicates the p_avg value.
The value ranges

from 0 to 14, and
the unit is dB.

assigning the CQICH.
Tx
Power
Report
Interval-CQICH

assigning CQICH.
Tx Power Report a
(p_avg)-CQICH
Indicates the p_avg value

after the CQICH is assigned.
Normalized
C/N
Channel Sounding
Indicates the normalized C/N

during the channel sounding.
Up BurstProfile
MultiFECTypes
Indicates the burst profile on

the uplink.
Ranging
InitRanging Interval
Tx Power Report bitmap

Tx
Power
Threshold
Report
Tx
Power
Interval
Report
Tx Power Report a
(p_avg)
Tx
Power
Report
Threshold-CQICH
For
handover
Basic Information (Beceem)

This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX Beceem.
The following table provides the information about the status information of the current terminal.
14-220
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Bandwidth
Range: 5 MHz, 7 MHz, 8.75

MHz, and 10 MHz. Unit: MHz.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
BSID
Indicates the ID of the BS. It is

displayed only if an engineering
Cell Name
Indicates the name of a cell. It is

CINR Deviation
Indicates the standard deviation of the

carrier-to-interference-and-noise
ratio (CINR).
CINR Diversity
Ant
Indicates the CINR of the diversity

antenna.
CINR Mean
CINR Primary Ant
Indicates the CINR of the primary

antenna.
Distance
Unit: m

terminal and the serving cell.
DL Bit Data Rate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the downlink bit rate.
DL PermBase
Range: 0 to 31
Indicates the permutation base for the

specified downlink subchannel.
Frame Ratio
Indicates the frame ratio on the uplink

and downlink.
Frequency
Unit: kHz
Frequency Offset
Unit: kHz
Indicates the frequency offset on the

downlink.
MAC Address
Network Entry
State
Indicates the network entry state,

including wait for sync, phy sync
achieved, wait for RNG RSP, wait
for SBC RSP, wait for REGRSP,
wait for DSA, and network entry
complete.
Number of SFIDs
Indicates the number of service flows.
Power Mode
Indicates the power mode, including

close loop, openloop passive
retention, open loop passive, and
open loop active.
Preamble Index
Range: 0 to 114
Ranging Code
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the ranging code.

14-221
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Ranging Seed
Indicates the ranging seed.
RSSI Deviation
Indicates the standard deviation of the

received signal strength indicator
(RSSI).
RSSI Diversity
Ant
Indicates the RSSI of the diversity

antenna.
RSSI Mean
RSSI Primary Ant
Indicates the RSSI of the primary

antenna.
Support ARQ
Range: Disable (does not

support the ARQ), or Enable
(support the ARQ)
Indicates whether to support the

automatic repeat request (ARQ).
Tx Headroom
Unit: dBm
Indicates the difference between the

current transmission power and the
maximum transmission power
available for the UE.
Tx Power
Unit: dBm
Indicates the transmission power.
UL Bit Data Rate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the uplink bit rate.
UL PermBase
Range: 0 to 69
Indicates the permutation base for the

specified uplink subchannel.
CS Information (Beceem)
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to CS Information of the WiMAX Beceem. The
following table provides the information about the convergence sublayer.
IE Name
IP
14-222
Range/Unit
Description
Associated PHSI
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the associated payload

header suppression index (PHSI). It
is the mirror of the PHSI.
Destination MAC
Address
Indicates the destination MAC

address.
Destination Port Range
Indicates the destination port range.
IP Destination Address
Indicates the destination IP address.
IP Source Address
Indicates the source IP address.
Protocol
Indicates the IP layer protocol.
Source MAC Address
Indicates the source MAC address.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
PHS
Range/Unit
Description
Source Port Range
Indicates the source port range.
Tos-High
Indicates the lower limit of the IP

packet service type.
Tos-Low
Indicates the upper limit of the IP

packet service type.
Tos-Mask
Indicates the mask of the IP packet

service type.
Classifier Rule Priority
Indicates the priority of data packet

classifier rules.
Classifier rules map data packets to
transmission connections.
SF List
Inform
ation
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Packet Classification
Rule Index
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the packet classification

rule index. It provides references for
the formulation of PHS rules.
PHSF
Indicates the payload header

suppression field (PHSF), which is a
set of bytes. It specifies the header
part to be suppressed in the packet
data unit (PDU) message.
PHSI
Indicates the ID of the payload

header suppression, which is a 8-bit
mask. It specifies the bytes that are
suppressed and those are not
suppressed in the PHSF.
PHSM
Indicates the mask of the payload

header suppression. It specifies the
bytes to be suppressed in the PHSF.
PHSS
Range: 1 to 255.
Unit: byte
Indicates the size of the payload

header suppression. The value is
equal to the number of bytes in the
PHSF or the number of valid bits in
the PHSM.
PHSV
Indicates whether the payload

header suppression is valid. It
determines whether to perform
suppression verification before
suppressing the payload header.
CID
Range: 0 to
65535
Indicates the connection ID. It can

map service flows to the
transmission connections on the
MAC layer.

14-223
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Direction
Range/Unit
Description
Indicates the direction of the service

flow.
The service flow may be used in the
uplink or downlink direction, and
each PDU message correlates with
an independent service flow.
SF Scheduling Type
Indicates the scheduling type of the

service flow, including the BE,
nrtPS, rtPS, ErtPS, and UGS.
SF state
Indicates the state of the service

flow, including Provisioned Set,
Admitted Set, and Active Set.
SFID
TID
Range: 0 to
65535
Indicates the transaction ID.
HARQ and FER Information (Beceem)

This describes the meanings of the IEs related to HARQ and FER Information of the WiMAX
Beceem. The following table provides the information about the hybrid automatic retransmission
request (HARQ) and frame error rate.
14-224
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
FER
Indicates the frame error rate.
PER
SDU Reject
Indicates the number of the rejected

signaling data unit (SDU) packets.
PDU Reject
Indicates the number of the rejected

packet data unit (PDU) packets.
PDU CRC Error
Indicates the number of PDU packets

with cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
errors.
PDU HCS Error
Indicates the number of PDU packets

with header check sequence (HCS)
errors.
DL MAP CRC Error
Indicates the number of downlink Map

packets with CRC errors.
DL MAP HCS Error
Indicates the number of downlink Map

packets with HCS errors.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
SDU Number
Indicates the number of the transmitted

or received SDU packets
PDU Number

or received PDU packets
Control Packet
Number

or received control packets
UL BURST HARQ
ASK DELAY
Range: Sync, one frame

offset, two frames offset,
and three frames offset
Indicates the acknowledgement delay of

the burst HARQ on the uplink.
DL BURST HARQ
ACK DELAY
Range: Sync, one frame

offset, two frames offset,
and three frames offset
Indicates the acknowledgement delay of

the burst HARQ on the downlink.
Ranging (Beceem)
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Ranging of the WiMAX Beceem. The
following table provides the information about the uplink channel descriptor (UCD) message.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Initial ranging code Start
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the start number of the initial

ranging code.
Periodic ranging code

Start
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the start number of the

periodic ranging code.
Handover ranging code

Start
Range: 0 to 255

handover ranging code.
Bandwidth ranging code

Start
Range: 0 to 255

bandwidth request ranging code.
Initial ranging code End
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the end value of the initial

ranging code.
Periodic ranging code

End
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the end value of the periodic

ranging code.
Handover ranging code

End
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the end value of the handover

ranging code.
Bandwidth ranging code

End
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the end value of the bandwidth

request ranging code.

14-225
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Physical Information (Beceem)

This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Physical Information of the WiMAX Beceem.
The following table provides the information about the physical channel coding.
IE Name
DL MAP
DL Map FEC Scheme
Range/
Unit
Description
Indicates the modulation coding

scheme (MCS) of the downlink MAP.
The downlink MAP is used to identify
the usage of downlink burst intervals
in the physical layer in burst mode.
DL Burst
UL Burst
14-226
Frame Number
Local Frame Number
Indicates the number of the current

frame, namely the frame on which the
downlink Map message is received.
PHY state
Indicates the physical layer state,

including SYNC_ACHIEVED,
SYNC_TRYING_TO_SYNC, and
SYNC_INVALID.
DCD Change Count

channel descriptor (DCD) message
changes.
Downlink Burst Data

CID
Indicates the connection ID of the

Downlink Burst Data

DIUC
Indicates the downlink interval usage

code (DIUC) of the burst data.
Downlink Burst Data

Duration
Unit: slot
Indicates the downlink burst data

duration.
Downlink Burst Data

FEC Repetition
Indicates the MCS repetition of the

Downlink Burst Data

FEC Scheme
Indicates the MCS of the downlink

burst data.
Downlink Burst Data

Size
Unit: byte
Indicates the downlink burst data size.
Downlink Burst Data

Zone
Indicates the uplink permutation zone.
UCD Change Count
Indicates the number of uplink channel

descriptor (UCD) message changes.
Uplink Burst Data CID
Indicates the connection ID of the

uplink burst data.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/
Unit
Description
Uplink Burst Data

Duration
Unit: slot
Indicates the uplink burst data

duration.
Uplink Burst Data FEC

Repetition
Indicates the MCS repetition of the

uplink burst data.
Uplink Burst Data FEC

Scheme
Indicates the MCS of the uplink burst

data.
Uplink Burst Data Size
Unit: byte
Indicates the uplink burst data size.
Uplink Burst Data UIUC
Indicates the uplink interval usage

code (UIUC) of the burst data.
Uplink Burst Data Zone
Indicates the downlink permutation

zone.
Handover and Neighboring Cells (Beceem)

This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Handover and Neighboring Cells of the
WiMAX Beceem. The following table provides the information about terminal handover and
neighboring cells.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Bandwidth
Unit: MHz
BSID
Indicates the ID of the BS. It is

CellName
Indicates the name of a cell. It is

CINR Mean
Distance
Unit: m

terminal and the neighboring cell.
Frequency
Unit: kHz
HO Type
Indicates the handover type.
Last HO Latency Time
Unit: ms
Indicates the delay of the last

handover.
Ping Pang Count During

HO
Indicates the number of ping pang

handovers.
Preamble Index
Range: 0 to 114

14-227
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
RSSI Mean

dBm.
The Number of HO
Indicates the number of successful

handovers.
The Number of HO Drop
Indicates the number of handover

drops.
The Number of HO
Ranging Failure
Indicates the number of ranging

handover failures.
The Number of HO Trial
Indicates the number of handover

trials.

This describes the LTE information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the LTE UE air interface views.
BandWidth
This section describes the IEs related to the Bandwidth of the LTE network. You can obtain
the information about the uplink bandwidth by referring to the following descriptions.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
UL RB Num
Range: 0 to 100
Indicates the number of uplink resource

blocks.
UL RB Start
Range: 0 to 99
Indicates the start uplink resource block.
BLER
This section describes the IEs related to the BLER of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the block error rate (BLER) by referring to the following descriptions.
14-228
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Initial Error TB
Count
Indicates the statistics of transport blocks

(TBs) with initial transmission errors on
codeword 0 or 1.
Initial Total TB
Count
Indicates the statistics of TBs initially

transmitted on codeword 0 or 1.
Residual Error TB
Count
Indicates the statistics of TBs with

retransmission errors on codeword 0 or 1.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Residual Total TB
Count
Indicates the statistics of TBs

retransmitted on codeword 0 or 1.
Code0 Initial
BLER
Range: 0 to 100; Unit: %
Indicates the initial BLER on codeword 0.
Code1 Initial
BLER
Indicates the initial BLER on codeword 1.
Code0 Residual
BLER
Indicates the residual BLER on codeword

0.
Code1 Residual
BLER
Indicates the residual BLER on codeword

1.
PDSCH BLER
Indicates the BLER on the physical

downlink shared channel (PDSCH).
Buffer Status Report

This section describes the IEs related to the Buffer Status Report of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the buffer status report (BSR) by referring to the following
descriptions.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Long BSR0
Range: 0 to 63
Indicates the status reports of long buffer 0.
Long BSR1
Range: 0 to 63
Long BSR2
Range: 0 to 63
Long BSR3
Range: 0 to 63
Short BSR
Range: 0 to 63
Indicates the status reports of short buffer.
Camp Cell Information

This section describes the IEs related to the Camp Cell Information of the LTE network. You
can obtain the information about the camp cell by referring to the following descriptions.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
CP Length
Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates
the normal CP length. 1
indicates the extended CP
length.
Indicates the cyclic prefix length.
C-RNTI
Indicates the cell radio network

temporary identifier.

14-229
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Dl BandWidth
Range: 0 to 5
Indicates the downlink bandwidth.
l 0 indicates 1.4 MHz.

l 1 indicates 3 MHz.
14-230
DL Frequency
Indicates the downlink central

frequency.
EARFCN
Indicates the E-UTRA absolute radio

frequency channel number.
eNBTxAntennasNumber
1, 2, or 4
Indicates the eNodeB transmit

antenna number.
NeighbourAntennasNumber
1, 2, or 4
Indicate the neighbor antenna number.
PCI
Range: 0 to 503
Indicates the physical cell identity.
P-RNTI
Indicates the paging radio network

RA-RNTI
Indicates the random access radio

network temporary identifier.
SI-RNTI
Indicates the system information radio

SpecialSubFramePatterns
Indicates the ratio of special sub

frames such as DwPTS, GP, and
UpPTS, available only for TDD.
SPS C-RNTI
Indicates the semi-persistent

scheduling cell radio network
SubFrameAssignmentType
Indicates the ratio of sub frames on the

uplink and downlink, available only
for TDD.
SyncFlag
the synchronization. 1
indicates the
asynchronization.
Indicates the synchronous flag.
TAC
Range: 0 to 63
Indicates the tracking area code.
TMP C-RNTI
Indicates the temporary cell radio


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
TPC-PUCCH-RNTI

temporary identifier for power control
on Physical Uplink Control Channel
(PUCCH).
TPC-PUSCH-RNTI

temporary identifier for power control
on PUCCH Physical Uplink Shared
Channel (PUSCH).
Transmission Mode
Range: 1 to 9
Indicates the transmission mode.
UERxAntennasNumber
1, 2, or 4
Indicates the UE received antenna

number.
UETxAntennasNumber
1 or 2
Indicates the UE transmit antenna

number.
UL BandWidth
Range: 0 to 5
Indicates the uplink bandwidth.

UL Freqency
Indicates the uplink central frequency.
Work Mode
the FDD mode. 1 indicates
the TDD mode.
Indicates the work mode.
Cell Reselection Parameters

This section describes the IEs related to the Cell Reselection Parameters of the LTE network.
You can obtain the information about the cell reselection parameters by referring to the following
descriptions.
IE Name
RESEL_C
OMM
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Range/Unit
Description
NCellReselectionHigh
Range: 1 to 16

number of cell reselections for
UEs to enter the high-mobility
state.
NCellReselectionMedium
Range: 1 to 16

number of cell reselections for
UEs to enter the mediummobility state.

14-231
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
PCompensation
Unit: dB
Indicates the difference

between the maximum
allowed transmit power of the
UE and the maximum actual
transmit power of the UE, that
is, max(PeMax - PuMax, 0).
PeMax
Unit: dBm

transmit power of a UE during
data transmission on the
downlink.
PuMax
Unit: dBm
Indicates the maximum RF

output power of the UE.
QHyst
Range: 0 to 8
Indicates the hysteresis value

for ranking criteria.
Qrxlevmeas
Unit: dBm
Indicates the hysteresis value

for ranking criteria.
QRxLevMinOffse
t
Range: 1 to 8
Indicates the offset to the

signalled Qrxlevmin taken into
account in the Srxlev
evaluation as a result of a
periodic search for a higher
priority PLMN while camped
normally in a VPLMN.
RxLevMin
Range: -70 to -22.

Unit: dBm.

required received signal level
in a cell.
SfHigh
Range: 0 to 3
Indicates the scaling factor for

Qhyst in high service flow for
high-mobility state.
0 indicates 0.25.
1 indicates 0.5.
2 indicates 0.7.
3 indicates 1.
SfMedium
Range: 0 to 3
0 indicates 0.25.
1 indicates 0.5.

Qhyst in medium service flow
for medium-mobility state.
2 indicates 0.7.
3 indicates 1.
TEvaluation
14-232
Value: 30, 60, 120,

180, or 240. Unit: s

Indicates the duration for

evaluating the allowed number
of cell reselections.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
SERVING_
FREQ_INF
O
INTRA_FR
EQ_CELL_
RESELEC
T
INTER_FR
EQ_CARR
IER_FREQ
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Range/Unit
Description
THystNormal
Value: 30, 60, 120,

180, or 240
Indicates the additional time

period before the UE can enter
the normal-mobility state.
CellReselectPriority
Indicates the cell reselection

information that is common for
intra-frequency cells.
SNonIntraSearch

dB.
Indicates the threshold (in dB)

for E-UTRAN inter-frequency
and inter-RAT measurements.
ThreshServingLo
w
Range: 0 to 56

serving frequency that is used
in reselection evaluation
towards lower priority EUTRAN frequency or RAT.
PMax
Indicates the value that is

applicable for the intrafrequency neighboring EUTRA cells.
QRxLevMin
Range: -70 to -22.

Unit: dBm.

required RxLevel in a cell.
SfHigh

Qhyst in sf-High for highmobility state.
SfMedium

Qhyst in sf-medium for
medium-mobility state.
SIntraSearch

dB.
Indicates the threshold (in dB)

for intra-frequency
measurements.
TReselectEutra
Range: 0 to 7

timer value TreselectionRAT
for E-UTRAN. This parameter
can be set for each E-UTRAN
frequency.
CellReselectionPriority

priority.
DlCarrierFreq
Unit: dBm

required Rx level in a cell.
InterFrequencyNumber
Indicates the inter frequency

number.

14-233
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
NeighborCellConfig
Indicates the neighbor cell

configuration table.
PCI
Range: 0 to 503
Indicates the neighbor cell ID.
PMax
Unit: dBm
Indicates the value applicable

for the neighboring E-UTRAN
cells on a carrier frequency.
QOffsetCell
Range: 0 to 30
Indicates the frequency offset

for E-UTRAN frequencies
with the same priority.
QOffsetFreq
Indicates the frequency offset

for E-UTRAN frequencies
with the same priority.
RxLevMin
Range: -70 to -22.

Unit: dBm.

required RxLevel in a cell.
SfHigh

Qhyst in sf-high for highmobility state.
SfMedium

Qhyst in sf-Medium for
medium-mobility state.
ThreshXHigh
Indicates the threshold used by

the UE when reselecting
towards the higher priority
frequency X than current
serving frequency.
ThreshXLow
Indicates the threshold used in

reselection towards frequency
X priority from a higher
priority frequency.
TReselectEutra
Range: 0 to 7

timer value for E-UTRAN.
This parameter can be set for
each E-UTRAN frequency.
Cell Scan
This section describes the IEs related to the Cell Scan of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the LTE cell searching test by referring to the following descriptions.
14-234

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
DlBandWidth
Unit: M
Indicates the downlink bandwidth, such as 5

M, 10 M, and 20 M.
Frequency
Indicates the frequency involved in the cell

searching test.
Iot
Unit: dB
Indicates the Iot value.
RSRP

dBm.
Indicates the reference signal received power.
RSRQ
Indicates the reference signal received

quality.
RSSI
Unit: dBm

indicator.
SCHRP
Unit: dBm
Indicates the SCH_RP value.
Cell Search
This section describes the IEs related to the Cell Search of the LTE network. You can obtain
the information reported by the test terminal during the cell searching.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
CP Type
Range: 0 to 1
Indicates the cyclic prefix type.
GroupID
Range: 0 to 167
Indicates the group ID.
Physical Sector
Range: 0 to 2
Indicates the physical sector

index.
RxAntNumber
Range: 0 to 3
Indicates the received antenna

number.
l 0 indicates 1R.
l 1 indicates 2R.
l 2 indicates 3R.
l 3 indicates 4R.
SyncPosition
Range: 0 to 11520
Indicates the symbol

synchronization position.
System Bandwidth
Range: 0 to 5
Indicates the system bandwidth.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-235
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Time Position
Range: 0 to (11520 x 16)
Indicates the time position.
Constellation Painting
This section describes the IEs related to the Constellation Painting of the LTE network. You
can obtain the statistical information by referring to the following descriptions when the QPSK,
16QAM, or 64QAM is used as the modulation method.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
QPSK
Unit: frame

Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) mode.
16QAM
Unit: frame
Indicates the number of frames modulated in 16

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (16QAM)
mode.
64QAM
Unit: frame

64QAM mode.
CQI
This section describes the IEs related to the CQI of the LTE network. You can obtain the
configuration information about the channel quality indicator (CQI) by referring to the following
descriptions.
14-236
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
DL SubBand
Schedule Number
Indicates the scheduling times of downlink

subband.
Rank1
Indicates the CQI of Rank 1.
Rank2 Code0
Indicates the CQI of Rank 2 on codeword

0.
Rank2 Code1

1.
Rank3 Code0

0.
Rank3 Code1

1.
Rank4 Code0

0.
Rank4 Code1

1.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Sub0~24
Range: 0 to 1000
Indicates the scheduling times of subband.
Sub Band CQI
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the CQI of each subband.
Wide Band CQI
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the CQI of each wideband.
CQI Configuration Information

This section describes the IEs related to the CQI Configuration Information of the LTE
network. You can obtain the configuration information about the channel quality indicator (CQI)
by referring to the following descriptions.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
AckMcsOffsetIndex
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the MCS offset index of the

acknowledgment (ACK).
AperiodCqiReportMode
Range: 0 to 4
Indicates the aperiodic CQI report mode of

the PUSCH.
BandwidthPartNumber
Range: 0 to 4
Indicates the number of bandwidth parts.
CQIMcsOffsetIndex
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the MCS offset index of the CQI.
MultiRi
Range: 0 to 32
Indicates the multi-RIs.
NOffsetRi
Range: -160 to 0
Indicates the rank indicator (RI) offset.
ParaH
Range: 1 to 17
Indicates the parameter H.
ParaK
Range: 0 to 4
Indicates the parameter K.
PeriodCqiReportMode
Range: 5 to 8
Indicates the periodic CQI report mode of

the PUSCH.
CQIPeriodicity
Range: 1 to 160
Indicates the CQI periodicity.
PmiMode
Range: 0 to 2
Indicates the PreCoding Matrix Index

(PMI) mode.
PucchFeedBackType
Range: 1 to 2
Indicates the CQI feedback type of the

PUCCH.
Rank1CQISpecial
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the special CQI of rank 1.
Rank2Code0CQISpecial
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the special CQI on codeword 0 of

rank 2.
Rand2Code1CQISpecial
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the special CQI on codeword 1 of

rank 2.
RiBitNumber
Range: 0 to 2
Indicates the number of RI bits.
RiMcsOffsetIndex
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the MCS offset index of RI.

14-237
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
SubFrameOffset
Range: 0 to 159
Indicates the CQI subframe offset.
Transmit Mode
Range: 0 to 8
Indicates the transmission mode.
DRX Information
This section describes the IEs related to the DRX Information of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the DRX by referring to the following descriptions.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
AnrEnable
Range: 0 to 1
Indicates whether the DRX is enabled for

the ANR.
ContentionTimer
Range: 0 to 1
Indicates the instantaneous state of the

contention timer.
DrxCfgInd
Range: 0 to 1
Indicates the DRX configuration

indicator.
DrxCycleType
Range: 1 to 3
Indicates the DRX cycle type.
l 1 indicates the
short period of
DRX.
l 2 indicates the long
period of DRX.
l 3 indicates the
invalid period of
DRX.
14-238
DrxInactivityTimer
Range: 0 to 2,560.
Unit: ms
Indicates the value of the DRX inactivity

timer.
DrxRetxTimer

ms
Indicates the value of the DRX

retransmission timer.
DrxRetxTimer1
Range: 0 to 1

DRX retransmission timer that
corresponds to HARQ channel 1.
DrxRetxTimer2
Range: 0 to 1

DrxRetxTimer3
Range: 0 to 1

DrxRetxTimer4
Range: 0 to 1


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
DrxRetxTimer5
Range: 0 to 1

DrxRetxTimer6
Range: 0 to 1

DrxRetxTimer7
Range: 0 to 1

DrxRetxTimer8
Range: 0 to 1

DrxShortCycleTimer

ms
Indicates the value of the DRX short cycle

timer.
DrxStartedFlag
Range: 0 to 1
Indicates whether the DRX is enabled.
DrxStartOffset
Range: 0 to 2,599.
Unit: ms
Indicates the offset when the DRX cycle

is started.
DrxStateBitmap
Range: 0 to 232
Indicates the DRX state timer.
DrxSubState
Range: 0 to 4
Indicates the DRX sub-state.
InactivityTimer
Range: 0 to 1
Indicates the instantaneous state of

inactivity timer.
LongDrxCycle
Range: 10 to 2,560.
Unit: ms
Indicates the long cycle of the DRX.
LTEType
Range: 1 to 3
Indicates the LTE type.
l 1 indicates FDD.
l 2 indicates TDD.
l 3 indicates the
invalid LTE mode.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
OndurationTimer

ms
Indicates the value of the continuous

monitoring timer.
OndurationTimerState
Range: 0 to 1

continuous monitoring timer.
ShortDrxCycleFlg
Range: 0 to 640
Indicates whether the short cycle of the

DRX is valid.
ShortDrxCycle

ms
Indicates the short cycle of the DRX.

14-239
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
EPS Bearer Information

This section describes the IEs related to the EPS Bearer Information of the LTE network. You
can obtain the information about the Evolved Packet System (EPS) bearer by referring to the
following descriptions.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Bearer Context
Type
Indicates the bearer context type.
CID Number
Range: 0 to 31
Indicates the context ID.
DLGuaranteedMax
Rate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the maximum guaranteed bit rate for

downlink.
DLMaxRate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the maximum bit rate for downlink.
EPSB ID
Indicates the evolved packet system bearer ID.
EPSB Number
Range: 1 to 11
Indicates the number of evolved packet system

bearer.
Link EPSB ID
Indicates the evolved packet system link bearer

ID.
QCI
Indicates the QoS class identifier.
ULGuaranteedMax
Rate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the maximum guaranteed bit rate for

uplink.
ULMaxRate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the maximum bit rate for uplink.
HARQ
This section describes the IEs related to the HARQ of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) by referring to the following
descriptions.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
ReTx Index
l First Transfer: indicates the number of

initial transmission successes (during a
statistic period).
l Nth RxTx: indicates the number of Nth
retransmission successes (during a
statistic period).
14-240
MAX ReTx
Count
Range: 0 to 9
Indicates the maximum number of HARQ

retransmissions.
Repetition
repetition or non-repetition
Indicates the HARQ transmission mode.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Period
Indicates the HARQ retransmission period.

This IE is displayed only when Repetition
is set to repetition.
UL IBLER
Range: 0 to 100; unit: %
Indicates the uplink initial block error rate

(BLER).
UL RBLER
Indicates the uplink residual BLER.
UL SBLER
Indicates the uplink scheduling BLER.
UL HARQ
ACK
Indicates the number of times that the UL

HARQ ACK messages are transmitted. The
following statistics are displayed
separately: number of times that the UL
HARQ ACK messages are successfully
transmitted for the first time within a
statistical period and the number of times
that the UL HARQ ACK messages are
successfully retransmitted from the first
time to the ninth time within a statistical
period.
UL HARQ
NACK
Indicates the number of times that the UL

HARQ NACK messages are transmitted.
The following statistics are displayed
separately: number of times that the UL
HARQ NACK messages are successfully
transmitted for the first time within a
statistical period and the number of times
that the UL HARQ NACK messages are
period.
Code0 DL
HARQ ACK
Indicates the number of times that the DL

HARQ ACK messages are transmitted on
codeword 0. The following statistics are
displayed separately: number of times that
the DL HARQ ACK messages are
successfully transmitted for the first time
within a statistical period and the number of
times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are
period.

14-241
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Code0 DL
HARQ NACK

HARQ NACK messages are transmitted on
the DL HARQ NACK messages are
times that the DL HARQ NACK messages
are successfully retransmitted from the first
period.
Code1 DL
HARQ ACK

HARQ ACK messages are transmitted on
the DL HARQ ACK messages are
times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are
period.
Code1 DL
HARQ NACK

HARQ NACK messages are transmitted on
the DL HARQ NACK messages are
times that the DL HARQ NACK messages
are successfully retransmitted from the first
period.
HO Interrupt Delay
This section describes the IEs related to the HO Interrupt Delay. You can obtain the information
about the interruption delay due to the UE handover by referring to the following descriptions.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Unit: s
Indicates the downlink interruption delay due

to the MAC handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the uplink interruption delay due to

the MAC handover.
MacHoDlInteruptTime
MacHoUlInteruptTime
14-242

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Unit: s
Indicates the start time stamp of the baseband

response random access.
Unit: s
Indicates the start time stamp of the MAC

random access at layer 3.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the random access

response (RAR) access message received by
the MAC.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the first ACK

message that is received after the handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the first packet that

the CRC is performed correctly and is received
by the target cell after the handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the first user plane

data packet that the CRC is performed
correctly and is received by the target cell after
the handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the first packet that

is received after the handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the first signaling

plane data packet that the CRC is performed
correctly and is received by the target cell after
the handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the first uplink

authorized message that is received after the
handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the last ACK

message that is received before the handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the last packet that

the CRC is performed correctly and is received
by the source cell before the handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the last user plane

correctly and is received by the source cell
before the handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the last packet that

is received before the handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the last signaling

correctly and is received by the source cell
before the handover.
MacRcvFpgaSyncTime
MacRcvHOReqTime
MacRcvRarTime
MacRx1stAckTime
MacRx1stCrcRightTime
MacRx1stDrbTime
MacRx1stPktTime
MacRx1stSrbTime
MacRx1stUlgrantTime
MacRxLastAckTime
MacRxLastCrcRightTime
MacRxLastDrbTime
MacRxLastPktTime
MacRxLastSrbTime
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-243
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the last uplink

authorized message that is received by the
MAC before the handover.
MacSend1stPreambleTime
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the first preamble

sent by the MAC.
MacSendLastPreambleTime
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the last preamble

sent by the MAC.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the MAC handover

completion, that is, the time stamp when the
RRC Request message of Message 3 is sent.
MacRxLastUlgrantTime
MacSendMsg3Time
MacSendPreambleNum
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the first user plane

correctly and is sent after the handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the first signaling

correctly and is sent after the handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the user plane data

packet that is sent before the handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the time stamp of the signaling plane

data packet that is sent before the handover.
MacTx1stDrbTime
MacTx1stSrbTime
MacTxLastDrbTime
MacTxLastSrbTime
OriginalCellRlcRxLastPktRb
OriginalCellRlcRxLastPktSi
OriginalCellRlcRxLastPktTi
Indicates the ID of the resource block of the

last data packet that is received by the RLC of
the source cell.
Indicates the size of the last data packet that is

received by the RLC of the source cell.
Unit: s
Indicates the time of the last data packet that

is received by the RLC of the source cell.
Unit: s
Indicates the contention time of the PDCP

downlink data transmission.
Unit: s
Indicates the delay in the PDCP downlink data

transmission.
Unit: s
Indicates the stop time of the PDCP downlink

data transmission.
Unit: s
Indicates the contention time of the PDCP

uplink data transmission.
Unit: s
Indicates the delay in the PDCP uplink data

transmission.
PdcpHoDlDtContTime
PdcpHoDlDtDelayTime
PdcpHoDlDtStopTime
PdcpHoUlDtContTime
PdcpHoUlDtDelayTime
14-244
Indicates the number of preambles that are sent

during the random access.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Unit: s
PdcpHoUlDtStopTime
PdcpRxPktNum
PdcpRxPktSize
Indicates the stop time of the PDCP uplink

data transmission.
Indicates the sequence number of the first

packet that is sent to the PDCP.
Indicates the size of the first packet sent to the

PDCP.
Unit: s
Indicates the time that the first packet is sent

to the PDCP.
Unit: s
Indicates the time that the RLC downlink

handover is complete.
RlcHoDlInteruptTime
Unit: s
Indicates the RLC downlink interruption time.
RlcHoUlInteruptTime
Unit: s
Indicates the RLC uplink interruption time.
Indicates the sequence number of the first

packet that is received by the RLC.
PdcpRxPktTime
RlcDLHoCmpTime
RlcRxPduSn
Unit: s
RlcRxPduTime
RlcRxPktSize
RlcRxRbid
Indicates the size of the first packet that is

received by the RLC.

first packet that is received by the RLC.

first data packet that is sent on the uplink of
the RLC after the handover.
RlcUlFirstRlcPktRbId
Unit: s
RlcUlFirstRlcPktTime
RlcUlLastRlcPktRbId
Indicates the time that the first data packet is

sent on the uplink of the RLC after the
handover.
last data packet that is sent on the uplink of the
RLC before the handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the time that the last data packet is

sent on the uplink of the RLC before the
handover.
Unit: s
Indicates the time that the handover command

is received on the uplink of the RLC.
RlcUlLastRlcPktTime
RlcULRxHoIndTime
Indicates the time that the first PDU that is

received by the RLC.
IPerf Data
This section describes the IEs related to the IPerf Data. You can obtain the information about
the data reported by the test terminal during the Iperf test.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-245
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
In the case of the Iperf test, C mode refers to that the Probe sends data to the core network (CN)
through the client. S mode refers to that the Probe receives data from the CN through the server.
C/S mode refers to that the Probe sends data to and receives data from the CN at the same time.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Bandwidth
Unit: Mbit/s
Begin Time
Indicates the start time of data transmission.
End Time
Indicates the end time of data transmission.
ID
Indicates the data transmission ID, which is used to

identify a data transmission service.
Jitter
Indicates the jitter.
Lost Datagrams
Indicates the number of lost data packets.
Lost Ratio
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the ratio of lost packets, that is, the ratio of

lost data packets to the total data packets.
Server UDP
Indicates the downlink user datagram protocol (UDP)

data transmission in S mode.
TCP or Client
UDP
Indicates the uplink and downlink TCP data

transmission in C/S mode or the uplink UDP data
transmission in C mode.
Total
Datagrams
Indicates the total number of transmitted data packets.
Transmit Bytes
Indicates the number of transmitted bytes.
Least Mean Square Painting

This section describes the IEs related to the Least Mean Square Painting of the LTE network.
You can obtain the information about the least mean square painting by referring to the following
descriptions.
IE Name
Description
LS Painting
Indicates the least mean square painting.
Logical Channel Statistics

This section describes the IEs related to the Logical Channel Statistics of the LTE network.
You can obtain the logical channel statistics by referring to the following descriptions.
14-246
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Logical Channel ID
Range: 0 to 32
Indicates the logical channel ID.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
RLC Mode
The value 0 indicates

the AM mode; the
value 1 indicates the
UM mode; the value
2 indicates the TM
mode.
Indicates the radio link control (RLC)

mode.
EPSB ID
Range: 0 to 15.
Indicates the carrier address.
Logical Channel PRI
Range: 1 to 16
Indicates the logical channel priority.
Logical Channel Group

ID
Range: 0 to 3
Logical Channel Group

PRI
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Indicates the logical channel group

priority.
Logical Channel PBR
0, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128,

or 256
Indicates the prioritized bit rate (PBR) of

a logical channel.
BuckSizeDuration
50, 100, 150, 300,

500, or 1000
Indicates the buck size duration.
DLRLCReceivePduLength
Indicates the total bytes of packet data

units (PDUs) that a UE receives on the
downlink at the RLC layer.
DLRLCRepeatPduLength
Indicates the total bytes of duplicate PDUs

that a UE receives on the downlink at the
RLC layer, including the bytes of PDUs
whose sequence number (SN) is smaller
than VR(R).
DLRabmReceiveSduLength
Indicates the total bytes of data that a UE

receives on the downlink at the application
layer.
DLPDCPReceiveSduLength
Indicates the total bytes of signaling data

units (SDUs) that a UE receives on the
downlink at the PDCP layer.
DLRLCDropRate
Unit: %
Indicates the packet loss rate of SDUs that

a UE receives on the downlink at the RLC
layer.
DLRLCReceiveControlPduNumber
Indicates the number of status report PDUs

that a UE receives on the downlink at the
RLC layer.
DLRLCReceiveControlPduLength
Indicates the total bytes of status report

PDUs that a UE receives on the downlink
at the RLC layer.

14-247
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
DlControlPduNumber
Indicates the number of intervals between

receptions of status reports on the
downlink by a UE.
DLRLCRxControlPduTimeSpace
Indicates the interval between receptions

of status reports on the downlink by a UE.
ULRLCTxControlPduNumber
Indicates the number of status report PDUs

that a UE triggers on the uplink.
ULRLCTxControlPduLength
Indicates the total bytes of status report

PDUs that a UE triggers on the uplink.
ULPDCPDropSduBySduTimer
Indicates the data volume of discarded

packets based on the SDU timer that a UE
receives on the uplink at the PDCP layer.
ULRLCTxNewPduLength
Indicates the total bytes of PDUs that a UE

transmits on the uplink at the RLC layer
for the first time.
ULRLCReTxPduLength
Indicates the total bytes of PDUs that a UE

retransmits on the uplink at the RLC layer.
ULRLCWindowUseRate
Indicates the usage of the transmit window

where a UE transmits data on the uplink at
the RLC layer.
UlControlPduNumber
Indicates the number of intervals between

sendings of status reports on the uplink by
a UE.
ULRLCTxControlPduTimeSpace
Indicates the interval between sendings of

status reports on the uplink by a UE.
MAC Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the MAC Parameters of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the MAC parameters related to the PDSCH and PUSCH by referring
to the following descriptions.
14-248
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
ActiveDemultFailNumber
Indicates the number of service data units

received on the downlink at the MAC layer that
fail to be demultiplexed when PDSCHs are in
activated state.
ActiveDemultySuccessNumber
Indicates the number of service data units

received on the downlink at the MAC layer that
are demultiplexed successfully when PDSCHs
are in activated state.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
ActivePDSCHCrcCorrectNumber
Indicates the number of times that the correct

cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs) are performed
on the service data units received on the downlink
at the MAC layer when PDSCHs are in activated
state.
ActivePDSCHCrcErrorNumber
Indicates the number of times that the incorrect

cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs) are performed
on the service data units received on the downlink
at the MAC layer when PDSCHs are in activated
state.
AntennaPortNumber
Indicates the number of antenna ports at the MAC

layer.
DLSystemRBNumber
Indicates the number of system resource blocks

that use the downlink bandwidth at the MAC
layer.
ParseDCI0SuccessNumber
Range: 0 to
1000
Indicates the number of DCI0s that are

successfully parsed by the uplink at the MAC
layer.
PDSCHCrcCorrectNumber
Indicates the number of times that the correct

CRCs are performed on the data packets received
on the downlink at the MAC layer regardless of
the states of PDSCHs.
PDSCHCrcErrorNumber
Indicates the number of times that the incorrect

CRCs are performed on the data packets received
on the downlink at the MAC layer regardless of
the states of PDSCHs.
PDSCHTotalDataNumber
Indicates the total number of data packets

received on the downlink PDSCHs at the MAC
layer.
PUSCHDynamicNumber
Range: 0 to
1000
Indicates the number of data packets that are

dynamically scheduled on uplink PUSCHs.
PUSCHSemiStaticNumber
Range: 0 to
1000

semi-statically scheduled on uplink PUSCHs.
ReceiveDCI0Number
Range: 0 to
1000
Indicates the number of DCI0s that are received

on the uplink at the MAC layer.
SendPUCCHSuccessNumber
Range: 0 to
1000

successfully sent on the uplink PUCCHs at the
MAC layer.
SendPUSCHSuccessNumber
Range: 0 to
1000

successfully sent on the uplink PUSCHs at the
MAC layer.

14-249
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
TATimerLength
Indicates the value of the timer for the tracing

area (TA) at the MAC layer.
ULSubCarrierRBNumber
Indicates the number of sub-carriers in each

resource block on the uplink at the MAC layer.
ULSymbolNumber
Indicates the number of symbols for each

timeslot on uplink channels at the MAC layer.
ULSystemRBNumber
Indicates the number of system resource blocks

that use the uplink bandwidth at the MAC layer.
MCS
This section describes the IEs related to the MCS of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the modulation coding scheme (MCS) by referring to the following
descriptions.
14-250
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Code0Count
Range: 0 to 1,000
Indicates the scheduling times of each MCS on

codeword 0 during a period.
Code0Mod
Indicates the modulation coding scheme of codeword

0, such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.
Code0RBCou
nt
Range: 0 to
100,000
Indicates the number of resource blocks in each MCS

on codeword 0 during a period.
Code1Count
Range: 0 to 1,000
Indicates the scheduling times of each MCS on

codeword 1 during a period.
Code1Mod
Indicates the modulation coding scheme of codeword

1, such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.
Code1RBCou
nt
Range: 0 to
100,000

on codeword 1 during a period.
Count
Range: 0 to 1,000
Indicates the scheduling times of each MCS during a

period.
Modulation
Indicates the modulation, such as QPSK, 16QAM,

and 64QAM.
RBCount
Range: 0 to
100,000

during a period.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
MIMO
This section describes the IEs related to the MIMO of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the multiple input multiple output (MIMO) by referring to the following
descriptions.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Description
1T1R
Indicates the single-antenna port that contains one transmitter and one
receiver.
1T2R
Indicates the single-antenna port that contains one transmitter and two
receivers.
2T2R SFBC
Indicates the space frequency block code for two transmitters and two
receivers.
2T2R OL SM
Indicates the open-loop spatial multiplexing for two transmitters and two
receivers.
2T2R CL
Rank2
Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 2 for two transmitters and two
receivers.
MultiUser
Indicates the multi-user MIMO.
2T2R CL
Rank1
Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 1 for two transmitters and two
receivers.
Single Port5
Indicates the single-transmitter port (port 5).
Single Port56
Indicates the dual-transmitter ports (port 5 and port 6).
4T2R SFBC
Indicates the space frequency block code for four transmitters and two
receivers.
4T2R OL SM
Indicates the open-loop spatial multiplexing for four transmitters and two
receivers.
4T2R CL
Rank1
Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 1 for four transmitters and two
receivers.
4T2R CL
Rank2
Indicates the open-loop multiplexing rank 2 for four transmitters and two
receivers.
4T4R SFBC
Indicates the space frequency block code for four transmitters and four
receivers.
4T4R OL
Rank2
Indicates the open-loop multiplexing rank 2 for four transmitters and four
receivers.
4T4R OL
Rank3
receivers.
4T4R OL
Rank4
receivers.
BF Port7
Indicates the single-stream beam forming port (port 7).

14-251
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Description
BF Port8
Indicates the single-stream beam forming port (port 8).
BF Port78
Indicates the double-stream beam forming ports (port 7 and port 8).
4T4R CL
Rank1
Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 1 for four transmitters and four
receivers.
4T4R CL
Rank2
receivers.
4T4R CL
Rank3
receivers.
4T4R CL
Rank4
receivers.
PMI
Indicates the PreCoding Matrix Index (PMI), and the value range is from
0 to 15.
NAS Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the NAS Parameters of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the NAS parameters by referring to the following descriptions.
14-252
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
EMM Service
State
Indicates the evolved packet core (EPC)

mobility management state.
IP Type
IPv4 or IPv6
Indicates the IP address type.
IPv4Address
Indicates the IPv4 address.
IPv6Address
Indicates the IPv6 address.
PdnNumber
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the number of packet data networks

(PDNs).
PLMN
Indicates the registered public land mobile

network (PLMN).
PLMN Select
Mode
Indicates the PLMN selection mode.
Register State
Indicates the registration state.
RRC Connect
State
Indicates the RRC connection state.
SecurityModeCon
trol
Indicates the security mode command switch.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
PDCP Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the PDCP Parameters of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) parameters by
referring to the following descriptions.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
DiscardTimerLength
Indicates the value of the discard timer

configured for the PDCP.
DL Count
Indicates the downlink PDCP entity

count.
MaxCid
Indicates the maximum connection ID

of the robust header compression
(ROHC) context.
PDCPRohcProfile
Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that

the ROHC profile
information is not
configured. 1 indicates that
the ROHC profile
information is configured.
Indicates the information about the

ROHC profile configured for the
PDCP.
PDCPSnBitLength
Range: 0 to 2
Indicates the bit length of the sequence

number configured for the PDCP.
l 0 indicates 5 bits.
RB ID
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the radio bearer ID of the

PDCP.
RLC Mode
0 or 1. 0 indicates the RLC

AM mode. 1 indicates the
RLC UM mode.
Indicates the RLC mode of the PDCP.
StateReportFlag
0 or 1. 0 indicates that the

state report is not sent during
the handover. 1 indicates
that the state report is sent
Indicates the state report flag that is sent

during the PDCP handover.
UL Count
Indicates the uplink PDCP entity count.
PHY Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the PHY Parameters of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the LTE physical channel parameters by referring to the following
descriptions.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-253
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
14-254
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Adjust Point
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the adjustment point that is traced

periodically.
CFI1 Number
Indicates the number of times that the control

format indicator (CFI) of the physical control
format indicator channel (PCFICH) is 1.
CFI2 Number
Indicates the number of times that the CFI of

the PCFICH is 2.
CFI3 Number

the PCFICH is 3.
CFI4 Number

the PCFICH is 4.
DCI DL Number
Indicates the number of downlink control

information (DCI) on the downlink public
dedicated control channel (PDCCH).
DCI UL Number
Indicates the number of DCI on the uplink

PDCCH.
PHICH Ack Number
Indicates the number of ACK messages sent

on the physical hybrid ARQ indicator
channel (PHICH).
PHICH Nack Number
Indicates the number of NACK messages

sent on the physical hybrid ARQ indicator
channel (PHICH).
FirstPathFailNumber
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the number of times that the first

path that is traced periodically fails to be
determined.
FirstPathFailThreeNumber
Range: 0 to 65535

determined for three consecutive times.
FirstPathFailThreeSwitchNumber
Range: 0 to 65535

determined for three consecutive times but is
in handover state.
FirstPathNumber
Range: 0 to 65535

path that is traced periodically is determined.
FirstPathStrValue
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the threshold that the first path is

traced periodically.
FirstPathSuccessNumber
Range: 0 to 65535

path that is traced periodically is determined
successfully.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
FirstPathValue
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the value of the first path that is

traced periodically.
MaxPathPosition
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the position of the maximum path

that is traced periodically.
MaxPathValue
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the value of the maximum path that

is traced periodically.
PLMN Information
This section describes the IEs related to the PLMN Information of the LTE network. You can
obtain the Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) information by referring to the following
descriptions.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Equivalent PLMN List
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the equivalent PLMN list.
Forbiden PLMN List
Range: 0 to 63
Indicates the forbidden PLMN list.
Power Control
This section describes the IEs related to the Power Control of the LTE network. You can obtain
the information about the power control by referring to the following descriptions.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Alpha Factor
Range: 0 to 7. The
values of 0 to 7
correspond to the alpha
factors 0, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6,
0.7, 0.8, 0.9, and 1.
Indicates the alpha factor of power control

shrinking.
CurrentFiValue
Indicates the current Fi adjust value getting

from the table according to the TPC value.
CurrGiValue
Indicates the current Gi adjust value getting

from table according to the TPC value.
DeltaFPUCCH
Indicates the delta F_PUCCH.
DeltaTFi
Indicates the delta TFI on the Physical

Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH).
DynNominal
PUCCH
Indicates the dynamic nominal Physical

Uplink Shared Channel (PUCCH) power.
DynNominalPUSC
H
Indicates the dynamic nominal PUSCH

power.

14-255
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
DynUEPUCCH
Indicates the dynamic UE PUCCH power.
DynUEPUSCH
Indicates the dynamic UE PUSCH power.
FiType
Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates the
accumulated type. 1
indicates the absolute
type.
Indicates the power control adjust type.
Format
Range: 1 to 6
Indicates the command format of the

PUCCH.
Max TxPower

dBm.
Indicates the maximum transmit power.
PathLoss
Unit: dB
Indicates the path loss of the PUSCH or

PUCCH.
PUCCHHn
Indicates the PUCCH H(n).
RB Number
Indicates the resource block.
SumFiValue
Indicates the accumulation value of all Fi

adjust value.
SumGiValue
Indicates the accumulation value of all Gi

adjust value.
TPCValue
Value: 0, 1, 2, or 3
Indicates the adjust value index of the power

control on PUSCH that is used to calculate
CurrGiValue .
PRB
This section describes the IEs related to the PRB of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the resource block by referring to the following descriptions.
14-256
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
DL RB Count
Range: 0 to
65535
Indicates the scheduling times of downlink

resource block.
RB Index
Range: 1 to 100
Indicates the resource block index.
UL RB Slot0 Count
Range: 1 to 1000
Indicates the scheduling times of uplink resource

block on slot 0.
UL RB Slot1 Count
Range: 1 to 1000
Indicates the scheduling times of uplink resource

block on slot 1.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Radio Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the Radio Parameters of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the transmit power and signal-to-interference plus noise ratio
(SINR) of all the channels by referring to the following descriptions.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
PCI
Range: 0 to 503
Indicates the physical cell ID.
RSRP
Range: -132 to -40; unit:

dBm
Indicates the measurement value of the

reference signal received power (RSRP),
which is used for deciding the uplink
quality during the handover.
RSRQ
Range: -20 to 0; unit: dB

reference signal received quality (RSRQ),
RSSI

dBm

received signal strength indicator (RSSI),
PUSCH Power
Range: -40 to 23; unit:

dBm
Indicates the transmit power of the

physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH).
PUCCH Power

dBm
Indicates the transmit power of the

physical uplink control channel (PUCCH).
RACH Power

dBm
Indicates the transmit power of the random

access channel (RACH).
SRS Power

dBm
Indicates the transmit power of the channel

for a UE to send sounding reference signals
(SRSs).
Power Headroom

dB
Indicates the power headroom of a UE.
PDCCH DL Grant
Count
Range: 0 to 1000
Indicates the total number of granted

downlink public dedicated control
channels (PDCCHs).
PDCCH UL Grant
Count
Range: 0 to 1000
Indicates the total number of granted

uplink PDCCHs.
Average SINR

dB
Indicates the average SINR.
Rank1 SINR

dB
Indicates the target SINR of Rank 1.
Rank2 SINR1

dB
Indicates the target SINR on codeword 0 of

Rank 2.

14-257
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Rank2 SINR2

dB

Rank 2.
Rank3 SINR1

dB

Rank 3.
Rank3 SINR2

dB

Rank 3.
Rank4 SINR1

dB

Rank 4.
Rank4 SINR2

dB

Rank 4.
DrsRank1SINR

dB
Indicates the target SINR of dedicated

reference signals of Rank 1.
DrsRank2SINR1

dB

reference signals on codeword 0 of Rank 2.
DrsRank2SINR2

dB

reference signals on codeword 1 of Rank 2.
RxChCorFactor
Range: 0 to 1
Indicates the Rx channel correlation factor.
TxChCorFactor
Range: 0 to 1
Indicates the Tx channel correlation factor.
Rank Indicator
Range: 1 to 2
Indicates the rank value.
DMRS HOP
Range: 0 to 30
Indicates the demodulation reference

signal (DMRS) hopping group. This IE is
displayed after the frequency hopping test
is performed.
You can choose Test > LTE
SendCommand to control a terminal to
perform the DMRS frequency hopping
test.
Random Access Parameters

This section describes the IEs related to the Random Access Parameters of the LTE network.
You can obtain the information about the random access message by referring to the following
descriptions.
14-258
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
ContentionMessagePayload
Indicates the contention message payload.
MACStatAfter
Indicates the state of the MAC layer after

the random access.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
MACStatePrevious
Indicates the state of the MAC layer before

the random access.
Message3Payload
Indicates the Message3 (RRC Request)

payload.
Message5ScheduledUlGrant
Range: 0 to 19
Indicates the Message5 (RRC Request

Complete) scheduled on the uplink.
Message5ScheduledUlGrantPayload
Indicates the payload of Message5 (RRC

Request Complete) scheduled on the
uplink.
RaCauseType
Indicates the random access cause type.
RandomAccessNumber
Indicates the random access number.
RarMessagePayload
Indicates the RAR message payload.
RaType
0 or 1. 0 indicates the
contention based
random access. 1
indicates the noncontention based
random access.
Indicates the random access type.
ReceiveContentionMessage
Range: 0 to 19
Indicates the received contention

messages.
ReceiveRarMessage
Range: 0 to 19
Indicates the received radio random access

messages.
SendMessage3Message
Range: 0 to 19
Indicates the Message3 (RRC Request)

sent during the random access.
RB Configuration Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the RB Configuration Parameters of the LTE network.
You can obtain the information about the resource block (RB) configuration parameters by
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
BuckSizeDuration
50, 100, 150, 300, 500, or

1000
Indicates the buck size duration.
ControlPduLength
Indicates the length of a control protocol

data unit (PDU).
EPSB ID
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the evolved packet system

bearer ID.

14-259
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Logical Channel
Group ID
Range: 0 to 3
Indicates the logical channel group ID.
Logical Channel
Group PRI
Indicates the logical channel group

priority.
Logical Channel ID
Range: 0 to 32
Logical Channel PBR
Value: 0, 8, 16, 32, 64,

128, 256, or 0xFFFF.
Unit: ms.
Indicates the prioritized bit rate of a

logical channel.
Logical Channel PRI
Range: 1 to 16
Indicates the logical channel priority.
ReTxPduLength
Indicates the length of the PDU to be

retransmitted.
RLC Mode
Range: 0 to 2
Indicates the RLC mode.
l 0 indicates the
acknowledge mode.
l 1 indicates the
unacknowledge
mode.
l 2 indicates the
transparent mode.
RxSduLength
Indicates the length of the received

service data unit (SDU).
SendSduLength
Indicates the length of the sent SDU.
RLC Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the RLC Parameters of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the radio link control channel parameters by referring to the
following descriptions.
14-260
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Entity State
Indicates the entity state.
Logical Channel ID
Range: 0 to 31
MACNotifySendNumber
Indicates the number of protocol data units

(PDUs) that the MAC layer instructs the uplink
RLC to send.
RxMACPdu
Indicates the number of MAC PDUs received on

downlink RLC channels.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
RxPDCPSdu
Indicates the number of PDCP service data units

(SDUs) received on uplink RLC channels.
Transmit Type
Range: 0 to 2
Indicates the transmission type.
l 0 indicates the
acknowledge
mode.
l 1 indicates the
unacknowled
ge mode.
l 2 indicates the
transparent
mode.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
TxPduToMAC
Indicates the number of PDUs sent from the

uplink RLC channel to the MAC layer.
TxSduToPDCP
Indicates the number of PDUs sent from the

downlink RLC to the PDCP.
VR(h)
Indicates the highest receive state variable, that

is, the sequence number of the received PDU that
follows the PDU with the maximum sequence
number in AM mode.
VR(mr)
Indicates the maximum acceptable receive state

variable, which is equal to the sum of VR(r) and
the receive window size.
VR(ms)
Indicates the maximum transmit state variable,

that is, the sequence number of the maximum
PDU (ACK) of the transmit state report.
VR(r)
Indicates the receive state variable. As the lower

limit of the AM receive window, it indicates the
sequence number of the first PDU that is not
completely received or disordered.
VR(uh)
Indicates the UM highest received state variable.

As the upper limit of the receive window, it
indicates the sequence number of the received
PDU that follows the PDU with the maximum
sequence number in UM mode.
VR(ur)
Indicates the UM receive state variable, that is,

the sequence number of the first PDU that needs
to be re-ordered in UM mode.
VR(ux)
Indicates the UM t-reordering state variable, that

is, the sequence number of the PDU that triggers
the re-ordering timer in UM mode.

14-261
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
VR(x)
Indicates the t-Reordering state variable, that is,

the sequence number of the PDU that triggers the
re-ordering timer in AM mode.
VT(a)
Indicates the acknowledgment state variable,

that is, the sequence number of the next PDU to
be confirmed in AM mode.
VT(ms)
Indicates the maximum send state variable, that

is, the sequence number of the maximum sent
PDU in AM mode. The value of this parameter
is equal to the sum of VT(a) and the send window
size.
VT(s)
Indicates the send state variable, that is, the

sequence number of the next PDU to be sent in
AM mode.
VT(us)
Indicates the send state variable, that is, the

sequence number of the next PDU to be sent in
UM mode.
RRC Information
This section describes the IEs related to the RRC Information of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the radio resource control by referring to the following descriptions.
IE Name
PUSCH
Configure
Parameter
14-262
Range/Unit
Description
64QAM Enable
Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates that the
64QAM is
disabled. 1
indicates that the
64QAM is enabled.
Indicates whether the 64

quadrature amplitude
modulation is enabled.
CyclicShift
Range: 1 to 7
Indicates the cyclic shift.
DeltaOffsetAckIndex
Range: 0 to 10
Indicates the delta offset

acknowledgment index.
DeltaOffsetCqiIndex
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the delta offset

channel quality indicator
(CQI) index.
DeltaOffsetRiIn
dex
Range: 0 to 12
Indicates the delta offset rank

indicator (RI) index.
GroupAssignPU
SCH
Range: 0 to 29
Indicates the group that is

assigned to the PUSCH.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
RACH Configure
Parameter
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Range/Unit
Description
GroupHoppingE
nabled
Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates that the
group hopping is
disabled. 1
indicates that the
group hopping is
enabled.
Indicates whether the group

hopping is enabled.
Hopping Mode
Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates that the
hopping mode is
Inter-SubFrame. 1
indicates that the
hopping mode is
Inter&IntraSubFrame.
Indicates the hopping mode.
SubBandNumbe
r
Range: 1 to 4
Indicates the number of subbands.
PUSCHHoppin
gOffset
Range: 0 to 63
Indicates the PUSCH hopping

offset.
SequenceHoppi
ngEnabled
Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates that the
sequence hopping
is disabled. 1
indicates that the
sequence hopping
is enabled.

sequence hopping is enabled.
MACContentio
nTimer
Range: 8 to 64.
Step: 8. Unit:
subframe.
Indicates the timer for

contention resolution in TS
36.321 [6]. The unit is
subframe. Value sf8
corresponds to 8 subframes,
sf16 corresponds to 16
subframes.
MaxHarqMessa
ge3Tx
Range: 1 to 8

number of Msg3 HARQ
transmissions in TS 36.321
[6], which is used for
contention based random
access.
MessagePower
OffsetGroupB
Range:
0xFFFFFFFF, 0, 5,
8, 10, 12, 15, 18.
Unit: dB.

preamble selection in TS
36.321 [6]. The unit is dB.
Value minusinfinity
corresponds to infinity. Value
dB0 corresponds to 0 dB, dB5
corresponds to 5 dB.

14-263
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
SRS Configure
Parameter
14-264
Range/Unit
Description
MessageSizeGr
oupA
56, 144, 208, or 256

random access preambles
group A or B.
PreambleInitialReceivedTargetPower
Range: -120 to -90.

Unit: 2
Indicates the preamble initial

received target power.
PreambleTransmitMax
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10,
20, 50, 100, or 200

number of transmitted
preambles.
PowerRamping
Step
0, 2, 4, or 6
Indicates the power ramping

step.
RaPRACHMask
Index
Indicates the random access

physical random access
channel (PRACH) mask
index.
RaPreambleGro
upANumber
Range: 0 to 60.
Step: 4
Indicates the number of nondedicated random access

preambles that correspond to
group A.
RaPreambleInde
x
Indicates the dedicated

random access preamble
index.
RaPreambleNu
mber
Range: 4 to 60.
Step: 4

random access preambles.
RaResponseWin
dowSize
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or
10

random access response
window.
CyclicShift
Range: 0 to 7
Indicates the cyclic shift.
Duration
Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates the
normal duration. 1
indicates the
extended duration.
Indicates the duration of

physical hybrid ARQ
indicator channel (PHICH).
FreqencyDomai
nPosition
Range: 0 to 23
Indicates the frequency

domain position.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
SimultaneousAnAndSRS
Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates that the
messages cannot be
transmitted on a
channel
simultaneously. 1
indicates that the
messages can be
transmitted on a
channel
simultaneously.

sounding reference signal
(SRS) and format 1a1b
messages can be transmitted
on a channel simultaneously.
SRSBandwidth
Range: 0 to 7
Indicates the SRS bandwidth.
l 0 indicates
UU_BW0.
l 1 indicates
UU_BW1.
l 2 indicates
UU_BW2.
l 3 indicates
UU_BW3.
l 4 indicates
UU_BW4.
l 5 indicates
UU_BW5.
l 6 indicates
UU_BW6.
l 7 indicates
UU_BW7.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
SRSConfigInde
x
Range: 0 to 1023
Indicates the SRS configured

index.
SRSHoppingBa
ndwidth
Range: 0 to 3
Indicates the SRS hopping

bandwidth.
SRSMaxUpPts
Value: 0 or 1. 0
indicates that the
maximum uplink
pilot timeslot
restriction is
disabled. 1
indicates that the
maximum uplink
pilot timeslot
restriction is
enabled.
Indicates the maximum uplink

pilot timeslot of the SRS.

14-265
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
PUCCH
Configure
Parameter
Range/Unit
Description
SRSSubframeC
onfig
Range: 0 to 15

configured subframes of the
SRS.
SRSUEReleated
Bandwith
Range: 0 to 3
Indicates the UE-related

bandwidth of the SRS.
TransmissionCo
mb
0 or 1
Indicates the transmission

mode.
DeltaPUCCHSh
ift
1, 2, or 3
Indicates the delta PUCCH

shift.
EnableFlg
Value: 1 or 2. 1
indicates that the
enable flag is
disabled. 2
indicates that the
enable flag is
enabled.
Indicates the enable flag.
N1PUCCHAn
Range: 0 to 2047
Indicate the PUCCH resource

value.
N1PUCCHAnR
ep
Range: 0 to 2047
Indicates that the UE send the

ACK and NACK messages
repeatedly with a
RepetitionFactor.
NcsAn
Range: 0 to 7
Indicates the number of cyclic

shifts.
NrbCqi
Range: 0 to 63

calculated on the basis of the
resource block.
RepetitionFacto
r
Range: 0 to 3
Indicates the repetition factor

that affects the value of
N1PUCCHAnRep.
l 0 indicates
N2_REPET_F
ACTOR.
l 1 indicates
N4_REPET_F
ACTOR.
l 2 indicates
N6_REPET_F
ACTOR.
l 3 indicates
SPARE1_REP
ET_FACTOR.
14-266

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
PRACH
Configure
Parameter
Range/Unit
Description
TddAckNackFe
edbackMode
0 or 1. 0 indicates
that the feedback
mode of ACK and
NACK messages is
bundling. 1
indicates that the
feedback mode of
ACK and NACK
messages is
multiplexing.
Indicates the feedback mode

of the ACK and NACK
messages in TDD mode.
HighSpeedFlag
0 or 1. 0 indicates
the low speed
(restricted). 1
indicates the high
speed
(unrestricted).
Indicates the high speed flag.
PRACHConfigI
ndex
Range: 0 to 63
Indicates the PRACH

configuration index.
PRACHFreqencyOffset
Range: 0 to 104
Indicates the PRACH

frequency offset.
RootSequenceIn
dex
Range: 0 to 837
Indicates the root sequence

index.
ZeroCorrelation
ZoneConfig
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the configuration

value of the zero correlation
zone.
RRU Measurement
This section describes the IEs related to the RRU Measurement of the LTE network. You can
obtain the information about the remote radio unit (RRU).
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
RF
0 or 1
Indicates the radio frequency unit.
RTWP_ChA
Range: -110 to -40.

Unit: dBm.
Indicates the received total power of the

wideband on main A.
Received total (RT) indicates the total
power of the wideband signals that a base
station receives.
Wideband power (WP) indicates the power
of the wideband including the noise floor
and self interference noise.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-267
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
RTWP_ChB
Range: -110 to -40.

Unit: dBm.
Indicates the received total power of the

wideband on diversity B.
Received total (RT) indicates the total
power of the wideband signals that a base
station receives.
Wideband power (WP) indicates the power
of the wideband including the noise floor
and self interference noise.
Range: -110 to +40.

Unit: dBm.
Tx Power
RSRP Measurement
This section describes the IEs related to the RSRP Measurement of the LTE network. You can
obtain the measurement value of the reference signal received power (RSRP) of each antenna
by referring to the following descriptions.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
RSRP Antenna0

dBm
Indicates the RSRP measurement value

of antenna 0.
RSRP Antenna1

dBm

of antenna 1.
RSRP Antenna2

dBm

of antenna 2.
RSRP Antenna3

dBm

of antenna 3.
DrsRSRP Antenna0

dBm

of the dedicated channel of antenna 0.
DrsRSRP Antenna1

dBm

DrsRSRP Antenna2

dBm

DrsRSRP Antenna3

dBm

Service Data Flow Information

This section describes the IEs related to the Service Data Flow Information of the LTE network.
You can obtain the information about the service data flow by referring to the following
descriptions.
14-268

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Bearer Context Type
Indicates the bearer context type.
Context ID
Range: 0 to 31
Indicates the context ID.
DLGuaranteedMaxRate
Unit: kbit/s

guaranteed bit rate for downlink.
DLMaxRate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the maximum bit rate

for downlink.
EPSB ID
Indicates the evolved packet

system (EPS) bearer ID.
FlowLabelType
Indicates the IPv6 flow label type.
LocalPortHighLimit
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the maximum local port

number.
LocalPortLowLimit
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the minimum local port

number.
PacketFilterID
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the packet filter

identifier.
Precedence
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the packet filter priority.
ProtocolID
Indicates the protocol ID.
QCI
Indicates the QoS class identifier.
RemoteIpv4Address
Indicates the remote IPv4

address.
RemoteIpv4Mask
Indicates the remote IPv4 mask.
RemoteIpv6Address
Indicates the remote IPv6

address.
RemoteIpv6Mask
Indicates the remote IPv6 mask.
RemotePortHighLimit
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the maximum remote

port number.
RemotePortLowLimit
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the minimum remote

port number.
SdfNumber
Range: 1 to 11
Indicates the number of service

data flow.
SdfPfNumber
Indicates the number of service

data flow packet filter.
SingleLcPort
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the single local port

number.
SingleRmtPort
Range: 0 to 65535
Indicates the single remote port

number.

14-269
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
TypeOfService
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the service type.
TypeOfServiceMask
Range: 0 to 255
Indicates the service type mask.
ULGuaranteedMaxRate
Unit: kbit/s

guaranteed bit rate for uplink.
ULMaxRate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the maximum bit rate

for uplink.
Serving and Neighboring Cells

This section describes the IEs related to the Serving and Neighboring Cells of the LTE network.
You can obtain the information about the serving cell, listed cell, and detected cell by referring
to the following descriptions.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
PCI
Range: 0 to 503
Indicates the physical cell ID.
RSRP

dBm.

power.
RSRQ

quality.
RSSI

dBm.

indicator.
EARFCN
Indicates the E-UTRA absolute radio

frequency channel number.
Frequency Offset
Unit: Hz
Indicates the frequency offset.
SINR PDF
This section describes the IEs related to the SINR PDF of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the signal-to-interference and noise ratio (SINR) of Rank 1 and Rank 2 by
14-270
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Average SINR

dB.
Indicates the average SINR.
DrsRank1SINR

dB.
Indicates the dedicated reference signal target

SINR of rank 1.
DrsRank2SINR1

dB.

SINR on codeword 0 of rank 2.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
DrsRank2SINR2

dB.

SINR on codeword 1 of rank 2.
RANK1 SINR

dB.
Indicates the target SINR on Rank 1.
RANK2 SINR1

dB.

Rank 1.
RANK2 SINR2

dB.

Rank 2.
Throughput
This section describes the IEs related to the Throughput of the LTE network. You can obtain
the throughput of the medium access control (MAC), packet data convergence protocol (PDCP),
and radio link control (RLC) by referring to the following descriptions.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
MAC DL Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the downlink throughput at the MAC

layer.
MAC UL Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the uplink throughput at the MAC

layer.
PDCP DL
Throughput
Unit: kbit/s

PDCP layer.
PDCP UL
Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the uplink throughput at the PDCP

layer.
PHY DL Throughput
Unit: kbit/s

physical layer.
PHY UL Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the uplink throughput at the physical

layer.
RLC DL Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the downlink throughput at the RLC

layer.
RLC UL Throughput
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the uplink throughput at the RLC

layer.
Tracking Area Information

This section describes the IEs related to the Tracking Area Information of the LTE network.
You can obtain the information about the tracking area by referring to the following descriptions.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-271
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Forbiden TA List
Range: 0 to 63
Indicates the forbidden tracking

area.
TA List
Range: 0 to 63
Indicates the tracking area list.
UE State
This section describes the IEs related to the UE State of the LTE network. You can obtain the
information about the status of the non-access stratum, RRC, and MS by referring to this section.
14-272
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
EMM State
Indicates the evolved packet

system (EPS) mobility
management state.
EMM Sub State
Indicates the EPS mobility

management sub state.
EMM Update
Indicates the EPS mobility

management update.
RRC State
Idle, Connected, or Unkown
Indicates the RRC connection

state.
DRX State
Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates the

non-DRX state. 1 indicates the
DRX state.
Indicates the discontinuous

reception mechanism state.
Cell Allowed Access

Indicates the cell allowed access.
the cell access is not allowed. 1
indicates that the cell access is
allowed.
Cell Barred

the cell is not barred. 1 indicates
that the cell is barred.
Indicates the cell barred.
Cell Reserved
Indicates the cell reserved.
Camped PCI
Range: 0 to 503
Indicates the camped physical

cell identity.
IMSI
Indicates the international mobile

subscriber identity.
Version
UE Category
Indicates the user equipment

category.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Antenna Selection
Range: 0 to 4
Indicates the antenna selection.
l 0 indicates the closed loop.

l 1 indicates the open loop.
l 2 indicates the singleantenna transmission.
l 3 indicates the power aiding.
l 4 indicates that the antenna
is invalid.
Feature Group
Indicators
Indicates the feature group

indicators.
Timing Advance
Range: 0 to 63
Indicates the timing advance

(TA).
Synchronous State

synchronization state of a UE.
MME Code
Indicates the mobility

management entity code.
MME GroupId
Indicates the mobility

management entity group ID.
MTMSI
Indicates the M-temporary

mobile subscriber identity.
AFC Period
Indicates the automatic frequency

control period.
AFC Frequency Read

Value
Indicates the automatic frequency

control frequency read value.
PLMN
Indicates the public land mobile

network.
TAC
Indicates the tracking area code.
14.3.6 Information Elements of Scanners

This describes the IEs of the PCTel, Anritsu, and Rohde & Schwarz scanners. You can refer to
the description when browsing the IEs in the views of these scanners.
GSM Information Elements of Scanners

This describes the IEs of the GSM scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing the
IEs in the GSM scanner view.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-273
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
ARFCN
Indicates the ARFCN.
BSIC
C/A
Unit: dB
Indicates the carrier-to-adjacent (ratio).
C/I
Unit: dB
Indicates the carrier-to-interference

(ratio).
Center Frequency
Frequency
Unit: MHz
Indicates the carrier frequency.
Power
Unit: dBm
Indicates the level strength of each

frequency.
RSSI
Unit: dBm

indicator.
RxLev
Unit: dBm
Indicates the received signal level.
Spectrum Channel
Indicates the tested ARFCN of spectrum

analysis.
WCDMA Information Elements of Scanners

This describes the IEs of the WCDMA scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing
the IEs in the WCDMA scanner view.
14-274
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Aggregate Ec/Io
Unit: dB
Indicates the aggregate Ec/Io.
Center Frequency
Channel Code
Indicates the primary and secondary

scrambling codes.
Delay Spread
Indicates the spread delay.
Dev.Drift
Indicates the received signals of time

slices, which are obtained by using the
standard method.
Drift
Indicates the received signals of time

slices.
Ec
Unit: dBm
Indicates the energy per chip.
Ec/Io
Unit: dB
Indicates the ratio of the energy per

chip to the total power density of the
received bandwidth.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Eps/Io
Indicates the peak value of the Ec/Io of

the primary scrambling code.
Ess/Io
Indicates the peak value of the Ec/Io of

the secondary scrambling code.
Finger No
Indicates the number of a finger.
Io
Unit: dBm
Indicates the total power spectral

density of the received bandwidth.
ISCP
Indicates the interference signal code

power.
p Total
Indicates the total received power of

the current ARFCN.
Power
Unit: dBm
Indicates the level strength of each

frequency.
RSSI
Unit: dBm

indicator.
Scrambling Code
Indicates the scrambling code.
SIR
Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio.
Spectrum Channel
Indicates the tested ARFCN of

spectrum analysis.
Time
Indicates the time sequence offset.
Time Offset
Indicates the time sequence offset or

pilot delay.
CDMA Information Elements of Scanners

This describes the IEs of the CDMA scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing
the IEs in the CDMA scanner view.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Aggregate Ec/Io
Unit: dB
Indicates the aggregate Ec/Io.
Channel
Indicates the tested ARFCN.
Delay Spread
Unit: chip
Indicates the spread delay.
Ec/Io
Unit: dB
Indicates the ratio of the pilot energy per chip to

the total power spectral density of the received
bandwidth.
Io
Unit: dBm
Indicates the total power of the specified

bandwidth

14-275
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Pilot Delay
Indicates the pilot delay.
Power
Indicates the power.
Protocol
Indicates the network system.
RSSI
Unit: dBm
Indicates the received signal strength indicator.
Spectrum Channel
Indicates the tested ARFCN of spectrum analysis.
WiMAX Information Elements of Scanners

This describes the IEs of the WiMAX scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing
the IEs in the WiMAX scanner view.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
CINR
Unit: dB
Indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio of the preamble

numbered N. Here, N refers to the preamble index.
RSSI
Unit: dBm
Indicates the received signal strength indicator of the

preamble numbered N. Here, N refers to the preamble
index.
14.3.7 Packet Service Testing Information Elements

This describes the packet service testing information elements. You can refer to this part when
browsing the information about information elements in the packet service views.
App Throughput
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the App Throughput test for the packet service.
The following table provides the information about the throughput ratio at the application layer
of the packet service.
14-276
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Rx App Rate

kbit/s.
Indicates the downlink throughput rate at the

application layer, that is, the current throughput
for data received at the application layer.
Tx App Rate

kbit/s.
Indicates the uplink throughput rate at the

application layer, that is, the current throughput
for data sent at the application layer.
TCP
Retransmit
Ratio
Indicates the retransmission ratio at the TCP

layer.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Attach Detach
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the Attach Detach test for the packet service. The
following table provides the information about the Attach or Detach service of the packet service.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Attach Success Rate

%.
Indicates the attach success rate.
Detach Success Rate

%.
Indicates the detach success rate.
Attach Time
Unit: ms
Indicates the attach time.
Detach Time
Unit: ms
Indicates the detach time.
FTP Service Quality Evaluation

This describes meanings of the IEs related to the FTP Service Quality Evaluation test for the
packet service. The following table provides the information related to the FTP service of the
packet service.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Progress
Range: 0 to 100.
Unit: %.
Indicates the upload or download progress.
Download/Upload
Rate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the upload or download rate.
Time Elapsed
Indicates the upload or download elapsed

time.
Current Load Size
Unit: kbyte
Indicates the size of the file uploaded or

downloaded currently.
Total Load Size
Unit: kbyte
Indicates the total size of all uploaded or

downloaded files.
Download File Size
Unit: kbyte
Indicates the size of the downloaded file.
Download Total
Count
Indicates the total number of download

attempts.
Download Failure
Count
Indicates the number of download failures.
Download Failure
Rate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the download failure rate.
Upload File Size
Unit: kbyte
Indicates the size of the uploaded file.
Upload Total Count
Indicates the total number of upload attempts.

14-277
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Upload Failure Count
Indicates the number of upload failures.
Upload Failure Rate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the upload failure rate.
Download time
Unit: s
Indicates the statistical value (such as

minimum value, maximum value, average
value, and standard deviation) of the
download duration.
Download Avg rate
Unit: kbit/s

value, and standard deviation) of the average
download rate.
Upload time
Unit: s

value, and standard deviation) of the upload
duration.
Upload Avg rate
Unit: kbit/s

upload rate.
Max Rate Up
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the maximum rate on the uplink.
Min Rate Down
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the minimum rate on the downlink.
Guar Rate Up
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the guaranteed rate on the uplink.
Guar Rate Down
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the guaranteed rate on the downlink.
HTTP Service Quality Evaluation

This describes meanings of the IEs related to the HTTP Service Quality Evaluation test for
the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the HTTP service of
the packet service.
14-278
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Progress

%.
Indicates the test progress.
Page download rate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the page download rate.
Max Rate Up
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the maximum uplink rate.
Max Rate Down
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the maximum downlink rate.
Guar Rate Up
Unit: kbit/s
Guar Rate Down
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the guaranteed rate on the

downlink.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
DNS Parse Time
Unit: s
Indicates the duration for parsing the

domain name server (DNS).
Page size
Unit: byte
Indicates the page size.
Buffer
Indicates the buffer.
Page access failure

rate

%.
Indicates the failure rate of accessing pages.
URL
Indicates the IP address of the HTTP server.
Page download
time
Unit: ms

value, and standard deviation) of the page
download duration.
Avg rate
Unit: kbit/s

page download rate.
Ping Service Quality Evaluation

This describes meanings of the IEs related to the Ping Service Quality Evaluation test for the
packet service. The following table provides the information related to the Ping service of the
packet service.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Packet Size
Unit: byte
Indicates the size in bytes of the packet sent

with the Ping command. Valid only during
Ping sessions.
IP
Indicates the server IP address that is pinged.
Status
Indicates the status of the current ping test.
Packet Loss Rate

%.
Indicates the packet loss rate.
Ping time
Unit: ms
Indicates the duration of the ping test.
Max Rate Up
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the maximum uplink rate.
Max Rate Down
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the maximum downlink rate.
Guar Rate Up
Unit: kbit/s
Guar Rate Down
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the guaranteed rate on the

downlink.

14-279
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
PS Common Indicators
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the PS Common Indicators test for the packet
service. The following table provides the information about the PDP activation for the packet
service.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
PDP Activation Success

Rate

%.
Indicates the PDP activation success

rate.
PDP Activation Time
Unit: s
Indicates the PDP activation time.
WAP Download
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Download test for the packet service.
The following table provides the information related to the WAP download service of the packet
service.
14-280
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Progress
Unit: %
Indicates the test progress of the WAP

download.
Download Rate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the download rate.
Time Elapsed
Unit: ms
Indicates the elapsed download time.
Current Load Size
Unit: byte
Indicates the size of the file downloaded

currently.
Total Load Size
Unit: byte
Indicates the total size of downloaded files.
File Size
Unit: byte
Indicates the size of the downloaded file.
Login failure rate
Unit: %
Indicates the failure rate of logging in to the

WAP gateway.
Download Total
Count
Indicates the total number of download

attempts.
Download Failure
Count
Indicates the number of download failures.
Download Failure
Rate
Unit: %
Indicates the download failure rate.
Max rate down
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the maximum download rate.
Guar rate down
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the guaranteed download rate.
Download time
Unit: ms
Indicates the download time.
Download Avg rate
Unit: kbit/s
Indicates the average download rate.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
WAP Gateway Connection

This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Gateway Connection test for the packet
service. The following table provides the information related to the WAP gateway connection
service of the packet service.
IE Name
Description
WAP Gateway
Connection
ID
Indicates the ID of the number of WAP

gateway connection tests. The ID starts from
1.
Time
Indicates the time for the WAP gateway

connection.
Status
Indicates the status of the WAP gateway

connection test.
WAP Logon
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Logon test for the packet service. The
following table provides the information related to the WAP login service of the packet service.
IE Name
Description
WAP Logon
ID
Indicates the ID of the number of WAP login tests.

The ID starts from 1.
Time
Indicates the WAP login time.
Status
Indicates the status of the WAP login test.
WAP Page Refresh

This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Page Refresh test for the packet service.
The following table provides the information related to the WAP page refreshing service of the
packet service.
IE Name
Description
WAP Page Refresh
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
ID
Indicates the ID of the number of WAP page

refreshing tests. The ID starts from 1.
Time
Indicates the time for refreshing the WAP page.
Status
Indicates the status of the WAP page refreshing

test.

14-281
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
14.3.8 Speech Quality Evaluation Information Elements

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Speech Quality Evaluation. The following table
provides information about IEs related to the speech quality service.
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
Index
Data Time
Indicates the time calculated according to the

speech evaluation.
PESQ P.862.1
Range: 1 to 4.5
Indicates an algorithm of the perceptual evaluation

of speech quality.
KPI
Indicates the key performance indicator.
Min
Indicates the minimum value of the speech

evaluation.
Max
Indicates the maximum value of the speech

evaluation.
Avg Value
Indicates the average value of the speech

evaluation.
Std Deviation
Indicates the standard deviation of the speech

evaluation.
14.3.9 Noise Test Information Elements

This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Noise Test KPI. The following table provides
the information noise test information elements.
14-282
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
MOS Score
Indicates the MOS score obtained through the PESQ

862.1 algorithm.
Noise Level
Unit: dB
Indicates the noise level of the noise sample file or

recorded speech result file measured in the non-speech
phase. The smaller the value is, the less the noise is.
Sample Noise
File
Indicates the name of the noise sample file used in the

noise test.
SNR
Unit: dB
Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of the noise

sample file or recorded speech result file. The SNR can
be calculated through the following formula:
SpeechLevel - NoiseLevel.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
IE Name
Range/Unit
Description
SNRI
Unit: dB
The signal-to-noise ratio improvement (SNRI) can be

calculated through the following formula: Result File
SNR - Sample File SNR.
The larger the value is, the more the noises are
eliminated.
Speech Activity
Range: 0 to 1
Indicates the speech activity of the noise sample file or

recorded speech result file.
Speech Level
Unit: dB
Indicates the speech level of the noise sample file or

recorded speech result file.
TNLR
Unit: dB
Indicates the total noise level reduction (TNLR) in the

non-speech phase. The TNLR can be calculated through
the following formula: Result File NoiseLevel Sample File NoiseLevel.
14.4 Keyboard Shortcuts

This describes certain keyboard shortcuts of the Probe.
General Shortcuts
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Function
Shortcut
Open the online help.
F1
Open the project.
Ctrl + O
Save the project.
Ctrl + S
Open the engineering parameter view.
Ctrl + E
Open the outdoor map window.
Ctrl + M
Enlarge the map area.
Shrink the map area.
Open the Device Configure window to

configure external devices.
F8
Add external devices.
Ctrl + D
Connect the external device automatically.
F2
Disconnect the external device.
Ctrl + F2
Open the Test Plan Control dialog box to

configure or view the test plan.
F9
Start or stop the logfile recording.
F10

14-283
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Function
Shortcut
Pause or resume the logfile recording.
F11
Start the test plan.
F5
End the test plan.
Ctrl + F5
Insert filemark
F12
Switch worksheets on the operation interface.
Ctrl + Tab
Replay Shortcuts
Function
Shortcut
Close the logfile.
Ctrl + H
Open the logfile.
Ctrl + L
Play the logfile.
Enter
Stop the logfile.
Ctrl + F6
Shortcuts for synchronization

Function
Shortcut
Check the signaling in the L2 Messages or L3

Messages view.
Up/Down
Move the Line Chart view and update the data

in the view.
Left/Right
Synchronize the points in the map.
Left/Right

This provides the guidelines for using the PSTN SQE Server and methods for speech quality
evaluation. The PSTN SQE Server is an important component of the speech evaluation solution
of Huawei GENEX series. The PSTN SQE Server is deployed on the PSTN as the application
management program and is used to test the speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink
of the GSM and WCDMA networks.
14.5.1 Overview of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes the overview of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server is used to test the
independent speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink. The following contents help
you understand the features, rationale, scenarios, system structure, and basic concepts of the
PSTN SQE Server.
14.5.2 Installing the PSTN SQE Server
14-284

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
This section describes how to install the PSTN SQE Server and other assistants. To complete
the installation of the PSTN SQE Server, you only need to run the installation program and then
perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard.
14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server
The PSTN SQE Server adopts the standard PESQ algorithm and implements the speech quality
evaluation on the uplink and downlink on the radio network with the Probe and PHU.
14.5.4 Interface Reference of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes the interfaces for using the PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality
evaluation test and describes corresponding parameters.
14.5.5 FAQs
This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the PSTN SQE Server and the
corresponding causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the
using skills.
14.5.6 Test Items of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes the properties of the SQE test item. You can refer to this part when using the
PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality evaluation test, and then perform the related
operations.
14.5.7 Predefined Events of the PSTN SQE Server
This describes the predefined events of the PSTN SQE Server. You can refer to this part when
configuring events of the speech quality evaluation.
14.5.1 Overview of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes the overview of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server is used to test the
independent speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink. The following contents help
you understand the features, rationale, scenarios, system structure, and basic concepts of the
PSTN SQE Server.
Introduction to the PSTN SQE Server

This describes features of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server supports the speech
quality evaluation tests on multiple networks and provides user-friendly interfaces.
Features
l
Speech quality evaluation test on multiple networks such as GSM and WCDMA.
Speech quality evaluation test for outgoing and incoming calls.

Speech quality evaluation test for outgoing calls
The PSTN SQE Server can set modes of the speech quality evaluation test for outgoing
calls and perform the speech quality evaluation test by configuring the specified
destination number.
Speech quality evaluation test for incoming calls
The PSTN SQE Server can set modes of the speech quality evaluation test for incoming
calls, listen to incoming calls, and give responses to incoming calls.
Pre-synchronization of speech evaluation
After a call is set up, the PSTN SQE Server can perform the pre-synchronization test to
synchronize two parties for the normal speech evaluation test.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-285
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Recording function
Supporting the automatic recording during the speech evaluation test. For the concepts
of recording, see Basic Concepts of the PSTN SQE Server.
Playing function
Supporting the automatic playing during the speech evaluation test. For the concepts of
playing, see Basic Concepts of the PSTN SQE Server.
l
Supporting the half-duplex interactive speech evaluation. Thus, the speech quality on the
uplink and downlink can be tested in real time. The two interactive speech evaluation modes
are as follows:
The PSTN SQE Server plays a speech sample, and the PHU records the speech sample.
Then, the PHU plays a speech sample, and the PSTN SQE Server records the speech
sample.
The PHU plays a speech sample, and the PSTN SQE Server records the speech sample.
Then, the PSTN SQE Server plays a speech sample, and the PHU records the speech
sample.
Real-time display of key events on the PSTN such as calling, recording, and playing events.
Thus, you can troubleshoot problems in time. For details, see 14.5.7 Predefined Events
of the PSTN SQE Server.
Simultaneous test for multiple channels. The PSTN SQE Server can perform the
synchronous speech evaluation test for a maximum of eight channels.
Recording and storing logfiles (.gen file) in real time.

The logfile records the MOS values calculated by the specified channel according to
different protocols such as PESQ.862, PESQ.862.1, PESQ LQ, and PESQ Ie. You can
import the logfile to the GENEX Assistant to generate the analysis reports of speech
evaluation.
Application Scenarios
The PSTN SQE Server can be used in each phase of network lifecycles such as the network
establishment, expansion, maintenance, and optimization and is applicable to the performance
evaluation test and speech quality problem localization.
l
Performance evaluation test

During the network establishment, expansion, or optimization, the PSTN SQE Server can
be used to evaluate the speech quality performance of each network, thus providing the
network establishment or optimization with information.
Speech quality problem localization on the radio network

During the network maintenance or optimization, the PSTN SQE Server and the UEs of
the GENEX Probe collect data. The PSTN SQE Server records the uplink MOS. The Probe
records the downlink MOS and quickly locates the speech quality problems on the uplink
and downlink with the GENEX Assistant.
System Structure
The PSTN SQE Server consists of a voice card, and PC that is installed with the PSTN SQE
Server and a voice card driver. The voice card supports a maximum of eight speech channels.
Figure 14-1 shows the system structure of the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-3 describes each
entity shown in Figure 14-1.
14-286

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Figure 14-1 System structure of the PSTN SQE Server
Table 14-3 Description of system structure of the PSTN SQE Server

Entity
Description
PC
Refers to a desktop, where the drivers for the PSTN SQE Server and voice
card are installed.
NOTE
The PC must has at least one PCI for installing a voice card.
Voice card
Provides an RJ-11 interface, which is used to connect to the PSTN. The

voice card supports the speech call, call answer, recording, and playing
functions. The type of the voice card supported by the PSTN SQE Server
is Dialogic Diva Analog -2P/-4P/-8P.
RJ-11
Refers to the interface that is provided by the voice card and is used to
connect to the PSTN.
PSTN
Refers to the public switched telephone network.
Working Principles of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes working principles of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server supports
the speech quality evaluation test on the uplink and downlink. By interacting with the PHU test
terminal, the PSTN SQE Server performs the speech quality evaluation test. During the test, the
PSTN SQE Server or Probe records the speech result files, performs the MOS analysis in real
time, and then displays the MOS values. Thus, you can easily locate the speech quality problems
on the radio network.
Speech Evaluation on the Uplink

The PHU test terminal plays a speech sample through the air interface. Then, the PSTN SQE
Server receives the played speech sample through the PSTN and records the speech sample in
the destination file. Thus, the uplink MOS value is obtained according to the speech result file
and the speech sample through the PESQ algorithm, as shown in Figure 14-2. Table 14-4
describes Figure 14-2.
Figure 14-2 Speech evaluation on the uplink
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-287
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Table 14-4 Speech evaluation on the uplink

Entity
Description
Probe
Controls the dial-up of the PHU for playing a speech sample.
PHU test terminal
Plays a speech sample through the air interface.

Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, and Huawei U6100 are
supported.
PSTN SQE Server
Receives the played speech sample through the PSTN, and then
records the speech sample in the destination file.
Speech Evaluation on the Downlink

The PSTN SQE Server plays a speech sample through the PSTN. Then, the PHU test terminal
receives the played speech sample through the air interface and records the speech sample in the
destination file. Thus, the downlink MOS value is obtained according to the speech result file
and the speech sample through the PESQ algorithm, as shown in Table 14-5. Figure 14-3
describes Table 14-5.
Figure 14-3 Speech evaluation on the downlink
Table 14-5 Speech evaluation on the downlink

Entity
Description
Probe
Compares the speech result file with the speech sample and
obtains the downlink MOS value through the PESQ algorithm.
PHU test terminal
Receives the played speech sample through the air interface,

and then records the speech sample in the destination file.
Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, and Huawei U6100 are
supported.
PSTN SQE Server
14-288
Plays a speech sample through the PSTN.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Basic Concepts of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes the basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server, including the logfile, project, test
task, PESQ, and MOS. These concepts help you better conduct the PSTN SQE Server to perform
the speech quality evaluation test.
Table 14-6 lists the basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server.
Table 14-6 Basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server
Basic
Concepts
Description
Logfile
The logfile is the record of the collected information during the drive test.
The test data is stored in a file during the drive test. This file is called logfile
(.gen file). Through the logfile, you can easily browse and analyze data.
Project
The PSTN SQE Server is used to manage test items based on the project. A
maximum of eight speech channels can be configured in a project. Multiple
test tasks can be configured for each speech channel.
Test task
A test task consists of test items provided by the system. You can configure
test tasks as required. The test task can provide guidelines for the speech
quality test during the drive test.
Event
The PSTN SQE Server provides the events of the speech quality evaluation.
These events indicate the status of the speech quality evaluation test. You
can browse predefined events in the SpeechView window.
Channel
This is an emulation interface of a voice card, which is used to connect to

the telephone cable of the PSTN.
PESQ
This is an international standard algorithm of the perceptual evaluation of

speech quality. You can evaluate the speech quality by comparing the
original speech sample with the fading speech file. The result of the
evaluation is the MOS value.
MOS
The MOS is a subjective evaluation method adopting the ITU-T P.830

protocol. According to the requirements of the P.830 protocol, a specified
talker and listener in the specified environment analyze the speech quality
by collecting the objective feelings of the tested person in different scenarios.
Recording
The PSTN SQE Server receives the speech sample played on the test
terminal through the PSTN, and then records the speech sample in the
destination file.
Playing
The PSTN SQE Server plays the speech sample through the PSTN network.
Main Interface of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes the main interface for the PSTN SQE Server. The main interface consists of the
menu bar, toolbar, operation interface, status bar, and entries to the related operations by using
on the PSTN SQE Server.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-289
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Figure 14-4 shows the main interface for the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-7 describes the items
shown in Figure 14-4.
Figure 14-4 Main interface of the PSTN SQE Server
Table 14-7 Description of the main interface
14-290
No.
Name
Description
Menu bar
Indicates the main menu of the system. For details, see

Menu Bar.
Toolbar
Provides the shortcut icons for common operations. For

details, see Toolbar.
Operation
interface
Displays different view windows and configuration

windows. For details, see Operation Interface.
Status bar
Displays the keyboard status such as the status of the Caps

Lock, Num Lock, and Scroll Lock keys.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Menu Bar
The menu bar of the PSTN SQE Server displays main menus of the system and is designed based
on the main functions of the PSTN SQE Server to facilitate your operations.
Table 14-8 describes the menu bar and the corresponding functions of the PSTN SQE Server.
Table 14-8 Description of the menu bar
Main Menu
Description
File
Provides the entries for operations related to the project

Configuration
Provides the entries for configuring speech channels,

creating test tasks, and configuring test plans. For
details, see Table 14-10.
View
Provides the entries for operations related to the view

Test
Provides the entries for performing and stopping test

tasks. For details, see Table 14-12.
Help
Provides the entries for the system help and license

Table 14-9 Description of the File menu

Menu Item
Description
New
This menu item is used to create a project.
Open
This menu item is used to open a project under the

specified path.
Save
This menu item is used to save a project.
Save as
This menu item is used to save a current project as

another one.
Close
This menu item is used to close a project.
Table 14-10 Description of the Configuration menu
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Menu Item
Description
Hardware Config
This menu item is used to configure a speech channel.
Test Plan Editor
This menu item is used to create a test task.
Test Plan Configuration Editor
This menu item is used to configure a test plan.

14-291
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Table 14-11 Description of the View menu

Menu Item
Description
Speech/TV
This menu item is used to display the view for

monitoring test data.
Table 14-12 Description of the Test menu

Menu Item
Description
Start Run
This menu item is used to start a test task.
Stop Run
This menu item is used to stop a test task.
Table 14-13 Description of the Help menu

Menu Item
Description
Contents
This menu item is used to view the online help of the

PSTN SQE Server.
License Info
This menu item is used to view license information.
Update License
This menu item is used to update the license.
View ESN
This menu item is used to obtain the ESN code.
About PSTN SQE Server
This menu item is used to view the version information

about the PSTN SQE Server.
Toolbar
To enter windows fast or perform relevant operations, you can click corresponding icons on the
toolbar of the main interface for the PSTN SQE Server.
Table 14-14 describes the icons on the toolbar.
Table 14-14 Description of the toolbar
Icon
14-292
Name
Description
Create a project.
This icon is used to create a project.
Open a project.
This icon is used to open a project (.xml

file).
Save a project.
This icon is used to save the current

project.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Icon
Name
Description
Configure a speech
channel.
This icon is used to configure a speech

channel. Click this icon to configure a
speech channel in the displayed
Hardware Config window.
Create a test task.
This icon is used to create a test task.

Click this icon to create a test task in the
displayed Test Plan Editor window.
Configure a test
task.
This icon is used to configure a test plan.

Click this icon to configure a test plan in
the displayed Test Plan Configuration
Editor window.
Monitor a test.
This icon is used to monitor a test. Click

this icon to monitor a test in the displayed
SpeechView view in real time.
Start a test task.
This icon is used to start a test task.
Stop a test task.
This icon is used to stop a test task.
Help Content
This icon is used to view the version

information about the PSTN SQE Server.
Operation Interface
To enter windows fast, you can click corresponding icons in the navigation pane of the operation
interface for the PSTN SQE Server.
Table 14-15 describes the icons in the navigation pane.
Table 14-15 Description of the navigation pane of the operation interface
Icon
Name
Description
Hardware Config
This icon is used to configure a speech

channel. Click this icon to configure a
speech channel in the displayed
Hardware Config window.
Test Plan Editor
This icon is used to create a test task.

Click this icon to create a test task in the
displayed Test Plan Editor window.
Test Plan
This icon is used to configure a test plan.
Configuration Editor Click this icon to configure a test plan in
the displayed Test Plan Configuration
Editor window.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-293
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Icon
Name
Description
SpeechView
Click this icon to monitor a test in the

SpeechView view in real time.
Operation Procedure of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes the procedure for using the PSTN SQE Server. In the speech evaluation project,
the PSTN SQE Server creates test tasks to perform the speech quality evaluation test. You can
familiarize yourself with the procedure for using the PSTN SQE Server.
Table 14-16 describes the operation procedures.
Table 14-16 Operation procedures
14-294
Step
Operation
Description
Reference
Configure a
voice card
Refers to configuring the

relevant parameters of the
voice card. Thus, the voice
card can run properly.
For details, see Configuring a

Voice Card.
Create a
speech
evaluation
project.
Refers to creating a project for

the speech evaluation.
For details, see Creating a

Speech Evaluation Project.
Configure a
speech
channel.
Refers to configuring
available speech channels in
the PSTN SQE Server.

Speech Channel.
Create a test
task.
Refers to creating a test task

for the UE, which is used for
the speech evaluation test.
For details, see Creating a Test

Plan.
Configure a
test task.
Refers to selecting the

corresponding channel for a
test task and setting properties
of the Option.

Test Plan.
Perform a test
task.
Refers to starting a test task

and recording a logfile.
During the test, you can
browse the logfile in real time.
For details, see Starting a Test

Plan.
Browse the
speech
evaluation
view in real
time.
Refers to browsing the test

data in the SpeechView view.
For details, see Browsing the

Speech Evaluation View in Real
Time.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
14.5.2 Installing the PSTN SQE Server

This section describes how to install the PSTN SQE Server and other assistants. To complete
the installation of the PSTN SQE Server, you only need to run the installation program and then
perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard.
Context
After the PSTN SQE Server is installed, you must connect the dongle to the PC to obtain the
license so that you can use the relevant functions authorized by the license.
Preparations Before Installing the PSTN SQE Server

Before installing the PSTN SQE Server, you must check whether the installation requirements
are met.
The installation requirements are as follows:
l
The software package of the Probe is available.
The configuration of PC meets the requirement of the installation.
The voice card and the corresponding driver are required.
Hardware Requirements of the PSTN SQE Server

Table 14-17 describes the requirements for PC configuration.
Table 14-17 Hardware requirements of the PSTN SQE Server
Configuration Items
Configuration Requirements
CPU
The Intel T2500 2.00 GHz Dual-Core processor is recommended.
Memory
The minimum memory is 1 GB.
Hard disk
It is recommended that the available hard disk space be 10 GB or

greater.
PC port
l If a dongle plugs into the PC, at least a USB port is required.

l At least one PCI slot is required for installing a voice card.
Operating system
Windows XP Professional SP2.
Software Requirements of the PSTN SQE Server

Table 14-18 describes the software and the corresponding configurations recommended for the
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-295
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Table 14-18 Software requirements of the PSTN SQE Server

Configuratio
n Items
Obtaining Methods
Configuration
Requirements
Remarks
Operating
system
Microsoft Windows XP
Professional SP2.
Mandatory
GENEX Probe
V200R003
software
package
l Huawei website:
http://
support.huawei.com
You need to have an account

with http://
addition, you are authorized
to download the GENEX
Probe V200R003 software
package or purchase the
GENEX Probe V200R003
software.
Mandatory
Installation
package of the
Dialogic Diva
voice card
driver
l Huawei website:
http://
support.huawei.com
You need to have an account

with http://
addition, you are authorized
to download the Dialogic
Diva voice card driver or
purchase the GENEX Probe
V200R003 software.
If the voice card

driver is not
installed, you
cannot use the
PSTN SQE
Server to
evaluate the
speech quality.
The GENEX Probe

V200R003 is purchased.
Mandatory
l GENEX Probe
V200R003 software
installation CDROM
l GENEX Probe
V200R003 software
installation CDROM
l Dialogc website:
http://
www.dialogic.com/
support/software.
License
The license is integrated

in the dongle.
Installing the PSTN SQE Server Main Program

During the installation of the Probe, the system installs the PSTN SQE Server by default. You
can install the PSTN SQE Server as required.
Prerequisite
Check whether the computer meets the hardware requirements for installing the PSTN SQE
Server. For details, see Preparations Before Installing the PSTN SQE Server.
Context
It is recommended that you install the GENEX Probe and PSTN SQE Server on two PCs.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the GENEX Probe V200R003 installation program.
14-296

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
If ...
Then ...


and perform Step 2.

V200R003 is available.
Perform Step 2.

Step 3 Click Next.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, choose I accept the terms of the license
agreement.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the dialog box as shown in Figure 14-5, specify User Name and Company Name.
Figure 14-5 Customer Information
NOTE
l Anyone who uses this computer (all users): Authorize all users of this computer to use the Probe.
l Only for me (user): Authorize only the current user to use the Probe.
Step 7 Click Next.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-297
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Step 8 Select the Custom installation mode. Then select PSTN SQE Server.
Step 9 Click Browse to select the installation directory.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 After the installation is complete, you can select Yes, I want to restart my computer now or
No, I will restart my computer later. Then click Finish.
It is recommended that you select Yes, I want to restart my computer now.
Step 12 Check whether the PSTN SQE Server is installed successfully.
Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > PSTN
SQE Server and check whether the shortcut for the PSTN SQE Server exists.
If ...
Then ...
The shortcut for the PSTN SQE Server

exists.
The PSTN SQE Server is installed successfully.
The shortcut for the PSTN SQE Server

does not exist.
Perform Step 1 through Step 12 again.
----End
Plugging in a Dongle
Procedure
Step 1 Plug in the dongle.
If ...
Then ...
The software is being used for the first time Plug the dongle into the USB port of the PC.
and the dongle is available.
The dongle expires.
Perform Step 2 through Step 5 to obtain a

valid license and update the license for the
dongle.
Step 2 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 >
corresponding software name (such as Probe or PSTN SQE Server) to run the main program.
Step 3 On the displayed main interface, choose Help > View ESN.
Step 4 Send the ESN to Huawei technical support engineer and wait for a new license.
14-298

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Normally, the new license will be delivered in two to three days.

Step 5 Update the new license for the dongle.
1.
On the main interface, choose Help > Update License.
2.
In the Open dialog box, select the new license.
3.
Click Open.
4.
In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click OK.
CAUTION
When updating the new license for the dongle, ensure that only the dongle for the corresponding
software is plugged into the computer.
Step 6 Optional: Choose Help > License Info to check the authorization information of the dongle.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
If the dongle can not be used normally, the dongle driver should be installed.
You can obtain the dongle driver through the following modes:
l
Huawei website: http://support.huawei.com
GENEX Probe V200R003 software installation CD-ROM
Installing the Driver for a Voice Card

This describes how to install the driver for a voice card. To ensure that the PC installed with the
PSTN SQE Server can correctly recognize the Dialogic Diva voice card, you must install the
driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card on the PC.
Prerequisite
1.
All applications are already closed.
2.
The Dialogic Diva voice card has been connected to the PC through the PCMCIA slot.
3.
You must log in to the PC where the driver for the voice card is installed as an administrator.
4.
If the PC where the PSTN SQE Server is installed is already installed with another driver
for the voice card, uninstall it, and then install the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-299
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
If ...
Then ...
The driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card is

Decompress the downloaded driver
downloaded from http://support.huawei.com or installation package, and then perform
http://www.dialogic.com/support/software
Step 2.
The installation CD-ROM of is available
Perform Step 2.
Step 2 Double-click Setup.exe to start the installation.

Step 3 Click Next.
Step 4 Select the installation mode in the displayed dialog box.
l Default Installation: Diva API/CAPI will be installed.: refers to the default installation.
It is recommended that you install the driver for the voice card in default installation mode.
l Customized installation: Specify services which should be installed.: refers to the
customized installation. If you select this installation mode, you can specify the services to
be installed.
l Secure installation: Exclude specific services from installation and conf: refers to the
security installation. If you select this installation mode, you can set the security properties
for different services.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 Optional: Select Install WIBU-KEY software to install the WIBU-KEY software. It is
recommended that you do not install the WIBU-KEY software.
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 Click Install.
Step 10 Restart the PC.
Step 11 Check whether the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card is installed successfully.
Choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva to check whether the software information about
the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card exists.
If ...
Then ...
The software information about the driver The driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card is
for the Dialogic Diva voice card exists
installed successfully.
The software information about the driver Repeat Step 1 through Step 11 until the driver
for the Dialogic Diva voice card does not
for the Dialogic Diva voice card is installed
exist
successfully.
14-300

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
NOTE
After the installation is complete, choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva > Manual Diva
Boards to view details about how to install the driver for the voice card.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the installation is complete, you need to correctly configure the voice card. Thus, the voice
card can run properly. For details, see Configuring a Voice Card.
14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server

The PSTN SQE Server adopts the standard PESQ algorithm and implements the speech quality
evaluation on the uplink and downlink on the radio network with the Probe and PHU.
Configuring a Voice Card

This describes how to configure a voice card. After the driver for a voice card is installed, you
need to correctly configure the voice card. Thus, the voice card can run properly.
Prerequisite
The driver for the voice card is already installed..
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva > Configuration Manager. The Active
Configuration - Dialogic(R) Diva(R) Configuration Manager window is displayed.
Step 2 In the left pane of the Active Configuration - Dialogic(R) Diva(R) Configuration Manager
window, click
Step 3 Configure properties in the displayed dialog box.

From the Country Selection drop-down list, select the country where you stay. Other properties
are set by default.
on the toolbar of the Active Configuration - Dialogic
Step 4 After configuring the properties, click
(R) Diva(R) Configuration Manager window to save and activate the property configuration.
Step 5 After the properties are activated successfully, click OK in the displayed Activate
Configuration dialog box.
Step 6 In the displayed Update successful dialog box, perform either of the following operations:
l Click Yes. The PC is restarted and the activated configuration takes effect.
l Click No. The activated configuration does not take effect and the voice card cannot work
normally.
----End
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-301
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Creating a Speech Evaluation Project

This describes how to create a speech evaluation project. All operations of the PSTN SQE Server
are based on a project. Therefore, you need to create a project or open an existing project before
the speech evaluation test is performed.
Context
In the PSTN SQE Server, you can open only one project at a time. To switch the current project
to another one, you must close the open project.
Procedure
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar or choose File > New to create a project.
NOTE
You can click
on the toolbar or choose File > Open to open an existing project.
Step 2 Configure parameters.

You can configure the speech channels, create test tasks, and configure test tasks for a project.
For details, see corresponding chapters.
Step 3 Optional: Save the current project as required.
If You Need To ...
Then ...
Directly save the current project
Click
Save the current project as another one
Choose File > Save As.
on the toolbar or choose File > New.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can close or delete a project through the File menu of the main interface or through the
icons on the toolbar. For details about the main interface, see Main Interface of the PSTN SQE
Server.
Configuring a Speech Channel

This describes how to configure a speech channel. Before performing a test, you need to connect
the telephone cable to the PSTN correctly to make the channel of a voice card available, and
then configure a speech channel.
Prerequisite
l
The telephone cable is already connected to the channel of the voice card in the PC.
A speech evaluation project is already created or open.

NOTE
After the telephone cable is connected to the interface of the voice card in the PC, the software can automatically
recognize the ID of the available speech channel. You can directly configure Source Number and
Description for this channel.
14-302

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Context
A maximum of eight channels can be configured in a project.
Procedure
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar or choose Configuration > Hardware Config. The Hardware
Config window is displayed.
Step 2 Select corresponding channel nodes in the list on the left of the Hardware Config window and
configure Source Number and Description in the right area.
----End
Creating a Test Plan

This describes how to create a test plan. The PSTN SQE Server can be used for the test in different
test environments and provide the test items for the speech quality evaluation. You can set test
items for the speech quality evaluation and create test tasks for the UE, thus guiding the speech
test.
Procedure
on the toolbar or choose Configuration > Test Plan Editor. The Test Plan Editor
Step 1 Click
window is displayed.
Step 2 Click
at the lower left corner of the TestPlanList area in the displayed Test Plan Editor
window to create a test plan list.
For the description of the parameters related to the Test Plan Editor window, see Parameters
for Creating a Test Plan.
Step 3 Enter Name and Description at the upper corner of the Test Plan Editor window.
Step 4 Click Set to save the setting.
at the left corner
Step 5 Select a test plan list from the Test Plan Editor window, and then click
of the TestPlan Config area to add a test plan to the test plan list and configure corresponding
parameters.
The test plan is named SQE by default. For details about SQE, see 14.5.6 Test Items of the
PSTN SQE Server.
----End
Configuring a Test Plan

This describes how to configure a test plan. You need to select corresponding Channel and set
the Option property for each created test plan before the test plan is started.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-303
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Prerequisite
l
The telephone cable is already connected to the PSTN, and related parameters are already
configured. For details about how to configure a speech channel, see Configuring a Speech
Channel.
At least one test plan is already created. For details about how to create a test plan, see
Creating a Test Plan.
Procedure
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar or choose Configuration > Test Plan Configuration Editor. The Test
Plan Configuration Editor window is displayed.
The list names of created test tasks are automatically displayed in the Test Plan Configuration
Editor window.
Step 2 In the displayed Test Plan Configuration Editor window, select corresponding Channel and
set the Option property for each test plan list.
For details about the Option property, see Parameters for Configuring a Test Plan.
NOTE
The Option property involves two fields: Yes and No. To perform the selected test plan, you must set Option
to Yes.
----End
Starting a Test Plan

This describes how to start a test plan. After a speech channel is connected properly,
corresponding parameters are already configured, and a test plan is configured, you can record
the logfile and start a test plan.
Prerequisite
l
The telephone cable is already connected to the PSTN, and related parameters are already
configured. For details about how to configure a speech channel, see Configuring a Speech
Channel.
At least one test plan is already created. For details about how to create a test plan, see
Creating a Test Plan.
The corresponding channel is already selected for a test plan and Option is set to Yes.
The Ring Back Tone service on the test terminal is stopped.
Click
Procedure
on the toolbar or choose Test > StartRun. The test plan is started.
When the test plan is started, the PSTN SQE Server records a logfile (.gen file)
automatically. The default saving path is software installation directory\Huawei GENEX
\Probe 2.3\PSTN SQE Server\Data.
----End
14-304

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Monitoring the Execution State of a Test Plan

This describes how to monitor the execution state of a test plan in the Event list of the
SpeechView window during a test. This helps you view and analyze the test.
Prerequisite
At least one test plan is performed. For details, see Starting a Test Plan.
Procedure
l
Click
on the toolbar or choose View > Speech/TV. The SpeechView window is
displayed.
View the execution state of the test plan in the Event list.
----End
Stopping a Test Plan

This describes how to stop a test plan. You need to stop a test after it is finished.
Procedure
l
Click
on the toolbar or choose Test > StopRun. The test plan is stopped.
----End
Browsing the Speech Evaluation View in Real Time

This describes how to browse the speech evaluation view in real time. You can browse the test
data in the SpeechView view during the test.
Prerequisite
At least one test task is performed. For details, see Starting a Test Plan.
Context
The SpeechView view is displayed in a chart and in a list. In the chart view, the changes of the
MOS parameters are displayed in a histogram. In the list view, the changes are displayed in a
table.
Procedure
l
on the toolbar or choose View > Speech/TV. The SpeechView view is displayed.
Click
You can browse the test data in this view.
NOTE
Select the Channel No drop-down list of the SpeechView view. You can view the MOS information about
different channels.
----End
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-305
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
14.5.4 Interface Reference of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes the interfaces for using the PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality
evaluation test and describes corresponding parameters.
Interface Description: Create a Test Plan

This describes the Test Plan Editor interface and helps you understand the interface components
and functions of the components and shortcut icons.
Figure 14-6 shows the Test Plan Editor interface. Table 14-19 provides the description of
Figure 14-6.
Figure 14-6 Test Plan Editor interface
Table 14-19 Description of the Test Plan Editor interface
14-306
Name
Description
TestPlanList area
Displays a test plan list.
TestPlanList Information area
Displays the names of and information about test plan lists.
TestPlan Config area
Displays test tasks.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Name
Description
Toolbar of the TestPlanList

area
Provides the short icons for creating, deleting, and moving

test plan lists. For details, see Table 14-20.
Toolbar of the TestPlan

Config area
Provides the short icons for creating, deleting, and moving

test tasks. For details, see Table 14-20.
Table 14-20 Description of the Test Plan Editor Toolbar

Icon
Name
Description
Create
This icon is used to create a test plan list

or a test plan.
Move up
This icon is used to move the selected test

plan list or test plan upwards.
Move down
This icon is used to move the selected test

plan list or test plan downwards.
Delete
This icon is used to delete the selected test

plan list or test plan.
Parameters for Configuring a Speech Channel

This describes the parameters for configuring a speech channel. You can refer to this part when
configuring a speech channel and setting parameters.
Parameter
Description
Channel
Refers to an emulation interface of the voice card, which is connected to

the PSTN through a telephone cable and is used for the speech call or
speech listening. The system automatically obtains available channels
and displays them in Channel.
ChannelID
Refers to a ID of the selected channel.
SourceNumber
Refers to the source number of the selected channel.
Description
Refers to the description of the selected channel.
Parameters for Creating a Test Plan

This describes the parameters for creating a test plan. You can refer to this part when creating
a test plan and setting parameters.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-307
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a test plan list.
Description
Indicates the description of a test plan list.
ID
Indicates the ID of a test plan.
Name
Indicates the name of a test plan.
Property
Indicates the property name of a test item.
Value
Enables you to set values of Property.
Parameters for Configuring a Test Plan

This describes the parameters for configuring a test plan. You can refer to this part when
configuring a test plan and setting parameters.
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a test plan list.
ChannelID
Indicates the channel ID that is used to select a test plan list.
Option
Involves two fields: Yes and No. If this parameter is set to Yes, the
selected test plan lists are executable. If this parameter is set to No,
the selected test plan lists are inexecutable.
Parameters for Browsing the Speech Evaluation View in Real Time

This describes the parameters for browsing the speech evaluation view. You can refer to this
part when browsing the speech evaluation parameters and setting parameters.
Parameter
Description
Speech MOS
Speech Events
14-308
Time
Indicates the time of the current MOS.
Algorithm
Indicates the algorithm used for the

current MOS.
Count
Indicates the number of the times of

recording the MOS.
Current MOS
Indicates the current MOS value.
Avg MOS
Indicates the average MOS value.
Max MOS
Indicates the maximum MOS value.
Min MOS
Indicates the minimum MOS value.
EventTime
Indicates the time of the current event.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Parameter
Description
EventName
Indicates the name of the current

event.
DeviceID
Indicates the device ID.
ChannelID
Indicates the channel ID.
14.5.5 FAQs
This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the PSTN SQE Server and the
corresponding causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the
using skills.
What Should I Do When the PSTN SQE Server Searching for the Channel Fails?
Symptom
The PSTN SQE Server cannot search for the channel after the telephone cable of the PSTN is
Possible Causes
l
The telephone cable of the PSTN is not properly connected to the PC.
The driver for the voice card is installed incorrectly.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the telephone cable of the PSTN is connected to the PC properly.
Step 2 Reinstall the driver for the voice card.
----End
What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated?

Symptom
l
Symptom I: The SQE (MS-PSTN) test fails to be performed.
Symptom II: The SpeechView of the PSTN SQE Server contains invalid MOS values, that
is, certain MOS values are smaller than 2.5.
Possible Causes
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-309
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix

Fault Symptom
Possible Cause
Symptom I
l The version number of the Probe is incorrect.

l The used test terminal is not Huawei U120e PHU, Huawei U1205
PHU or Huawei U6100 PHU.
l The version number of the PHU is incorrect.
l The RBT service of the PHU is not disabled.
Symptom II
The invalid MOS value may be caused by network problems if the

following reasons are excluded.
l The speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are
different.
l Other operations are performed on the keypad of the test MS.
l An extension may be connected to the PSTN telephone cable that
is connected to the PSTN SQE Server.
l The configuration of the PC installed with the PSTN SQE Server
does not meet the requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the version number of the Probe.
Use the Probe V200R002C01SPC010 or a later version.
On the main interface of the Probe, choose Help > About PROBE to view the version number
of the Probe.
Step 2 Check the version number of the PHU.
Use the PHU V100R002C01B010SPC110 or a later version.
For details on how to view the version number of the PHU, see the help of the PHU.
Step 3 Check whether the speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are the same.
1.
. The Test Plan Control window is displayed.

On the main interface of the Probe, click
View the value of the Sample Type property of the SQE (MS-PSTN) test item.
2.
. The Test Plan Editor window

On the main interface of the PSTN SQE Server, click
is displayed. View the values of the Sample Time and Language Of Sample properties
of the SQE test item.
If the time of playing the speech sample and the language type of the speech sample are
different, reconfigure the two properties of the SQE (MS-PSTN) and SQE test items.
----End
14-310

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
How to Uninstall the Driver for a Voice Card

Question
How to uninstall the driver for a voice card?
Answer
After the driver for the voice card is uninstalled, the voice card cannot be used properly, and the
PSTN SQE Server cannot automatically recognize the available channel.
Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva > Uninstall. The window for uninstalling the
driver for the voice card is displayed.
Step 2 Click Next.
Step 3 Click Uninstall.
Step 4 Click Finish after the driver is uninstalled.
----End
How to Uninstall the Main Program

Question
How to uninstall the main program?
Answer
After the Probe main program is uninstalled, the PSTN SQE Server and system templates are
deleted but the operation logs and recorded logfiles are left.
Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > Uninstall
Probe. The uninstalling interface is displayed.
Step 2 Choose Remove.
Step 3 Click Next.
----End
14.5.6 Test Items of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes the properties of the SQE test item. You can refer to this part when using the
PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality evaluation test, and then perform the related
operations.
NOTE
The Ring Back Tone service on the test terminal must be stopped before the SQE test is performed.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14-311
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
Call Mode

following call modes:
l Outgoing, refers to the outgoing

call mode.
l Incoming, refers
incoming call mode.
to
the

Destination Number

Mode is set to Outgoing.
Indicates
number.
the
destination
Source Number

Mode is set to Incoming.
Indicates the source number.
Call Type

following call types:
Indicates a call type.
l Call By Call, refers to a short

call. The number of calls cannot
exceed the preset value.
l Continuous Call, refers to a long
call. The number of calls is
unlimited.
The default value is Call by Call.
Call Duration

unit is second.

call, that is, the time from call
setup to normal call release.
Call Interval

is second.

two calls, that is, the time
from the previous call
disconnection
to
the
Call Count


calls.

Setup Time

is second.

for call setup.
After a call is originated, if the
call cannot be set up within
the defined period, the call
setup fails.
Exception Interval
14-312

is second.

Indicates the call exception

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
Property
Value/Range/Unit
Description
MOS Direction

The Half duplex mode, that is
the half duplex interaction
mode is supported by the
PSTN SQE Server.
Language Of Sample
Indicates the speech type of a

speech sample.
The English speech type is
supported by the PSTN SQE
Server.
Sample Time
The unit is second.
Indicates the duration of

playing a speech sample.
The 5s duration is supported
by the PSTN SQE Server.
MOS Algorithm

following algorithms:
Indicates the algorithm of the

l PESQ.862.1
l PESQ.862
l PESQ LQ
l PESQ Ie
The default value is PESQ.862.1.
14.5.7 Predefined Events of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes the predefined events of the PSTN SQE Server. You can refer to this part when
configuring events of the speech quality evaluation.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Name
Meaning
Description
OutgoingCall
Outgoing call
This event occurs when the channel originates a

call.
CallAlerting
Call alerting
This event occurs when the channel receives an

incoming call.
CallAnswer
Call answer
This event occurs when the channel receives an

incoming call.
CallConnected
Call connected
This event occurs when the channel is connected

to an incoming call successfully.
CallSetupFail
Call setup failure
This event occurs when the channel receives the

call disconnected event but does not receive the
CallConnected event.

14-313
GENEX Probe
User Guide
14 Appendix
14-314
Name
Meaning
Description
CallComplete
Call complete
This event occurs when the channel receives the

call disconnected event reported from the voice
card in the case of a normal channel call
connection.
StartRecord
Recording start
Recording starts on the channel.
Recording
Recording
The channel is in recording state.
RecordComplete
Recording complete
Recording is complete on the channel.
StartPlay
Playing start
Playing starts on the channel.
Playing
Playing
The channel is in playing state.
PlayComplete
Playing complete
Playing is complete on the channel.
StartSync
Synchronization test
start
This event occurs when the synchronization test

is performed for the channel and PHU after the
channel is connected to a call.
SyncComplete
complete

is successfully performed for the channel and
PHU.
SyncFailed
failure

fails to be performed for the channel and PHU.
ChannelDisconnected
Channel
disconnected
The channel of the voice card is disconnected

from the PSTN.
PlayException
Playing exception
Failures and exceptions occur during the playing.
RecordException
Record exception
Failures and exceptions occur during the

recording.
TestStop
Test stop
This event occurs when the test is stopped.
VoiceQuality
MOS

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
GENEX Probe
User Guide
15 Technical Support
15
Technical Support
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and
service. Please feel free to contact our local office, customer care center or company
headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Administration Building, Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Hotline telephone: 0755-28560000; 4008302118
Fax: 0755-28560111
Email: support@huawei.com or PA@huawei.com
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

15-1

GENEX User Guide V200R003 04

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GENEX User Guide V200R003 04

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GENEX Probe

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

About This Document

Network design engineers

Network monitoring engineers

System maintenance engineers

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

2.5 Recommended Device List

7.1 Connectable External Devices

7.3.1 Configuring External Devices

11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing

13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is

13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into

13.4.5 What Should I Do When the

14.5 PSTN SQE Server

2.2 Basic Concepts of the Probe

The content descriptions are changed.

2.3 Main Interface of the Probe

The content descriptions are changed.

8.5.3 Performing an Outdoor Test

The content descriptions are changed.

13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?

Serving/Active Set and Neighboring Cells

The content descriptions are changed.

1 New Features of the Probe V200R003

The content descriptions are changed.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

7.2 Plugging in External Devices

The content descriptions are changed.

8.4 Designing Test Plans

The content descriptions are changed.

11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests

The content descriptions are changed.

13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to

14.3.5 LTE Information Elements of UEs

The content descriptions are changed.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

Book titles are in italics.

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Command arguments are in italics.

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

About This Document

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt